Owner's Manual

XC40 OWNER'S MANUAL

VÄLKOMMEN!

We hope your Volvo will give you many years of happy motoring. owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile The vehicle is designed for the safety and comfort of you and your app (Volvo Manual) and on Volvo Cars support page passengers. Volvo strives to design one of the world's safest pas- (support.volvocars.com). senger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable We also encourage everyone to always use seat belts in this and safety and environmental requirements. other vehicles. You should also not drive if you are under the influ- To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you ence of alcohol or medicines or if your ability to drive is for some read the instructions and maintenance information contained in this other reason impaired. TABLE OF CONTENTS

OWNER'S INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO SAFETY Owner's information 16 Contacting Volvo 26 Safety 44 Owner's Manual in the center display 17 Volvo ID 26 Safety during pregnancy 45 Navigate in the Owner's Manual 18 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 27 Occupant safety 45 in the center display Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure 28 Reporting safety defects 46 Owner's manual in mobile devices 20 IntelliSafe – driver support and safety 29 Recall information 47 Volvo Cars support site 21 Sensus - connection and enter- 30 Whiplash Protection System 48 Using the Owner's Manual 21 tainment Seat belts 49 The Owner's Manual and the envi- 23 Software Updates 33 ronment Buckling and unbuckling seat belts 50 Data recording 33 Seat belt tensioners 52 Terms and Conditions for Services 35 Resetting the electric seat belt 53 Customer Privacy Policy 35 tensioners* Important information on acces- 36 Door and seat belt reminders 54 sories and extra equipment Airbags 55 Accessory installation 37 Driver/passenger side front airbags 56 Connecting equipment to the 37 vehicle's data link connector Occupant Classification System 59 Side airbags Technician certification 38 63 Inflatable curtain Viewing the Vehicle Identification 39 63 Number (VIN) Safety mode 64 Volvo Structural Parts Statement 39 Starting and moving the vehicle 65 when it is in safety mode Change of market when importing 40 or relocating Child safety 66 Driver distraction 41 Child restraints 68 Infant seats 70 Convertible seats 72 Booster cushions 75

2 DISPLAYS AND VOICE Top tether anchors 76 CONTROL Activating and deactivating the 111 center display Lower child seat attachment points 77 Displays and controls by the driver 82 in a left-hand drive vehicle Navigating in the center display's 111 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 78 Instrument panel 84 views Instrument panel settings 86 Handling tiles in the center display 115 Fuel gauge 87 Function view in the center display 118 Trip computer 87 Moving apps and buttons in the 120 center display Displaying trip data in the instru- 88 ment panel Symbols in the center display sta- 120 tus bar Resetting the trip odometer 89 Using the center display keyboard 122 Displaying trip statistics in the 90 center display Changing keyboard language in 125 the center display Trip statistics settings 90 Entering characters, letters and 125 Date and time 91 words by hand in the center display Ambient temperature sensor 92 Changing the appearance of the 127 center display Indicator and warning symbols 92 Turning off and adjusting the vol- 127 Instrument panel licenses 95 ume of the center display system App menu in instrument panel 100 sounds Handling the App menu in the 101 Changing system units of meas- 128 instrument panel urement Messages in the instrument panel 102 Changing system language 128 Handling messages in the instru- 103 Changing settings in the center 128 ment panel display's Top view Handling messages saved from 104 Opening contextual setting in the 129 the instrument panel center display Center display overview 106 Resetting user data when the 130 vehicle changes owners Handling the center display 108

3 LIGHTING WINDOWS, GLASS AND Resetting center display settings 130 Lighting control and panel 146 MIRRORS Table of settings in the center display 131 Adjusting light functions via the 147 Windows, glass and mirrors 160 center display Driver profiles 132 Pinch protection for windows and 160 Parking lights 148 sun curtains Selecting a driver profile 133 Daytime running lights 148 Reset procedure for pinch protection 160 Changing a driver profile's name 133 Low beams 149 Power windows 161 Protecting a driver profile 134 Using high beam 150 Operating the power windows 161 Linking a remote key to a driver profile 134 Active high beam 151 Rearview/door mirrors 163 Resetting driver profile settings 136 Using turn signals 152 Adjusting the rearview mirror dim- 163 Messages in the center display 136 ming function Active Bending Lights* 152 Handling messages in the center 137 Adjusting the door mirrors 164 display Front fog lights/corner illumination* 153 Panoramic roof* 165 Handling messages saved from 137 Rear fog light 154 the center display Operating the panoramic roof* 167 Brake lights 155 * Voice Control 138 Auto closing the panoramic roof 169 Emergency brake lights 155 sun curtain Use voice recognition 139 Hazard warning flashers 155 Wiper blades and washer fluid 170 Voice control for cellular phones 141 Using home safe lighting 156 Using the windshield wipers 170 Voice control for radio and media 142 Welcome Light 156 Using the rain sensor 171 Voice control settings 142 Interior Lighting 156 Activating and deactivating the 172 rain sensor's memory function Adjusting interior lighting 158 Using the windshield and head- 173 light washers Using the rear window wiper/washer 174 Using automatic rear window 175 wiping when backing up

4 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE CONTROL Manual front seats 178 Climate 190 Activating and deactivating auto- 205 matic steering wheel heating* Power* front seats 179 Climate zones 190 Activating auto climate control 205 Adjusting the power* front seats 179 Climate control sensors 191 Activating and deactivating recir- 206 Storing positions for seats and mirrors 180 Perceived temperature 192 culation Using stored positions for seats 181 Climate control system voice 192 Activating and deactivating the 206 and mirrors commands recirculation timer setting * Adjusting front seat cushion length 182 Air quality 193 Activating and deactivating max 207 Adjusting front seat lumbar support* 182 CleanZone* 194 defroster Folding down the rear seat backrests 183 Clean Zone Interior Package* 194 Activating and deactivating the 208 heated rear window and door mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraints 185 Interior Air Quality System* 195 Automatically activating and deac- 208 Steering wheel controls and horn 186 Activating and deactivating the air 195 tivating the heated rear window quality sensor* and door mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel 187 Passenger compartment air filter 196 Setting the blower speed for the 209 front seats Air distribution 196 Adjusting air distribution Setting the temperature for the 210 197 front seats Opening, closing and directing air 197 vents Synchronize temperature 211 Air distribution options Activating and deactivating air 211 198 conditioning Climate system controls 201 Parking climate* 212 Activating and deactivating power 203 * front seats* Preconditioning 212 Starting and stopping precondi- 213 Activating and deactivating the 203 * heated front seat* tioning Preconditioning timer* Activating and deactivating the 204 213 heated rear seats* Adding and editing timer settings 214 for preconditioning* Activating and deactivating the 204 heated steering wheel*

5 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Activating and deactivating pre- 215 Locking and unlocking 220 Antenna locations for the start 241 conditioning timer* and lock system Lock indication 220 Deleting preconditioning timer 215 Locking and unlocking from inside 242 settings* Lock confirmation settings 221 the vehicle Climate comfort retaining function* 216 Remote key 222 Unlocking the tailgate from inside 243 Locking and unlocking using the the vehicle Starting and switching off the cli- 217 225 mate retaining function when parking* remote key Activating and deactivating child locks 243 Settings for remote and inside Parking climate symbols and mes- 218 226 Automatic locking when driving 244 sages* door unlock Closing and locking the tailgate 245 Unlocking the tailgate using the 226 using the buttons* remote key Setting maximum opening height 247 Remote key range 227 for the power tailgate* Replacing the remote key's battery 228 Operating the tailgate with a foot 247 * Ordering additional remote keys 232 movement Care Key – restricted remote key 232 Private Locking 248 Care Key settings 233 Activating and deactivating pri- 249 vate locking Detachable key blade 233 Alarm 250 Locking and unlocking with 234 detachable key blade Arming and disarming the alarm 251 Electronic immobilizer 236 Start and lock system type desig- 236 nations Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 238 Keyless locking and unlocking* 239 Keyless unlock settings* 240 Keyless tailgate unlock* 240

6 DRIVER SUPPORT Driver support systems 254 Cruise control standby mode 270 Using passing assistance 292 Speed-dependent steering wheel 254 Adaptive Cruise Control* 270 Collision risk warning from driver 293 resistance support Adaptive Cruise Control* controls 272 Electronic Stability Control 255 * Switching target vehicles with 294 Adaptive Cruise Control displays 272 driver support Electronic Stability Control in 256 sport mode Selecting and activating Adaptive 273 Adjusting set speed for driver support 294 Cruise Control* Activating or deactivating Sport 257 * Setting time interval to the vehicle 295 mode for Electronic Stability Control Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control 274 ahead * Electronic Stability Control sym- 258 Adaptive Cruise Control standby 275 Drive modes when using time 297 bols and messages mode interval to vehicle * Connected Safety 260 Adaptive Cruise Control limitations 276 Auto-hold braking with driver support 297 Switching between cruise control 277 Activating or deactivating 261 * Lane Keeping Aid 298 Connected Safety and Adaptive Cruise Control in the center display Activating or deactivating Lane 300 Connected Safety limitations 261 Keeping Aid Symbols and messages for Adap- 278 Road Sign Information* 262 tive Cruise Control* Selecting type of assistance for 301 Lane Keeping Aid Activating or deactivating Road 263 Pilot Assist* 280 Sign Information* Lane Keeping Aid limitations 301 Pilot Assist* controls 282 * Road Sign Information display 263 * Lane Keeping Aid symbols and 302 Pilot Assist displays 283 messages Road Sign Information and 264 * Sensus Navigation* Selecting and activating Pilot Assist 284 Lane Keeping Aid display 304 * Speed limit and speed camera 264 Deactivating Pilot Assist 285 City Safety™ 305 warnings from Road Sign Information* * Pilot Assist standby mode 286 City Safety sub-functions 306 Activating or deactivating warn- 265 Temporarily deactivating steering 287 ings from Road Sign Information* Setting a warning distance for 308 assistance with Pilot Assist* City Safety Road Sign Information* limitations 266 * Pilot Assist limitations 288 Detecting obstacles with City Safety 309 Cruise control 267 * Pilot Assist symbols and messages 290 City Safety in crossing traffic 311 Selecting and activating cruise control 268 * Passing assistance 292 Limitations of City Safety in cross- 311 Deactivating cruise control 269 ing traffic

Automatic braking during delayed 312 Selecting guidance to a rest area if 330 Leaving a parallel parking space 355 evasive maneuvers with City Safety the Driver Alert Control warning with Park Assist Pilot* has been given City Safety braking for oncoming 313 Park Assist Pilot* limitations 355 vehicles Driver Alert Control limitations 331 Park Assist Pilot* messages 358 City Safety limitations 313 Cross Traffic Alert* 331 Radar sensor 359 City Safety messages 317 Activating or deactivating Cross 332 Traffic Alert* Radar sensor type approval 360 Steering assistance at risk of collision 318 Cross Traffic Alert* limitations 333 Camera 362 Activating or deactivating steering 319 assistance during collision risks Cross Traffic Alert* messages 334 Camera/radar sensor limitations 362 Run-Off Mitigation with steering 319 Park Assist* 335 Recommended camera and radar 365 assistance sensor maintenance Park Assist front, rear and sides* 336 Camera and radar unit symbols 367 Steering assistance during colli- 320 * sion risks from oncoming traffic Activating or deactivating Park Assist 337 and messages Steering assistance during colli- 321 Park Assist limitations 338 * sion risks from behind Park Assist symbols and messages 339 Steering assistance during colli- 322 Park Assist Camera* 340 sion risks limitations Location and field of vision of Park 341 Symbols and messages for steer- 323 Assist Cameras* ing assistance during collision risks Park Assist Camera trajectory lines* 343 Rear Collision Warning* 324 Park Assist sensor field 345 Rear Collision Warning* limitations 324 Activating Park Assist Camera 346 BLIS* 325 Park Assist Camera symbols and 348 Activating or deactivating BLIS 326 messages BLIS limitations 327 Park Assist Pilot* 350 BLIS messages 328 Types of parking with Park Assist 351 * Driver Alert Control 329 Pilot * Activating or deactivating Driver 330 Using Park Assist Pilot 352 Alert Control

8 STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the vehicle 370 Shifting gears with automatic 384 Activating and deactivating Hill 401 transmission Descent Control* using the func- Switching off the vehicle 372 tion button Using the steering wheel paddles* 386 Ignition modes 372 to shift Economical driving 402 Selecting ignition mode 374 Shiftlock 387 Preparing for a long trip 403 Brake functions 374 The kickdown function 387 Winter driving 403 Brakes 375 The Launch function* 388 Driving through standing water 404 Brake Assist System 376 Automatic transmission symbols 388 Opening/closing the fuel filler door 404 and messages Braking on wet roads 376 Refueling 405 All Wheel Drive (AWD)* 388 Braking on salted roads 377 Fuel 406 Drive modes* 389 Maintenance of the brake system 377 Octane rating 407 Changing drive mode* 391 Parking brake 377 Emission controls 408 Eco drive mode 391 Activating and deactivating the 378 Overheating of engine and trans- 409 parking brake Activating and deactivating Eco 393 mission drive mode using the function button Settings for automatically activat- 379 Battery drain 410 ing the parking brake Start/Stop function 394 Jump starting using another battery 410 Parking on a hill 380 Driving with the Start/Stop function 394 Detachable towbar* 413 Parking brake malfunction 380 Deactivating the Start/Stop function 395 Driving with a trailer 414 Auto-hold brakes 381 Conditions for the Start/Stop function 396 Trailer Stability Assist* 416 Activating and deactivating Auto- 382 Leveling control* and suspension 398 hold at a standstill Checking trailer lights 417 Low Speed Control* 399 Hill Start Assist 382 Towing using a towline 418 Activating and deactivating Low 399 Braking assist after a collision 383 Speed Control* using the function Attaching and removing the tow- 419 ing eyelet Regenerative braking* 383 button Recovery 421 Transmission 383 Hill Descent Control* 400 HomeLink®* 421 Automatic transmission 384 Programming HomeLink®* 422

9 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET Using HomeLink®* 424 Audio, media and Internet 428 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications 446 Type approval for HomeLink®* 424 Sound settings 428 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel 447 Compass* 425 Sound experience* 429 SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports 448 Activating and deactivating the 425 Apps 429 Media player 449 compass* Download apps 430 Playing media 450 Calibrating the compass* 426 Updating apps 431 Controlling and changing media 451 Deleting apps 432 Media searches 452 Radio 432 Gracenote® 453 Starting the radio 433 Video 453 Changing waveband and radio station 433 Playing video 454 Searching for a radio station 434 Playing DivX® 454 Storing radio channels in the 435 Video settings Radio favorites app 454 Streaming media via Bluetooth® 455 Radio settings 435 Connecting a device via Bluetooth® RBDS 436 455 Playing media via the USB port HD Radio™ 436 455 Connecting a device via the USB port Activating and deactivating the HD 438 456 Radio™ Technical specifications for USB 456 devices HD Radio™ sub-channels 438 Compatible file formats for media HD Radio™ limitations 439 457 Apple® CarPlay®* SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 440 458 Using Apple® CarPlay®* Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 441 459 Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 442 461 Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* SiriusXM Travel Link®* 444 461 Android Auto* SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather 445 462

10 WHEELS AND TIRES Using Android Auto* 463 Connecting the vehicle to the 480 Tires 500 * Internet via a Bluetooth-connected Settings for Android Auto 464 phone Tire direction of rotation 502 * Tips for using Android Auto 464 Connecting the vehicle to the 480 Tread wear indicator 503 Phone 465 Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) Tire terminology 503 Connecting a phone to the car via 466 Connecting the vehicle to the 481 Tire sidewall designations 504 Bluetooth for the first time Internet via vehicle modem (SIM card) Uniform Tire Quality Grading 506 Connecting a phone to the car via 468 Vehicle modem settings 482 Checking tire pressure 507 Bluetooth automatically Sharing Internet from the vehicle 483 Adjusting tire pressure Connecting a phone to the car via 468 via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) 508 Bluetooth manually No or poor Internet connection 484 Recommended tire pressure 509 Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- 468 Deleting Wi-Fi networks 484 Tire pressure monitoring system* 509 nected phone Wi-Fi technology and security 485 Saving new reference values for 511 Switch between phones con- 469 tire inflation pressure monitoring* nected via Bluetooth Terms of use and data sharing 485 Viewing tire pressure status in the 512 Disconnecting Bluetooth-con- 469 Activating and deactivating data 486 center display* nected devices sharing Action when warned of low tire 513 Handling phone calls 469 Data sharing for services 486 pressure Handling text messages 470 Hard disk storage space 487 Tire inflation pressure monitoring 514 * Text message settings 471 License agreement for audio and 488 system messages media Managing the phone book 472 Changing a wheel 514 Phone settings 472 Tool kit 516 * Settings for Bluetooth devices 473 Jack 517 Wireless phone charger* 473 Wheel bolts 517 Using the wireless phone charger* 474 Spare wheel 518 Certificate for wireless charger 475 Handling the spare wheel 519 Internet-connected vehicle* 479 Snow tires 520 Snow chains 521

11 LOADING, STORAGE AND MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Tire sealing system 522 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Volvo's service program 548 Using the tire sealing system 523 Passenger compartment interior 532 Data transfer between vehicle and 550 workshop over Wi-Fi Inflate tires with the compressor 527 Tunnel console 533 included in the tire sealing system Electrical outlets 534 Download Center 551 Determining the vehicle's permit- 528 Using the electrical outlets 534 Handling system updates via 551 ted weight Download Center Using the glove compartment 535 Vehicle status 552 Sun visors 537 Scheduling service and repairs 553 Cargo compartment 537 Sending vehicle information to the 554 Loading recommendations 537 workshop Roof loads and load carriers 538 Hoisting the vehicle 555 Grocery bag holders 539 Climate control system service 558 Load anchoring eyelets 540 Opening and closing the hood 558 Rear seat ski hatch* 540 Engine compartment overview 559 Folding up the cargo compartment 540 Engine oil 560 floor Checking and filling engine oil 562 Removing the folding cargo com- 541 partment floor* Coolant 563 Installing and removing the cargo net* 542 Refilling coolant 563 Removing and storing the parcel shelf 544 Starter battery 565 Support battery 567 Battery symbols 569 Battery recycling 569 Fuses and fuseboxes 570 Replacing fuses 570 Fuses in the engine compartment 572

12 SPECIFICATIONS Fuses under the left front seat 578 Cleaning rims 600 Type designations 610 Replacing bulbs 584 Corrosion protection 601 Dimensions 613 Location of exterior lights 585 Paintwork 601 Weights 615 Replacing rear turn signal bulbs 585 Touching up minor paint damage 602 Towing capacity and tongue weight 616 Replacing the brake light bulb 587 Color codes 603 Engine specifications 617 Replacing the rear fog light bulb 588 Changing rear window wipers 603 Engine oil specifications 618 Bulb specifications 588 Replacing windshield wiper blades 604 Transmission fluid specifications 618 Cleaning the interior 589 Putting the wiper blades in service 605 Brake fluid specifications 619 position Cleaning the center display 589 Fuel tank volume 619 Filling washer fluid 606 Cleaning fabric upholstery and 590 Air conditioning specifications 619 ceiling liner Approved tire pressure 621 Cleaning the seat belt 591 Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats 592 Cleaning leather upholstery* 592 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 593 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and 594 wood surfaces Cleaning the exterior 594 Polishing and waxing 595 Hand washing 596 Automatic car washes 597 High-pressure washing 598 Cleaning the wiper blades 599 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber 599 and trim components

13 INDEX Index 623

14 OWNER'S INFORMATION OWNER'S INFORMATION

Owner's information Vehicle's center display1 Volvo Cars support site Owner's information is available in several In the center display, pull Go to volvocars.com/support different formats, both digital and printed. down Top view and tap and select your country. The Owner's Manual is available on the vehi- Owner's manual. This gives Owner's Manuals are availa- cle's center display, as a mobile app and on you access to visual naviga- ble here for viewing online Volvo Cars' support website. There is also a tion with exterior and interior and in PDF format. The sup- Quick Guide in the glove compartment, as images of the vehicle. The port site also contains well as a supplement to the Owner's Manual information is searchable and instructive videos and addi- containing information about e.g. fuses, spec- is divided into categories. tional information and assistance concerning ifications, etc. A printed Owner's Manual can your vehicle and owning a Volvo. The website be ordered. Mobile app is available on most markets. In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual". Printed information Download the app to your The glove compartment con- smartphone or tablet and tains a printed supplement to select your vehicle model. the Owner's Manual1, which The app contains instructive contains information on fuses videos and offers visual navi- and specifications as well as gation, including exterior and interior images a summary of important and of the vehicle. The contents are searchable practical information. and the sections are designed to be easy to There is also a printed Quick Guide with useful navigate. information about the most commonly used features and functions in your vehicle. Other printed information may also be provided in the vehicle, depending on equipment level, market, etc. A printed Owner's Manual and accompanying supplement can also be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to order.

1 For markets without Owner's Manuals in the center display, a complete printed manual is provided along with the vehicle.

16 OWNER'S INFORMATION

CAUTION Owner's Manual in the center To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Top display view in the center display and tap Owner's The driver is always responsible for operat- A digital version of the Owner's Manual is manual. ing the vehicle in a safe manner and adher- 2 ing to all applicable laws and regulations. It available in the vehicle's center display . The information in the Owner's Manual can be is also important that the vehicle is oper- The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed accessed directly via the Owner's Manual ated, maintained and serviced according to from Top view and in certain cases, the con- start page or via its Top menu. Volvo's recommendations provided in the textual Owner's Manual can also be accessed owner's information. from Top view.

If the information in the center display dif- NOTE fers from the printed information, the printed information always takes precedence. The digital Owner's Manual is not available during driving.

NOTE OWNER'S MANUAL Changing languages in the center display could mean that certain owner's information will not comply with national or local laws and regulations. Do not change to a language you do not speak well, as it can be difficult to find your way back through the menu.

Related information • Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17) • Owner's manual in mobile devices Top view with button for Owner's Manual. (p. 20) • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

2 Available in most markets. }}

17 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Contextual Owner's Manual Related information Navigate in the Owner's Manual in • Navigate in the Owner's Manual in the the center display center display (p. 18) The digital Owner's Manual can be accessed • Navigating in the center display's views from the center display's Top view. The con- (p. 111) tents are searchable and the sections are designed to be easy to navigate. • Download apps (p. 430)

Top view with button for contextual Owner's Manual. The contextual Owner's Manual is a shortcut to an article in the Owner's Manual describing the active function displayed on the screen. When a contextual Owner's Manual is available, it will be shown to the right of Owner's The Owner's Manual is accessed from Top view. manual in Top view. – To open the Owner's Manual, pull down Tap the contextual Owner's Manual to open Top view in the center display and tap an article in the Owner's Manual related to the Owner's manual. information displayed on the screen. There are a number of ways to find informa- For example, tap Navigation Manual to open tion in the Owner's Manual. The options can an article related to navigation. be accessed from the Owner's Manual start Certain apps in the vehicle only. For downloa- page and from the Top menu. ded third-party apps, it is e.g. not possible to access app-specific articles.

18 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Opening the menu in the Top menu Featured articles 2. Tap a hotspot. – Tap in the upper list in the Owner's Tap the symbol to go to a > The title of a relevant article will be dis- Manual. page with links to a selection played. of useful articles about the > A menu will open, displaying different 3. Tap the title to open the article. vehicle's more commonly options for finding information: used features and functions. To go back, tap the left arrow. Start page The articles can also be Favorites Tap the symbol to return to accessed via categories, but Tap the symbol to go to arti- the Owner's Manual start have been collected here for quicker access. cles saved as favorites. Tap page. Tap an article to read it in its entirety. an article to read it in its Exterior and interior hotspots entirety. Exterior and interior overviews of the vehicle. Hot- Categories spots are provided for certain Saving or deleting favorite articles The articles in the Owner's functions, components, etc. Manual are structured into Tap a hotspot to come to a Save an article as a favorite by tapping the main and sub-categories. The relevant article. at the upper right when the article is open. same article may appear in When an article has been saved as a favorite, several relevant categories in the star symbol will be filled in: . order to help make them eas- To remove an article from the list of favorites, ier to find. tap its star again. 1. Tap Categories. Video > The main categories are listed. Tap the symbol to go to brief 1. Press Exterior or Interior. instructive videos for various 2. Tap a main category ( ). > Exterior or interior images of the vehicle functions in the vehicle. > A list of sub-categories ( ) and articles are shown with hotspots. The hotspots ( ) will appear. lead to articles about the corresponding function, component, etc. Swipe the 3. Tap an article to open it. screen horizontally to scroll between To go back, tap the left arrow. the images.

}}

19 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Information Owner's manual in mobile devices The contents are searchable and the sections Tap the symbol for informa- The Owner's Manual is available as a mobile are designed to be easy to navigate. tion about the current version app3 and can be downloaded from the App of the Owner's Manual in Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for your vehicle and other useful both smartphones and tablets. information.

Using the search function in the Top menu 1. Tap in the Owner's Manual upper menu. A keyboard will appear at the bottom of the screen. 2. Enter a search word, e.g. "seat belt". > Suggested articles and categories will be displayed as characters are entered. 3. Tap the article or category to read it. The Owner's Manual can be Related information downloaded as a mobile app • Owner's Manual in the center display from the App Store or Google (p. 17) Play. This QR code will take The mobile app is available on both App Store and you directly to the app. You • Using the center display keyboard Google Play. can also search for "Volvo (p. 122) manual" in the App Store or Related information • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21) Google Play. • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21) The app contains videos and exterior/interior images of the vehicle. These images contain hotspots for various functions, components, etc., which lead directly to related information.

3 Certain mobile devices.

20 OWNER'S INFORMATION

Volvo Cars support site Contact Using the Owner's Manual Volvo Cars' website and support site contain Contact information for customer support and To get to know your new vehicle, read the additional information about your vehicle. your nearest Volvo retailer are available on the Owner's Manual before driving it for the first support site. time. Online support Reading your Owner's Manual is a way to Go to volvocars.com/support to visit the site. Related information • familiarize yourself with new features and The support site is available in most markets. Contacting Volvo (p. 26) functions, get advice on how to handle your The site contains support for e.g. Internet- • Volvo ID (p. 26) vehicle in different situations, and to learn how based services and functions, Volvo On Call, to take advantage of everything your Volvo has the navigation system* and apps. Videos and to offer. Pay particular attention to the safety step-by-step instructions explain various pro- warnings provided in the Owner's Manual. cedures, such as how to connect the vehicle The intention of this owner's information is to to the Internet via a cellular phone. explain all of the possible features, functions, options and accessories included in a Volvo Downloadable information vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or Maps guarantee that all of these features, functions For vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation and options are included in every vehicle. maps can be downloaded from the support Some terminology used may not exactly site. match terminology used in sales, marketing Mobile apps and advertising materials. Beginning with model year 2014, the Owner's Volvo continuously works to develop and Manual is available as an app for certain Volvo improve our products. Modifications can mean models. The Volvo On Call app can also be that information, descriptions and illustrations downloaded from the support site. in the Owner's Manual differ from the equip- Owner's manuals in PDF format ment in the vehicle. We reserve the right to Owner's Manuals are available for download- make changes without prior notice. ing in PDF format. Select the vehicle model Do not remove this manual from the vehicle. If and year to download the desired manual. a problem should occur, you will not have the necessary information on where and how to get professional assistance. © Volvo Car Corporation }}

* Option/accessory. 21 OWNER'S INFORMATION

|| Option/accessory Risk of injury White ISO symbols and white text/image on a In addition to standard equipment, the black or blue warning field and message field. Owner's Manual also describes options (fac- Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a tory-installed equipment) and certain accesso- warning of this type could result in damage. ries (extra retrofitted equipment). Information All, at the time of publication known, options and accessories are marked with an asterisk: *. The equipment described in the Owner's Man- ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may be equipped differently depending on market requirements and national or local laws and regulations. Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning field, For more information on which equipment is white text/image on a black message field. standard and which is an option or accessory, Used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a please contact your Volvo retailer. warning of this type could result in serious Decals injury or death. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a There are various types of decals affixed in the Risk of damage black message field. vehicle to communicate important information in a clear manner. The importance of these NOTE decals is explained as follows, in descending The decals shown in the Owner's Manual order of importance. do not claim to be exact reproductions of those found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show approximately how they look and about where they are located. The information that applies for your vehicle in particular is found on the decal on the vehicle.

22 * Option/accessory. OWNER'S INFORMATION

Illustrations, images and video clips The Owner's Manual and the Illustrations, images and video clips used in environment the Owner's Manual are sometimes generic The Owner's Manual is printed on paper from and are intended to provide an overview or an responsibly managed forests. example of a certain function or feature. They The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® sym- may vary depending on equipment level and bol certifies that the paper pulp in the printed market and may differ from the appearance of Owner's Manual comes from FSC®-certified your vehicle. forests or other responsibly managed sources. Related information • Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17) • Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 20) • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Related information • Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure (p. 28)

YOUR VOLVO YOUR VOLVO

Contacting Volvo Volvo ID When a Volvo ID is registered in the vehicle, Use the following contact information if you Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives you additional services are available. Multiple would like to get in touch with Volvo in the access to a range of services using a single Volvo IDs can be used for the same vehicle, United States or Canada. username and password. and multiple vehicles can be linked to the same Volvo ID. In the USA: NOTE Volvo Car USA, LLC The available services can vary over time Related information • Customer Care Center and depend on equipment level and mar- Creating and registering a Volvo ID ket. (p. 27) 1 Volvo Drive, • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553) P.O. Box 914 Examples of services: Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 • Volvo On Call-app - check your vehicle 1-800-458-1552 using your phone. You can check fuel level, find the nearest gas station and lock volvocars.com/us the vehicle remotely. In Canada: • Send to Car – send addresses from online map services directly to the vehicle. Volvo Car Canada Ltd. • Send a request for service and repairs Customer Care Centre directly from the vehicle. The booking will 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 then be completed via email. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 NOTE 1-800-663-8255 If the username/password for a service volvocars.com/ca (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, the change will also automatically be applied to other services.

The creation of a Volvo ID is initiated through the Volvo On Call app or from the vehicle and then completed by email.

26 YOUR VOLVO

Creating and registering a Volvo ID 5. Press the button to create your Volvo ID. Related information • A Volvo ID can be created in two ways. If your 6. An email will be sent to the address you Volvo ID (p. 26) Volvo ID was created with the Volvo On Call have provided. Click on the link in the • Download apps (p. 430) app, the Volvo IDmust also be registered to email to activate your Volvo ID. • Handling system updates via Download the vehicle to enable access to the Volvo ID > Your Volvo ID is now ready to be used. Center (p. 551) services. • * Registering your Volvo ID to the Internet-connected vehicle (p. 479) Creating a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app vehicle 1. Download the Volvo ID app from If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo Download Center in the center display's On Call app, follow these steps to register the App view. ID to the vehicle: 2. Start the app and register a personal email 1. If you have not already done so, download address. the Volvo ID app from Download Center 3. Follow the instructions that will be sent in the center display's App view. automatically to this email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created and is NOTE automatically registered to the vehicle. To download apps the vehicle must be The Volvo ID services can now be used. connected to the internet. Creating a Volvo ID using the Volvo On Call 1 app 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/ 1. Download the latest version of the Volvo email address. On Call app to your phone2. 3. Follow the instructions that will be auto- 2. Choose to create a Volvo ID. matically sent to the email address con- 3. The website for creating a Volvo ID will nected to your Volvo ID. open. Fill in the requested information. > Your Volvo ID has now been registered to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services 4. Check the box to accept the terms and can now be used. conditions.

1 Vehicles with Volvo On Call. 2 Can be downloaded from e.g. the Apple App Store or Google Play.

* Option/accessory. 27 YOUR VOLVO

Drive-E ‒ purer driving pleasure continuous environmental refinement of con- Related information Volvo is committed to the well-being of its ventional gasoline-powered internal combus- • Economical driving (p. 402) customers. As a natural part of this commit- tion engines, Volvo is actively looking at • Starting and stopping preconditioning* ment, we care about the environment in advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. (p. 213) which we all live. Concern for the environ- When you drive a Volvo, you become our part- • The Owner's Manual and the environment ment means an everyday involvement in ner in the work to lessen the vehicle's impact (p. 23) reducing our environmental impact. on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's • Volvo's environmental activities are based on a environmental impact, you can: Air quality (p. 193) holistic view, which means we consider the • overall environmental impact of a product Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. throughout its complete life cycle. In this con- Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- text, design, production, product use, and omy with improperly inflated tires. recycling are all important considerations. In • Follow the recommended maintenance production, Volvo has partly or completely schedule in your Warranty and Service phased out several chemicals including CFCs, Records Information booklet. lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and • Drive at a constant speed whenever possi- reduced the number of chemicals used in our ble. plants 50% since 1991. • See a trained and qualified Volvo service Volvo was the first in the world to introduce technician as soon as possible for inspec- into production a three-way catalytic converter tion if the check engine (malfunction indi- with a Lambda sond, now called the heated cator) light illuminates, or stays on after oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of the vehicle has started. this highly efficient system reduces emissions • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the waste such as used motor oil, used batter- exhaust pipe by approximately 95 - 99% and ies, brake pads, etc. the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile • When cleaning your vehicle, please use manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo the air conditioning system of all models as far car care products are formulated to be back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced elec- environmentally friendly. tronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to

28 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO

• * IntelliSafe – driver support and Park Assist Camera NOTE safety • Road Sign Information* Read the individual parts about each sys- IntelliSafe is Volvo Cars' philosophy regarding • Electronic Stability Control tem to fully understand the functions and vehicle safety. IntelliSafe consists of a num- • Roll Stability Control be notified of important warnings. ber of systems3 that are designed to help make driving safer, prevent accidents and • Cruise control protect passengers and other road users. • Adaptive Cruise Control* Related information • Active high beam (p. 151) WARNING • Rear Collision Warning • Safety (p. 44) The functions are supplementary aids – • Driver Alert Control • Driver support systems (p. 254) they cannot manage all situations in all 4 conditions. • All-Wheel Drive (AWD) The driver is always responsible for ensur- Prevention ing that the vehicle is driven in a safe man- IntelliSafe has the following functions ner and in accordance with applicable traf- designed to help the driver prevent accidents. fic rules and regulations. • City Safety Support • Distance Alert* IntelliSafe has the following functions • Lane Keeping Aid designed to help the driver operate the vehicle • Collision Avoidance more safely. • Active high beam Protection IntelliSafe has the following interacting func- • Tunnel detection tions to help protect the driver and passengers • Pilot Assist in certain situations in the event of an acci- • Cross Traffic Alert* dent. • Blind Spot Information* • Whiplash Protection System • Park Assist* • Seat belt with seat belt tensioner • Park Assist Pilot* • Airbags

3 Some of these systems are standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, vehicle model and model year. 4 All Wheel Drive

* Option/accessory. 29 YOUR VOLVO

Sensus - connection and Sensus provides an intelligent interface and Information when it's needed, where entertainment Internet connection to the digital world. An it's needed Sensus makes it possible to use apps and intuitive navigation structure offers access to The vehicle's displays present the right infor- turn your vehicle into a Wi-Fi hotspot. relevant assistance, information and entertain- mation at the right time. Information is pre- ment when it is needed, without distracting sented in different displays depending on how This is Sensus the driver. it should be prioritized by the driver. Sensus includes all of the solutions in the vehicle related to entertainment, Internet connection and navigation*, and serves as the user interface between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus is what makes communication between you, the vehicle and the world around you possible.

30 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritized. Instrument panel The instrument panel displays information Center display such as speed, incoming phone calls or the track currently playing. It is controlled using the steering wheel keypads.

Instrument panel5.

5 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. }}

31 YOUR VOLVO

|| Many of the vehicle's main functions are controlled from the center display, a touchscreen that reacts to taps and other gestures. This minimizes the number of physical buttons and controls needed in the vehicle. The screen can also be operated while wearing gloves. The center display is used to control e.g. the climate and entertainment systems and to adjust the power seats*. The information presented in the center display can be handled by the driver or by someone else in the vehicle. Voice control system The voice control system enables the driver to control certain vehicle functions without taking their hands off the wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice commands to e.g. play a song, make a phone call, increase the temperature in the passenger compartment or have a text message read aloud. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Center display overview (p. 106) • Voice Control (p. 138) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) • Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) (p. 483)

32 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO

Software Updates Data recording trivial crash situation occurs; no data are So that you as a Volvo customer shall have As part of Volvo's commitment to safety and recorded by the EDR under normal driving the best possible experience from your car, quality, certain information is recorded regar- conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, Volvo is continuously developing the systems ding vehicle operation, functionality and inci- gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. in the cars and the services that you are dents. However, other parties, such as law offered. US market only: enforcement, could combine the EDR data The software in your Volvo will be updated to with the type of personally identifying data EDR the latest version when the vehicle is serviced routinely acquired during a crash investigation. This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data at an authorized Volvo retailer. With the latest Recorder" (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR To read data recorded by an EDR, special software update, you can take advantage of is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like equipment is required, and access to the available improvements, including those that situations, such as an air bag deployment or vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to came with previous software updates. hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such For more information on available updates and understanding how a vehicle's systems as law enforcement, that have the special answers to frequently asked questions, visit performed. The EDR is designed to record equipment, can read the information if they volvocars.com/support. data related to vehicle dynamics and safety have access to the vehicle or the EDR. systems for a short period of time, typically 30 ASDR NOTE seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is This vehicle is equipped with an Active Safety designed to record such data as: Data Recorder (ASDR). This data recorder can Functionality after updating may vary record information related to the usage of the depending on market, model, model year • How various systems in your vehicle were car, functional errors and active safety and options. operating; actuations (e.g. auto brake). The information • Whether or not the driver and passenger saved is used by technicians for service and Related information safety belts were buckled/fastened; maintenance to diagnose and repair possible • Sensus - connection and entertainment • How far (if at all) the driver was faults that has occurred in the vehicle and to (p. 30) depressing the accelerator and/or brake fulfil certain legal requirements. The registered • Handling system updates via Download pedal; and, data can also, in congregated form, be used Center (p. 551) • How fast the vehicle was traveling. for research- and product development – purposes to continuously improve the safety These data can help provide a better and quality of Volvo Cars. For more understanding of the circumstances in which information contact your local Volvo retailer. crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

}}

33 YOUR VOLVO

|| Canadian market only: dent or near-accident. However, other parties, Volvo will not provide this information to any such as law enforcement, could combine the third parties without the vehicle owner's con- This vehicle is equipped with an “Event Data EDR data with the type of personally identifia- sent. However, national legislation and regula- Recorder” (EDR). The main purpose of the ble information that is routinely acquired dur- tions may require Volvo to disclose this type of EDR is to register and record data in traffic ing an accident investigation. Special equip- information to law enforcement or other accidents or accident-like situations, e.g. if an ment and access to either the vehicle or the authorities that can claim a legal right to the airbag deploys or if the vehicle hits an obstacle EDR is required to read this recorded data. information. Special technical equipment, in the road. This data is recorded in order to which Volvo and workshops that have entered help understand how the vehicle's systems In addition to the EDR, the vehicle is equipped agreements with Volvo have access to, is perform in these types of situations. The EDR with a number of computers that continuously required to read and interpret the recorded is designed to record data related to vehicle control and monitor the vehicle's performance. data. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that dynamics and safety systems for a short These computers may record data during nor- information provided to Volvo in conjunction period of time, usually 30 seconds or less. mal driving conditions, particularly if they with service and maintenance is stored and detect a fault relating to the vehicle's opera- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record handled securely and in compliance with tion and functionality or upon activation of the data in traffic accidents or accident-like situa- applicable legal requirements. For more infor- vehicle's active driver support functions (e.g. tions such as: mation, please contact a Volvo retailer. City Safety or the auto-brake function). • How the various systems in the vehicle Some of this recorded data is required by Vehicle Connectivity Module (VCM performed; technicians performing service and mainte- High) • Whether the driver and passenger seat nance in order to diagnose and rectify any Vehicles equipped with VCM High can collect belts were tightened/buckled; faults that may have occurred in the vehicle. data on the vehicle's safety functions as well • The driver's use of the accelerator/brake The recorded information is also needed to as other functions in the vehicle. This data is pedal; enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regula- collected for product development, quality fol- • How fast the vehicle was moving. tory requirements. Information registered in low-up, safety work and to improve and moni- the vehicle is stored in its computers until the tor the vehicle's quality and its safety func- This data can help provide a better under- vehicle is serviced or repaired. tions. Data is also collected in order to man- standing of the circumstances in which traffic age Volvo Cars' warranty commitments and to In addition to the above, the recorded informa- accidents and injuries occur. The EDR records comply with legal requirements related to tion may be used in aggregated form for data only if a non-trivial accident situation engine emission data. occurs. EDR does not record any data during research and product development purposes normal driving conditions. The system also in order to continuously improve the safety never registers data on who is driving the vehi- and quality of Volvo vehicles. cle or the geographical location of the acci-

34 YOUR VOLVO

NOTE Terms and Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy Volvo offers services that help enhance the Volvo respects and safeguards the personal When collecting data, Volvo may use a vehicle's safety and comfort. privacy of everyone who visits our websites. small portion of the vehicle's data plan, up These services comprise everything from This policy refers to the handling of customer to 10 MB a month. assistance in emergencies to navigation and data and personal information. The purpose is various maintenance services. to give current, past and potential customers a Related information general understanding of: Before using the services, it is important to • Contacting Volvo (p. 26) read support information about terms and • The circumstances in which we collect • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 39) conditions for the services at volvocars.com. and process your personal data. • Related information The types of personal data we collect. • Customer Privacy Policy (p. 35) • Why we collect your personal data. • How we process your personal data. For more information on the policy, search for support information on volvocars.com. Related information • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485) • Terms and Conditions for Services (p. 35) • Data recording (p. 33)

35 YOUR VOLVO

Important information on NOTE WARNING accessories and extra equipment Do not export your Volvo to another coun- Certain components of this vehicle such as Incorrectly connected or installed accessories try before investigating that country's air bag modules, seat belt tensioners, or extra equipment may have an adverse applicable safety and exhaust emission adaptive steering columns, and button cell effect on the vehicle's electronics. requirements. In some cases it may be dif- batteries may contain Perchlorate material. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners Special handling may apply for service or ficult or impossible to comply with these use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, vehicle end of life disposal. requirements. Modifications to the emis- and that accessory installations be performed sion control system(s) may render your See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ only by a trained and qualified Volvo service Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in perchlorate. technician. Certain accessories only work the U.S., Canada and other countries. when the associated software is installed in the vehicle's computer system. WARNING WARNING The driver is always responsible for operat- The equipment described in the Owner's Man- ing the vehicle in a safe manner and for ual is not available in all vehicles. Vehicles may CALIFORNIA proposition 65 complying with current statutes and regu- be equipped differently depending on market Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, lations. requirements and national or local laws and and certain vehicle components contain or It is also essential to maintain and service regulations. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- the vehicle according to Volvo's recom- fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or Optional or accessory equipment may not be mendations as stated in the owner's infor- other reproductive harm. In addition, cer- mation and the service and warranty book- available in all countries or markets. Please tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain let. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- products of component wear contain or ferently, depending on special legal require- emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- If the on-board information differs from the ments. For more information on which equip- fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects or printed owner's manual, the printed information always takes precedence. ment is standard and which is an option or other reproductive harm. accessory, please contact your Volvo retailer. Related information • Accessory installation (p. 37) • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's data link connector (p. 37) • Using the Owner's Manual (p. 21)

36 YOUR VOLVO

Accessory installation information. Volvo assumes no responsi- Connecting equipment to the We strongly recommend that Volvo owners bility for death, injury, or expenses that vehicle's data link connector install only genuine, Volvo-approved accesso- may result from the installation of non- Incorrectly connected or installed software or ries, and that accessory installations be per- genuine accessories. diagnostic tools may have an adverse effect formed only by a trained and qualified Volvo Related information on the vehicle's electronics. service technician. Certain functions only We strongly recommend that Volvo owners • Important information on accessories and work when the associated software is instal- use only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, extra equipment (p. 36) led in the vehicle's computer system. and that accessory installations be performed • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to only by a trained and qualified Volvo service ensure compatibility with the perform- technician. Certain accessories only work ance, safety, and emission systems in your when the associated software is installed in vehicle. Additionally, a trained and quali- the vehicle's computer system. fied Volvo service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle. • Accessories that have not been approved by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. • Any of your vehicle's performance and safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories On-board Diagnostic (OBDII) socket under the dash- to be installed by someone unfamiliar with board on the driver's side. your vehicle. • Damage caused by unapproved or improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty }}

37 YOUR VOLVO

|| NOTE This device complies with Industry Canada Technician certification license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo Volvo Cars takes no responsibility for the subject to the following two conditions: supports certification by the National Insti- consequences of connecting non-author- tute for Automotive Service Excellence ized equipment to the On-board (1) This device may not cause interference, and (A.S.E.). Diagnostic (OBDII) socket. This socket (2) this device must accept any interference Certified technicians have demonstrated a should only be used by a trained and quali- received, including interference that may high degree of competence in specific areas. fied Volvo service technician. cause undesired operation. Besides passing exams, each technician must Related information also have worked in the field for two or more Type approval • Important information on accessories and years before a certificate is issued. These pro- USA extra equipment (p. 36) fessional technicians are best able to analyze FCC ID: 2AGKKACUII-06 vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at This device complies with part 15 of the FCC peak operating condition. rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Canada IC: 20839-ACUII06

38 YOUR VOLVO

Viewing the Vehicle Identification Volvo Structural Parts Statement Number (VIN) Volvo is one of the leading companies for car When contacting a Volvo retailer, about e.g. safety. your Volvo On Call subscription, your Vehicle Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles Identification Number (VIN6) may be needed. designed to help protect vehicle occupants in 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top the event of a collision. view. Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a 2. Proceed to System System collision. This energy absorption system including, but not limited to, structural compo- Information Vehicle Identification nents such as bumper reinforcement bars, Number. bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender > The vehicle identification number will aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels The VIN has a similar location on all models. be displayed. must work together to maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle occupants. The VIN can also be found: The supplemental restraint system including • on the first page of the Warranty and but not limited to air bags, side curtain air Service Records Information booklet bags, and deployment sensors work together • on the vehicle's registration card with the above components to provide proper • by looking at the dashboard through the timing for air bag deployment. vehicle's windshield. Due to the above, Volvo Car USA does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo parts for collision repair. Volvo Car USA also recommends using Volvo- approved replacement glass. The use of aftermarket glass, particularly a windshield, can have an adverse effect on collision avoidance and advanced lighting systems.

6 Vehicle Identification Number }}

39 YOUR VOLVO

|| In addition Volvo does not support the use or Change of market when importing NOTE re-use of structural components from an exist- or relocating Visit an authorized Volvo retailer if you ing vehicle that has been previously damaged. If you import a vehicle or move to another have imported or relocated with your vehi- Although these parts may appear equivalent, it country, it is important that you register the cle to a new country. is difficult to tell if the parts have been previ- vehicle in the new market to help ensure that ously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part online services work correctly, that the vehi- Available services may vary depending on has been damaged as a result of a prior colli- cle meets local laws and regulations, etc. market and vehicle model. sion. The quality of these used parts may also have been affected due to environmental Visit an authorized Volvo retailer exposure. Visit an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance NOTE registering the vehicle in the new market. Related information If the vehicle is exported to another market, Volvo is not responsible for any adapta- • Data recording (p. 33) If you do not do this then you may experience that apps, Volvo On Call7, software downloads tions to the vehicle in order to meet appli- and other online services are affected and do cable requirements or laws in the country not work correctly. of import. For more information, see the Warranty and Service Records Information Creating a new Volvo ID in your new home booklet or contact your Volvo workshop. market When you relocate to another country you Related information should create a Volvo ID in the new country. • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553) If you have already created a Volvo ID in another country and want to use the same email address, you must first delete your Volvo ID in the region you originally created it. You can also create a new Volvo ID with another email address. For vehicles with Volvo On Call7 Download the Volvo On Call app from the country the vehicle will be used in and link the app to your vehicle.

7 Applicable only to markets that have access to Volvo On Call.

40 YOUR VOLVO

Driver distraction WARNING A driver has a responsibility to do everything • Never use a hand-held cellular tele- possible to ensure his or her own safety and phone while driving. Some jurisdictions the safety of passengers in the vehicle and prohibit cellular telephone use by a others sharing the roadway. Part of this driver while the vehicle is moving. responsibility is avoiding distractions, including performing activities that are not directly • If your vehicle is equipped with a navi- related to controlling the vehicle in the driving gation system, set and make changes environment. to your travel itinerary only with the Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with vehicle parked. feature-rich entertainment and communica- • Never program your audio system tion systems. These include hands-free cellular while the vehicle is moving. Program telephones, navigation systems, and multipur- radio presets with the vehicle parked, pose audio systems. You may also own other and use your programmed presets to portable electronic devices for your own con- make radio use quicker and simpler. venience. When used properly and safely, they • Never use portable computers or per- enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, sonal digital assistants while the vehi- any of these could cause a distraction. cle is moving. For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the strong Related information Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these • Audio, media and Internet (p. 428) devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In addition to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific new features that may be found in your vehicle:

SAFETY SAFETY

• Safety WARNING Airbags (p. 55) The vehicle is equipped with a number of • If the warning symbol remains illuminated Whiplash Protection System (p. 48) safety systems that work together to help or switches on while driving and the mes- • Safety mode (p. 64) protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to • Child safety (p. 66) the event of an accident. workshop is displayed in the instrument The vehicle is equipped with a number of sen- panel, this indicates that something in the sors that may react in the event of an accident safety system is not functioning properly. and activate different safety systems, such as Volvo recommends contacting an author- the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. ized Volvo workshop for repairs as soon as Depending on the specific conditions of the possible. accident, e.g. collisions at certain angles, over- turning or swerving, the systems react differ- WARNING ently to help provide good protection. Never attempt to alter or repair any of the There are also mechanical safety systems vehicle's safety systems yourself. Incor- such as the Whiplash Protection System. The rectly performed repairs to any system vehicle is also built so that a large part of the could impair function and lead to serious force of a collision is distributed to the vehi- injury. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. cle's members, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body. If this dedicated warning symbol is After an accident, the vehicle's safety mode not functioning, the general warning may be activated if any important function in symbol will illuminate instead and the vehicle has been damaged. the same message will be displayed Warning symbol in the instrument in the instrument panel. panel Related information The warning symbol in the instru- • Safety during pregnancy (p. 45) ment panel illuminates when the • vehicle's electrical system is in igni- Occupant safety (p. 45) tion mode II. The symbol will go out • Reporting safety defects (p. 46) after approx. 6 seconds if no faults are • Recall information (p. 47) detected in the vehicle's safety systems. • Seat belts (p. 49)

44 SAFETY

Safety during pregnancy position that allows them to retain full control Occupant safety It is important that seat belts are worn cor- of the vehicle (which means they should be Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. rectly during pregnancy and that pregnant able to easily reach the steering wheel and drivers adjust their seating position accord- foot pedals). Try to maintain as much distance Volvo's concern for safety ingly. as possible between the stomach and the Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 steering wheel. when the first Volvo rolled off the production Seat belt line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), Related information safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact • Safety (p. 44) zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long • Seat belts (p. 49) before it was fashionable or required by gov- • Manual front seats (p. 178) ernment regulation. • Power* front seats (p. 179) We will not compromise our commitment to safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or The seat belt should fit closely against the in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255. shoulder, with the diagonal section between the breasts and to the side of the stomach. The lap section of the seat belt should lie flat over the thighs and as far as possible under the stomach. Never let it ride upward. Remove unnecessary slack and make sure the seat belt fits as close as possible to the body. Make sure there are no twists in the seat belt. Seating position As pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust the seat and steering wheel to a }}

* Option/accessory. 45 SAFETY

|| Occupant safety reminders Related information Reporting safety defects How safely you drive doesn't depend on how • Safety (p. 44) The following information will help you report old you are but rather on: • Reporting safety defects (p. 46) any perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle. • How well you see. • Recall information (p. 47) • Your ability to concentrate. Reporting safety defects in the U.S. • How quickly you make decisions under If you believe that your vehicle has a stress to avoid an accident. defect which could cause a crash or The following suggestions are intended to could cause injury or death, you help you cope with the ever changing traffic should immediately inform the environment. National Highway Traffic Safety • Never drink and drive. Administration (NHTSA) in addition • If you are taking any medication, consult to notifying Volvo Car USA, LLC. If your physician about its potential effects NHTSA receives similar complaints, on your driving abilities. it may open an investigation, and if it • Take a driver-retraining course. finds that a safety defect exists in a • Have your eyes checked regularly. group of vehicles, it may order a • Keep your windshield and headlights recall and remedy campaign. How- clean. ever, NHTSA cannot become • Replace wiper blades when they start to involved in individual problems leave streaks. between you, your retailer, or Volvo • Take into account the traffic, road, and weather conditions, particularly with Car USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, regard to stopping distance. you may either call the Auto Safety • Never text while driving. Hotline tollfree at • Refrain from using or minimize the use of 1-888-327-4236 a cell phone while driving.

46 SAFETY

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: Reporting safety defects in Canada Recall information NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- If you believe your vehicle has a defect that On our website, click the "Owner" tab in the portation, Washington D.C. 20590. could cause a crash or could cause injury or upper left-hand side of the screen and then death, you should immediately inform Trans- click on the heading "Recall Information". You can also obtain other informa- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Car Enter the vehicle identification number (VIN), tion about motor vehicle safety from Canada Ltd. which can be found at the bottom of the wind- http://www.safercar.gov, where you Transport Canada can be contacted at: shield. If your vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page. can also enter your vehicle's VIN 1-800-333-0510 (Vehicle Identification Number) to Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 You can also enter the Vehicle Identification Number in the search field on the National see if it has any open recalls. Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Volvo strongly recommends that if Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road (NHTSA) website at: www.nhtsa.gov. your vehicle is covered under a serv- Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z Volvo customers in Canada ice campaign, safety or emission 0A1 For any questions regarding open recalls for recall or similar action, it should be Related information your vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to completed as soon as possible. • Safety (p. 44) answer your questions, please contact Volvo Please check with your local retailer • Occupant safety (p. 45) Customer Relations at 800-663-8255, Mon- or Volvo Car USA, LLC if your vehicle • Recall information (p. 47) day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or volvocars.com/ca. You may also write is covered under these conditions. • Viewing the Vehicle Identification Number us at: NHTSA can be reached at: (VIN) (p. 39) Volvo Car Canada Ltd. Internet: Customer Care Centre http://www.nhtsa.gov 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Telephone: Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-888-DASH-2-DOT www.tc.gc.ca (1-888-327-4236).

}}

47 SAFETY

|| Related information Whiplash Protection System WARNING • Safety (p. 44) The Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) is Do not attempt to alter or repair the seat or • Reporting safety defects (p. 46) designed to help reduce the risk of whiplash- WHIPS on your own. Volvo recommends type injuries. The system consists of energy • Occupant safety (p. 45) contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. absorbing backrests and seat cushions as If the front seats have been subjected to well as specially designed head restraints in severe stress, e.g. in a collision, the seats the front seats. must be replaced. Even if the seats appear WHIPS is activated in the event of a rear-end undamaged, some of their protective prop- collision and adapted to the angle and speed erties may have been lost. of the collision and to the characteristics of the colliding vehicle. When WHIPS is activated, the front seat backrests move rearward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating positions of the driver and front seat passenger. This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash.

WARNING WHIPS is a supplement to the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.

Do not place any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or on the rear seat that could prevent WHIPS from functioning correctly.

48 SAFETY

• * WARNING Power front seats (p. 179) Seat belts • * Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- Do not squeeze box-like cargo between the Rear Collision Warning (p. 324) rear seat cushion and the front seat back- pants in your vehicle. Children should be rest. properly restrained using an infant seat, adjustable child seat or booster cushion as If the rear seat backrests are folded down, determined by age, weight and height. cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the front seat back- Most states and provinces make it mandatory rests in the event of a collision. for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. Seat belt maintenance WARNING Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild deter- If a rear seat backrest is folded down or if a rear-facing child restraint is being used in gent for cleaning. Check the seat belt mecha- the rear seat, the seat in front must be nism's function as follows: attach the seat belt moved forward so that it does not come and pull rapidly on the strap. into contact with the backrest or child restraint.

Seating position For WHIPS to provide good protection, the driver and passenger must be seated correctly and the system's function must not be impe- ded in any way. Set the front seat to the correct seating position before starting to drive. The driver and the front seat passenger should sit in the center of the seat with their heads as close as possible to the head restraints. Related information • Safety (p. 44) • Manual front seats (p. 178) }}

* Option/accessory. 49 SAFETY

|| WARNING Buckling and unbuckling seat belts Buckling seat belts Make sure that all passengers have buckled 1. Pull out the belt slowly and make sure it is • Never repair the belt yourself. Repairs their seat belts before starting to drive. not twisted or damaged. should only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three- The seat belt is equipped with a seat belt point belt system will have a detrimen- retractor that will lock up in the following tal effect on the amount of protection situations: available in the event of a collision. • if the belt is pulled out too quickly. • The seat back should not be tilted too • during braking and acceleration. far back. The shoulder belt must be • if the vehicle is leaning excessively. taut in order to function properly. • when driving in turns. • Do not use any type of child restraint in the front passenger seat. We recom- • if the automatic locking retractor/emer- mend that children who have outgrown gency locking retractor (ALR/ELR) is these devices sit in the rear seat with activated. Each seat belt (except for the the seat belt properly fastened. driver's) is equipped with an ALR function, which is designed to keep the seat belt taut when installing a child Related information restraint. ALR is activated when the seat • Safety (p. 44) belt is pulled out as far as possible. If • Seat belt tensioners (p. 52) this is done, a sound from the seat belt • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts retractor will be audible, which is nor- (p. 50) mal. The seat belt can now only be fed • into the retractor, not pulled out. This Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54) function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted.

50 SAFETY

2. Buckle the seat belt by pushing the latch 3. The height of the seat belts in the front plate into the receptacle. seats can be adjusted. > A distinct "click" indicates that the belt is locked into place.

WARNING Always insert the seat belt latch plate into the belt buckle on the correct side. Failure to do so could cause the seat belts and belt buckles to malfunction in a collision. There is a risk of serious injury.

The belt should be positioned closely over the shoulder (against the collarbone, not down over the arm). 4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt Press the button on the seat belt holder over the hips by pulling the diagonal sec- and move the belt up or down. tion upward toward the shoulder. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against the neck.

The lap section of the seat belt should be positioned low on the hips (not against the abdomen).

}}

51 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Seat belt tensioners • Seat belts (p. 49) The vehicle is equipped with standard and Never use a seat belt for more than one * occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion • Seat belt tensioners (p. 52) electric seat belt tensioners that can help tension the seat belt in a critical situation or of the belt under the arm, behind the back • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54) or otherwise out of position. Such use collision. could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their Standard seat belt tensioners strength when exposed to violent stretch- The seat belts on the front seats and rear out- ing, they should be replaced after any colli- board seats are equipped with standard seat sion, even if they appear to be undamaged. belt tensioners. In a collision of sufficiently violent force, the WARNING seat belt tensioners will tension the seat belts Do not use clips or fasten the belts around in order to more effectively restrain the occu- hooks or other parts of the interior. This will pants. prevent the seat belt from fitting properly. Electric seat belt tensioners* The driver's and front passenger's seat belts WARNING are equipped with electric seat belt tensioners. Never damage the seat belts and never The seat belt tensioners interact and can be insert any foreign objects into the belt activated in conjunction with the City Safety buckle. This may cause the seat belts and and Rear Collision Warning driver support sys- belt buckles to malfunction in a collision. There is a risk of serious injury. tems. In critical situations, such as if the vehicle brakes suddenly, begins to skid or runs off the road (e.g if the vehicle rolls into a ditch, Unbuckling seat belts lifts off the ground or hits an obstacle in the 1. Press the red button on the seat belt road), or if there is a risk of collision, the seat receptacle and make sure the seat belt belts can be pulled taut by the seat belt ten- retracts fully into the retractor slot. sioner's electric motor. 2. If it does not fully retract, guide the belt The electric seat belt tensioner helps to posi- manually into the slot and make sure it tion the occupant more effectively in the seat, does not hang loose. which reduces the risk of the occupant striking the interior of the passenger compartment

52 * Option/accessory. SAFETY and improves the effect of other safety sys- • Resetting the electric seat belt tensioners* Resetting the electric seat belt tems such as the airbags. (p. 53) tensioners* When a critical situation has passed, the seat • City Safety™ (p. 305) The electric seat belt tensioners are designed belt and the electric seat belt tensioner are • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324) to be reset automatically, but if the seat belt reset automatically. However, they can also be remains taut it can be reset manually. reset manually. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location. 2. Unbuckle the seat belt and then rebuckle CAUTION it. If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the > The seat belt and the electric seat belt passenger-side electric seat belt tensioner tensioner will be reset. may also be deactivated. WARNING WARNING Never attempt to alter or repair the seat belt on your own. Volvo recommends con- Never attempt to alter or repair the seat tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. belt on your own. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. If the seat belt has been exposed to extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a If the seat belt has been exposed to collision, the entire seat belt must be extreme forces, e.g. in conjunction with a replaced. Even if the seat belt appears collision, the entire seat belt must be undamaged, some of its protective proper- replaced. Even if the seat belt appears ties may have been lost. Also replace the undamaged, some of its protective proper- seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new ties may have been lost. Also replace the seat belt must be type approved and seat belt if it is worn or damaged. The new intended for the same seating position as seat belt must be type approved and the replaced seat belt. intended for the same seating position as the replaced seat belt. Related information • Seat belt tensioners (p. 52) Related information • Seat belts (p. 49) • Seat belts (p. 49) • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 50)

* Option/accessory. 53 SAFETY

Door and seat belt reminders Seat belt reminder Rear seat This system is intended to remind occupants The rear seat belt reminder has two functions: to buckle their seat belts and to alert the • To indicate which seat belts are buckled in driver if a door, hood or other opening (trunk, the rear seats. This will also be displayed sunroof, etc.) is open. in an instrument panel graphic. Graphics in the instrument panel • To provide audio and visual reminders if any seat belt in the rear seat is removed while the vehicle is in motion. The reminder will stop when the seat belt has been rebuckled. Door/hood/tailgate and fuel filler door reminder Reminder light in ceiling console. If the hood, tailgate, fuel filler door or any door A seat belt reminder light illuminates in the is not properly closed, this will be indicated by ceiling console and a warning symbol is dis- a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the played in the instrument panel. vehicle safely and close the open door, hood, The audible reminder varies depending on the etc. Graphics in the instrument panel with various types vehicle's speed, driving time and distance If the vehicle is moving at a speed of warnings. The warning colors for the doors/tail- driven. under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the gate vary depending on the vehicle's speed. A seat belt status graphic in the instrument information symbol will illuminate in The instrument panel graphic shows the seats panel indicates when the driver's or a pas- the instrument panel. where seat belts are buckled and not buckled. senger's seat belt is buckled or unbuckled. If the vehicle is moving at a speed The same graphic also indicates if the hood, Child seats are not included in the seat belt above approx. 10 km/h (6 mph), the tailgate or any door is open. reminder system. warning symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Confirm the graphic by briefly pressing the O Front seats button on the right-side steering wheel key- An audible signal and an indicator light remind Related information pad. unbuckled occupants to fasten their seat • Seat belts (p. 49) belts. • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 50)

54 SAFETY

• Airbags WARNING Inflatable curtain (p. 63) The vehicle is equipped with airbags and If your vehicle has become water-damaged inflatable curtains for the driver and passen- in any way (e.g., soaked floor mats/stand- gers. ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do WARNING not attempt to start the engine. This may cause airbag deployment, which could • If the airbag warning light stays on result in serious injury. Volvo recommends after the engine has started or if it illu- towing the vehicle directly to an authorized minates while you are driving, have the Volvo workshop. vehicle inspected by a trained and Before attempting to tow the vehicle: qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. 1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. • Never attempt to alter or repair any of the vehicle's safety systems yourself. 2. Follow the instructions for manually Incorrectly performed repairs to any overriding the shiftlock system. system could impair function and lead to serious injury. All work on these sys- Deployed airbags tems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING If any of the airbags have deployed: • Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an authorized workshop. • If necessary, seek medical attention.

Related information • Safety (p. 44) • Driver/passenger side front airbags (p. 56) • Side airbags (p. 63)

55 SAFETY

Driver/passenger side front NOTE The front airbag system airbags The front airbag system includes gas genera- The sensors react differently depending on As a supplement to the seat belts, the vehicle tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- the circumstances of the accident and is equipped with driver and passenger side tion sensors that activate the gas generators, whether or not the seat belt is used. This front airbags. causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro- applies to all belt positions. gen gas. There may therefore be accident situations As the movement of the seats' occupants in which only one (or none) of the airbags compresses the airbags, some of the gas is are deployed. The sensors monitor the expelled at a controlled rate to provide better impact of the collision and react accord- cushioning. The belt tensioners minimize slack ingly to deploy one, several or no airbags. in the seat belts and are activated for occupants wearing their seat belts. The entire proc- WARNING ess, from inflation to deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. The seat belt and the airbag work together. If the seat belt is not used or is used incor- The location of the front airbags is indicated rectly, the airbag may not provide the by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering intended protection in a collision. wheel pad and above the glove compartment, Driver/passenger side front airbags. To help prevent injury in the event the air- and by decals on both sun visors and on the In a frontal collision, the airbags help protect bag is deployed, passengers should sit as front and far right side of the dash. the driver's and passenger's head, neck, face upright as possible, with their feet on the The driver's side front airbag is folded and and chest and the driver's knees and legs. floor and their backs against the seat backrest. located in the steering wheel hub. A collision of a sufficiently violent force will knee airbag trigger the sensors and one or more airbags The is folded on the underside of will inflate. The airbag helps cushion the initial the dashboard on the driver's side. The text WARNING AIRBAG impact of the collision for the passenger. The is embossed on the panel. Volvo recommends contacting an author- airbag deflates when compressed by the colli- ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly The passenger's side front airbag is folded sion. A small amount of powder will also be performed repairs to the airbag system behind a panel located above the glove com- released from the airbag. This may appear to could impair function and lead to serious partment. be smoke and is normal. The entire process, injury. from inflation to deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

56 SAFETY

WARNING deploy in certain non-frontal collisions NOTE where rapid deceleration occurs. • The airbags in the vehicle are designed • Deployment of front airbags occurs • The airbag system's sensors, which trigger to be a SUPPLEMENT to-not a only one time during an accident. In a the front airbags, are designed to deter- replacement for-the three-point seat collision where deployment occurs, the mine if the collision is powerful enough to belts. For maximum protection, wear airbags and seat belt tensioners acti- activate the belt tensioners and/or the air- seat belts at all times. Be aware that no vate. Some noise occurs and a small bags. system can prevent all possible injuries amount of powder is released. The that may occur in an accident. However, not all frontal collisions activate the release of the powder may appear as front airbags. • Never drive with your hands on the smoke-like matter. This is a normal steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object characteristic and does not indicate fire. • The front airbags are designed to help (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed prevent serious injury. Deployment object at a low speed, the front airbags • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- occurs very quickly and with considera- will not necessarily deploy. sors that are integrated with the front ble force. During normal deployment • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a seat buckles. The point at which the and depending on variables such as side impact collision, in a collision from airbag deploys is determined by seating position, one may experience the rear or in a rollover situation. whether or not the seat belt is being abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other • used, as well as the severity of the col- The amount of damage to the bodywork lision. injuries as a result of deployment of does not reliably indicate if the airbags one or both of the airbags. should have deployed or not. • Collisions can occur where only one of • When installing any accessory equip- the airbags deploys. If the impact is ment, make sure that the front airbag less severe, but severe enough to pres- system is not damaged. Any interfer- ent a clear injury risk, the airbags are ence in the system could cause mal- triggered at partial capacity. If the function. impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity. Front airbag deployment • The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and object impacted. The airbags may also }}

57 SAFETY

|| WARNING Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 • Do not use child safety seats or child 1-800-458-1552 booster cushions/backrests in the front www.volvocars.com/us passenger's seat. We also recommend In Canada that occupants under 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) in height who have outgrown Volvo Car Canada Ltd. these devices sit in the rear seat with Customer Care Centre the seat belt fastened. See also the Occupant Classification System infor- 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 mation. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 • Never drive with the airbags deployed. 1-800-663-8255 The fact that they hang out can impair Passenger's side airbag decal. the steering of your vehicle. Other www.volvocars.com/ca safety systems can also be damaged. WARNING • Airbag decals The smoke and dust formed when the • Children must never be allowed in the airbags are deployed can cause skin front passenger's seat. and eye irritation in the event of pro- • longed exposure. Occupants in the front passenger's seat must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit leaning toward the instrument Should you have questions about any compo- panel or otherwise sit out of position. nent in the SRS system, please contact a • trained and qualified Volvo service technician The occupant's back must be as or Volvo customer support: upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt In the United States properly fastened. Volvo Car USA, LLC • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on Customer Care Center Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors. the dash, seat or out of the window. 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914

58 SAFETY

WARNING Occupant Classification System Classifica- OCS indica- Passeng- The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is tion of pas- tor light sta- er's side • No objects or accessory equipment, designed to meet the regulatory require- e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed sengers in tus front air- ments of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety on, attached to, or installed near the air front pas- bag status Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to bag cover (the area above the glove senger seat disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side compartment) or the area affected by front airbag under certain conditions. The passen- OCS indica- Enabled airbag deployment. ger is classi- tor light is • There should be no loose articles, such fied as an not lit. as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or adult. dashboard area. • The passen- The OCS Enabled or Never try to open the airbag cover on ger is classi- indicator disabled the steering wheel or the passenger's fied as a light is lit or depending side dashboard. This should only be small child in not lit on several done by a trained and qualified Volvo a front-facing depending parameters service technician. child seat. on several that deter- • Failure to follow these instructions can parameters mine the result in injury to the vehicle's occu- that deter- most suita- pants. mine the ble status. OCS indicator light. most suitable Related information The front passenger-side airbag is either ena- status. bled or disabled depending on the classifica- • Airbags (p. 55) The passen- OCS indica- Disabled tion of the passenger in the front passenger • ger is classi- tor light is lit. Occupant Classification System (p. 59) seat. fied as a Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and small child in recommends that ALL children up to and a rear-facing including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat child seat. and are restrained in a suitable manner appropriate to their height and weight. This is The passen- OCS indica- Disabled strongly recommended for children in rear-fac- ger seat is tor light is lit. ing child seats. empty.

}}

59 SAFETY

|| Occupant Classification System If a malfunction is detected in the function system, the OCS indicator light will OCS works in combination with sensors in the remain illuminated and the SRS front passenger seat. The sensors are warning symbol will be shown in the intended to detect the presence, and classifi- instrument panel along with a text message. cation of, an occupant sitting correctly and determine whether the front passenger airbag WARNING should be enabled (able to be deployed) or If a fault in the system is detected and indi- disabled (cannot be deployed). cated as described, be aware that the pas- The OCS uses an indicator light with the text senger's side front airbag will not deploy in PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF, which will illu- the event of a collision. If this occurs, have the airbag system and Occupant Classifi- minate and stay on to remind you that the cation System checked by a workshop as Correct seating position. passenger's side front airbag is disabled. The soon as possible. Volvo recommends con- PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. located in the ceiling console near the bracket for the rearview mirror. Classification of adult Always pay attention that the status of the To help ensure accurate classification when a indicator light shows the correct classification person of adult size is sitting in the front pas- both before and while driving when the front senger seat, the passenger must: passenger seat is occupied. • be wearing their seat belt • NOTE sit normally in the seat, in the center of the seat cushion When the ignition is switched on, the OCS • sit upright in the seat with their shoulders indicator light will illuminate for several against the backrest seconds while the system performs a self- Example of incorrect seating position - the passenger diagnostic test. The indicator light will then • have their legs comfortably extended with must not have slid forward on the seat cushion. go out or remain illuminated, depending on their feet on the floor. the classification of the passenger in the front passenger seat.

60 SAFETY

or center console, by pushing their feet is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting against the floor or by pushing against the properly in the seat. backrest. If this occurs, turn off the vehicle and ask the • The passenger must never sit on the side person to follow the above instructions for of the seat cushion, slide forward on the accurate classification. Restart the vehicle and seat cushion or fold the backrest to a lying have the person remain in this position for position. about two minutes. This will allow the system • The passenger must never wear wet or to detect that person and enable the passeng- thick clothing, e.g. ski wear or padded gar- er's frontal airbag. ments. If the OCS indicator lamp remains on even • Never place any objects between the pas- after this, the person should be advised to ride Example of incorrect seating position - the passenger senger and the seat cushion, e.g. pillows, in the rear seat. must be seated with their feet on the floor. heating blankets or ordinary blankets, seat This may indicate restrictions in the OCS clas- liners or mats. sification ability, e.g. that the person is too • Never place a radio transmitter (e.g. hunt- light to be classified as an adult. It does not ing radio or walkie-talkie) or device that is need to indicate an OCS error. being charged (e.g. cellular phone, tablet or computer) on or under the seat cushion. Classification of child Never let anyone sitting on the passenger Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations and seat use a radio transmitter or device that recommends that ALL children up to and is being charged. including 12 years of age sit in the rear seat. This is strongly recommended for children in WARNING rear-facing child seats. Failure to follow the above instructions If a child in a child restraint is placed in the could adversely affect the Occupant Classi- front passenger seat, the child restraint must Example of incorrect seating position - the passenger fication System functions and result in be installed according to the manufacturer's must not fold the backrest to a lying position. death or serious injury. instructions to help ensure accurate classifica- Remember the following when an adult sits in tion. the front passenger seat: If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the OCS indicator lamp • The passenger must never get up from the seat cushion using the armrest in the door }}

61 SAFETY

|| Remember the following if a child in a child example by altering or adapting the driver's or Related information seat sits in the front passenger seat: front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag sys- • Driver/passenger side front airbags (p. 56) tems, please contact Volvo at: • Never place any items or accessories on the passenger seat, between the child In the United States seat and the seat cushion or near to the Volvo Car USA, LLC seat cushion. Customer Care Center • Never place a radio transmitter (e.g. hunt- ing radio or walkie-talkie) or device that is 1 Volvo Drive being charged (e.g. cellular phone, tablet P.O. Box 914 or computer) on the seat cushion. Never let anyone sitting on the passenger seat Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 use a radio transmitter or device that is 1-800-458-1552 being charged. In Canada • Never place wet clothing or fluids on the passenger seat. Volvo Car Canada Ltd. • Always correctly position the child seat so Customer Care Centre that the entire lower section of the child 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 seat rests against the seat cushion. • Always place a front-facing child seat as Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 far back as possible against the seat back. 1-800-663-8255

WARNING WARNING Failure to follow the above instructions Never attempt to open, remove or repair could adversely affect the Occupant Classi- any components in the OCS system. Volvo fication System functions and result in recommends contacting an authorized death or serious injury. Volvo workshop. Incorrectly performed repairs to the OCS system could impair Modifications function and lead to serious injury. If you are considering modifying your vehicle The front passenger's seat should not be in any way to accommodate a disability, for modified in any way. This could affect the function of the OCS system.

62 SAFETY

Side airbags WARNING Inflatable curtain The side airbags, on the driver's and passen- The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), Volvo recommends contacting an author- ger sides, protect the chest and hip in a colli- ized Volvo workshop for repairs. Incorrectly helps to prevent the driver and passengers sion. performed repairs to the side airbag sys- from striking their heads on the inside of the tem could impair function and lead to seri- vehicle during a collision. ous injury.

WARNING Do not place any objects in the area between the outer edges of the seats and the door panels, as this could impair the function of the side airbags. Volvo recommends only using seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers could prevent the side airbags from functioning properly. The side airbags are located in the front seats' outer backrest frames and help protect the The inflatable curtains are installed along both driver and front seat passenger. WARNING sides of the inside of the roof and help protect The side airbag is a supplement to the seat occupants in the vehicle's outer seats. IC A collision of a sufficiently violent force will belt. Always wear your seat belt. AIRBAG is embossed on the panels. trigger the sensors and one or more side airbags will inflate. The side airbags inflate A collision of a sufficiently violent force will between the seat occupant and the door panel Related information trigger the sensors and the inflatable curtain to help cushion the initial impact of the colli- • Airbags (p. 55) will inflate. sion. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbags are normally only deployed on the side of the vehicle impacted by the collision.

}}

63 SAFETY

|| WARNING Related information Safety mode • Airbags (p. 55) Safety mode is a feature that is triggered Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop for repair. Incorrectly after a collision if there is potential damage to performed repairs to the inflatable curtain an important function in the vehicle, such as system could impair function and lead to the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety serious injury. systems, the brake system, etc. If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See Owner's manual WARNING may appear in the instrument panel along with Never hang or attach heavy objects in the the warning symbol if the panel is undamaged handle in the ceiling. The hooks are only and the vehicle's electrical system is intact. intended for lightweight garments (not for The message indicates that one or more of the hard objects such as umbrellas). vehicle's functions may be reduced. Never screw or mount anything to the vehicle's headlining, door pillars or side panels. WARNING This could impair the intended protective properties. Volvo recommends only using Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you Volvo original parts that are approved for smell fuel fumes when the message Safety placement in these areas. mode See Owner's manual is displayed in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle immediately. WARNING If objects are loaded higher than the upper If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm ble to reset the system in order to start and (4 in.) space between the objects and the move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- window. Objects placed closer to this ple, if it is blocking traffic. could impede the function of the inflatable curtain concealed inside the headlining.

WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seat belt. Always wear your seat belt.

64 SAFETY

WARNING Starting and moving the vehicle 3. Then try to start the vehicle. when it is in safety mode > The vehicle's electrical system will per- Never attempt to perform repairs or reset electrical components on your own after If safety mode has been set, it may be possi- form a system check and then attempt the vehicle has been in safety mode. This ble to reset the system in order to start and to reset to normal operating mode. could result in injury or prevent the vehicle move the vehicle a short distance, for exam- from functioning properly. Volvo recom- ple, if it is blocking traffic. CAUTION mends having the vehicle inspected and reset to normal operating status by an Starting the vehicle when it is in safety If the message Safety mode See authorized Volvo workshop after Safety mode Owner's manual is still displayed, the mode See Owner's manual has been dis- 1. Check the vehicle for damage, particularly vehicle should not be driven or towed played. for fuel leakage. Make sure you do not behind another vehicle. If the vehicle needs detect any gasoline fumes. to be moved, it must be towed on a tow WARNING truck. Even if no damage is apparent, there If the damage to the vehicle is minor and may be hidden damage that could make When the vehicle is in safety mode, it there is no fuel leakage/fumes, you may the vehicle impossible to control. should not be towed behind another vehi- attempt to start the engine. cle. It should be towed from the site on a tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo WARNING Moving the vehicle when it is in safety workshop. Never attempt to restart the vehicle if you mode smell fuel fumes when the message Safety 1. If the message Normal mode The car is mode See Owner's manual is displayed now in normal mode is displayed after Related information in the instrument panel. Leave the vehicle • Safety (p. 44) immediately. attempting to start the engine, the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present • Starting and moving the vehicle when it is position if, for example, it is blocking traf- in safety mode (p. 65) 2. Switch off the ignition. fic. • Recovery (p. 421) 2. Do not move the vehicle farther than absolutely necessary.

}}

65 SAFETY

|| WARNING Child safety ejected from the vehicle during a sudden Children should always be seated safely maneuver or impact. The same can also hap- When the vehicle is in safety mode, it when traveling in the vehicle. pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on should not be towed behind another vehi- the seat. Other occupants should also be cle. It should be towed from the site on a tow truck. Volvo recommends towing the General information properly restrained to help reduce the chance vehicle directly to an authorized Volvo Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. systems for all occupants including children. workshop. All states and provinces have legislation gov- Remember that, regardless of age and size, a erning how and where children should be car- child should always be properly restrained in a Related information ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations exist- vehicle. • Safety mode (p. 64) ing in your state or province. Recent accident • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ statistics have shown that children are safer in • LATCH attachments, which make it more con- rear seating positions than front seating posi- Recovery (p. 421) venient to install child seats. tions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child in a Some restraint systems for children are vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap a child restraint system: belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child restraint systems can help protect It should have a label certifying that it meets children in vehicles in the event of an accident applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety only if they are used properly. However, chil- Standards (FMVSS 213) - or in Canada, dren could be endangered in a crash if the CMVSS 213. child restraints are not properly secured in the Make sure the child restraint system is vehicle. Failure to follow the installation approved for the child's height, weight and instructions for your child restraint can result development - the label required by the stand- in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a ard or regulation, or instructions for infant sudden stop. restraints, typically provide this information. Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable In using any child restraint system, we urge substitute for a child restraint system. In an you to carefully look over the instructions that accident, a child held in a person's arms can are provided with the restraint. Be sure you be crushed between the vehicle's interior and understand them and can use the device prop- an unrestrained person. The child could also erly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child be injured by striking the interior, or by being restraint system can result in increased inju-

66 SAFETY ries for both the infant or child and other occu- WARNING tion of resting on our laurels. But we need pants in the vehicle. your help. Please remember to put your chil- • Do not use child safety seats or child dren in the back seat, and buckle them up. When a child has outgrown the child safety booster cushions/backrests in the front seat, you should use the rear seat with the passenger's seat. We also recommend WARNING standard seat belt fastened. The best way to that children under 140 cm (4 feet help protect the child here is to place the child 7 inches) in height who have outgrown A child restraint should never be reused if: on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly these devices sit in the rear seat with • The vehicle has been involved in a colli- located on the hips. Legislation in your state or the seat belt fastened. sion, no matter how minor province may mandate the use of a child seat • or cushion in combination with the seat belt, On hot days, the temperature in the • Its history is unknown vehicle interior can rise very quickly. depending on the child's age and/or size. • It is older than the manufacturer's expi- Exposure to these high temperatures Please check local regulations. ration date for even a short period of time can A specially designed and tested booster cush- cause heat-related injury or death. ion and backrest can be obtained from your Small children are particularly at risk. Volvo has some very specific Volvo retailer. See also the article "Integrated Never leave children unattended in a recommendations booster cushion." vehicle. • Always wear your seat belt. • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety Child seats should always be registered. device which, when used with a three- point seat belt can help reduce serious Volvo's recommendations injuries during certain types of accidents. Why does Volvo believe that no child should Volvo recommends that you do not dis- sit in the front seat of a vehicle? It's quite sim- connect the airbag system in your vehicle. ple really. A front airbag is a very powerful • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone device designed, by law, to help protect an in the vehicle be properly restrained. adult. • Volvo follows NHTSA's recommendations Because of the size of the airbag and its speed and recommends that ALL children up to of inflation, a child should never be placed in and including 12 years of age sit in the rear the front seat, even if he or she is properly bel- seat. This is strongly recommended for ted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo children in rear-facing child seats. has been an innovator in the field of safety since it was founded. And we have no inten- • Drive safely! }}

67 SAFETY

|| Related information Child restraints • Safety (p. 44) Suitable child restraints should always be • Child restraints (p. 68) used when children travel in the vehicle. • Activating and deactivating child locks Child restraint systems (p. 243)

Convertible seat

WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a Infant seat front passenger airbag - not even if the There are three main types of child restraint "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the systems: infant seats, convertible seats and rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the booster cushions. They are classified accord- airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious ing to the child's age and size. injury or death to a child seated in this The child restraint should be secured using a position. three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or top tether anchors.

68 SAFETY

WARNING When attaching the seat belt to a child • seat: When not in use, keep the child 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat restraint system secured or remove it according to the child seat manufacturer's from the passenger compartment to instructions. help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. collision. 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the • A small child's head represents a con- buckle (lock) in the usual way. siderable part of its total weight and its 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- around the child seat. mends that children up to age 4 travel, Booster cushion properly restrained, facing rearward. In A sound from the seat belt retractor will be addition, Volvo recommends that chil- audible at this time and is normal. The belt will WARNING dren should ride rearward facing, prop- now be locked in place. This function is auto- erly restrained, as long as possible. matically disabled when the seat belt is Always refer to the child restraint manufac- unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. turer's instructions for detailed information on securing the restraint. NOTE WARNING Prolonged installation and use of the child Do not use child safety seats or child restraint may damage the vehicle's interior. booster cushions/backrests in the front Volvo recommends using the kick guard passenger's seat. We also recommend that accessory to help protect the vehicle's children who have outgrown these devices interior. sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ Child restraint registration and recalls ELR) Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint To make child seat installation easier, each to be reached in a recall. To stay informed seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill ped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut. }}

69 SAFETY

|| out and return the registration card that Infant seats comes with new child restraints. Suitable child restraints should always be Child restraint recall information is readily used when children (depending on their age/ available in both the U.S. and Canada. For size) are seated in the vehicle. recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Securing an infant seat with a seat Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www- belt odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/ register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm. Route the seat belt through the infant seat. Related information • Child safety (p. 66) WARNING • Infant seats (p. 70) • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing • Convertible seats (p. 72) position only. • Booster cushions (p. 75) • The infant seat should not be positioned • Top tether anchors (p. 76) Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's behind the driver's seat unless there is seat adequate space for safe installation. • Lower child seat attachment points (p. 77) 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78) 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

70 SAFETY

WARNING NOTE A child seat should never be used in the The locking retractor will automatically front passenger seat of any vehicle with a release when the seat belt is unbuckled front passenger airbag - not even if the and allowed to retract fully. "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound injury or death to a child seated in this from the seat belt retractor's automatic position. locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be 3. locked in place. Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function.

Fasten the seat belt. Check that the infant seat is properly secured. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch 6. Press and pull the infant seat along the plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct direction of the seat belt to check that it is click is audible. properly held in place by the seat belt.

}}

71 SAFETY

• || WARNING ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78) Convertible seats Suitable child restraints should always be It should not be possible to move the child restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any used when children (depending on their age/ direction along the seat belt path. size) are seated in the vehicle. Securing a convertible seat with a seat belt

When installing infant seats in the rear seat, Volvo recommends maintaining a distance of at least 50 mm (2 inches) from the front-most part of the Do not place the convertible seat in the front pas- infant seat to the rearmost part of the seat in front. senger's seat. The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling Convertible seats can be used in either a for- the seat belt and letting it retract completely. ward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child. Related information • Child restraints (p. 68) • Convertible seats (p. 72) • Booster cushions (p. 75) • Top tether anchors (p. 76) • Lower child seat attachment points (p. 77)

72 SAFETY

WARNING • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only. Route the seat belt through the convertible seat. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not Fasten the seat belt. be positioned behind the driver's seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch WARNING unless there is adequate space for safe plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Always use a convertible seat that is suita- installation. click is audible. ble for the child's age and size. See the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt convertible seat manufacturer's recom- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat mendations. out as far as possible to activate the belt's according to the child restraint manufac- automatic locking function. turer's instructions. 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.

}}

73 SAFETY

|| NOTE WARNING Related information • Child restraints (p. 68) The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child • release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint more than 2.5 cm (1 in.) in any Infant seats (p. 70) and allowed to retract fully. direction along the seat belt path. • Booster cushions (p. 75) • Top tether anchors (p. 76) The convertible seat can be removed by 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, • Lower child seat attachment points unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A (p. 77) sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- completely. • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78) matic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place.

Ensure that the convertible seat is securely in place.

WARNING Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt. A child seat should never be used in the 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag - not even if the the seat belt path to ensure that it is held "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the securely in place by the seat belt. rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

74 SAFETY

Booster cushions 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Related information Suitable child restraints should always be plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct • Child restraints (p. 68) used when children (depending on their age/ click is audible. • Convertible seats (p. 72) size) are seated in the vehicle. • Infant seats (p. 70) Securing a booster cushion • Top tether anchors (p. 76) • Lower child seat attachment points (p. 77) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

Positioning the seat belt. 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and Position the child correctly on the booster cushion. fits snugly around the child. Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats. WARNING • 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat The hip section of the three-point seat of the vehicle. belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. 2. With the child properly seated on the • The shoulder section of the three-point booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or seat belt should be positioned across around the cushion according to the man- the chest and shoulder. ufacturer's instructions. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

75 SAFETY

Top tether anchors 3. Attach the strap for the lower tether WARNING Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint anchors in the lower ISOFIX/LATCH • Always refer to the recommendations top tether anchorages for all three seating attachment points. If the child restraint is made by the child restraint manufac- positions in the rear seat. They are located on not equipped with straps for the lower turer. the rear side of the backrests. tether anchors, or if the child restraint is used on the center seating position, follow • Volvo recommends that the top tether Child restraint anchorages the instructions for attaching a child anchors be used when installing a for- restraint using the automatic locking seat ward-facing child restraint. belt. • Never route a top tether strap over the 4. Firmly tension all straps. top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's restraint. instructions for information on securing the child seat. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads NOTE imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are If the vehicle is equipped with a parcel they to be used for adult seat belts or shelf, this must be removed before a child harnesses. The anchorages are not able seat can be attached in the tether anchors. to withstand excessive forces on them Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of the rear seat backrests. There is no symbol for the in the event of collision if full harness center anchor position. seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a belt Securing a child seat anchored in a child restraint anchorage 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. runs a great risk of suffering severe 2. Route the top tether strap under the head injuries should a collision occur. restraint and attach it to the anchor. • Do not install rear speakers that require the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap.

76 SAFETY

Related information Lower child seat attachment points Related information • Child restraints (p. 68) The rear seats are equipped with lower child • Child restraints (p. 68) • Lower child seat attachment points seat attachment points. • Top tether anchors (p. 76) The lower child seat attachment points are (p. 77) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78) intended for use with certain rear-facing child • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78) restraints. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when attaching a child seat to the lower child seat attachment points. Location of child seat attachment points

Location of child seat attachment points in the rear seat. The child seat attachment points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat floor rails.

77 SAFETY

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped the seat cushion and locate the anchors child seats are located in the rear, outboard by feel. seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child LATCH lower anchors. seat anchors 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to LATCH lower anchors FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. WARNING • Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustra- NOTE tion). If the attachment is not correctly Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors • The rear center seat is not equipped fastened, the child restraint may not be Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the with ISOFIX/LATCH lower tether properly secured in the event of a colli- ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To anchors. If a child restraint is used in sion. access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion this seat, attach the restraint's upper • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow anchor strap (if equipped with these) restraint anchors are only intended for your child seat manufacturer's installation to the top tether anchor point for this use with child seats positioned in the instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH strap and secure the child restraint outboard seating positions. These lower anchors and top tethers whenever pos- with the vehicle's center seat belt. anchors are not certified for use with sible. • Always follow your child seat manufac- any child restraint that is positioned in To access the anchors turer's installation instructions, and use the center seating position. When 1. Put the child restraint in position. both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors securing a child restraint in the center and top tethers whenever possible. seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt.

78 SAFETY

Related information • Child restraints (p. 68) • Top tether anchors (p. 76) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 78)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Displays and controls by the driver Left-side steering wheel keypad Center and tunnel console in a left-hand drive vehicle Display lighting, unlocking/locking*/clos- The overviews show the location of the vehi- ing* the trunk lid/tailgate cle's displays and controls. Ceiling console Steering wheel and dashboard

Center display

Start button

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, Front reading lights and courtesy lighting media, drive mode button* Parking lights, daytime running lights, low beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog Panoramic roof* Electrical outlet, USB port, wireless phone * lights/cornering illumination*, rear fog charger light, trip computer reset Ceiling console display ON CALL button Gear selector Steering wheel paddles* for manual shift- ® HomeLink * Parking brake ing of automatic transmission Instrument panel Auto-hold brakes

Wipers and washers, rain sensor*

Right-side steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

Horn

82 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Driver's door

Memory for power front seat*, door mirror settings Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child locks* Hood open

Controls for front seat

Related information • Manual front seats (p. 178) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187) • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Center display overview (p. 106) • Transmission (p. 383)

* Option/accessory. 83 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel • Open one of the doors. The instrument panel displays information related to the vehicle and driving. WARNING The instrument panel contains gauges, indica- If the instrument panel turns off, does not tors and monitoring and warning symbols. activate when the ignition is switched on, What is shown in the instrument panel varies or part/all of the panel cannot be read, do depending on the equipment, settings and not drive the vehicle. Consult a workshop functions currently active. immediately. Volvo recommends an authorized Volvo workshop. The instrument panel is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition mode 0. The WARNING panel will power down after a short period of time if it is not used. To reactivate it, do one of If the instrument panel is not functioning the following: properly, information about brakes, airbags The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- or other safety-related systems may not be ing to vehicle model. • Depress the brake pedal. displayed. The driver will then not be able • Activate ignition mode I. to check the status of the vehicle systems or receive relevant warnings and information.

Location in the instrument panel: Left side In the center Right side

Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Trip odometer Ambient temperature sensor Gear indicator

OdometerB Clock Drive Mode Cruise control/speed limiter information Message (also graphics in some cases) Fuel gauge Road sign information* Door and seat belt status Start/Stop function status – Media player Distance to empty tank

84 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Left side In the center Right side – Navigation system map* Current fuel consumption – Phone App menu (activated using steering wheel keypad) – Voice Control –

– CompassA –

A Depends on selected drive mode. B Total distance.

Dynamic symbol • Messages in the instrument panel Dynamic symbol in basic (p. 102) mode. • Handling the App menu in the instrument panel (p. 101) • Drive modes* (p. 389)

In the center of the instrument panel is a dynamic symbol that changes appearance according to the type of message displayed. The severity of the control or warning symbol is indicated by a red or amber-colored marking Example with indicator symbol. around the symbol. An animation may be used to change the symbol into a graphic image to depict the location of a problem or to clarify information. Related information • Instrument panel settings (p. 86) • Indicator and warning symbols (p. 92) • Trip computer (p. 87)

* Option/accessory. 85 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Instrument panel settings Settings via center display 2. Tap System System Languages and Display settings for the instrument panel can Selecting type of information Units System Language to select lan- be set in the instrument panel's App menu 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top guage. and in the center display's Settings menu. view. > A change made here will affect the language in all displays. Settings via instrument panel's app 2. Tap My Car Displays Driver Display menu Information. The settings are personal and saved automatically in the active driver profile. 3. Select a background: • Related information Show no information in the • background Instrument panel (p. 84) • • Show information for current Handling the App menu in the instrument playing media panel (p. 101) • • Show navigation even if no route is Changing settings in the center display's Top view (p. 128) set Select theme 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. 2. Tap My Car Displays Display Themes The app menu will open and can be controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad. 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the instrument panel: The app menu can be used to set what information will be displayed in the instrument • Glass panel • Minimalistic • trip computer • Performance • media player • Chrome Rings • phone Select language • navigation system*. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view.

86 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Fuel gauge Trip computer Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be The fuel gauge in the instrument panel shows The vehicle's trip computer registers data changed via system settings in the center dis- the fuel level in the tank. while driving such as mileage, fuel consump- play. tion and average speed. Trip odometer To help promote fuel-efficient driving, data is There are two trip odometers: TM and TA. recorded on both current and average fuel consumption. Data from the trip computer can TM can be reset manually and TA is reset be displayed in the instrument panel. automatically if the vehicle is not used for four hours. During a drive, the trip odometer registers data on: • Mileage • Driving time • Average speed The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. • Average fuel consumption The readings since the trip odometer's last The beige area in the fuel gauge indicates the reset are displayed. amount of fuel left in the tank. When the fuel level is low, the fuel pump sym- Odometer Example of trip computer information in the instru- bol will illuminate with an amber-colored light. The odometer records the vehicle's total mile- ment panel. The illustration is generic - details may age. This reading cannot be reset. The trip computer also indicates the approxi- vary according to vehicle model. mate distance that can be driven on the fuel The trip computer includes the following Current fuel consumption remaining in the tank. gauges: This gauge shows the vehicle's fuel consump- Related information • Trip odometer tion at that moment. The reading is updated • Instrument panel (p. 84) about once a second. • Odometer • Refueling (p. 405) • Current fuel consumption Distance to empty tank • Fuel tank volume (p. 619) The trip computer calculates the dis- • Distance to empty tank tance that can be driven on the fuel • Tourist - alternative speedometer remaining in the tank. }}

87 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| This calculation is based on average fuel con- • Displaying trip statistics in the center dis- Displaying trip data in the sumption during the last 30 km (20 miles) play (p. 90) instrument panel and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. • Instrument panel (p. 84) Data recorded and calculated by the trip When the gauge displays "----", there is not • Changing system units of measurement computer can be displayed on the instrument enough fuel remaining to calculate the remain- (p. 128) panel. ing mileage. Refuel as soon as possible. This data is stored in a trip computer app. You can choose which information the instrument NOTE panel will display in the app menu. The information will change based on your driving style.

An economical driving style will generally increase how far you can drive on a certain amount of fuel. Tourist - alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are shown in a different measurement unit than the one shown in the vehicle's 1 gauges. Open and navigate in the app menu using the right- hand steering wheel keypad. When used, the digital speed is displayed in App menu the opposite unit to that shown in the analog speedometer. If mph is used in the analog Left/right speedometer, the equivalent speed in km/h will be shown in the digital speedometer. Up/down Related information Confirm • Displaying trip data in the instrument panel (p. 88) • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 89)

88 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

1. Open the app menu in the instrument 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to Resetting the trip odometer panel by pressing (1). choose which information to show in the Resetting the trip odometer using the left- instrument panel: (The App menu cannot be opened while side steering wheel lever. there is an unacknowledged message in • Odometer the instrument panel. The message must • Distance to empty tank be acknowledged by pressing the O but- • ton (4) before the App menu can be Tourist (alternative speedometer) opened). • Mileage for trip odometer TM, TA or no display of mileage 2. Navigate to the trip computer app by moving left or right using (2). • Current fuel consumption, average fuel consumption for TM or TA, or no dis- > The top four menu rows show meas- play of fuel consumption ured values for trip odometer TM. The next four menu rows show measured Select or clear a selection using the O but- values for trip odometer TA. Scroll up or ton (4). The change will apply immedi- down in the list using (3). ately. – Reset all information in trip odometer TM Related information (i.e. mileage, average fuel consumption, • Trip computer (p. 87) average speed and driving time) by press- • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 89) ing and holding the RESET button on the left-hand steering wheel lever. Pressing the RESET button only resets the distance driven. The TA trip odometer can not be manually reset. It resets automatically if the vehicle is not used for four hours or more. Related information • Trip computer (p. 87)

1 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

89 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Displaying trip statistics in the Trip statistics settings center display Trip statistics settings can be reset or Trip computer statistics can be displayed adjusted. graphically in the center display, providing an 1. Open the Driver performance app in the overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient App view to display trip statistics. driving. Open the Driver performance app in the App view to display trip statistics. Each bar in the graph represents a driving distance of 1 kilometers, 10 kilometers or Trip computer statistics2. 2. Tap Preferences to 100 kilometers (or miles). The bars are added from the right as you drive. The bar at the far Related information • change the graph scale. Select 1, 10 or right shows the data for the current trip. • Trip statistics settings (p. 90) 100 km/miles for the bar. Average fuel consumption and total driving • Trip computer (p. 87) • reset data after each trip. Performed time are calculated from the most recent reset when the vehicle remains stationary for of the trip statistics. more than 4 hours. • reset data for current trip. Trip statistics, calculated average consumption, and total driving time are always reset simultaneously. Unit standards for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the center display.

2 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

90 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Related information Date and time time zone will then be automatically set to the • Displaying trip statistics in the center dis- The clock is displayed in both the instrument vehicle's location. In some navigation systems, play (p. 90) panel and the center display. the current location must also be set to deter- • Trip computer (p. 87) mine the correct time zone. If Auto Time is Location of clock not selected, the time and date can be • Resetting the trip odometer (p. 89) adjusted using the up and down arrows on the touchscreen. Daylight savings time In some countries, the Auto Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected to automatically change to daylight savings time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected manually. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Changing settings in the center display's Certain messages and other information may Top view (p. 128) obscure the clock in the instrument panel. In the center display, the clock is located on the upper right-hand side in the status bar. Settings for date and time – Select Settings System Date and Time in the center display's Top view to change settings for time and date format. Adjust the date and time by tapping the up or down arrows on the touchscreen. Automatic time for vehicles with GPS When the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time is also available. The

91 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Ambient temperature sensor Related information Indicator and warning symbols The ambient temperature is shown in the • Instrument panel (p. 84) Indicator and warning symbols alert the instrument panel. • Changing system units of measurement driver that a function is active, that a symbol The sensor detects the temperature outside (p. 128) is working, or that an error or serious fault the vehicle. has occurred. Red symbols WARNING The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate that a fault has been detected that could affect safety or driveability. An explana- tory message will be simultaneously displayed in the instrument panel. The warning symbol may also illuminate in combination with If the vehicle has been stationary, the sensor other symbols. reading may be higher than the actual tem- Seat belt reminder perature. Lights up or flashes when a When the ambient temperature is someone in the vehicle has not between –5 °C and +2 °C (23 F ° fastened their seat belt. and 36 °F), a snowflake symbol will illuminate to alert the driver of the risk of slippery conditions. Change the measurement standard for the temperature sensor etc. via system settings in the center display's Top view.

92 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Airbags Fault in electrical system Collision risk A fault has been detected in one A fault has occurred in the elec- City Safety warns the driver if of the vehicle's safety systems. trical system. there is a risk of a collision with another vehicle, pedestrian, Read the message in the instru- Read the message in the instru- cyclist or large animal. ment panel and contact a work- ment panel and contact a workshop. Volvo recommends con- shop. Volvo recommends con- Low oil pressure tacting an authorized Volvo tacting an authorized Volvo workshop. workshop. The engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immedi- Fault in brake system High engine temperature ately and check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. A fault has occurred in the brake The engine's temperature is too system. high. Read the message in the If this symbol lights up and the instrument panel. oil level is normal, read the mes- A Read the message in the instru- sage in the instrument panel and ment panel and contact a work- contact a workshop. Volvo rec- shop. Volvo recommends con- ommends contacting an author- tacting an authorized Volvo ized Volvo workshop. workshop. B A Canadian models. B US models. Parking brake Steady glow: the parking brake is activated. A Flashing: a fault has occurred in the parking brake. Read the message in the instrument panel.

}}

93 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Amber symbols Emission control system Stability system Information Fault in emission control system. Steady glow: a fault has occurred A problem has occurred in one of Have the vehicle checked by a in the system. workshop. Volvo recommends the vehicle's systems. Read the Flashing: the system is working. message in the instrument panel. contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. Stability system, Sport mode The information symbol may also illuminate in combination with Rear fog light Sport mode is activated. other symbols. Rear fog light on. Fault in brake system Blue symbols A fault has occurred in the brake Tire pressure system Active high beam system. Read the message in the Tire pressure low. Active high beam is activated A instrument panel. If there is a fault in the tire pres- and on. sure system, the symbol will first High beams flash for approximately 1 minute and then glow steadily. This may High beams on. occur if the system cannot detect B or alert the driver of low tire pressure as intended. Green symbols Fault in ABS system Auto-hold brake The system is not functioning Fault in headlight system The function is activated and the properly. The vehicle's regular A fault has occurred in the head- brakes or the parking brake are brakes will still work, but without light system. Read the message A being used. the ABS function. in the instrument panel. A Lane Keeping Aid Front fog light Lane Keeping Aid is alerting/ Front fog light on. intervening. B

94 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Parking lights Lane Keeping Aid Instrument panel licenses A license is an agreement on the right to con- Parking lights on. White symbol: Lane Keeping Aid duct a certain activity or the right to use is on and lane marker lines are someone else's right according to terms and detected. Left/right turn signals conditions specified in the agreement. The Gray symbol: Lane Keeping Aid following text is Volvo's agreement with the Turn signal in use. is on but no lane marker lines are manufacturer or developer. detected. Freetype Project License Rain sensor 3rd Party Software Disclaimers and License The rain sensor is activated. Agreements Confidential ID 06-00004-004 39 / 75 Revision 06.00A, 2015-06-09 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 White/gray symbols Related information by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Active high beam • Instrument panel (p. 84) Lemberg. Active high beam is activated but not on. Preconditioning Engine and passenger compartment heater/air conditioning is preconditioning the vehicle.

}}

95 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Introduction to use in compliance with this license. We 1. No Warranty – THE FREETYPE PROJECT The FreeType Project is distributed in several thus encourage you to use the following text: IS PROVIDED ÀS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR archive packages; some of them may contain, "Portions of this software are copyright © IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED in addition to the FreeType font engine, 2013 The FreeType Project TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY various tools and contributions which rely on, (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved." or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR applies to all files found in such packages, and Legal Terms PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE which do not fall under their own explicit 0. Definitions – Throughout this license, the AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE license. The license affects thus the FreeType terms `package', `FreeType Project', and LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY font engine, the test programs, documentation `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF and makefiles, at the very least. This license originally distributed by the authors (David THE FREETYPE PROJECT. ' was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as 2. Redistribution – This license grants a (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and encourage inclusion and use of free software alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where irrevocable right and license to use, execute, in commercial and freeware products alike. As perform, compile, display, copy, create a consequence, its main points are that: o We ùsing' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it derivative works of, distribute and sublicense don't promise that this software works. the FreeType Project (in both source and However, we will be interested in any kind of to form a `program' or èxecutable'. This program is referred to as à program using the object code forms) and derivative works bug reports. (às is' distribution) o You can use thereof for any purpose; and to authorize this software for whatever you want, in parts FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType others to exercise some or all of the rights or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty- granted herein, subject to the following free' usage) o You may not pretend that you Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the conditions: o Redistribution of source code wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') of it, in a program, you must acknowledge file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes somewhere in your documentation that you to the original files must be clearly indicated in have used the FreeType code. (`credits') We unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us accompanying documentation. The copyright specifically permit and encourage the notices of the unaltered, original files must be inclusion of this software, with or without to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, preserved in all copies of source files. o modifications, in commercial products. We Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. disclaimer that states that the software is Project and assume no liability related to The based in part of the work of the FreeType FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked Team, in the distribution documentation. We us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer

96 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL also encourage you to put an URL to the are looking for support, start in this list if you documentation for any purpose, provided that FreeType web page in your documentation, haven't found anything to help you in the the above copyright notice and the following though this isn't mandatory. These conditions documentation. o freetype- two paragraphs appear in all copies of this apply to any software derived from or based [email protected]. Discusses bugs, as well software. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE on the FreeType Project, not just the as engine internals, design issues, specific COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY unmodified files. If you use our work, you must licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, acknowledge us. However, no fee need be found at http://www.freetype.org INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL paid to us. HarfBuzz / UCDN License DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS 3. Advertising – Neither the FreeType authors • Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc. DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE and contributors nor you shall use the name of © • Copyright 2012 Mozilla Foundation COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED the other for commercial, advertising, or • Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. promotional purposes without specific prior THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY written permission. We suggest, but do not • Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, require, that you use one or more of the Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE following phrases to refer to this software in • © Copyright 2009 Keith Stribley IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF your documentation or advertising materials: • Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', International PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" As you have not signed this license, you are • Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS not required to accept it. However, as the • © Copyright 2006 Behdad Esfahbod NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only • Copyright © 2005 David Turner MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, this license, or another one contracted with ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS. the authors, grants you the right to use, • Copyright © distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Inc. Project, you indicate that you understand and • Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and accept all the terms of this license. Werner Lemberg 4. Contacts – There are two mailing lists For full copyright notices consult the individual related to FreeType: o [email protected]. files in the package. Permission is hereby Discusses general use and applications of granted, without written agreement and FreeType, as well as future and wanted without license or royalty fees, to use, copy, additions to the library and distribution. If you modify, and distribute this software and its }}

97 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Libunibreak License documentation would be appreciated but SOFTWARE. COPYRIGHT AND This library is released under an open-source is not required. PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright © licence, the zlib/libpng licence. Please check 2. Altered source versions must be plainly 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. the file LICENCE for details. Apart from using marked as such, and must not be Distributed under the Terms of Use in http:// the algorithm, part of the code is derived from misrepresented as being the original www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission the data provided under http:// software. is hereby granted, free of charge, to any www.unicode.org/Public. And the Unicode person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data 3. This notice may not be removed or altered Terms of Use may apply: URL:http:// files and any associated documentation (the from any source distribution. www.unicode.org/copyright.html "Data Files") or Unicode software and any Unicode Inc. License Agreement associated documentation (the "Software") to LICENSE: EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE, INC. LICENSE deal in the Data Files or Software without • Copyright (C) 2008-2012 Wu Yongwei AGREEMENT - DATA FILES AND restriction, including without limitation the SOFTWARE Unicode Data Files include all rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, • Copyright (C) 2012 Tom Hacohen www.unicode.org/Public/, http:// or Software, and to permit persons to whom www.unicode.org/reports/, and http:// the Data Files or Software are furnished to do This software is provided 'as-is', without any www.unicode.org/cldr/data/ . Unicode so, provided that (a) the above copyright express or implied warranty. In no event will Software includes any source code published notice(s) and this permission notice appear the author be held liable for any damages in the Unicode Standard or under the with all copies of the Data Files or Software, arising from the use of this software. directories http://www.unicode.org/Public/, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this Permission is granted to anyone to use this http://www.unicode.org/reports/, and http:// permission notice appear in associated software for any purpose, including www.unicode.org/cldr/data/. NOTICE TO documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in commercial applications, and to alter it and USER: Carefully read the following legal each modified Data File or in the Software as redistribute it freely, subject to the following agreement. BY DOWNLOADING, well as in the documentation associated with restrictions: INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE the Data File(s) or Software that the data or 1. The origin of this software must not be USING UNICODE INC.'S DATA FILES ("DATA software has been modified. THE DATA FILES misrepresented; you must not claim that FILES"), AND/OR SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", you wrote the original software. If you use ("SOFTWARE"), YOU UNEQUIVOCALLY WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, this software in a product, an ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT acknowledgement in the product ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY, PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE DATA FILES OR NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY

98 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE you wrote the original software. If you use • Copyright (C) 2002, Lev Povalahev COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS this software in a product, an All rights reserved. INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR acknowledgment in the product ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR documentation would be appreciated but Redistribution and use in source and binary CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY is not required. forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING 2. Altered source versions must be plainly conditions are met: Redistributions of source FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, marked as such, and must not be code must retain the above copyright notice, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, misrepresented as being the original this list of conditions and the following NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS software. ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR 3. This notice may not be removed or altered must reproduce the above copyright notice, PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR from any source distribution. this list of conditions and the following SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler [email protected] disclaimer in the documentation and/or other notice, the name of a copyright holder shall [email protected] If you use the zlib materials provided with the distribution. * The not be used in advertising or otherwise to library in a product, we would appreciate *not* name of the author may be used to endorse or promote the sale, use or other dealings in receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The promote products derived from this software these Data Files or Software without prior sources are provided for free but without without specific prior written permission. THIS written authorization of the copyright holder. warranty of any kind. The library has been SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND ZLIB Data Compression Library License entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code. If CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY Agreement you redistribute modified sources, we would EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark appreciate that you include in the file INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without ChangeLog history information documenting IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF any express or implied warranty. In no event your changes. Please read the FAQ for more MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A will the authors be held liable for any damages information on the distribution of modified PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. arising from the use of this software. source versions. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT Permission is granted to anyone to use this OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE GLEW License (Modified BSD License) software for any purpose, including FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library commercial applications, and to alter it and SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR redistribute it freely, subject to the following • Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, restrictions: BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF 1. The origin of this software must not be • Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Marcelo E. SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS misrepresented; you must not claim that Magallon OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS }}

99 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND App menu in instrument panel App Functions ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER The App menu in the instrument panel pro- IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT vides quick access to commonly used func- Trip com- Select a trip odometer, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR tions for certain apps. puter change instrument panel dis- OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT play settings, etc. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF Media Select active source for ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH player media player. DAMAGE. Phone Call a contact from the call Related information list. • Instrument panel (p. 84) Navigation Guide to destination, etc.

Related information • Instrument panel (p. 84) • Center display overview (p. 106) The illustration is generic. • Handling the App menu in the instrument The App menu in the instrument panel can be panel (p. 101) used instead of the center display and is then controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel. App menu functions Different apps provide access to different types of functions. The following apps and their functions can be controlled from the App menu:

100 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling the App menu in the Opening and closing the app menu The next time the App menu is opened, the instrument panel – Tap open/close (1). functions for the most recently selected app The App menu in the instrument panel is con- > The App men opens/closes. will be displayed automatically. trolled using the right-side steering wheel Related information keypad. NOTE • App menu in instrument panel (p. 100) The App menu cannot be opened while • Messages in the instrument panel there is an unacknowledged message in (p. 102) the instrument panel. The message must be acknowledged before the App menu can be opened.

The App menu turns off automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain selections are made. Navigating and making selections in App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad. The the App menu illustration is generic. 1. Navigate between apps by tapping left or Open/close right (2). Left/right > Functions for the previous/next app will be shown in the App menu. Up/down 2. Scroll through the functions for the Confirm selected app using the up or down arrows (3). 3. Confirm or make a selection for the function by pressing confirm (4). > The function will be activated and, for some selections, the App menu will then close.

101 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Messages in the instrument panel Service messages The instrument panel shows messages in The following table lists a selection of impor- certain circumstances to inform or assist the tant service messages and what they mean. driver. Message Meaning

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - contact a workshopB. Turn off Stop and switch off the engineA engine. Serious risk of Example of message in the instrument panel. The illustration is generic - details may vary according to damage - contact a vehicle model. workshopB. High-priority messages for the driver are dis- Service urgent Contact a workshopB to Example of message in an 8-inch instrument panel. played in the instrument panel. Drive to work- have the vehicle inspec- The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- The messages may appear in different parts of shopA ted immediately. ing to vehicle model. the instrument panel depending on what other Service Contact a workshopB to information is currently being displayed. The requiredA have the vehicle inspec- message will disappear from the instrument ted as soon as possible. panel after a short period of time or after it has been acknowledged or any required action has Regular main- Time for service - contact been taken. Messages that need to be saved tenance a workshopB. Shown are stored in the Car Status app, which can Book time for before the next service be opened from the App view in the center date. display. maintenance The message may be shown along with Regular main- Time for service - contact graphics, symbols or buttons to e.g. acknowl- tenance a workshopB. Shown on edge the message or accept a request. Time for main- the next service date. tenance

102 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Message Meaning Handling messages in the instrument panel Regular main- Time for service - contact Messages in the instrument panel are con- B tenance a workshop . Shown trolled using the right-side steering wheel Maintenance when the date for service keypad. overdue has passed. Temporarily A function has been tem- offA porarily deactivated and will be reactivated automatically while driving or after the engine is restarted. Examples of messages in the instrument panel4 and the right-side steering wheel keypad. The illustration A Part of message, shown along with information on the loca- is generic - details may vary according to vehicle tion of the problem. B An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. model. Left/right Related information • Handling messages in the instrument Examples of messages in the instrument panel3 and Confirm panel (p. 103) the right-side steering wheel keypad. • Some messages in the instrument panel con- Handling messages saved from the instru- tain one or more buttons for e.g. confirming ment panel (p. 104) the message or accepting a request. • Messages in the center display (p. 136)

3 With 8" instrument panel. 4 With 12" instrument panel. }}

103 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Handling new messages Handling messages saved from the Reading saved messages For messages with buttons: instrument panel To read a saved message immediately: 1. Navigate between the buttons by tapping Messages saved from the instrument panel – Tap the button to the right of the message left or right (1). and center displays are handled in the center Vehicle message stored in Car Status display. 2. Confirm your selection by pressing con- app in the center display. firm (2). > The saved message will be displayed in > The message will disappear from the the Car Status app. instrument panel. To read saved messages at a later time: For messages without buttons: 1. Open the Car Status app from App view – Close the message by pressing confirm in the center display. (2) or let the message automatically time- > The app will open in the bottom tile of out after a short period. Home view. > The message will disappear from the 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. instrument panel. > A list of saved messages will be dis- Messages that need to be saved are stored in played. the Car Status app, which can be opened Saved messages can be viewed in the Car Status 3. Tap a message to expand/minimize it. from the App view in the center display. The app. > More information about the message message Vehicle message stored in Car The messages displayed in will appear in the list and the image to Status app will simultaneously appear in the the instrument panel that the left of the app will display informa- center display. need to be saved are stored tion about the message in graphic form. Related information in the Car Status app in the center display. The message • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102) Vehicle message stored in • Handling messages saved from the instru- Car Status app will simulta- ment panel (p. 104) neously appear in the center display. • Messages in the center display (p. 136)

104 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling saved messages Related information In expanded form, some messages have two • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102) buttons available for booking service or read- • Handling messages in the instrument ing the Owner's Manual. panel (p. 103) Booking service for saved messages: • Messages in the center display (p. 136) – With the message in expanded form, tap Request appoint./Call to make Appointment5 for assistance booking service. > With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab will open in the app and create a request for a service/repair appointment. With Call to make Appointment: The phone app will open and call a service center to make an appointment for service or repairs. Reading the Owner's Manual for saved messages: – With the message in expanded form, tap Owner's manual to read relevant information about the message in the Owner's Manual. > The Owner's Manual will open in the center display and provide information related to the message. Saved messages in the app are automatically deleted each time the engine is started.

5 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.

105 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Center display overview display and its possibilities are presented Many of the vehicle's functions can be con- below. trolled from the center display. The center

Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access Function or App view6.

106 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Function view ‒ vehicle functions that can Media ‒ most recently used media-related • Symbols in the center display status bar be activated or deactivated with one tap. apps. Tap the tile to expand it. (p. 120) Certain functions, called "trigger func- Phone ‒ used to access phone-related • Changing settings in the center display's tions", open windows with settings functions. Tap the tile to expand it. Top view (p. 128) options. One example is the Camera. Fourth tile ‒ most recently used apps or • Opening contextual setting in the center Home view ‒ the initial view displayed vehicle functions not associated with the display (p. 129) when the screen is turned on. other tiles. Tap the tile to expand it. • Owner's Manual in the center display App view ‒ shows downloaded apps Climate row - information and direct inter- (p. 17) (third-party apps) as well as apps for inte- action to set temperature and seat heating • Media player (p. 449) grated functions, such as FM radio. Tap for example*. Tap the symbol in the center • Phone (p. 465) an app icon to open that app. of the climate bar to open Climate view Status bar ‒ current vehicle activities are and additional setting options. • Climate system controls (p. 201) shown at the top of the screen. Network • Turning off and adjusting the volume of and connection information is shown to NOTE the center display system sounds (p. 127) the left of the status bar. Media-related The climate system can be used to cool • Changing the appearance of the center information, the clock and information down the media system in the center dis- display (p. 127) about background activities are shown to play if needed. In these cases, the message the right. • Changing system language (p. 128) Climate system Cooling the • Top view ‒ pull the tab down to open Top infotainment system will be shown in the Changing system units of measurement view. From here, you can access Settings, instrument panel. (p. 128) Owner's manual, Profile and messages • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) stored in the vehicle. In certain cases, con- Related information • Messages in the center display (p. 136) textual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings) • and the contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. Handling the center display (p. 108) Navigation Manual) can also be accessed • Navigating in the center display's views in Top view. (p. 111) Navigation ‒ takes you to map navigation • Function view in the center display with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap the tile (p. 118) to expand it. • Apps (p. 429)

6 In right-hand drive vehicles, these views are mirror images of the ones shown here.

* Option/accessory. 107 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling the center display tapping. It is possible to e.g. move between CAUTION Many of the vehicle's functions and features different views, mark objects and scroll in a Do not use sharp objects on the screen as can be controlled and adjusted from the cen- list by touching the screen in various ways. this could cause scratches. ter display. The center display is a An infrared light curtain just above the surface touchscreen that reacts to taps and other of the screen enables the screen to detect gestures. when a finger is directly in front of the screen. The following table presents the various pro- This technology makes it possible to use the Using the center display's cedures for using the screen: screen even while wearing gloves. touchscreen The screen reacts differently depending on Two people can interact with the screen at the whether it is touched by dragging, swiping or same time, e.g. to adjust climate system settings for both the driver and passenger sides.

Procedure Gesture Result Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Double-tap. Zooms in on a digital object, such as a map. Press and hold. Grabs hold of an object so it can be moved. Can be used to move apps or points on a map. Press and hold your finger on the screen and drag the object to the desired position.

Tap once with two Zooms out from a digital object, such as a map. fingers.

108 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Procedure Gesture Result Drag Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or points on a map. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen.

Swipe Moves between screen views or scrolls in a list, text or a view. Drag horizontally or vertically over the screen. Note that touching the upper part of the screen could cause Top view to open.

Stretch Zooms in.

Pinch Zooms out.

}}

109 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Returning to Home view from another • drag the control to the desired tempera- view ture, 1. Briefly press the home button below the • tap + or − to raise or lower the tempera- center display. ture by degrees, or > The most recent Home view mode will • tap the desired temperature on the con- be displayed. trol. 2. Press briefly again. Related information > All of the Home view's tiles will return • Activating and deactivating the center dis- to standard mode. play (p. 111) • Moving apps and buttons in the center NOTE display (p. 120) The scroll indicator will be shown in the center dis- In Home view's standard mode – short play when it is possible to scroll in the view. • Using the center display keyboard press on the Home button. An animation (p. 122) describing access to the various views is Using the center display controls shown on the screen.

Scrolling in lists, articles or views A scroll indicator is displayed on the screen when it is possible to scroll up or down in the view. Swipe down/up anywhere in the view.

Temperature control. Digital controls are available for many of the vehicle's functions. For example, to set the temperature:

110 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the 1. Press and hold the button beneath the Navigating in the center display's center display screen. views The center display can be temporarily > The screen will go dark (the climate bar There are five different basic views in the cen- switched off and reactivated using the home will remain visible). All functions con- ter display: Home view, Top view, Climate button under the screen. nected to the screen continue to oper- view, App view and Function view. The ate. screen is automatically activated when the 2. To reactivate the screen, briefly press the driver's door is opened. Home button. Home view > The view that was displayed before the Home view is the view displayed when the screen was turned off will be displayed screen is activated. It consists of four tiles: again. Navigation, Media, Phone and a fourth tile. An app or vehicle function selected from the NOTE App or Function views will start in the respec- The screen cannot be turned off when a tive tile in Home view. FM radio, for example, prompt to perform an action is being dis- will start in the Media tile. played on the screen. The extra tile displays the most recently used Center display's home button. app or vehicle function that is not related to When the home button is used, the screen will NOTE the other three tiles. go dark and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate bar will remain visible. The center display is turned off automati- The tiles display brief information about the All functions connected to the screen continue cally when the engine is off and the driver's respective apps. to operate, such as climate, audio, guiding* door is opened. and apps. The center display screen can be NOTE cleaned when the display is dimmed. The dim- Related information When the vehicle is started, information on ming function can also be used to darken the • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) the current status of apps will be displayed screen so it is not a distraction while driving. • Changing the appearance of the center in the respective tile in Home view. display (p. 127) • Center display overview (p. 106)

}}

* Option/accessory. 111 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| NOTE Top view the digital Owner's Manual related to the content shown on the screen, directly in In Home view's standard mode – short Top view. press on the Home button. An animation describing access to the various views is To exit Top view, tap the screen outside Top shown on the screen. view, press the Home button or tap the screen at the bottom of Top view and swipe upward. The views behind will become visible again NOTE and can be used. When the vehicle is moving: NOTE • Certain functions (e.g. using the center display's keyboard) may be deacti- The top view is not available at start-up/ vated. shutdown or when a message is being • Certain texts (e.g. those generated by Top view when expanded. shown on the screen. Similarly, it is not apps) will be shortened to three rows. There is a tab in the center of the status bar at available when the climate view is shown. Tap the Read out button to have the the top of the screen. Open Top view by tap- entire message read aloud. ping the tab or by dragging/swiping from the Climate view • Text messages will be shortened to top of the screen downward. The climate bar is always visible at the bottom one row. Tap the Read out button to Top view always provides access to: of the screen. The most common climate set- have the entire message read aloud. tings can be made directly there, such as set- • Settings ting temperature and seat heating*. • Owner's manual Status bar Tap the symbol in the center of the Current vehicle activities are shown at the top • Profile climate bar to open Climate view of the screen in the status bar. Network and • The vehicle's stored messages. and access additional climate system settings. connection information is shown to the left of In certain cases, Top view provides access to: the status bar. Media-related information, the • Tap the symbol to close Climate clock and information about background activ- Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation view and return to a previous view. ities are shown to the right. Settings). Change settings directly in Top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is being used. • Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Access articles in

112 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

App view Tap an app to open it. It will then be opened in Function view its associated tile, e.g. Media. Depending on the number of apps, it is possible to scroll down in App view. This is done by sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards. To return to Home view, swipe the screen from left to right7 or press the Home button.

App view showing the vehicle's apps. Function view with buttons for various vehicle functions. Swipe the screen from right to left7 to access the App view from the Home view. This view Swipe the screen from left to right7 to access displays downloaded apps (third-party apps) Function view from Home view. From Func- as well as apps for integrated functions, such tion view, you can activate or deactivate vari- as FM radio. Brief information will be dis- ous vehicle functions such as BLIS*, Lane played directly in App view for certain apps, Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*. such as unread text messages for Messages.

7 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction. }}

* Option/accessory. 113 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| If there are many functions, you can also scroll downward through the view. This is done by sweeping/dragging from the bottom upwards. Unlike in App view, where you tap an app to open it, in Function view, tapping a function activates or deactivates it. Certain functions (trigger functions) open in their own window when tapped. To return to Home view, swipe the screen from right to left7 or press the Home button. Related information • Handling tiles in the center display (p. 115) • Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 120) • Changing settings in the center display's Top view (p. 128) • Opening contextual setting in the center display (p. 129) • Owner's Manual in the center display (p. 17) • Driver profiles (p. 132) • Climate system controls (p. 201) • Apps (p. 429) • Function view in the center display (p. 118) • Center display overview (p. 106)

7 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

114 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling tiles in the center display Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation, Media, Phone and a fourth tile. These views can be expanded.

}}

115 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Expanding a tile from standard mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the center display.

116 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Expanding a tile: In expanded mode, open the Related information app in full-screen mode. Tap • – For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Handling the center display (p. 108) the symbol. Tap the screen anywhere in the tile. When • Activating and deactivating the center dis- a tile is expanded, the extra tile in Home play (p. 111) view will be temporarily hidden. The other • Navigating in the center display's views two tiles will be minimized and only show (p. 111) certain information. When the extra tile is To return to expanded mode, tapped, the other three tiles are minimized tap the symbol or press the and only certain information is displayed. Home button under the Expanded view provides access to the screen. basic functions of the respective apps. Closing an expanded tile: – The tile can be closed in three different ways: • Tap the top section of the expanded tile. • Tap another tile (it will then be opened in expanded mode instead). • Press briefly on the Home button under the center display. Opening or closing a tile in full-screen mode The fourth tile8 and tile for Navigation can be Center display's home button. opened in full-screen mode to show additional You can always press the Home button to information and possible settings. return to Home view. To return to Home When a tile is opened in full-screen mode, no view's standard view from full-screen mode, information from the other tiles is displayed. press the Home button twice.

8 Does not apply to all apps or vehicle functions opened via the fourth tile.

117 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Function view in the center display navigate to Function view by swiping from Different types of buttons Function view, which is one of the center dis- left to right over the screen9. There are three different types of buttons for play's basic views, contains all of the vehi- vehicle functions; see below: cle's function buttons. From the Home view,

Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected Function buttons Have On/Off modes. Most buttons in Function view are function buttons. When a function is active, an LED indicator light will illuminate to the left of the button's icon. Press the button to turn the function on or off. Trigger buttons Do not have On/Off modes. • Camera Pressing a trigger button opens a window for the function. This can be, for example, a win- • Headrest Fold dow to change seat position. Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes. • Park In Similar to function buttons, but have an extra mode for parking scanning. • Park Out

9 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

118 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Button modes

The function is deactivated when the LED When a function or parking button's LED indi- indicator light is switched off. cator is green, the function is activated (on). For some functions, an additional text explain- ing the function will be shown when the function is initially activated. The text will be displayed for a few seconds and then the button will be displayed with the LED indicator illuminated. For Lane Keeping Aid, for example, the text Works only at certain speeds will be displayed when the button is pressed. A warning triangle in the right-hand section of Press the button once briefly to activate or the button indicates that something is not deactivate the function. working correctly. Related information • Handling the center display (p. 108) • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 111)

119 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Moving apps and buttons in the NOTE Symbols in the center display center display status bar Hide the apps that are rarely or never used The apps and buttons for vehicle functions Overview of symbols displayed in the center by moving them far down, outside of the can be moved and organized in the App and display status bar. visible view. This makes it easier to find the Function views. The status bar shows current vehicle activities apps used more frequently. 1. Swipe from right to left10 to access App and in certain cases, also their status. Due to view or swipe from left to right10 to access the limited space in the status bar, not all sym- Function view. NOTE bols will be displayed at all times. 2. Press and hold an app or button. Apps and vehicle function buttons cannot Symbol Meaning > The app or button will change size and be situated at spots already in use. become slightly transparent. It can then Connected to the Internet. be moved. Related information 3. Drag the app or button to an available • Function view in the center display (p. 118) Roaming activated. position in the view. • Apps (p. 429) • Cell phone network signal A maximum of 48 rows can be used to posi- Handling the center display (p. 108) strength. tion apps or buttons. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bot- Bluetooth device connected. tom of the view. New rows will be added and the app or button can be placed in one of Bluetooth activated but no these. device connected. Apps or buttons placed below the view's nor- Information sent to and from mal display will not be visible on the screen. GPS. Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the Connected to Wi-Fi network. view to display information outside the view.

10 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction.

120 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hot- Traffic information being spot). This means that the vehi- received.B cle shares an available Internet connection. Clock.

Vehicle modem activated. A Only hybrid models. B Not available in all markets. USB sharing active. Related information • Navigating in the center display's views Phone is wirelessly charging. (p. 111) • Messages in the center display (p. 136) Action in progress. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) Timer for preconditioning active.A • Connecting a device via the USB port (p. 456) Audio source being played. • Wireless phone charger* (p. 473) • Phone (p. 465) Audio source paused. • Date and time (p. 91) Phone call in progress.

Audio source muted.

News broadcasts from current radio station.B

* Option/accessory. 121 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Using the center display keyboard You can use the keyboard in the center display to enter characters or to switch to handwriting mode to "write" letters and characters on the screen. The keyboard can be used to enter characters (letters, numbers, symbols, etc.) to e.g. send text messages from the vehicle, enter pass- words or search for information in the digital Owner's Manual. The keyboard will only appear when it is possible to enter text on the screen.

NOTE The keyboard cannot be used while the vehicle is moving.

122 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

The illustration shows an overview of some of the buttons that may be shown on the keyboard. The appearance may vary depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is used.

}}

123 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Row showing suggestions for words or The first letter entered in text fields will that has been entered. The button's appear- characters11. The suggested words change also be uppercase. In text fields intended ance differs depending on the context. as new letters are entered. Scroll through for names or addresses, each word will be the list of suggested words by tapping the automatically started with an uppercase Variants of letters or characters right or left arrows. Tap a suggestion to letter. In text fields intended for pass- select it. Please note that this function is words, website addresses or email not available in all languages. When addresses, all letters will automatically be unavailable, this row will not be shown on lowercase unless uppercase is selected. the keyboard. Used to enter numbers. The number key- Available characters are adapted to the board (2) will then be displayed. Tap language selected for the keyboard (see , which is shown instead of in number 7 below). Tap a character to enter number mode, to return to the keyboard it. with letters, or to display the key- Different buttons are displayed here board with special characters. depending on the context in which the Used to change the keyboard language, keyboard is used, e.g. @ to enter an email e.g. EN. The available characters and word Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can address or the return key to start a new suggestions (1) vary depending on the be entered by pressing and holding the letter line. selected language. In order to toggle or character. A box containing possible vari- This button hides the keyboard. In cases between keyboard languages, the lan- ants of the letter or character will appear. Tap where this is not possible, the button will guages must first be added under Set- the desired variant. If no variant is selected, not be displayed. tings. the original letter/character will be used. Used to enter uppercase letters. Tap once Space bar. to enter one uppercase letter and then Related information continue with lowercase letters. Tap twice Delete. Tap to delete characters one at a • Changing keyboard language in the center for caps lock (all text will be entered in time. Press and hold to delete multiple display (p. 125) characters quickly. uppercase letters). Tap again to return the • Entering characters, letters and words by keyboard to lowercase letters. In this Used to change to handwriting mode. hand in the center display (p. 125) mode, the first letter after a period, excla- • Handling the center display (p. 108) mation point or question mark will be Tap the confirm button over the keyboard (not automatically entered in uppercase form. shown in illustration) once to confirm the text • Handling text messages (p. 470)

11 For Asian languages.

124 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Changing keyboard language in Toggling between keyboard languages Entering characters, letters and the center display If more than one language words by hand in the center In order to toggle between keyboard lan- has been selected in display guages, the languages must first be added Settings, the button in the Characters, letters and words can be entered under Settings. keyboard can be used to in the center display by handwriting them on switch between the different the touchscreen. Adding or deleting languages in languages. Tap the button on the center Settings To toggle between keyboard languages from display's keyboard to switch The keyboard is automatically set to the same the list: from the keyboard to hand- language as the system language. The key- writing mode. board language can be manually changed 1. Press and hold the button. without affecting the system language. > A list will appear. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Select the desired language. If more than 2. Tap System System Languages and four languages have been selected under Settings, you can scroll through the list Units Keyboard Layouts. shown on the keyboard. 3. Select one or more languages in the list. > The keyboard and word suggestions > It is now possible to toggle between will be adapted to the selected lan- the selected languages using the key- guage. board. To change keyboard language without display- If no language has been selected under ing the list: Settings, the keyboard will remain in the – Tap the button. same language as the vehicle's system language. > The keyboard layout will change to the next language in the list without dis- Space for entering characters/letters/ playing the list. words/parts of words. Related information Text field displaying suggested characters • Changing system language (p. 128) or words12 as they are written on the screen (1). • Using the center display keyboard (p. 122)

12 Certain system languages only. }}

125 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Suggestions for characters/letters/words/ Handwriting characters/letters/words Erasing/changing handwritten characters/ parts of words. You can scroll through the 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts letters list. of a word in the field for handwritten let- Space bar. Blank spaces can be created ters (1). Write the word or part of the word by writing a dash (‒) in the field for hand- vertically or horizontally. written letters (1). See "Writing blank > A number of suggestions for charac- spaces in free-text fields" below. ters, letters or words will be displayed Delete. Tap once to erase one character/ (3). The most likely will be shown at the letter at a time. Wait a moment before top of the list. tapping again to erase the next character, letter etc. CAUTION Erase text in the text field (2) by swiping over the Return to the standard keyboard layout. Do not use sharp objects on the screen as handwriting field (1). this could cause scratches. Switch off/on screen tap sounds. – Characters/letters can be erased or changed in several ways: Hide the keyboard. In cases where this is 2. The character/letter/word will be entered not possible, the button will not be dis- automatically after a short pause if no • Tap the desired letter or word in the list played. other action is taken. (3). Change language for text input. > The character/letter/word at the top of • Tap the delete button (5) to erase the the list will be used. Tap one of the letter and start again. other characters/letters/words in the • Swipe horizontally from right to left13 list to use it instead. over the handwriting field (1). Erase several letters at once by swiping over the area several times. • Tap the X box in the text field (2) to erase all written text.

13 For Arabic keyboards, swipe in the other direction. Swiping from right to left will create a blank space.

126 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

New lines in free-text fields in handwriting Changing the appearance of the Turning off and adjusting the mode center display volume of the center display The appearance of the center display can be system sounds changed by selecting a different theme. The volume of the center display system 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. sounds can be adjusted or turned off completely. 2. Tap My Car Displays Display 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Themes. display. 3. Select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or 2. Tap Sound System Volumes. Chrome Rings. 3. Pull the control under Touch Sounds to In addition to these themes, you can also Create a new line by drawing above the characters in adjust the volume or turn off screen tap choose between Normal and Bright. In the handwriting field as shown in the illustration14. sounds. Pull the control to the desired Normal, the background of the screen is dark sound level. Writing blank spaces in free-text fields and the text is light. This option is the default setting for all themes. If the bright version is Related information selected, the background will be light and the • Center display overview (p. 106) text will be dark. This option can, for example, • make the screen easier to see in bright day- Changing settings in the center display's light conditions. Top view (p. 128) • Sound settings (p. 428) These alternatives are always available for selection and are not affected by the ambient lighting. Make a blank space by drawing a line from left to Related information 15 right . • Changing settings in the center display's Related information Top view (p. 128) • Using the center display keyboard (p. 122) • Activating and deactivating the center display (p. 111) • Cleaning the center display (p. 589)

14 For Arabic keyboards, draw the same character, but in mirror image. 15 For Arabic keyboards, draw the line from right to left.

127 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Changing system units of Changing system language Changing settings in the center measurement Language settings are adjusted in the display's Top view Unit settings are adjusted in the Settings Settings menu in the center display. You can change settings and information for menu in the center display. NOTE many of the vehicle's functions via the center 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. display. Changing languages in the center display could mean that certain owner's informa- 1. Open Top view by tapping the tab at the 2. Proceed to System System tion will not comply with national or local top of the screen or by dragging/swiping Languages and Units Units of laws and regulations. Do not change to a from the top of the screen downward. Measurement. language you do not speak well, as it can 2. Tap Settings to open the Settings menu. be difficult to find your way back through 3. Choose a measurement standard: the menu. • Metric - kilometers, liters and degrees Celsius. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center • Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees display. Celsius. • 2. Proceed to System System US - miles, gallons and degrees Fah- Languages and Units. renheit. 3. Select System Language. > The units in the instrument panel and center display are changed. A voice control symbol indicates that the language can be used for voice com- Related information mands. • Center display overview (p. 106) > The language in the instrument panel Top view with Settings button. • Changing settings in the center display's and center display is changed. 3. Tap one of the categories and sub-catego- Top view (p. 128) ries to navigate to the desired setting. • Changing system language (p. 128) Related information • Center display overview (p. 106) 4. Change the setting(s). Different types of settings are changed in different ways. • Changing settings in the center display's > Changes are saved immediately. Top view (p. 128) • Changing system units of measurement (p. 128)

128 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Opening contextual setting in the 2. Tap Navigation Settings. center display > The navigation settings page will open. Most of the settings for the vehicle's basic 3. Change the desired settings and confirm. apps can be changed directly in Top view in the center display via contextual settings. Tap Close or press the Home button under the center display to close Settings view. Most of the vehicle's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Third-party apps Third-party apps are apps that are not factory- installed in the vehicle's system, but can be A sub-category in the Settings menu with various downloaded, e.g. Volvo ID. Settings for these possible settings; has a multi-selection button and apps are changed in the apps themselves, not radio buttons. in Top view. Related information • Center display overview (p. 106) Related information Top view with button for contextual settings. • Changing settings in the center display's • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) Top view (p. 128) Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing • Table of settings in the center display • Center display overview (p. 106) (p. 131) specific settings related to the active function displayed on the screen. Apps that are factory- • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) installed in your vehicle, e.g. FM radio and • Download apps (p. 430) USB, are part of Sensus and are used to control the vehicle's integrated functions. The settings for these apps can be changed directly via contextual setting in Top view. When contextual setting is available: 1. Pull down Top view when an app is in expanded form, e.g. Navigation.

129 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Resetting user data when the Resetting center display settings 4. Tap OK to confirm the reset. vehicle changes owners All settings made in the center display's Set- For Reset Personal Settings, confirm If the vehicle changes owners, all user data tings menu can be reset to default values. the reset by tapping Reset for the active and system settings should be reset to fac- profile or Reset for all profiles. tory defaults. Two types of reset > The selected settings will be reset. Vehicle settings can be reset at different lev- There are two types of reset in the Settings els. Reset all user data and system settings to menu: Related information their original factory defaults when the vehicle • Factory Reset- erases all data and files • Center display overview (p. 106) changes owner. It is also important to change and resets all settings to factory default. • Changing settings in the center display's the owner of the Volvo On Call service. • Reset Personal Settings- erases per- Top view (p. 128) Related information sonal data and resets personalized set- • Table of settings in the center display • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) tings to factory default. (p. 131) • Resetting driver profile settings (p. 136) Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset the settings.

NOTE Factory Reset is only possible when the vehicle is stationary.

1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Proceed to System Factory Reset. 3. Select the type of reset you would like to do. > A pop-up window will appear.

130 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Table of settings in the center Sub-categories Sub-categories display ® The center display's Settings menu has a Locking Gracenote number of main categories and sub-catego- Parking Brake and Suspension Video ries that contain settings and information for many of the vehicle's features and functions. Wipers Communication There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Sound Sub-categories Communication, Climate and System. Sub-categories Phone Each category, in turn, contains a number of Tone Text Messages sub-categories and possible settings. The table below shows the first level of sub-cate- Balance Android Auto* gories. The possible settings for a function or an area are described in more detail in their System Volumes Apple CarPlay* respective sections of the Owner's Manual. Navigation Bluetooth Devices Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to a Driver Profiles. Others Sub-categories Wi-Fi are global, which means that they are not Map Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot linked to a driver profile. Route and Guidance Vehicle Modem Internet My Car Volvo On Call Sub-categories Traffic Volvo Service Networks Displays Media IntelliSafe Sub-categories Climate The Climate main category does not have any AM/FM Radio Drive Preferences/Individual Drive sub-categories. * Mode SiriusXM Lights and Lighting SiriusXM Travel Link Mirrors and Convenience }}

* Option/accessory. 131 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| System Driver profiles Keyboard layout is an example of a global set- Sub-categories Many of the vehicle's settings can be cus- ting. If driver profile X is used to add additional tomized to the driver's personal preferences keyboard languages, these languages will also Driver Profile and saved in one or more driver profiles. be available for driver profile Y. The settings These personal settings are automatically for keyboard layout are not saved to a specific Date and Time saved in the active driver profile. Each key can driver profile - the settings are global. System Languages and Units be linked to one driver profile. When the linked Personal settings key is used, the vehicle is customized to the If driver profile X has been used to e.g., set the Privacy and Data specific settings of that driver profile. brightness for the center display, driver profile Keyboard Layouts Y will not be affected by this setting. It will Which settings are saved in driver only be saved to driver profile X because Voice Control* profiles? brightness setting is a personal setting. Many of the settings made in the vehicle will Factory Reset be automatically stored in the active driver Related information • System Information profile if the profile is not protected. The vehi- Selecting a driver profile (p. 133) cle has settings that can be made either per- • Changing a driver profile's name (p. 133) Related information sonal or global. The personal settings are • saved in driver profiles. Linking a remote key to a driver profile • Center display overview (p. 106) (p. 134) Settings that can be saved in a driver profile • Changing settings in the center display's • Protecting a driver profile (p. 134) Top view (p. 128) include, among other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media sys- • Resetting driver profile settings (p. 136) • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) tem, language and voice control. • Table of settings in the center display Some settings are global settings. These set- (p. 131) tings can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles. Global settings Global settings do not change when driver profiles are changed. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is currently active.

132 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Selecting a driver profile 3. Select desired driver profile. Changing a driver profile's name When the center display starts up, the 4. Tap Confirm. It is possible to change the names of the dif- selected driver profile will be shown at the ferent driver profiles used in the vehicle. > The driver profile has now been top of the screen. The most recently used 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center selected and the system will load the driver profile will be active the next time the settings stored in that profile. display. vehicle is unlocked. A different driver profile can be selected once the vehicle has been Option 3: 2. Tap System Driver Profiles. unlocked. However, if the remote key has 1. Pull down Top view in the center display. 3. Select Edit Profile. been linked to a driver profile, this profile will > A menu will open in which the driver 2. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center be used instead. profile can be changed. There are three options for switching between display. 4. Tap the Profile Name box. driver profiles. 3. Tap System Driver Profiles. > A keyboard will be displayed and can Option 1: > A list will appear, showing driver pro- be used to change the name. Tap files that can be selected. 1. Tap the name of the driver profile shown to close the keyboard. at the top of the center display when the 4. Select desired driver profile. display starts up. 5. Save the name change by pressing Back > The driver profile has now been or Close. > A list will appear, showing driver pro- selected and the system will load the files that can be selected. settings stored in that profile. > The name has now been changed. 2. Select desired driver profile. Related information NOTE 3. Tap Confirm. • Driver profiles (p. 132) Profile names may not begin with a space. > The driver profile has now been • Navigating in the center display's views If a space is entered first, the profile name selected and the system will load the (p. 111) will not be saved. settings stored in that profile. • Changing a driver profile's name (p. 133) Option 2: • Linking a remote key to a driver profile Related information 1. Pull down Top view in the center display. (p. 134) • Selecting a driver profile (p. 133) 2. Tap Profile. • Using the center display keyboard (p. 122) > The same list as in option 1 will be displayed.

133 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Protecting a driver profile 5. Confirm your selection to protect the pro- Linking a remote key to a driver It may not always be desirable to store set- file by tapping Back/Close. profile tings made in the vehicle to the active driver > When the profile is protected, settings A remote key can be linked to a driver profile. profile. In these instances, the driver profile made in the vehicle will not be auto- This driver profile and all of its settings will can be protected. matically stored to the profile. The then automatically be selected every time the NOTE changes must instead be saved man- vehicle is used with that particular remote ually under Settings System key. Protecting a driver profile is only possible The first time the remote key is used, it is not when the vehicle is stationary. Driver Profiles Edit Profile by tapping Save current settings to the linked to any specific driver profile. The Guest profile. If the profile is not protected, profile is automatically activated when the To protect a driver profile: the settings will be automatically stored ignition is switched on. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center to the profile. A driver profile can also be selected manually display. without linking it to any key. When the vehicle Related information is unlocked, the last active driver profile will be 2. Tap System Driver Profiles. • Driver profiles (p. 132) activated. If the key has ever been linked to a 3. Select Edit Profile. driver profile, it is not necessary to manually > A menu will open in which the driver select a driver profile when using that particu- profile can be changed. lar key. 4. Tap Protect Profile to protect the profile. Linking a remote key to a specific driver profile

NOTE A remote key can only be connected to a driver profile when the vehicle is stationary.

First select the profile you would like to link to the key (if that profile is not already active).

134 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

The active profile can then be linked to the 5. Select Connect key to link the profile with • Remote key (p. 222) key. the key. A driver profile can only be linked to the key currently being used in the vehi- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center cle. If there are any other keys in the vehi- display. cle, More than one key is found, put the 2. Tap System Driver Profiles. key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed. 3. Mark the desired profile. The display will return to Home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a remote key. 4. Pull down Top view again and tap Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile.

Location of the backup key reader in the storage compartment. > When Profile connected to key is displayed, the key and driver profile have been linked. 6. Tap OK. > The key used is now linked to the driver profile and will remain so as long as the Connect key box is not deselected. Related information • Driver profiles (p. 132) • Changing a driver profile's name (p. 133)

135 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Resetting driver profile settings Messages in the center display ority than messages shown in the status bar Settings that have been saved for one or The center display shows messages in certain and require acknowledgment/action before more driver profiles can be reset when the circumstances to inform or assist the driver. they disappear. vehicle is stationary. Related information NOTE • Handling messages in the center display Factory Reset is only possible when the (p. 137) vehicle is stationary. • Handling messages saved from the center display (p. 137) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102) 2. Tap System Factory Reset Reset Personal Settings. 3. Select option Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel. Example of message in the center display's Top view. Related information Messages with lower priority for the driver are • Driver profiles (p. 132) shown in the center display. • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) Most of the messages are shown in the center display's status bar. The message will disappear from the status bar after a short period of time or after the required action has been taken. Messages that need to be saved are stored in Top view in the center display. The message may be shown along with graphics, symbols or a button to e.g. activate/ deactivate a function connected to the message. Pop-up messages Messages are sometimes shown as pop-up windows. Pop-up messages have a higher pri-

136 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Handling messages in the center For messages without buttons: Handling messages saved from the display – Close the message by tapping it or let the center display Messages in the center display are handled in message automatically time-out after a Messages saved from the instrument panel the center display's views. short period. and center displays are handled in the center > The message will disappear from the display. status bar. Messages that need to be saved are stored in Top view in the center display. Related information • Messages in the center display (p. 136) • Handling messages saved from the center display (p. 137) • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102)

Example of message in the center display's Top view. Some messages in the center display have a Examples of saved messages and possible selections in Top view. button (or several buttons in a pop-up message) to e.g. activate/deactivate a function Messages that have been shown in the center related to the message. display and that need to be saved are stored in the center display's Top view. Handling new messages For messages with buttons: – Tap the button to perform the action or let the message automatically time-out after a short period. > The message will disappear from the status bar.

}}

137 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Reading saved messages Voice Control WARNING 1. Open Top view in the center display. 16 Voice control allows you to control func- The driver is always responsible for ensur- > A list of saved messages will be dis- tions in the vehicle, e.g. the climate control ing that the vehicle is operated in a safe played. Messages with an arrow to the system, radio or a Bluetooth-connected manner and that all applicable traffic regu- right can be expanded. phone, using spoken commands. In vehicles lations are followed. equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the navi- 2. Tap a message to expand/minimize it. gation system can also be controlled using > More information about the message voice commands. will appear in the list and the image to the left of the app will display informa- What is voice control? tion about the message in graphic form. Voice control is a driver support function that Handling saved messages can simplify the use of various commands in Some messages have a button to e.g. acti- your vehicle. It works in general like a regular vate/deactivate a function related to the mes- application in which you input information in a sage. set order in order to perform a task, but instead of typing on a keypad, you use voice – Tap the button to perform the action. commands. It can therefore be a good idea to Saved messages in Top view are automatically familiarize yourself with how, and in what deleted when the ignition is switched off. order, a voice command should be spoken to get the desired result. Voice control microphone Related information You can control certain infotainment and cli- System updates • Messages in the center display (p. 136) mate control functions through the voice con- The voice control system is continuously • Handling messages in the center display trol system by using voice commands. The improved. It is recommended to always have (p. 137) system can respond verbally and by displaying the latest version installed. • Messages in the instrument panel (p. 102) information in the instrument panel. Download updates at volvocars.com/support.

16 Certain markets only.

138 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

• NOTE Use voice recognition Avoid background noises in the passenger compartment by keeping doors, windows Not all system languages support voice Starting voice control17 and the panoramic roof* closed. control. If a language supports voice con- Voice commands are given trol, it is marked with a symbol in the through a "dialog" with the NOTE list of available system languages. Read voice control system. Press Not all system languages support voice more about where the information is found the button for voice control control. If a language supports voice con- in the section on voice control settings. on the right-side steering trol, it is marked with a symbol in the wheel keypad to activate the list of available system languages. Read Related information system and initiate a voice more about where the information is found • Use voice recognition (p. 139) command dialog. When you press the button, in the section on voice control settings. • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) a beep will sound and the voice control symbol will appear in the instrument panel. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) Generally, the system will listen for a basic This shows that the system has begun listen- • command that is then followed by more Climate control system voice commands ing and you can now begin speaking com- detailed commands specifying what you want (p. 192) mands. As soon as you start speaking, the the system to do. • Voice control settings (p. 142) system will be trained to recognize and understand your voice. This takes several seconds To change the audio volume of the system, and is done automatically, which means that turn the volume knob while the voice is speak- you don't need to manually initiate any voice ing. It is possible to use other buttons while training. voice commands are being given. However, because other audio is silenced during dialog These may include: with the system, it is not possible to perform • Wait until after the tone, and then speak in any functions connected to audio using the your normal voice at a normal speed. buttons. • Do not speak while the system is responding (the system is unable to process commands during this time).

17 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 139 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

|| Canceling voice control 2. Say "Call [First name] [Last name] e.g. "zero, three, one, two, two, four, four, To cancel voice control, do one of the follow- [number category]", e.g. "Call Robyn three" (03122443). ing: Smith cellular". • Addresses can be given by stating each > The system will call the selected con- • Briefly press and say "Cancel". number individually or in a group, e.g. tact from the phone book. If the contact "two, two" or "twenty-two" (22). For Eng- • Press and hold the steering wheel key- has several phone numbers (e.g. home, lish and Dutch language settings, groups pad's voice command button until cell, work), the right category must also of numbers can also be said in sequence, two audible signals are given. This cancels be given. e.g. "twenty-two, twenty-two" (22 22). voice control even when the system is For English, double or triple digits can also speaking. Commands/phrases be used, e.g. "double zero" (00). Numbers The following commands can usually be used Voice control will also be canceled if you do in the range 0-2300 can be used. in any situation: not respond during a dialog. The system will • Frequencies can be given as "ninety-eight first ask three times for a response and if the • "Repeat" - repeats the most recent voice point eight" (98.8), "one hundred four response is still not given, voice control will be command in the current dialog. point two" or "hundred and four point automatically canceled. • "Cancel" - cancels the dialog.18 two" (104.2). To speed up communication and skip prompts • "Help" - initiates a help dialog. The sys- Speech rate and repeat mode from the system, press the voice control but- tem responds with commands that can be The speed at which the system speaks can be ton on the steering wheel keypad. This used in the current situation, an instruc- adjusted. will interrupt the system's response and you tion or an example. With repeat mode on, the system will repeat can say the next command. Commands for specific functions, such as what you have said. Voice command examples phone and audio, are described in the sections To change the speech rate or activate/deacti- related to that function. 1. Tap . vate repeat mode: Numbers 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. Number commands can be given in different ways depending on the function to be con- 2. Tap System Voice Control and select trolled: settings. • Phone numbers and zip codes should be • Repeat Voice Command given by stating each number individually, • Speech Rate

18 Note that this only cancels the dialog when the system is not speaking. To do this, press and hold until you hear two beeps.

140 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

19 Related information Voice control for cellular phones NOTE • Voice Control (p. 138) Call a contact in the phone book, have a text Not all system languages support voice • message read aloud or dictate short mes- Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) control. If a language supports voice con- sages using voice commands to a Bluetooth- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) trol, it is marked with a symbol in the • connected phone. Climate control system voice commands To access a contact in the phone book, the list of available system languages. Read (p. 192) voice command must contain the contact more about where the information is found • Voice control settings (p. 142) information entered in the phone book. If a in the section on voice control settings. contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers listed in the phone book, a number Related information category such as home or cellular can also be • Voice Control (p. 138) specified, i.e. "Call Robyn Smith cellular". • Use voice recognition (p. 139) Tap and say one of the following com- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) mands: • Climate control system voice commands • "Call [contact]" - call the selected con- (p. 192) tact from the phone book. • Voice control settings (p. 142) • "Call [phone number]" - call a phone • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) number. • "Recent calls" - display the list of recent calls. • "Read message" - read a text message aloud. If there are several messages, select the message to read aloud. • "Message to [contact]" – the user is prompted to dictate a short message. The message will then be read aloud and the user can choose to send or re-dictate the message. The vehicle must be connected to the Internet to access this function.

19 Certain markets only.

* Option/accessory. 141 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Voice control for radio and media20 • "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Voice control settings21 Voice commands for the radio and media • "SiriusXM" - starts SiriusXM radio* Settings for the voice control system are players are shown below. • "USB" - starts playback from USB. made here. Tap and say one of the following com- • "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. Settings System Voice Control mands: • "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a • Settings can be personalized in the following "Media" - initiates a dialog for media and Bluetooth-connected media source. radio and displays examples of com- areas: • "Similar music" - plays music from a mands. • Repeat Voice Command • USB-connected device with music similar "Play [artist]" - plays music by the to that currently playing. • Gender selected artist. • Speech Rate • "Play [song title]" - plays the selected NOTE song. Sound settings • Not all system languages support voice Select sound settings under: "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays control. If a language supports voice con- the selected song from the selected trol, it is marked with a symbol in the album. Settings Sound System Volumes list of available system languages. Read Voice Control • "Play [radio station]" - starts the more about where the information is found selected radio station. in the section on voice control settings. Language settings • "Tune to [frequency]" - tunes to the The voice control system is not available for all selected radio frequency in the currently Related information languages. The languages available for voice active waveband. If no radio source is • Voice Control (p. 138) commands are indicated by the icon in active, the FM band will be started as • the list of languages. default. Use voice recognition (p. 139) • Changing the language here will also change • "Tune to [frequency] [waveband]" - Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) the language in the menus, messages and tunes to the selected radio frequency on • Climate control system voice commands help texts. the selected waveband. (p. 192) • "Radio" - starts FM radio. • Voice control settings (p. 142) Settings System System Languages • "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. and Units System Language

20 Certain markets only. 21 Certain markets only.

142 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

Related information • Voice Control (p. 138) • Use voice recognition (p. 139) • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) • Climate control system voice commands (p. 192) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) • Sound settings (p. 428) • Changing system language (p. 128)

143

LIGHTING LIGHTING

Lighting control and panel Position Meaning Position Meaning The lighting panel and controls can be used to adjust both exterior and interior lighting. US: Daytime running lights and Daytime running lights and The lighting ring on the left-side steering parking lights are off. parking lights in daylight condi- A wheel lever can be used to activate and Canada: Daytime running lights tions. adjust the exterior lighting. The brightness of and parking lights are on. Low beams and parking lights in the interior lighting can be adjusted using the High beam flash can be used. weak daylight or dark conditions thumb wheel on the dashboard. or when the front fog lights* Parking lights when the vehicle Exterior lighting and/or rear fog light are acti- is parked. vated. US: Daytime running lights are Active high beam can be acti- off. vated. Canada: Daytime running lights High beams can be activated are on. when low beams are on. High beam flash can be used. High beam flash can be used. Low beams and parking lights. Active high beams on/off. High beams can be activated. A US models only: Daytime running lights and parking lights High beam flash can be used. can be deactivated in the center display.

Lighting ring position. NOTE When the vehicle's ignition is in mode II, the Volvo recommends use of Daytime lighting ring positions have the following func- Running Lights in the US. Its use is man- tions: datory in Canada.

Volvo recommends using position when the vehicle is in motion.

146 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

• WARNING Using turn signals (p. 152) Adjusting light functions via the • center display The vehicle lighting system cannot in all sit- Using high beam (p. 150) uations determine when the daylight is too • Low beams (p. 149) A number of light functions can be adjusted weak or not strong enough, e.g. when and activated via the center display. These • Front fog lights/corner illumination* there is fog or rain. include active high beams, home safe lighting (p. 153) and approach lighting. The driver is always responsible for driving • the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the Rear fog light (p. 154) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top traffic conditions and as specified by appli- • Active Bending Lights* (p. 152) view. cable traffic regulations. • Brake lights (p. 155) 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting. • Emergency brake lights (p. 155) Thumbwheel in instrument panel 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior • Hazard warning flashers (p. 155) Lighting and then select the function that you would like to adjust. Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) • Active high beam (p. 151) • Using home safe lighting (p. 156) • Welcome Light (p. 156) • Using turn signals (p. 152) • Changing settings in the center display's Top view (p. 128) Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting interior bright- • Function view in the center display (p. 118) ness. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the center display (p. 147) • Interior Lighting (p. 156) • Parking lights (p. 148)

* Option/accessory. 147 LIGHTING

Parking lights conditions, the parking lights and low beams Daytime running lights The parking lights can be used to help other will be illuminated. The vehicle has sensors that detect ambient road users see the vehicle if it is stopped or In dark conditions, the rear parking lights also lighting conditions. With the lighting ring in parked. Use the lighting ring on the steering illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert the position, the daytime running lights wheel lever to turn on the parking lights. following traffic. This happens regardless of will always be activated when the ignition is what position the lighting ring or ignition is in. in mode II. In weak daylight or dark conditions, the headlights automatically switch to Related information low beams. • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) • Ignition modes (p. 372)

Lighting ring in the parking light position. Turn the lighting ring to the position to turn on the parking lights (the license plate lighting will also illuminate). Lighting ring in AUTO position. With the steering wheel lever's lighting ring in Canadian models: If the ignition is in the II position, the daytime running lights will illumi- the position, the daytime running lights nate instead of the front parking lights. With (DRL1) will illuminate when the vehicle is the lighting ring in this position, the parking driven in daylight conditions. The headlights lights will remain on regardless of what posi- will switch automatically from daytime run- tion the ignition is in. ning lights to low beams in weak daylight or dark conditions. The headlights will also US models: When mode is selected, switch to low beams if the front fog lights* the daytime running lights can be deactivated and/or rear fog light are activated. in the center display. The parking lights will also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark

148 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

US models: When mode is selected, Related information Low beams the daytime running lights can be deactivated • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) When driving with the lighting ring in the in the center display. The parking lights will • Ignition modes (p. 372) position, low beam will be automati- also be deactivated. In weak daylight or dark • Low beams (p. 149) cally activated in weak daylight or dark condi- conditions, the parking lights and low beams tions, when the ignition is in the II position. will be illuminated. US models: With the lighting ring in the or position, the daytime running lights will be off. Canadian models: With the lighting ring in the or position, the daytime running lights will be on.

NOTE Volvo recommends use of Daytime Running Lights in the US. Its use is man- Lighting ring in AUTO position. datory in Canada. With the lighting ring in the position, the low beams will be automatically activated if: WARNING • the front fog lights* are activated The system is an energy saving aid – it • cannot in all situations determine when the the rear fog light is activated daylight is too weak or not strong enough, • the rear and front fog lights are activated. e.g. when there is fog or rain. With the lighting ring in the position, The driver is always responsible for driving low beams will always be on when the ignition the vehicle with lighting that is safe for the traffic conditions and as specified by appli- is in the II position. cable traffic regulations.

1 Daytime Running Lights }}

* Option/accessory. 149 LIGHTING

|| Tunnel detection Using high beam . Activate high beams by moving the The vehicle will detect if it enters a tunnel and High beam is operated via the left-hand steering wheel lever forward. shift from daytime running lights to low steering wheel lever. High beam is the vehi- Deactivate by moving the steering wheel beams. cle's strongest lighting and should be used lever backward. Note that the left-hand steering wheel lever when driving in dark conditions, provided it does not blind other road users, to improve must be in position for tunnel detection When the high beams are activated, the visibility. to work. symbol will be illuminated in the instrument panel. Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) • Ignition modes (p. 372) • Active high beam (p. 151) • Daytime running lights (p. 148)

Steering wheel lever with lighting ring. High beam flash Move the steering wheel lever slightly backward to the high beam flash mode. The high beams will illuminate until the lever is released. High beams The high beams can be activated when the lighting ring is in mode 2 or

2 When the low beams are on.

150 LIGHTING

Active high beam Activating active high beams rain. When active high beams become availa- Active high beams is a function that uses Active high beams can be activated and deac- ble again, or the windshield sensors are no camera sensors in the upper edge of the tivated by turning the lighting ring on the left- longer blocked, the message will disappear windshield to detect the headlights of side steering wheel lever to position . and the symbol will be displayed. approaching vehicles or the taillights of the The lighting ring will then return to . vehicle directly ahead. When either of these When active high beams are activated, a white WARNING is detected, the vehicle's headlights will auto- symbol will be displayed in the instru- Automatic high beam is an aid in using the matically switch from high beams to low ment panel. When high beams are on, the best possible light based on prevailing con- beams. symbol will be blue. ditions. If active high beams are deactivated when the The driver is always responsible for man- high beams are on, the headlights will auto- ually switching between high and low beam when traffic situations or weather matically switch to low beams. conditions require this. Limitations for active high beams The camera sensor on which the function is Related information based has limitations. • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) If this symbol and the message • Using high beam (p. 150) Active High Beam Temporarily • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) unavailable is displayed in the instrument panel, switching Active high beams is indicated by the symbol. between high and low beams must be done manually. The symbol will go out when This function can be used in dark conditions the message is displayed. when the vehicle's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can The same applies if this symbol also detect street lighting. When the camera along with the message sensor no longer detects an approaching vehi- Windscreen sensor Sensor cle or a vehicle ahead, the headlights will blocked, see Owner's manual is return to high beams after a second or two. displayed. Active high beams may be temporarily unavailable in certain situations, e.g. heavy fog or

151 LIGHTING

* Using turn signals NOTE Active Bending Lights The vehicle's turn signals are controlled using Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to • This automatic flashing sequence can the left-side steering wheel lever. The turn help provide extra illumination in curves and be interrupted by immediately moving signals flash three times or continuously, intersections. Depending on equipment level, the lever in the opposite direction. depending on how far up or down the lever is vehicles with LED3 headlights* may be equip- moved. • If the turn signal indicator flashes more ped with Active Bending Lights. quickly than normal, refer to the message in the instrument panel.

Continuous flashing sequence Move the lever up or down as far as possible. The lever will stop in its end position and can be moved back manually or automatically by moving the steering wheel. Related information • Hazard warning flashers (p. 155) Turn signals. • Adjusting light functions via the center Headlight pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right). Triple flash indicator display (p. 147) Active Bending Lights follow the movement of Move the steering wheel lever up or down • Replacing rear turn signal bulbs (p. 585) to the first position and release. The turn the steering wheel to help provide extra illumi- signals will flash three times. If the func- nation in curves and intersections, helping to tion is deactivated via the center display, improve visibility for the driver. the signals will flash once. The function is automatically activated when the engine is started. If a fault is detected in the system, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a message will be displayed.

3 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

152 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

The function is only active in weak daylight or Front fog lights/corner The front fog lights turn off automatically dark conditions and only when the vehicle is illumination* when the ignition is switched off or when the moving and the low beams are on. The fog lights can be activated manually lighting ring is in position . Deactivating/activating the function when driving in fog and are activated automatically when backing up to help augment The function is activated as the default factory NOTE the backup light. setting and can be activated and deactivated Regulations concerning fog light use vary in the center display's Function view: If the vehicle is equipped with corner illumi- from country to country. nation*, the fog lights are activated automati- Tap the Active Bending cally in weak daylight or dark conditions to Lights button. Cornering illumination* illuminate the area diagonally in front of the The front fog lamps can include the cornering vehicle. lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the Related information direction indicators. • Adjusting light functions via the center The function is activated in weak daylight or display (p. 147) dark conditions when the lighting ring is in • * Front fog lights/corner illumination or mode and the vehicle speed is (p. 153) less than about 30 km/h (about 20 mph). Both cornering illumination are also illuminated as a complement to the taillights when reversing. Front fog lights button. The function is activated as the default factory The front fog lights can be turned on when the setting and can be activated and deactivated ignition is in mode II and the lighting ring is in using the center display. position , or . Tap the button to activate or deactivate the Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) function. The symbol in the instrument panel comes on when the front fog lights are • Ignition modes (p. 372) on. • Rear fog light (p. 154) }}

* Option/accessory. 153 LIGHTING

• Active Bending Lights* (p. 152) Rear fog light The rear fog light turns off automatically when: • Adjusting light functions via the center The rear fog light is considerably brighter • the ignition is off or the lighting ring is in display (p. 147) than ordinary taillights and should only be the position. used to help other road users see the vehicle when visibility is reduced by conditions such • the lighting ring is in the position as fog, snow, smoke or dust. and the front fog lights are turned off.

NOTE Regulations concerning rear fog light use vary from country to country.

Related information • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) • Front fog lights/corner illumination* (p. 153) • Ignition modes (p. 372)

Rear fog light button. • Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 588) The fog lights are located on the right and left sides of the rear of the vehicle. The rear fog light can only be used when: • ignition mode II is active and the lighting ring is in position or • the lighting ring is in the position and the front fog lights are on. Press the button to switch on/off. The symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when the rear fog light is on.

154 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

Brake lights Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers The brake lights are automatically illuminated The emergency brake lights are activated to Hazard warning flashers warn other road when braking. warn following vehicles of hard braking. users by all of the vehicle's turn signals being The brake lights are illuminated when the activated at the same time. The function can This function causes an additional taillight on brake pedal is depressed and when the brakes be used to warn about a traffic hazard. each side of the vehicle to illuminate. are automatically applied by a driver support The emergency brake lights are activated in system. the event of hard braking or if the ABS system Related information is activated and the vehicle is traveling at a • Emergency brake lights (p. 155) high speed. • Brake functions (p. 374) After the driver decelerates to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake lights • Replacing the brake light bulb (p. 587) resume their normal brightness. • Driver support systems (p. 254) Related information • Brake lights (p. 155) • Brakes (p. 375) • Hazard warning flashers (p. 155) Hazard warning flashers button. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.

NOTE Regulations concerning the use of hazard warning flashers may vary from country to country.

Related information • Emergency brake lights (p. 155) • Using turn signals (p. 152)

155 LIGHTING

Using home safe lighting Welcome Light Interior Lighting Some of the exterior lights remain on to illu- Approach lighting is activated when the vehi- The passenger compartment is equipped minate the area around the vehicle. This is cle is unlocked and can be used to provide with several different types of lighting, e.g. called home safe lighting. light as you walk toward the vehicle. general lighting, adjustable ambient lighting To activate home safe lighting: The function is activated when the remote key and reading lights. is used for unlocking. The parking lights, ceil- 1. Switch off the ignition. All lighting in the passenger compartment can ing lights, footwell lights and trunk/cargo be turned on and off manually within 2. Push the left-side steering wheel lever compartment lights are activated in daylight 5 minutes after: toward the dashboard and release. conditions. In weak daylight or dark condi- • the engine has been switched off and the 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. tions, the license plate lighting and outer door handle lighting* will also be activated, with the ignition is in mode 0. > A symbol in the instrument panel illumi- light directed toward the ground. • nates to indicate that the function is the vehicle is unlocked but has not been activated and exterior lighting switches If no door is opened, the lights will remain illu- started. on: Parking lights, headlights, license minated for approx. 2 minutes. If a door is Front ceiling lighting plate lighting and outer door handle opened while the function is activated, the lighting*. interior lighting and outer door handle lighting* will remain on for a longer period of time. The length of time home safe lighting remains illuminated can be set in the center display. This function can be activated and deactivated in the center display. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the center Related information display (p. 147) • Adjusting light functions via the center • Welcome Light (p. 156) display (p. 147) • Using home safe lighting (p. 156) • Remote key (p. 222)

The controls in the ceiling console for the front reading lights and courtesy lighting. Reading light left side

Passenger compartment lighting

156 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING

Courtesy lighting auto switch Rear roof lighting* Briefly press the button on the light to turn on Reading lights are located in the rear section or off the reading lights. To adjust the bright- Reading light right side of the vehicle and can also be used as passen- ness, press and hold the button. ger compartment lighting. Reading lights Glove compartment lighting The reading lights on the right and left sides The glove compartment lighting comes on or are switched on and off by briefly pressing the goes off when the glove compartment is buttons in the ceiling console. To adjust the opened or closed. brightness, press and hold the button. * Passenger compartment lighting Vanity mirror lighting Briefly press the button in the ceiling console The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off to switch on or off the footwell lighting and when the cover over the mirror is opened or ceiling lighting. closed. Courtesy lighting auto switch Ground lighting* Activate the auto switch by briefly pressing The ground lighting comes on or goes off the AUTO button in the ceiling console. With when a door is opened or closed. Auto activated, the indicator light in the button Reading lights over the rear seat. and the courtesy lighting come on and are Cargo compartment lighting turned off as follows. The cargo compartment lighting comes on or goes off when the cargo compartment is Courtesy lighting is switched on when: opened or closed. • The vehicle is unlocked Ambient Lighting • The vehicle is switched off The ambient lighting comes on when the • A side door is opened. doors are opened and goes out when the vehi- Courtesy lighting is switched off when: cle is locked. Ambient lighting brightness can • be adjusted in the center display and also fine- The vehicle is locked tuned using the thumb wheel in the dash- • The engine is started board. • A side door is closed Mood lighting* * • A side door has been open for approx. In vehicles with panoramic roofs , there are two lamp The vehicle is equipped with LEDs that pro- units, one on each side of the ceiling. 2 minutes. vide faint lighting in various colors. This lighting is on when the engine is running. Mood }}

* Option/accessory. 157 LIGHTING

|| lighting can be adjusted in the center display Adjusting interior lighting Changing the brightness and also fine-tuned using the thumb wheel in Illumination in the vehicle varies depending 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center the dashboard. on ignition mode. The interior lighting can be display. adjusted with a thumb wheel in the dash- Lighting in the door storage 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting board and certain light functions can also be compartments adjusted via the center display. Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting in the door storage compartments The thumb wheel on the Lighting. comes on when the doors are opened and dashboard to the left of the 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, goes out when the vehicle is locked. The steering wheel can be used select Off, Low or High. brightness can be adjusted using the thumb to adjust the brightness of Changing the color of the light wheel in the dashboard. the display lighting, instru- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Lighting in the tunnel console's front ment lighting, ambient light- * display. cup holder ing and mood lighting . 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting The lighting in front console cup holders Adjust ambient decor lighting switches on when the vehicle is unlocked and 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center Interior Lighting Interior Mood off when the vehicle is locked. The brightness display. Lighting. can be adjusted using the thumb wheel in the 3. Choose By Temperature or By Color to dashboard. 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting change the color of the light. Interior Lighting. Related information If By Temperature is selected, the light 3. Choose from among the following set- • Adjusting interior lighting (p. 158) will change according to the temperature tings: • Lighting control and panel (p. 146) set for the passenger compartment. • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select • Ignition modes (p. 372) If By Color is selected, the subcategory Off, Low or High. • Passenger compartment interior (p. 532) Theme Colors can be used to make fur- • Under Ambient Light Level, select ther adjustments. Reduced or Full. Adjusting mood lighting* Related information • Interior Lighting (p. 156) The vehicle is equipped with several LEDs that provide faint lighting in various colors. This • Adjusting light functions via the center lighting is on when the engine is running. display (p. 147) • Ignition modes (p. 372)

158 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Windows, glass and mirrors Pinch protection for windows and Reset procedure for pinch The vehicle is equipped with several different sun curtains protection types of windows, glass and mirrors. Some of All power windows and sun curtains* have a If you experience any problems with the elec- the windows in the car are laminated. pinch protection function that is triggered if trical functions for the power windows, you The windshield has laminated glass. Lamina- anything blocks them while they are opening can try to perform a reset. ted glass is also available as on option for or closing. WARNING some other glass surfaces. Laminated glass is If pinch protection is activated, movement will reinforced, which provides better protection stop and then retract automatically to approx. If the starter battery is disconnected, the against break-ins and improved soundproofing 50 mm (2 inches) from the point at which it function for automatic opening and closing must be reset to function correctly. A reset in the passenger compartment. was blocked (or to full ventilation position). is required in order for the pinch protection The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass. It is still possible to override pinch protection to work. when closing is interrupted (e.g. due to ice) by pressing and holding down the control in the Consult a workshop if you experience any same direction. problems with the panoramic roof.2 If there is any problem with the pinch protec- The symbol shows the windows containing lamina- Resetting a power window 1 tion, a rest procedure can be tested. ted glass. 1. Start with the window in the closed position. Related information WARNING • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- 2. Then move the control in manual mode tains (p. 160) If the starter battery is disconnected, the three times upward toward the closed function for automatic opening and closing position. • Panoramic roof* (p. 165) must be reset to function correctly. A reset • Power windows (p. 161) is required in order for the pinch protection > The system will be automatically acti- to work. vated. • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 163) • If the problem persists, contact a workshop. Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) Related information • Using the windshield and headlight wash- • Reset procedure for pinch protection Related information ers (p. 173) (p. 160) • Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 160) • Activating and deactivating the heated • Operating the power windows (p. 161) • Operating the power windows (p. 161) rear window and door mirrors (p. 208) • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 167)

1 Does not apply to windshield and panoramic roof*, which are always laminated and therefore do not have this symbol.

160 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Power windows WARNING Operating the power windows Every door has a control panel for the power All power windows can be operated using the Children, other passengers or objects can windows. The driver's door has controls for be trapped by the moving parts. control panel in the driver's door. The control operating all windows and for activating the panels in the other doors can be used to child safety locks. • Always operate the windows with cau- operate that particular door. tion. The power windows have pinch protection. If • Do not allow children to play with the there is any problem with the pinch protection, operating controls. a rest procedure can be tested. • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. • Remember to always cut the current to WARNING the power windows by setting the Children, other passengers or objects can vehicle's electrical system to ignition be trapped by the moving parts. mode 0 and then taking the key with • Always operate the windows with cau- you when leaving the vehicle. tion. • Never stick objects or body parts out • Do not allow children to play with the through the windows, even if the vehi- operating controls. cle electrical system is completely Driver's door control panel. • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. * turned off. Electric child safety locks that deactivate • Remember to always cut the current to the controls in the rear doors to prevent the power windows by setting the the doors or windows from being opened Related information • vehicle's electrical system to ignition from the inside. Operating the power windows (p. 161) mode 0 and then taking the key with Rear window controls. • Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- you when leaving the vehicle. tains (p. 160) Front window controls. • Never stick objects or body parts out • Reset procedure for pinch protection through the windows, even if the vehi- (p. 160) cle electrical system is completely turned off.

2 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

* Option/accessory. 161 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• * || WARNING Keyless locking and unlocking (p. 239) • Make sure that no child or other passenger Locking and unlocking using the remote comes into contact with the windows as key (p. 225) they are closing with keyless closing*.

NOTE One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise heard when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating the power windows. Operating manually. Move one of the con- NOTE trols slightly up or down. The power win- The windows cannot be opened at speeds dows go up or down while the control is over approx. 180 km/h (ca 112 mph), but held in position. they can be closed. Operating with automatic controls. Move The driver is always responsible for follow- one of the controls up or down to its end ing applicable traffic regulations. position and release it. The window moves automatically to its fully closed/open position. NOTE To use the power windows, the ignition must It may not be possible to operate the win- be in at least mode I or II. After the ignition dows in low temperatures. has been switched off, the power windows can be operated for several minutes or until a door is opened. Only one control can be oper- Related information ated at a time. • Power windows (p. 161) • It can also be operated using keyless opening* Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- with the door handle. tains (p. 160) • Reset procedure for pinch protection (p. 160)

162 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Rearview/door mirrors • Storing positions for seats and mirrors Adjusting the rearview mirror The rearview mirror and door mirrors can be (p. 180) dimming function used to improve the driver's visibility behind • Activating and deactivating the heated Bright light entering the vehicle from behind, the vehicle. rear window and door mirrors (p. 208) e.g. from the headlights of following vehicles, could reflect in the rearview mirror and door Rearview mirror mirrors and cause a glare. Use the dimming The rearview mirror is equipped with Home- function when light from behind is distract- * * * Link , auto-dim and compass . ing. The rearview mirror can be adjusted manually. Auto-dim Door mirrors If bright light enters the vehicle from behind, the door mirrors will automatically dim when it WARNING is dark outside or when lighting conditions are low, for example when driving in tunnels. The door mirror on the passenger side is Auto-dim is always active when the engine is curved to improve visibility. Objects in the running, except when reverse gear is engaged. mirror may appear farther away than they actually are. NOTE The joystick in the drivers' door control panel Adjustments to the sensitivity level will not is used to adjust the position of the door mir- be noticeable immediately but will instead rors. take effect after a short period of time. There are also several automatic settings that can also be connected to the memory function The sensitivity level for dimming will affect buttons for the power seat*. both the rearview mirror and door mirrors. Related information To change the dimming sensitivity level: • HomeLink®* (p. 421) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center • Compass* (p. 425) display. • Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. function (p. 163) 3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164) select Normal, Dark or Light. }}

* Option/accessory. 163 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| The rearview mirror has two sensors - one Adjusting the door mirrors 2. Adjust the position using the joystick pointing forward and one pointing rearward - To improve visibility to the rear, the door mir- located between the buttons. which work together to identify and eliminate rors need to be adjusted to the driver's height 3. Press the L or R button again. The light in glare. The forward-pointing sensor monitors and seating position. the button will go out. ambient light, while the rearward-pointing There are several automatic settings that can sensor monitors light from the headlights of Automatically folding door mirrors* also be connected to the memory function following vehicles. The door mirrors can be automatically folded buttons for the power seat*. For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto- when driving or parking in tight spaces. dim, the rearview mirror must also be equip- Controls used for door mirrors 1. Press the L and R buttons at the same ped with auto-dim. time. 2. Release the buttons after about 1 second. NOTE The mirrors will automatically stop when If the sensors are obstructed by e.g. a they are completely folded in. parking permit, transponder, sunshade or Open the mirrors by pressing L and R at the objects on the seats or in the cargo com- same time. The mirrors will automatically stop partment in a way that prevents light from when they reach the last-used setting. reaching the sensors, the auto-dim function in the door and rearview mirrors will Resetting the mirrors' position be reduced. A mirror that has been moved out of position manually (e.g. hit or bumped into) must be Related information Door mirror controls. electrically returned to its original position for • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 163) automatic folding* to function properly. The joystick in the drivers' door control panel • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164) is used to adjust the position of the door mir- 1. Fold in the mirrors by pressing the L and R rors. The ignition must be in at least mode I. buttons at the same time. 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror 2. Open them again by pressing the L and R or R for the right door mirror. The button buttons at the same time. will light up. 3. Repeat the above procedure as needed. The mirrors return to their original positions.

164 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Tilting when parking3 Automatic folding when the vehicle is Panoramic roof* The door mirrors can be tilted down to help locked* The panoramic roof is divided into two glass give the driver a better view along the sides of In the center display, you can set the door mir- sections. The front section can be opened the vehicle, e.g. of the curb when parking. rors to retract/extend automatically when the vertically at the rear edge (ventilation posi- vehicle is locked/unlocked with the key. – Select reverse gear and press the L or R tion) or horizontally (open position). The rear mirror button. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top section cannot be moved. Please note that the button may need to be view. The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and sun curtain made of perforated fabric (located pressed twice depending on settings. When 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. the door mirror is tilted down, the light in the beneath the glass sections) for extra protec- button will flash. When reverse gear is 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- tion in e.g. bright sunlight. engaged, the door mirrors will automatically vate/deactivate. start to move after 3 seconds and will reach their original position after about 8 seconds. NOTE Automatically tilting when parking3 If the door mirrors are folded in manually using the L and R buttons and then the With this setting, the door mirrors will auto- vehicle is locked, the mirrors will not automatically tilt down when reverse gear is matically fold out when the vehicle is engaged. The folded position is preset and unlocked, even if this preference has been cannot be adjusted. set. In this case, the mirrors must be folded 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top out manually. view. Related information 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper- • Rearview/door mirrors (p. 163) ated using the controls in the ceiling. 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, • select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to Adjusting the rearview mirror dimming function (p. 163) To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur- activate/deactivate and to select which tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II. mirror to tilt. • Storing positions for seats and mirrors (p. 180) To immediately return the door mirrors to their original position, press the L or R button • Activating and deactivating the heated twice. rear window and door mirrors (p. 208)

3 * Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat with memory buttons . }}

* Option/accessory. 165 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• * || WARNING CAUTION Keyless locking and unlocking (p. 239) • Locking and unlocking using the remote Children, other passengers or objects can • Remove ice and snow before opening key (p. 225) be trapped by the moving parts. the panoramic roof. Be careful not to • Always operate the windows with cau- scratch any surfaces or damage the tion. trim. • Do not allow children to play with the • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it operating controls. is frozen in place. • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. • Remember to always cut the current to Wind blocker the power windows by setting the vehicle's electrical system to ignition mode 0 and then taking the key with you when leaving the vehicle. • Never stick objects or body parts out through the windows, even if the vehicle electrical system is completely turned off.

CAUTION • Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are installed. The panoramic roof is equipped with a wind • Never place heavy objects on the pan- blocker that folds up when the roof is open. oramic roof. Related information • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 167) • Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun curtain (p. 169) • Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 160)

166 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Operating the panoramic roof CAUTION CAUTION The panoramic roof and sun curtain are oper- • Do not open the panoramic roof when Check that the panoramic roof is properly ated using a control in the ceiling panel, and load carriers are installed. closed when closing. both are equipped with pinch protection. • Never place heavy objects on the pan- WARNING oramic roof. The movement of the roof will stop if the con- Children, other passengers or objects can trol is released during manual operation or be trapped by the moving parts. when the glass has reached the comfort4 or • Always operate the windows with cau- CAUTION fully open/closed position. The movement of tion. • Remove ice and snow before opening both the panoramic roof and the sun curtain is • Do not allow children to play with the the panoramic roof. Be careful not to also stopped if the control in the ceiling is operating controls. scratch any surfaces or damage the operated again in the direction opposite that trim. of the current direction of movement. • Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it The panoramic roof and sun curtain are also • Remember to always cut the current to is frozen in place. equipped with pinch protection. If there is any the power windows by setting the problem with the pinch protection, a rest pro- vehicle's electrical system to ignition cedure can be tested. mode 0 and then taking the key with To operate the panoramic roof and sun cur- you when leaving the vehicle. tain, the ignition must be in mode I or II. NOTE • Never stick objects or body parts out It can also be operated using keyless opening* through the windows, even if the vehi- with the door handle. For manual opening, the sun curtain must cle electrical system is completely be completely open before the panoramic turned off. WARNING roof can be opened. For the reverse procedure, the panoramic roof must be com- Make sure that no child or other passenger pletely closed before the sun curtain can comes into contact with the windows as they are closing with keyless closing*. be completely closed.

NOTE It may not be possible to operate the windows in low temperatures.

4 The comfort position is a position which helps keep wind and resonance sounds to a comfortably low level. }}

* Option/accessory. 167 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| Opening and closing ventilation Fully opening and closing the Auto operation position panoramic roof with the control in the 1. To open the sun curtain to the fully open ceiling position, pull the control backward to the auto open mode and release. 2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort position, pull the control backward a second time to the automatic opening position and release. 3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the control backward a third time to the automatic opening position and release. Close by repeating the above procedure in reverse - push the control forward/down to Ventilation position, rear edge raised. the auto close position. Open by pushing the control upward Operation, manual mode Automatic operation - rapid opening or once. closing Operation, automatic mode Close by pushing the control downward The panoramic roof and sun curtain can be once. Manual operation opened or closed simultaneously: When ventilation mode is selected, the rear 1. To open the sun curtain, pull the control – Open - press the control backward twice edge of the front section of the roof is raised. backward to the manual open mode. to the automatic operation position and If the sun curtain is fully closed when ventila- 2. To open the panoramic roof to the comfort release. tion position is selected, it will automatically position, pull the control backward a sec- – open approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches). Close - press the control forward/down ond time to the manual opening position. twice to the automatic operation position If the panoramic roof is closed from the venti- 3. To open the panoramic roof fully, pull the and release. lation position, the sun curtain will also auto- control backward a third time to the man- matically close. Related information ual opening position. • Panoramic roof* (p. 165) Close by repeating the above procedure in • Auto closing the panoramic roof* sun cur- reverse - push the control forward/down to tain (p. 169) the manual closing position.

168 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Pinch protection for windows and sun cur- Auto closing the panoramic roof* • Locking and unlocking using the remote tains (p. 160) sun curtain key (p. 225) • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239) With this function, the sun curtain closes • Locking and unlocking using the remote automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has key (p. 225) been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is done to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the upholstery against being bleached by the sun. The function is deactivated as the default factory setting and can be activated or deactivated using the center display. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. 2. Tap My Car Locking. Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate.

NOTE The sun curtain also closes when all windows are closed with keyless closing*.

Related information • Panoramic roof* (p. 165) • Operating the panoramic roof* (p. 167) • Pinch protection for windows and sun curtains (p. 160) • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239)

* Option/accessory. 169 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Wiper blades and washer fluid Using the windshield wipers Interval wipers The wipers and the washer fluid are designed The windshield wipers are designed to clean Move the lever upward to put the wip- to improve visibility and the headlight pat- the windshield. The right-side steering wheel ers in interval wiping mode. Set the tern. lever is used to adjust windshield wiper set- number of sweeps per time unit with the The washer nozzles are heated* automatically tings. thumb wheel when interval wipers are in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid selected. from freezing. Continuous wipers When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of Move the lever upward for the wipers washer fluid remaining, a message to refill will to operate at normal speed. appear in the instrument panel. Move the lever upward again for the Related information wipers to operate at high speed. • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) • Using the windshield and headlight wash- CAUTION ers (p. 173) Before activating the wipers, make sure • Using automatic rear window wiping that the wiper blades are not frozen in place and that any snow or ice on the when backing up (p. 175) Right-hand steering wheel lever. windshield and rear window has been • Activating and deactivating the rain sen- The thumb wheel is used to set rain sen- scraped away. sor's memory function (p. 172) sor sensitivity and interval wiper speed. • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 174) Single sweep CAUTION • Move the lever down and release for a Filling washer fluid (p. 606) single sweep. Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- clean the windshield. The windshield must tion (p. 605) Wipers off be wet when the windshield wipers are Move the lever to position 0 to turn off working. • Replacing windshield wiper blades the windshield wipers. (p. 604) Related information • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 173)

170 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Using automatic rear window wiping Using the rain sensor Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain when backing up (p. 175) The rain sensor monitors the amount of water sensor button . • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) on the windshield and automatically starts Move the lever downward for an extra wiper • Activating and deactivating the rain sen- the windshield wipers. Rain sensor sensitivity sweep. sor's memory function (p. 172) can be adjusted using the thumb wheel on the right-hand steering wheel lever. Turn the thumb wheel upward for increased • Using the rear window wiper/washer sensitivity and downward for decreased sensi- (p. 174) tivity. The wipers will make one extra sweep • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) when the thumb wheel is turned upward. • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Deactivate the rain sensor tion (p. 605) Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the • Replacing windshield wiper blades rain sensor button or moving the lever (p. 604) upward to another wiper mode. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in ignition mode 0 or when the engine is switched off. The rain sensor is also automatically deacti- Right-hand steering wheel lever. vated when the wiper blades are put in the Rain sensor button service position. The rain sensor will reactivate Thumb wheel, sensitivity/interval wiper when service mode is switched off. speed CAUTION When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor symbol will be displayed in the The windshield wipers may start inadver- instrument panel. tently and be damaged in automatic car washes. Deactivate the rain sensor when Activating the rain sensor the engine is running or when the ignition When the rain sensor is activated, the engine is in mode I or II. The symbol in the instru- must be running or the ignition in mode I or II ment panel will go out. while the windshield wiper lever is in position 0 or in the single sweep position. }}

171 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

|| Related information Activating and deactivating the • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) • Using the windshield and headlight wash- rain sensor's memory function ers (p. 173) The rain sensor monitors the amount of water • Using automatic rear window wiping on the windshield and automatically starts when backing up (p. 175) the windshield wipers. When the memory function is activated, the • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) rain sensor button does not need to be • Activating and deactivating the rain sen- pressed every time the vehicle is started: sor's memory function (p. 172) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • Using the rear window wiper/washer view. (p. 174) • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) 2. Tap My Car Wipers. • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ tion (p. 605) deactivate the memory function. • Replacing windshield wiper blades Related information (p. 604) • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) • Using the windshield and headlight wash- • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) ers (p. 173) • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 175) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 174) • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) • Putting the wiper blades in service position (p. 605) • Replacing windshield wiper blades (p. 604) • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603)

172 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

• Using the windshield and CAUTION Filling washer fluid (p. 606) headlight washers • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- Avoid activating the washer system when The windshield and headlight washers are tion (p. 605) it is frozen or the fluid reservoir is empty. designed to clean the windshield and head- Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the • Replacing windshield wiper blades lights. Use the right-side steering wheel lever pump. (p. 604) to start the windshield and headlight wash- • ers. Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) Headlight washer* • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) Starting the windshield and headlight To save washer fluid, the headlights are washers washed automatically according to a defined interval when the headlights are on. Reduced washing When there is about 1 liter (1 qt) of washer fluid left in the reservoir and the Washer fluid Level low, refill message is displayed in the instrument panel together with the symbol, the washer fluid supply to the headlights is cut off. This is to prioritize windshield cleaning and visibility through it. The headlights are only washed if high or low beam is on.

Washing function, right-hand steering wheel lever. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) – Move the right-hand steering wheel lever • toward the steering wheel to start the Using automatic rear window wiping windshield and headlight washers. when backing up (p. 175) > After the lever is released, the wipers • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) make several extra sweeps. • Activating and deactivating the rain sensor's memory function (p. 172) • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 174)

* Option/accessory. 173 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Using the rear window wiper/ • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- washer tion (p. 605) The rear window washer/wiper is designed to • Replacing windshield wiper blades clean the rear window. Use the right-side (p. 604) steering wheel lever to start and control the • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) wiper/washer. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) Activating the rear window wiper/ washer

NOTE The rear window wiper motor is equipped with overheating protection that switches Select for interval rear window off the motor if it becomes overheated. The wiper. rear window wiper can be operated again Select for continuous rear window after a cooling-down period. wiper. – Move the right-side steering wheel lever forward to wash/wipe the rear window. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 173) • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 175) • Activating and deactivating the rain sensor's memory function (p. 172) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) • Filling washer fluid (p. 606)

174 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

Using automatic rear window • Replacing windshield wiper blades wiping when backing up (p. 604) If reverse gear is engaged while the wind- • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) shield wipers are on, the rear window wipers • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) will start. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center display. 2. Tap My Car Wipers. 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate automatic rear window wiping when backing up. If the rear window wipers are already in continuous wiper mode, no change will be made when reverse gear is engaged. Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 173) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) • Activating and deactivating the rain sensor's memory function (p. 172) • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 174) • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) • Putting the wiper blades in service position (p. 605)

175

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Manual front seats Raise/lower the seat by moving the lever Related information The front seats can be adjusted in a number up/down. • Power* front seats (p. 179) of different ways to help enhance your seat- Change the backrest tilt by turning the • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) ing comfort. knob on the backrest. • Storing positions for seats and mirrors (p. 180) • Using stored positions for seats and mirrors (p. 181) • Adjusting* front seat cushion length (p. 182) • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 182)

Move the seat forward/backing by lifting The head restraint can be adjusted up or the handle and moving the seat to a suita- down by pressing the button and manually ble distance from the steering wheel and moving the head restraint to the desired pedals. Check to make sure the seat is position. securely locked into place after its setting has been changed. WARNING * Change the length of the seat cushion by • pulling up the lever and moving the cush- Do not adjust the seat while driving. ion forward/backward. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In Raise/lower the front edge of the seat addition, position the seat as far rear- 1 cushion* by moving the control up/down. ward as comfort and control allow. Adjust lumbar support* by pressing the • Check that the seat is securely locked button up/down/forward/rearward. into position after adjusting.

1 Only applies to the driver's seat.

178 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Power* front seats • Adjusting* front seat cushion length Adjusting the power* front seats The front seats can be adjusted in a number (p. 182) Set the desired seating position using the of different ways to help enhance your seat- • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* controls on the front seat cushion. Activate ing comfort. The power seat can be moved (p. 182) lumbar support* by pressing the four-way forward/backward and up/down. The front control. edge of the seat cushion can be raised/ lowered and the tilt of the backrest can be adjusted. Lumbar support* can be adjusted up/down/forward/rearward. The length of the seat cushion can be adjusted manually*. The seats can be adjusted when the engine is running and for a certain period of time after the door has been unlocked without the engine running. They can also be adjusted for a short period after the engine is turned off.

CAUTION The power seats have an overload protec- Activate and use the lumbar support con- tor that is triggered if a seat is blocked by trol by pressing the four-way control any object. If this occurs, remove the upwards/downwards/forwards/back- object and attempt to adjust the seat wards. again. Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion by moving the control up/down. Related information Raise/lower the seat by moving the con- • Manual front seats (p. 178) trol up/down. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) Move the seat forward/rearward by mov- • Storing positions for seats and mirrors ing the control forward/rearward. (p. 180) Change the backrest tilt by moving the • Using stored positions for seats and mir- control forward/backward. rors (p. 181) Only one movement (forward/rearward/up/ down) can be performed at a time. }}

* Option/accessory. 179 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| The front seat backrests cannot be folded Storing positions for seats and 2. Press and hold the M button. The indica- down completely. mirrors tor light in the button will illuminate. Adjustment settings for the power* seat and 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 door mirrors can be stored in the memory or 2 button. buttons. > When the position has been stored in * Two different positions for the power seat the memory button, an audio signal will and the door mirrors can be stored using the sound and the indicator light in the M memory buttons. The buttons are located on button will go out. the inside of either one or both* front doors. If none of the memory buttons are pressed within three seconds, the M button will go out and no position will be stored. The seats or door mirrors must be readjusted before a new memory position can be set. The head restraint can be adjusted up or Related information down by pressing the button and manually • Manual front seats (p. 178) moving the head restraint to the desired * position. • Power front seats (p. 179) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) Related information • Using stored positions for seats and mir- • Manual front seats (p. 178) rors (p. 181) • Power* front seats (p. 179) Button M for storing a setting. • Adjusting* front seat cushion length • Storing positions for seats and mirrors (p. 182) (p. 180) Memory button. • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* • Using stored positions for seats and mir- Memory button. (p. 182) rors (p. 181) • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164) • Adjusting* front seat cushion length Storing positions (p. 182) 1. Adjust the seat and door mirrors to the desired position. • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* (p. 182)

180 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Using stored positions for seats If the memory button is released, the seat and • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* and mirrors door mirrors will stop moving. (p. 182) If the positions for the power* seat and door • Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 164) mirrors have been stored, they can be acti- WARNING vated using the memory buttons. • This list point needs to be translated Using a stored position exactly to: "Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOP- PED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. • The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • The seat rails on the floor must not be A stored position can be used with the front obstructed in any way when the seat is door open or closed: in motion. Front door open – Briefly press one of the memory buttons 1 Related information ( ) or 2 ( ). The power seats and door • Manual front seats (p. 178) mirrors will move and stop at the positions • Power* front seats (p. 179) stored in that button. • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) Front door closed • Storing positions for seats and mirrors – Press and hold one of the memory buttons (p. 180) (1 ( ) or 2 ( ) until the seat and door • Adjusting* front seat cushion length mirrors stop in the positions stored in that (p. 182) memory button.

* Option/accessory. 181 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting* front seat cushion • Using stored positions for seats and mir- Adjusting front seat lumbar length rors (p. 181) support* The length of the seat cushion can be • Adjusting front seat lumbar support* Use the control on the side of the seat cush- adjusted to increase comfort. (p. 182) ion to adjust the lumbar support.

Control for adjusting seat cushion. The four-way button is located on the side of the seat cushion. 1. Grasp the handle on the front of the seat and pull upward. Four-way lumbar support is adjusted using the four-way button (the round one) located on 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. the side of the seat cushion. The lumbar sup- 3. Release the handle and make sure the port can be adjusted forward/backward and seat cushion locks into position. up/down. Related information • Manual front seats (p. 178) • Power* front seats (p. 179) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) • Storing positions for seats and mirrors (p. 180)

182 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting lumbar support • Adjusting* front seat cushion length Folding down the rear seat (p. 182) backrests The rear seat backrest is split into two sections. The two sections can be folded forward individually. WARNING • Adjust the seat and ensure it locks into position before driving. Use caution when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustments could lead to injury. • Long objects must always be securely tied down to help prevent injury or • Press the four-way button up /down damage in the event of sudden brak- to move the lumbar support upward/ ing. downward. • Always turn off the engine and apply • Press the front part of the four-way the parking brake when loading or button to increase lumbar support. unloading the vehicle. • Press the rear part of the four-way but- • Put the gear selector in P to help pre- ton to decrease lumbar support. vent the gear selector from being inadvertently moved. Related information • Manual front seats (p. 178) • Power* front seats (p. 179) CAUTION • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) When the backrest is folded down, make • sure there are no objects in the rear seat, Storing positions for seats and mirrors and the seat belts are not buckled. Other- (p. 180) wise there is a risk of damage to the • Using stored positions for seats and mir- upholstery. rors (p. 181)

}}

* Option/accessory. 183 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| CAUTION Make sure that the rear seat is unoccupied 4. Adjust the center head restraint if neces- and that there are no objects on the seat. sary. The armrest* in the center seat must be Push down the center seat's head raised before the seat backrest is folded WARNING down. restraint manually. When the backrest is restored to an The ski hatch* must be closed before the Pull the handle in the vehicle's left or right rear seat backrest forward to fold down upright position, the red indicator should seat backrest is folded down. no longer be visible. If it is still visible, the the left or right section of the rear seat. backrest is not locked in place. 3. The backrest lock will release and the NOTE backrest will automatically fold down to WARNING The front seats may need to be pushed for- the horizontal position. ward and/or the backrest adjusted so that Make sure that the rear seat backrest and the rear seat backrests can be fully low- Folding up the backrest head restraint are locked securely in place ered. To fold up the backrest to the upright position after the seat is folded up. manually: The head restraints at the outer seats must 1. Move the backrest upward/rearward. always be raised when there is a passenger Folding down the backrests in one of these spots of the rear seat. The vehicle must be stationary and at least 2. Press the backrest until it locks into posi- one of the rear doors must be open before a tion. backrest can be folded down. 3. Fold up the head restraints manually. Related information • Adjusting the rear seat head restraints (p. 185) • Private Locking (p. 248) • Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 249)

184 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting the rear seat head restraints Adjust the center head restraint in the rear seat to the seat occupant's height. Fold down the outboard head restraints* to improve rear visibility. Adjusting the center seat head restraint

To lower the restraint, push and hold the but- Tap the Headrest Fold button (see illustration) while carefully lowering ton to activate/deactivate the head restraint. folding. WARNING The center seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the seat is not occupied. When the center seat is occu- Manually push the head restraint until it clicks pied, the head restraint must be correctly into position. adjusted to the passenger's height, cover- The center head restraint should be adjusted ing the entire back of the head if possible. to suit the passenger's height. The entire back WARNING of the head should be covered if possible. Do not lower the head restraint if there are Manually move the restraint up or down as Folding the rear seat outboard head passengers in any of the rear seats. needed. restraints using the center display* The outer head restraints can be folded via the center display's function view. The head WARNING restraint can be folded down when the vehicle The head restraint must be locked in the is in ignition mode 0. upright position after it has been folded up.

}}

* Option/accessory. 185 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

|| Related information Steering wheel controls and horn Horn • Folding down the rear seat backrests The steering wheel has a horn and controls (p. 183) for e.g. driver support systems and voice control.

The horn is located in the center of the steering wheel. Related information * Steering wheel keypads and paddles . • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187) Driver support system controls.2 Paddle* for manually shifting gears (automatic transmission). Controls for voice commands, accessing menus and messages, and handling phone calls.

2 Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Alert* and Pilot Assist.

186 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted to various positions.

Steering wheel adjuster lever. 1. Move the lever forward to release the steering wheel. The steering wheel's reach and height can be adjusted. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. WARNING 3. Pull the lever back to lock the steering Adjust the steering wheel and ensure it wheel into place. If the lever is difficult to locks into position before driving. Never move, press or lift the steering wheel adjust the steering wheel while driving. lightly while pulling the lever. Related information • Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 186) • Adjusting the power* front seats (p. 179) • Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance (p. 254)

* Option/accessory. 187

CLIMATE CONTROL CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate • Climate system controls (p. 201) Climate zones The vehicle is equipped with electronic cli- The vehicle is divided into climate zones to mate control. The climate system cools, heats make it possible to set different temperatures and dehumidifies the air in the passenger for different parts of the passenger compart- compartment. ment. All of the climate system functions are controlled from the center display and the buttons 1-zone climate system on the center console. Certain rear seat functions can also be controlled from the climate controls* on the rear of the tunnel console.

NOTE The climate system can be used to cool down the media system in the center display if needed. In these cases, the message Climate system Cooling the infotainment system will be shown in the instrument panel. Climate zones with 1-zone climate system. In 1-zone climate systems, the passenger Related information compartment temperature is set jointly for the • Climate zones (p. 190) left and right sides of the vehicle. • Climate control sensors (p. 191) • Perceived temperature (p. 192) • Climate control system voice commands (p. 192) • Parking climate* (p. 212) • Air quality (p. 193) • Air distribution (p. 196)

190 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

2-zone climate system* Climate control sensors Related information The climate system has a number of sensors • Climate (p. 190) to help regulate the climate settings in the • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195) vehicle. Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. Location of the sensors

Climate zones with 2-zone climate system. In 2-zone climate systems, the passenger compartment temperature can be set separately for the left and right sides of the vehicle. Related information • Climate (p. 190) Sunlight sensors - on the upper side of the dashboard. Humidity sensor - in the rearview mirror console. Ambient temperature sensor - in the right- side door mirror. Passenger compartment temperature sensor - near the buttons in the center console. On vehicles equipped with the Interior Air Quality System*, there is also an air quality sensor in the climate system's air intake.

* Option/accessory. 191 CLIMATE CONTROL

Perceived temperature Climate control system voice • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic cli- The climate control system regulates the cli- commands1 mate control. mate in the passenger compartment based Voice commands can be used for the climate • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" - on perceived temperature, not actual tem- control system to e.g. change temperature, activates/deactivates air conditioning. perature. * activate seat heating or change blower • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" - The selected passenger compartment tem- speed. activates/deactivates air recirculation. perature is based on the physical perception of Tap and say one of the following com- • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off the current ambient temperature, airflow mands: speed, humidity, sunlight in the passenger defroster" - activates/deactivates win- compartment, etc. • "Climate" - starts a command dialog for dow and door mirror defrosting. climate controls and provides examples of • The system has a sunlight sensor that detects "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn off max commands that can be used. defroster" - activates/deactivates max which side of the vehicle the sunlight is shin- • ing on and adjusts the temperature accord- "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets defroster. ingly. This means that the temperature of the desired temperature. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear air coming out of the vents may be different • "Raise temperature"/"Lower defroster" - Activates/deactivates heated for the left and right sides, even if the tem- temperature" - raises/lowers the set tem- rear window and door mirrors. perature setting is the same for both sides. perature. • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn • Related information "Sync temperature" - synchronizes the steering wheel heat off" - activates/ * * • Climate (p. 190) temperature for all climate zones in the deactivates heated steering wheel . vehicle with the temperature set for the • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower driver's side. steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the level of steering wheel heating*. desired air vent. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - - activates/deactivates seat heating*. closes the desired air vent. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" - • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - raises/lowers the level of seat heating*. changes blower speed to Max/Off. • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" - raises/lowers the set blower speed.

1 Certain markets only.

192 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

• NOTE Air quality Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196) The materials used in the passenger compart- Not all system languages support voice ment and air filtering system have been control. If a language supports voice con- selected to ensure a high level of air quality in trol, it is marked with a symbol in the the passenger compartment. list of available system languages. Read more about where the information is found Materials used in the passenger in the section on voice control settings. compartment The materials in the passenger compartment Related information are designed to be pleasant and comfortable, • Climate (p. 190) even for people with asthma or allergies. • Voice Control (p. 138) The materials have been developed and tested to reduce dust in the passenger compartment • Use voice recognition (p. 139) and make it easier to keep clean. • Voice control settings (p. 142) The mats in both the passenger compartment and cargo compartment can be easily removed for cleaning. Use Volvo-recommended cleaning agents and car care products to clean the interior. Air filtering systems In addition to the passenger compartment air filter, the vehicle is also equipped with other air cleaning systems that help you maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment. Related information • Climate (p. 190) • CleanZone* (p. 194) • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194) • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195)

* Option/accessory. 193 CLIMATE CONTROL

CleanZone* • The Interior Air Quality System* is acti- Clean Zone Interior Package* The CleanZone function monitors the condi- vated. Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) is a series tions affecting good air quality in the passen- • The blower is activated. of modifications that filters even more allergy ger compartment and indicates whether they • Air recirculation is deactivated. and asthma-inducing substances and other are fulfilled or not. pollutants from the passenger compartment. CZIP includes the following: NOTE • An enhanced function that starts the CleanZone does not indicate that the air blower when the vehicle is unlocked using quality is good, but only that the conditions the remote key. The blower will then fill for good air quality have been met. the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and Related information switches off automatically after a period of • Air quality (p. 193) time or when one of the passenger com- • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194) partment doors is opened. The amount of time the blower runs gradually decreases • * Interior Air Quality System (p. 195) due to reduced need up until the vehicle is • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196) 4 years old. The indicator is shown in the center dis- • The fully automatic Interior Air Quality play's Climate view. System (IAQS). The indicator is shown in the climate bar when Climate view is not open. Related information • Air quality (p. 193) If the conditions are not met, the text Clean Zone will be shown in white. When all the • CleanZone* (p. 194) conditions are met, the text will change to • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195) blue. • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196) The following conditions must be met: • All doors and tailgate are closed. • All side windows and panoramic roof* are closed.

194 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Interior Air Quality System* • Passenger compartment air filter (p. 196) Activating and deactivating the air Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully quality sensor* automatic air quality system that removes The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- gases and particles to reduce odors and con- mated Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). taminants in the passenger compartment. The air quality sensor can be switched on or IAQS is part of the Clean Zone Interior off. Package (CZIP) and removes air contaminants 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitric oxides display. and ground-level ozone. 2. Tap Climate. If the system's air quality sensors detect contaminants in the outside air, the air intake 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/ closes and air recirculation is activated. deactivate the air quality sensor. Related information NOTE • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 195) To ensure optimal air quality in the passenger compartment, the air quality sensor should always be engaged. Recirculation is limited in cold weather to prevent fogging. In the event of fogging, use the defroster functions for the windshield, side windows and rear window.

Related information • Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* (p. 195) • Air quality (p. 193) • CleanZone* (p. 194) • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194)

* Option/accessory. 195 CLIMATE CONTROL

Passenger compartment air filter Air distribution All air entering the passenger compartment The climate system distributes incoming air through the climate control system intake is through a number of vents in the passenger filtered. compartment. Replacing the passenger Automatic and manual air distribution compartment filter When the auto-climate feature is on, air distri- To maintain the high performance of the cli- bution is regulated automatically. Air distribu- mate control system, the filter must be tion can also be controlled manually. replaced regularly. Follow Volvo's service schedule for recommended replacement inter- Adjustable air vents vals. When driving in areas with a lot of smog, Certain air vents in the vehicle are adjustable, dust, etc., the filter may need to be changed which means they can be opened/closed and Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger more frequently. the direction of the air flow from the vent can compartment. be adjusted. With 1-zone climate system - four on NOTE dashboard. There are two types of passenger compart- 2-zone climate system* - two additional ment filters. Make sure that the correct fil- vents on the rear side of the tunnel con- ter is installed. sole.

Related information NOTE • Air quality (p. 193) At low ambient temperatures, no air is dis- • CleanZone* (p. 194) tributed from the adjustable air vent nozzles at the rear of the tunnel console. • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 194) • * Interior Air Quality System (p. 195) Related information • Climate (p. 190) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 197) • Opening, closing and directing air vents (p. 197) • Air distribution options (p. 198)

196 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Adjusting air distribution Opening, closing and directing air Air distribution can be adjusted manually if vents needed. Some of the air vents in the passenger compartment can be individually opened, closed and directed. Misting can be eliminated by directing the outer air vents towards the door windows. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center dis- Direct the outer air vents into the passenger play. compartment to maintain a comfortable temperature in warm weather. Opening and closing the air vents Air distribution buttons in Climate view. – Turn the knob in the center of the air vent Air distribution - windshield defrost vents to open/close airflow from the vent. Air distribution - dashboard and center When the mark on the knob is vertical, the console air vents airflow is strongest. Air distribution - floor air vents Directing air flow – 2. Tap one or more air distribution buttons to Move the lever in the center of the air vent open/close the airflow for that vent. horizontally or vertically to direct the airflow from the vent. > The air distribution changes and the buttons will light up or go out. Related information • Related information Air distribution (p. 196) • Air distribution (p. 196) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 197) • Opening, closing and directing air vents • Air distribution options (p. 198) (p. 197) • Air distribution options (p. 198)

197 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution options Air distribution can be adjusted manually if needed. The following options are available. Air distribution Purpose If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system will revert to automatic mode.

Main airflow from defroster vents. Some airflow from other Helps remove ice and condensation in cold and humid weather vents. (blower speed should not be set too low).

Main airflow from dashboard vents. Some airflow from other Provides effective cooling in warm weather. vents.

Main airflow from floor vents. Some airflow from other vents. Provides heating or cooling in footwell areas.

198 CLIMATE CONTROL

Air distribution Purpose Main airflow from defroster and dashboard vents. Some air- Provides a comfortable climate in warm and dry weather. flow from other vents.

Main airflow from defroster and floor vents. Some airflow from Provides a comfortable climate and effective defogging in cold other vents. and humid weather.

Main airflow from dashboard and floor vents. Some airflow Provides a comfortable climate in sunny, cool weather. from other vents.

Main airflow from defroster, dashboard and floor vents. Provides balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

}}

199 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Related information • Air distribution (p. 196) • Opening, closing and directing air vents (p. 197) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 197)

200 CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate system controls Depending on equipment level, Climate view The climate system functions are controlled may be divided into several tabs. Toggle from physical buttons on the center console, between the tabs by swiping the screen to the the center display, and the climate panel on left/right or by tapping the desired heading. the rear side of the tunnel console*. Physical buttons in the center console

Climate row with 2-zone climate. Climate row with 1-zone climate has certain differences in terms of control locations. Temperature controls for driver and passenger side.2 Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as Button for max defroster. heated steering wheel*.3 Button for heated rear window and door Button for opening Climate view. The mirrors. graphic in the button shows activated climate system settings. Climate bar in the center display The most common climate system functions Climate view in the center display can be controlled from the climate bar. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view.

2 With 1-zone climate, the control is located to the right of the center button. 3 With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row. }}

* Option/accessory. 201 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Main climate Blower control. • Setting the blower speed for the front In addition to the functions in the climate bar, seats (p. 209) AUTO - Automatic climate control. other main climate system functions can be • Synchronize temperature (p. 211) controlled from the Main climate tab. Parking climate* • Activating and deactivating air condition- Parking climate functions can be controlled ing (p. 211) from the Parking climate tab. Climate controls on the rear side of the tunnel console* If the vehicle is equipped with heated rear seats*, there are physical buttons on the rear side of the tunnel console to control this function. Related information • Climate (p. 190) • Activating and deactivating power front seats* (p. 203) • Activating and deactivating the heated rear seats* (p. 204) • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 204) • Activating auto climate control (p. 205) • Activating and deactivating recirculation Max, Rear – Controls for defrosting win- (p. 206) dows and door mirrors. • Activating and deactivating max defroster AC - Air conditioning controls. (p. 207) • Activating and deactivating the heated Recirc - Air recirculation controls. rear window and door mirrors (p. 208) Air distribution controls.

202 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating power WARNING Activating and deactivating the front seats* heated front seat* Heated seats should not be used by people The seats can be heated for added comfort who have difficulty detecting temperature The seats can be heated for added comfort for the driver and passengers in cold weather. increases due to nerve damage or numb- for the driver and passengers in cold weather. ness or who for another reason may have Seat heating can be set to automatically acti- difficulty operating the controls for seat vate when the engine is started. When set to heating. automatically activate, heating will be turned on at low ambient temperatures. 1. Tap the left- or right-side steering wheel Related information and seat button in the center display's cli- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center • Climate system controls (p. 201) display. mate bar to open the controls for steering • wheel and seat heating. Activating and deactivating the heated 2. Tap Climate. front seat* (p. 203) If the vehicle is not equipped with ventila- 3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level ted seats or heated steering wheel (for the and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level driver's side), the button for seat heating is to activate/deactivate automatic start of directly accessible in the climate bar. heated driver's and passenger seat. > An "A" will be displayed next to the relevant seat heating button in the climate bar when auto start has been activated. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select 2. Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to level after the function has been activated. select one of the four levels: Off, High, Medium or Low. Related information > The level is changed and the set level is • Climate system controls (p. 201) displayed in the button. • Activating and deactivating power front seats* (p. 203)

* Option/accessory. 203 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the WARNING Activating and deactivating the heated rear seats* heated steering wheel* Heated seats should not be used by people The seats can be heated for added comfort who have difficulty detecting temperature The steering wheel can be heated for added for the driver and passengers in cold weather. increases due to nerve damage or numb- comfort in cold weather. ness or who for another reason may have Activating and deactivating the heated difficulty operating the controls for seat rear seats from the rear seat heating.

Related information 1. Tap the driver's side steering wheel and • Climate system controls (p. 201) seat button in the climate bar in the center display to open the controls for steering wheel and seat heating. If the vehicle is not equipped with heated or ventilated seats, the button for steering wheel heating is directly accessible in the climate bar.

Buttons for seat heating on the rear side of the tunnel console. 2. Tap the steering wheel heating button – Press repeatedly on the left or right seat repeatedly to select one of the four levels: heating buttons on the rear side of the Off, High, Medium or Low. tunnel console to select one of four levels: > The level is changed and the set level is Off, High, Medium or Low. displayed in the button. > The level is changed and the indicator lights in the button display the level. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 201) • Activating and deactivating automatic steering wheel heating* (p. 205)

204 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating Activating auto climate control NOTE automatic steering wheel heating* If auto climate control is activated, several cli- It is possible to change the temperature The steering wheel can be heated for added mate system functions are controlled auto- and blower speed without deactivating comfort in cold weather. matically. automatic climate control. Automatic cli- Steering wheel heating can be set to automat- mate control is deactivated when the air ically activate when the engine is started. distribution is changed manually or when When set to automatically activate, heating the max defroster is activated. will be turned on at low ambient temperatures. 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center dis- Related information 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center play. • Climate system controls (p. 201) display. 2. Tap or press and hold AUTO Climate/> 2. Tap Climate. • Tap - air recirculation, air conditioning 3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating and air distribution are controlled auto- Level to activate/deactivate automatic matically. start of heated steering wheel. • Press and hold - air recirculation, air > An "A" will be displayed next to the conditioning and air distribution are heated steering wheel button in the cli- controlled automatically. Temperature mate bar when auto start has been and blower speed are changed to activated. standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select speed 3. level after the function has been activated. > Auto climate mode is activated and the button lights up. Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 204)

* Option/accessory. 205 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating Related information Activating and deactivating the recirculation • Climate system controls (p. 201) recirculation timer setting The climate system's recirculation function • Activating and deactivating the recircula- The climate system's recirculation function helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, tion timer setting (p. 206) helps shut out smog, smoke, exhaust fumes, etc. by reusing the air in the passenger com- etc. by reusing the air in the passenger compartment. partment. When the recirculation timer is activated, air recirculation will switch off automatically after 20 minutes.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center bar to open Climate view in the center dis- display. play. 2. Tap Climate. 3. Tap Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the recirculation timer. Related information 2. Tap Recirc. • Activating and deactivating recirculation > Air recirculation is activated/deacti- (p. 206) vated and the button lights up/goes out.

CAUTION If the air in the vehicle is recirculated too long, there is a risk of fogging on the inside of the windows.

NOTE Recirculation cannot be activated when the max defroster is on.

206 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating max defroster Max defroster is used to quickly remove condensation and ice from windows. 2. Tap Max. Max defroster deactivates automatic climate control and air recirculation, activates the air > Max defroster is activated/deactivated conditioning, and changes blower speed to 5 and the button lights up/goes out. and temperature to HI. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 201) NOTE The volume increases when the blower speed is changed to 5. Button in center console. – Tap the button. When max defroster is deactivated, the cli- > Max defroster is activated/deactivated mate system reverts to the previous settings. and the button lights up/goes out. Activating and deactivating max Activating and deactivating max defroster from the center console defroster from the center display A button in the center console offers quick access to the max defroster.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center display.

207 CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating the Activating and deactivating the heated Automatically activating and heated rear window and door rear window and door mirrors from deactivating the heated rear mirrors the center display window and door mirrors The heated rear window and door mirrors are The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove condensation and ice used to quickly remove condensation and ice from the glass. from the glass. It is possible to select whether rear window Activating and deactivating the heated 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate and door mirror heating should be automati- rear window and door mirrors from bar to open Climate view in the center dis- cally activated or deactivated when the engine the center console play. is started. With automatic start activated, A button in the center console offers quick heating will be activated when there is a risk access to the heated rear window and door of ice or condensation on the windows or mir- mirrors functions. rors. Heating is automatically switched off when the window or door mirror is sufficiently 2. Tap Rear. warm and the condensation or ice is gone. > Heated windows and door mirrors are 1. Tap Settings in the Top view in the center activated and the button lights up/goes display. out. 2. Tap Climate. Related information 3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ • Climate system controls (p. 201) deactivate automatic rear window and • Automatically activating and deactivating door heating. the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 208) Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 208) Button in center console. – Tap the button. > Heated windows and door mirrors are activated and the button lights up/goes out.

208 CLIMATE CONTROL

Setting the blower speed for the NOTE front seats4 The climate system automatically adapts The blower can be set to several different airflow as needed within the set blower automatically controlled speeds for the front speed, which means that airflow speed seat. may vary slightly within the same blower speed.

Related information 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate • Climate system controls (p. 201) bar to open Climate view in the center display. Blower control buttons in Climate view. 2. Tap the desired blower speed: Off, 1-5 or Max. > The blower speed will be changed and the buttons for the set speed will light up.

CAUTION The air conditioning will not engage if the blower is turned off completely, which may cause fogging on the inside of the windows.

4 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system.

209 CLIMATE CONTROL

Setting the temperature for the Related information front seats5 • Climate system controls (p. 201) The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the front seat climate zones.

Temperature control.7 2. Set the temperature by doing one of the following: • dragging the control to the desired temperature, or Temperature buttons in the climate bar.6 • tapping +− to raise/lower the tempera- 1. Tap the left- or right-side temperature but- ture. tons in the center display's climate bar to open the control. > The temperature will be set and the button will display the new temperature.

NOTE Heating/cooling cannot be accelerated by choosing a higher/lower temperature than the desired temperature.

5 The same setting applies to the rear seats with the 2-zone climate system. 6 With 1-zone climate, the temperature button is to the right of the center button. 7 With 1-zone climate, the control is horizontal instead of vertical.

210 CLIMATE CONTROL

Synchronize temperature8 the temperature setting for a climate zone Activating and deactivating air The temperature in the different climate other than the driver's. conditioning zones of the vehicle can be synchronized Related information The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies with the temperature set for the driver's side. incoming air as needed. • Climate system controls (p. 201) When the air conditioning is activated, it will be switched on and off automatically by the climate system as needed.

1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate bar to open Climate view in the center display.

Synchronization button on the driver's side temperature control. 1. Tap the driver's side temperature button in 2. Tap AC. the center display's climate bar to open > Air conditioning is activated/deacti- the control. vated and the button lights up/goes 2. Tap Synchronize temperature. out. > The temperature for all of the vehicle's climate zones will be synchronized with NOTE the one set for the driver's side and the For optimal air conditioning function, close synchronization symbol will be dis- all the side windows and the panoramic played next to the temperature button. roof*. Synchronization is stopped with another press on Synchronize temperature or by changing

8 Not available with 1-zone climate system. }}

* Option/accessory. 211 CLIMATE CONTROL

* * || NOTE Parking climate Preconditioning Parking climate is an umbrella term for vari- Preconditioning is a climate function that, if The air conditioning cannot be activated ous functions that improve the passenger possible, attempts to achieve a comfortable when the fan speed is set to Off. compartment climate when the vehicle is temperature in the passenger compartment parked, e.g. preconditioning. before driving. Related information Parking climate functions are con- Preconditioning can be started immediately or • Climate system controls (p. 201) trolled from the Parking climate tab started at a preset time using a timer. in the center display's Climate view. Tap the symbol in the center of the In warm weather, the climate system venti- climate bar to open Climate view. lates the passenger compartment by blowing air in from outside. The function cannot heat Related information the passenger compartment. • Climate (p. 190) • Preconditioning* (p. 212) NOTE • Climate comfort retaining function* During preconditioning of the passenger (p. 216) compartment, the vehicle works to reach a • Parking climate symbols and messages* comfortable temperature and not the tem- (p. 218) perature set in the climate system.

Related information • Parking climate* (p. 212) • Starting and stopping preconditioning* (p. 213) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)

212 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Starting and stopping tings. Preconditioning ventilates the passen- Preconditioning timer* preconditioning* ger compartment by blowing in air from out- The timer can be set to finish preconditioning side. at a predetermined time. Preconditioning ventilates the passenger compartment, if possible, before driving. The The passenger compartment can also be pre- The timer can store up to 8 preset times for conditioned using the Engine Remote Start function can be started in the center display • a time on a particular date or from a cellular phone. (ERS)9 function using the Volvo On Call* app. • a time on one or more days of the week, Related information with or without the repeat function. Starting and stopping from the vehicle • Parking climate* (p. 212) • Preconditioning* (p. 212) Related information • Preconditioning* (p. 212) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 213) • Adding and editing timer settings for pre- * 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate conditioning (p. 214) bar to open Climate view in the center dis- • Activating and deactivating precondition- play. ing timer* (p. 215) 2. Select the Parking climate tab. • Deleting preconditioning timer settings* (p. 215) 3. Tap Preconditioning. > Preconditioning starts/stops and the button lights up/goes out.

NOTE The vehicle doors and windows should be closed during preconditioning of the passenger compartment.

Starting from app A device with the Volvo On Call* app can be used to start preconditioning or check set-

9 Certain markets only.

* Option/accessory. 213 CLIMATE CONTROL

Adding and editing timer settings 3. Tap Add timer. Editing the timer setting for preconditioning* > A pop-up window will appear. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. The preconditioning timer can store up to 8 2. Select the Parking climate tab. preset timer settings. NOTE 3. Tap the timer setting you would like to It is not possible to add a time setting if Adding a timer setting change. there are already 8 settings for the timer. > A pop-up window will appear. Delete a time setting to be able to add a new one. 4. To edit a timer setting, follow the procedures described under the heading "Add- ing a timer setting" above. 4. Tap Date to set a time for a specific date. Tap Days to set a time for one or more Related information * days of the week. • Preconditioning (p. 212) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 213) With Days: Activate/deactivate the repeat function by selecting/deselecting the • Activating and deactivating precondition- Repeat weekly checkbox. ing timer* (p. 215) * 5. With Date: Select a date for precondition- • Deleting preconditioning timer settings Button for adding a timer setting in the Parking ing by scrolling in the date list using the (p. 215) climate tab in Climate view. arrows. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. With Days: Select days of the week for 2. Select the Parking climate tab. preconditioning by tapping the buttons for the days. 6. Set the time at which preconditioning should be completed by scrolling using the arrows in the clock. 7. Tap Confirm to add a timer setting. > The timer setting will be added to the list and activated.

214 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Activating and deactivating • Adding and editing timer settings for pre- Deleting preconditioning timer preconditioning timer* conditioning* (p. 214) settings* Timer settings in the preconditioning timer • Deleting preconditioning timer settings* A preconditioning timer setting that is no can be activated or deactivated as needed. (p. 215) longer needed can be deleted.

Timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in Climate The button for editing a list/deleting a timer setting in view. the Parking climate tab in Climate view. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 1. Open Climate view in the center display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Activate/deactivate a timer setting by tap- 3. Tap Edit list. ping the timer button to the right of the 4. Tap the editing icon to the right in the list. setting. > The icon will change to the text Delete. > The timer is activated/deactivated and the button lights up/goes out. 5. Tap Delete to confirm. > The timer setting will be deleted from Related information the list. • Preconditioning* (p. 212) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 213)

}}

* Option/accessory. 215 CLIMATE CONTROL

|| Related information Climate comfort retaining Related information • Preconditioning* (p. 212) function* • Parking climate* (p. 212) • Preconditioning timer* (p. 213) The climate in the passenger compartment • Starting and switching off the climate can be maintained when the vehicle is * • Adding and editing timer settings for pre- retaining function when parking (p. 217) parked, e.g. if the engine is turned off but the conditioning* (p. 214) driver or passengers remain in the vehicle. • Activating and deactivating preconditioning timer* (p. 215) This function can only be direct-started from the center display. The function utilizes several of the vehicle's systems: • Residual heat from the engine is used to help heat the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature. • In warm weather, the ventilation system cools the passenger compartment by blowing air in from outside.

NOTE Climate comfort maintenance will be deactivated if the vehicle is locked from the outside in order to avoid using residual engine heat unnecessarily. This function is intended to be used to maintain climate comfort when the driver or a passenger remains in the vehicle after the engine is turned off. The climate comfort retaining function is limited in duration in cold weather depending on the amount of residual warmth available.

216 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CONTROL

Starting and switching off the NOTE climate retaining function when parking* Climate comfort maintenance will be deactivated if the vehicle is locked from the out- The climate retaining function maintains the side in order to avoid using residual engine climate settings in the vehicle after the heat unnecessarily. This function is engine has been switched off. The function intended to be used to maintain climate can be activated in the center display. comfort when the driver or a passenger remains in the vehicle after the engine is turned off. The climate comfort retaining function is 1. Tap the symbol in the center of the climate limited in duration in cold weather depend- bar to open Climate view in the center dis- ing on the amount of residual warmth play. available. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. Related information 3. Tap Keep climate comfort. • Climate comfort retaining function* > The climate comfort retaining function (p. 216) will be activated/deactivated and the button light will go on/off.

NOTE Maintained climate comfort is not possible when there is not sufficient residual engine heat to maintain the climate settings in the passenger compartment, or if the outside temperature is above approximately 20 °C (68 °F).

* Option/accessory. 217 CLIMATE CONTROL

Parking climate symbols and Messages related to parking climate can also messages* be displayed in a device that has the Volvo On * A number of symbols and messages related Call app. to parking climate may be displayed in the instrument panel.

Symbol Message Meaning

Parking climate Parking climate is not functioning properly. Contact a workshopA to have the system checked as soon as Service required possible.

Parking climate Parking climate is temporarily not functioning properly. If the problem persists, contact a workshopA to have Temporarily unavailable the system checked.

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Parking climate* (p. 212)

218 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking and unlocking Lock indication Lock and alarm indicators on the The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in The turn signals will flash when the vehicle is dashboard several different ways. locked or unlocked. The vehicle can be locked and unlocked Exterior confirmation • using the buttons on the remote key Locking • with the detachable key blade (if the bat- • The turn signals will flash once and the tery in the remote key is discharged) door mirrors will fold in1 to confirm the • keyless* (Passive Entry), the remote key vehicle is locked. must be within range Unlocking • from inside the vehicle using the lock con- • trols in the doors The turn signals will flash twice and the door mirrors will fold out1 to confirm the • remote door unlocking with Volvo On Call. vehicle is unlocked. There are also several types of remote keys The tailgate, hood and all doors must be The locks and alarm indicator will display the that can be used. closed for confirmation to be given. If only the status of the locking system: driver's door is closed when the vehicle is For vehicles equipped with keyless locking • One long flash indicates locking. * locked2, the vehicle will be locked but the turn and unlocking , a smaller, lighter and button- • less key is provided (Key Tag). signals will only flash to indicate locking when When the vehicle is locked, this will be all doors and the tailgate and hood have been indicated by short, pulsating flashes. Related information closed. • Rapid flashing after disabling the alarm • Locking and unlocking using the remote indicates that the alarm has been trig- key (p. 225) gered. • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239) • Locking and unlocking from inside the vehicle (p. 242) • Private Locking (p. 248) • Alarm (p. 250)

1 Only vehicles with power folding mirrors. 2 Does not apply to vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

220 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Lock button indicators Rear door* Lock confirmation settings Front door Settings for how the vehicle confirms locking and unlocking can be adjusted in the center display's Settings menu. To change the locking response settings: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Locking. 3. Tap Visible Locking Feedback to select when the vehicle should provide a visible response: Lock button with indicator light in rear door. • Lock Lock buttons with indicator lights in front door. Illuminated indicator lights in each door indi- • Unlock Illuminated indicator lights in both front door cate that that particular door is locked. If any • Both door is unlocked and opened, the indicator lock buttons indicate that all doors are locked. Or turn off the function by marking Off . If any door is opened, the lights in both doors light in that door will go out. The lights in the will go out. other doors will remain illuminated. 4. Select to receive an audible response when locking the vehicle by marking Other indicators Audible Locking Feedback. The approach lighting and home safe lighting functions may be activated when locking and To change the settings for folding door mir- unlocking. rors* when locking: Related information 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • Lock confirmation settings (p. 221) view. • Locking and unlocking (p. 220) 2. Tap My Car Mirrors and Convenience. • Welcome Light (p. 156) 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- • Using home safe lighting (p. 156) vate or deactivate the function.

}}

* Option/accessory. 221 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Remote key The remote keys can be linked to different • Lock indication (p. 220) The remote key is used to lock and unlock driver profiles to store personal settings in the doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler door. The vehicle. remote key must be in the vehicle in order to start the engine. WARNING The remote key contains a button cell battery. Keep new and used batteries out of the reach of children. If batteries are swallowed, they can cause serious injury. If any damage is detected, e.g. if the battery cover cannot be closed properly, do not use the product. Keep defective products out of the reach of children.

Remote key3, Care Key and button-less key (Key Tag)*. The remote key is not physically used to start the ignition because the vehicle is standard- equipped with keyless start (Passive Start). The key only needs to be in the front section of the passenger compartment. For vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry)*, the engine can be started with the key anywhere in the vehicle. A smaller, lighter and button-less key (Key Tag) is also provided.

3 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

222 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Remote key buttons an open tailgate (an audible warning sig- NOTE nal will be given). Be aware of the risk of locking the remote Panic alarm - Used to attract attention in key in the vehicle. emergency situations. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press • If the remote key or key tag is left in twice within 3 seconds to activate the the vehicle, it will be deactivated when turn signals and horn. To deactivate, wait the vehicle is locked and the alarm set at least 5 seconds and press the button using another valid key. The key will be again. If no action is taken, the panic alarm reactivated when the vehicle is will deactivate automatically after 3 unlocked. minutes. • If the remote key or Care Key is left in the vehicle, it will be deactivated even WARNING if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On The remote key has four buttons, one on the left side Call, and will be reactivated when the and three on the right. If anyone is left in the vehicle, make sure that power to the power windows and pan- vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call Locking - Press once to lock the doors, oramic roof* is cut off by always taking the or another valid key. tailgate and fuel filler door and arm the remote key with you when you leave the alarm. vehicle. Button-less key (Key Tag)* Press and hold to close all windows. The button-less key4 provided with the keyless Unlocking - Press once to unlock the locking and unlocking function works in the doors, tailgate and fuel filler door and dis- same way as the regular remote key for key- arm the alarm. less start, locking and unlocking. The key is Press and hold to open all windows at the waterproof up to a depth of approx. 10 meters same time. This total airing function can (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It does not be used to e.g. quickly air out the vehicle have a detachable key blade and its battery in hot weather. cannot be replaced. Tailgate - Unlock and disarm the tailgate Care Key - restricted remote key only. On vehicles equipped with the power A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a * tailgate , press and hold to automatically maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This limit open the tailgate. Press and hold to close

4 Also called sport key. }}

* Option/accessory. 223 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| is intended to promote safe use of the vehicle, NOTE Related information e.g. when it is loaned out. • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) When the remote key is placed in the • Interference backup reader in the storage compart- Locking and unlocking using the remote Electromagnetic fields or obstructing objects ment, make sure that no other vehicle key (p. 225) may interfere with the remote key's functions keys, metal objects or electronic devices • Remote key range (p. 227) for keyless start and keyless locking and (e.g. cellular phones, tablets, laptops or • Replacing the remote key's battery unlocking*. chargers) are also placed there. Multiple (p. 228) vehicle keys close to each other in the stor- • Detachable key blade (p. 233) NOTE age compartment can disrupt their functionality. • Care Key – restricted remote key (p. 232) Avoid storing the remote key near metal • Electronic immobilizer (p. 236) objects or electronic devices, e.g. cell phones, tablets, laptops or chargers – pref- WARNING • Linking a remote key to a driver profile (p. 134) erably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 in.). California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- If you experience interference, use the remote senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- key's detachable blade to unlock the vehicle cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- and then place the remote key in the backup oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are reader in the tunnel console storage compart- known to the State of California to cause ment to disarm the alarm and start the vehicle. cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle.

224 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking and unlocking using the NOTE Unlocking with remote key remote key – Press the button on the remote key to Be aware of the risk of locking the remote All doors, tailgate and fuel filler door can be unlock the vehicle. key in the vehicle. locked and unlocked simultaneously using the buttons on the remote key. • If the remote key or key tag is left in Automatic relocking the vehicle, it will be deactivated when If none of the doors or tailgate are opened Locking with remote key the vehicle is locked and the alarm set within two minutes after being unlocked, they using another valid key. The key will be will automatically relock. This function reduces reactivated when the vehicle is the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle unlocked. unlocked. • If the remote key or Care Key is left in Remote key not working the vehicle, it will be deactivated even if the vehicle is locked using Volvo On Call, and will be reactivated when the NOTE vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call Move closer to the vehicle and try to or another valid key. unlock it again.

Locking when the tailgate is open If the remote key is not working to lock or unlock the vehicle, its battery may be dis- The illustration is generic - details may vary accord- NOTE charged. Use the detachable key blade to ing to vehicle model. lock/unlock the driver's door instead. If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is – Press the button on the remote key to still open, make sure that the remote key is Related information lock the vehicle. not left in the cargo compartment when • Settings for remote and inside door unlock To activate the locking sequence, the driver's the tailgate is closed and the entire vehicle (p. 226) 5 6 door must be closed . If any of the other doors is locked . • Unlocking the tailgate using the remote or the tailgate are open, they will be locked key (p. 226) and the alarm will be armed once they are • closed. Remote key (p. 222)

5 If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*, all side doors must be closed. 6 * If the vehicle is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the vehicle, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed. }}

* Option/accessory. 225 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

• Replacing the remote key's battery Settings for remote and inside Unlocking the tailgate using the (p. 228) door unlock remote key • Locking and unlocking with detachable Several different sequences are available for The remote key can be used to unlock the key blade (p. 234) remote unlocking. tailgate while keeping the rest of the vehicle To change this setting: locked. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock. 3. Select alternative: • All Doors – unlocks all doors at the same time. • Single Door – unlocks the driver's door. Press the remote key unlock button twice to unlock all doors. The settings made here also affect central 1. Press the button on the remote key. locking using the inside door handle. > The tailgate will be unlocked but remain Related information closed. • Locking and unlocking using the remote The side doors remain locked and key (p. 225) armed. The lock and alarm indicator on • Locking and unlocking from inside the the dashboard will go out to indicate vehicle (p. 242) that the vehicle is no longer fully locked. Press lightly on the rubberized pressure plate under the tailgate handle to open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes, it will be relocked and the alarm armed.

226 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

2. With the optional power tailgate* - Remote key range the vehicle or approx. 1 meter (3 feet) from the tailgate. Hold and press (about 1.5 seconds) the In order to function correctly, the remote key button on the remote key must be within a certain distance from the vehicle. NOTE > The tailgate will unlock and open. How- ever, the side doors will remain locked Manual use The functions of the remote control key and armed. The remote key's functions for e.g. locking and can be disrupted by ambient radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. unlocking, which are activated by pressing Related information The vehicle can always be locked/unlocked • Locking and unlocking using the remote or , have a range of approx. 20 meters using the key blade. key (p. 225) (65 feet) from the vehicle. If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer If the remote key is removed from the and try again. vehicle Keyless* use If the remote key is removed from the vehicle while the engine is running, the warning message Vehicle key not found Removed from vehicle will be displayed in the instrument panel and an audible signal will sound when the last door is closed. The message will disappear when the key is returned to the vehicle and the O button on the right-side steering wheel keypad is pressed or when the last door is closed again. Related information • Remote key (p. 222) For keyless use, a remote key or the Key Tag • Antenna locations for the start and lock must be within the shaded areas shown in the system (p. 241) illustration, i.e. a semicircle with a radius of * approx. 1.5 meter (5 feet) along the sides of • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces (p. 238)

* Option/accessory. 227 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Replacing the remote key's battery The battery in the smaller key without but- Opening the key and replacing the The battery in the remote key must be tons7 (the Key Tag) cannot be replaced. A new battery replaced when it is discharged. key can be ordered from an authorized Volvo workshop. NOTE All batteries have a limited service life and CAUTION must eventually be replaced (does not apply for Key Tag). The battery's service life An end-of-life Key Tag must be turned in to varies depending on how often the an authorized Volvo workshop. The key vehicle/key is used. must be deleted from the vehicle because it can still be used to start the vehicle via backup start. Hold the remote key with the front side (with the Volvo logo) facing up and move the button on the key ring section to the The remote key battery should be replaced if right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. • the information symbol illuminates and the The cover will loosen and can be message Vehicle key bat. low is dis- removed from the key. played in the instrument panel • the locks do not react after several attempts to lock or unlock the vehicle using the remote key within approx. 20 meter (65 feet) from the vehicle.

NOTE Move closer to the vehicle and try to unlock it again.

7 Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

228 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Turn the key over, move the button to Use a screwdriver or similar object to turn The battery's positive side (+) faces the side and slide the rear cover slightly the battery cover counterclockwise so the upward. Carefully pry out the battery as upward. markers point to OPEN. shown in the illustration. Remove the cover carefully by pressing The cover will loosen and can be CAUTION removed from the key. e.g. a fingernail into the indentation. Pry the cover up. Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this will impair their function.

}}

229 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| NOTE Volvo recommends that batteries used in the remote control key satisfy UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. The factory installed batteries and batteries replaced by an authorized Volvo workshop satisfy the above criterion.

Insert a new battery with the positive side Put the rear cover back into position (+) facing upward. Do not touch the con- and press it down until it clicks into place. tact surfaces of the remote key battery. Slide the cover back. Place the edge of the battery down- > A second click indicates that the cover ward into the holder. Slide the battery for- is correctly positioned and locked into ward until it locks into place under the two place. plastic catches. Press the battery downward until it locks into place under the upper black Replace the battery cover and turn it plastic catch. clockwise until it points to CLOSE.

NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.

230 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

WARNING WARNING Make sure the battery is positioned cor- California Proposition 65 rectly with the right polarity. If the remote Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- key will not be used for a prolonged period senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- of time, remove the battery to avoid battery cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- leakage and damage. Wear protective oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are gloves when handling damaged batteries, known to the State of California to cause as batteries that are damaged or leaking cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- can cause corrosive damage in contact tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid with the skin. breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine Turn the remote key over and press the • Keep batteries out of the reach of chil- except as necessary, service your vehicle in front cover down until it clicks into place. dren. a well ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing Slide the cover back. • Do not leave batteries lying out where your vehicle. For more information go to > An additional click indicates that the they could be swallowed by children or www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- cover is correctly in place. pets. vehicle. • Never disassemble, short-circuit or place a battery into open fire. Related information • Do not charge non-rechargeable bat- • Locking and unlocking with detachable teries, as this could cause an explosion. key blade (p. 234) Check the remote key for damage before • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) using it. If any damage is detected, e.g. if • Remote key (p. 222) the battery cover cannot be closed properly, do not use the product. Keep defective products out of the reach of children.

CAUTION Be sure to dispose of end-of-life batteries in a way that protects the environment.

231 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Ordering additional remote keys NOTE Care Key – restricted remote key Two remote keys are provided with the vehi- A Care Key enables the vehicle owner to set a Volvo recommends that you order a new or cle. One Key Tag is also included if the vehi- maximum speed limit for the vehicle. This duplicate remote key from an authorized cle is equipped with keyless locking/unlock- limit is intended to promote safe use of the Volvo workshop. ing*. Additional keys can be ordered. vehicle, e.g. when it is loaned out. A total of 12 keys can be programmed and You can also obtain additional or duplicate used for the same vehicle. An additional driver remote keys from certain independent profile will be added for each new remote key. repair facilities and locksmiths that are This also applies to the key tag. qualified to make remote keys. Each key must be programmed to work with your Loss of a remote key vehicle. If you lose your remote key, you can order a replacement from a workshop - an authorized A list of independent repair facilities and/or Volvo workshop is recommended. Bring the locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut other remaining remote keys to the workshop. and code replacement keys can be found: As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost • at volvocars.com remote key must be erased from the system. • by calling Volvo Customer Care The current number of keys registered for the 1-800-458-1552. A maximum vehicle speed can be defined for a vehicle can be checked via driver profiles in Care Key. Otherwise, the Red Key functions in the center display's Top view. Select Settings Related information the same way as a standard remote key. System Driver Profiles. • Remote key (p. 222) This restriction is intended to help reduce the risk of accidents and help the driver feel more secure when handing over the vehicle to e.g. a young driver, parking attendant or workshop. Ordering a Care Key One or more Care Key can be ordered from a Volvo retailer. A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for the same vehicle. Up to ten may be restricted keys, but at least two must be standard remote keys.

232 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Care Key limitations Care Key settings Detachable key blade The key is linked to a specific Care Key driver Change maximum speed for a Care Key via The remote key contains a detachable metal profile, and when it is active the key's settings the center display. key blade that can be used to activate a num- cannot be changed. It is also not possible to 1. Unlock the vehicle using a regular remote ber of functions and preform certain actions. switch to another driver profile, as this key. A Volvo workshop can provide you with the requires a regular remote key. key blade's unique code, which is recom- 2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top mended in case you need to order a new key The driver profile is activated when the vehicle view. is unlocked using a Care Key without a regular blade. remote key nearby. 3. Tap System Driver Profiles Care Key. Using the detachable key blade The detachable key blade can be used to NOTE 4. Adjust desired settings. • manually open the left-side front door if If the vehicle changes owners, the vehicle Related information central locking cannot be activated with must be locked and then unlocked for a • Care Key – restricted remote key (p. 232) the remote key new driver profile to be activated. • emergency lock all doors • activate/deactivate the rear door mechani- Setting options cal child locks. The following limitations are available: 8 • The button-less key does not have a detacha- speed range: 50-180 km/h (30-112 mph) ble key blade. If needed, use the standard • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) remote key's detachable key blade. Symbol Meaning Speed limitation is active.

Related information • Care Key settings (p. 233) • Remote key (p. 222)

8 * Included in vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking . }}

* Option/accessory. 233 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Detaching the key blade Locking and unlocking with detachable key blade The detachable key blade can be used to unlock the vehicle from the outside, e.g. if the battery in the remote key is discharged. Unlocking

Put the key blade back into its designated Hold the remote key with the front side spot in the remote key after use. (with the Volvo logo) facing up and move Replace the cover by pressing it down the button on the key ring section to the until it clicks into place. right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. Slide the cover back. The cover will loosen and can be > An additional click indicates that the removed from the key. Pull the front left-hand door handle to its cover is correctly in place. end position to access the lock cylinder. Related information Put the key in the lock cylinder. • Locking and unlocking with detachable key blade (p. 234) Turn the key clockwise 45 degrees so that • Remote key (p. 222) the key blade is pointing straight rearward. Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its original position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so Remove the key blade by pulling it up. that it returns to its original position against the vehicle. 5. Pull the door handle. > The door will open.

234 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

• NOTE 1. Remove the detachable key blade from Replacing the remote key's battery the remote key. (p. 228) When the door is unlocked using the • Remote key (p. 222) detachable key blade and then opened, the 2. Insert the key blade into the opening for alarm will be triggered. The alarm must be the lock mechanism. deactivated manually; see separate sec- 3. Push in the key until it stops, about 12 mm tion. (0.5 inch). The door can be opened from both the Locking outside and the inside. The left-hand front door can be locked by The door cannot be opened from the out- inserting the detachable key into the door's side. To return to position A, open the door lock cylinder. using the inside door handle. The other doors have lock mechanisms in the side of the door that must be pushed in using NOTE the key blade. The door will then be locked • mechanically and cannot be opened from the The door's lock controls only lock that outside. specific door, not all doors simultaneously. The doors can still be opened from inside. • A manually locked rear door with activated child lock cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. The door can only be unlocked using the buttons on the key, the central locking button, the keyless locking system* or Volvo On Call.

Related information • Detachable key blade (p. 233) • Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 251) • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) Manual door lock. This is not the child lock.

* Option/accessory. 235 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Electronic immobilizer The following instrument panel error mes- Start and lock system type The electronic immobilizer is a start inhibitor sages are related to the remote immobilizer designations that helps prevent the vehicle from being with tracking system: The following information contains type des- started by an unauthorized person. ignations for the start and lock system. The vehicle can only be started with the right Symbol Message Meaning remote key. Alarm system Remotely The remote USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) The following instrument panel error mes- immobilised immobilizer with sages are related to the electronic immobil- tracking system This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Vehicle not izer: is activated. The rules. Operation is subject to the following possible to vehicle cannot conditions: (1) This device may not cause start Symbol Message Meaning be started. Con- harmful interference, and (2) this device must tact Volvo On accept any interference received, including Vehicle key Remote key not Call Service interference that may cause undesired opera- not found recognized during Center. tion. start. Place the See Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) remote key on the Owner's Related information key symbol in the This device is subject to the following condi- manual • Remote key (p. 222) storage compart- tions: (1) This device may not cause interfer- ment and try to • Ordering additional remote keys (p. 232) ence, and (2) this device must accept any start the vehicle interference, including interference that may again. cause undesired operation of the device. * Remote immobilizer with tracking Remote keys (Passive Entry /Passive Start) system9 USA The vehicle is equipped with a system that makes it possible to track and locate the vehi- Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGO- cle and to remotely activate the immobilizer to HUF8423MS prevent the vehicle from being started. Con- Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432MS tact your nearest Volvo retailer for more information and assistance activating the system.

9 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call.

236 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, Related information Rules. Operation is subject to the following et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter • Remote key (p. 222) two conditions: tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre (1) This device may not cause harmful le fonctionnement. interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including Immobilizer and Passive Entry*/ interference that may cause undesired Passive Start systems operation. USA-FCC ID: LTQVO3134 CAUTION: Changes or modifications not This device complies with part 15 of the FCC expressly approved by the party responsible rules. Operation is subject to the following for compliance could void the user’s authority two conditions: to operate the equipment. (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- Canada ence, and Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423MS (2) this device must accept any interference Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432MS received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt Any changes or modification not expressly RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the approved by the party responsible for compli- following two conditions: ance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept Canada-IC:3659A-VO3134 any interference received, including This device complies with Industry Canada interference that may cause undesired license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is operation. subject to the following two conditions: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils ence, and (2) this device must accept any radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est interference received, including interference autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : that may cause undesired operation.

* Option/accessory. 237 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless and touch-sensitive NOTE Related information surfaces* • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239) It is important that only one pressure-sen- With the keyless locking and unlocking func- • * sitive surface is activated at a time. If the Keyless tailgate unlock (p. 240) tion, the remote key only needs to be within handle is grasped at the same time as the range, e.g. in a pocket or bag. The vehicle can lock area is pressed, there is a risk that then be locked or unlocked by touching the double commands may be sent. This may pressure-sensitive surface on the door han- cause the requested action (locking/ dle. unlocking) to be delayed or not performed Pressure-sensitive surfaces at all. Door handle There are indentations on the outside of the Tailgate handle outer door handles for locking, and pressure- The tailgate handle has a rubberized pressure sensitive surfaces on the inside of the handles plate that can only be used for unlocking. for unlocking.

NOTE Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking Please be aware that the system could be Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking activated in a car wash if the remote key is within range.

238 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Keyless locking and unlocking* Keyless locking Keyless unlocking With keyless locking and unlocking, touching All of the doors have to be closed before the – To unlock, grasp a door handle or lightly the pressure-sensitive indentation on the vehicle can be locked. However, the tailgate press the rubberized button on the under- door handle will lock or unlock the vehicle. can be open when a door handle is used for side of the tailgate handle. locking. NOTE > The lock indicator light on the dash- – Touch the marked area on the outside of board will stop flashing to confirm that One of the vehicle's remote keys must be one of the door handles after the door is the vehicle is unlocked. within range for locking and unlocking to be possible. closed. Or press the button on the lower edge of the tailgate before it is closed. > The lock indicator light on the dashboard will flash to confirm that the vehicle is locked. To close all door windows at the same time - place your finger on the pressure-sensitive indentation on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until the side windows have closed.

Locking when the tailgate is open The rubberized button on the tailgate can only be If the vehicle is locked and the tailgate is still used for unlocking. open, make sure that the remote key is not left Pressure-sensitive indentation for locking in the cargo compartment when the tailgate is Automatic relocking closed. If none of the doors or tailgate are opened Pressure-sensitive surface for unlocking within two minutes after being unlocked, they NOTE will automatically relock. This function reduces NOTE the risk of inadvertently leaving the vehicle If the key is detected in the vehicle, the tail- unlocked. Please be aware that the system could be gate will not lock when it is closed. activated in a car wash if the remote key is within range.

}}

* Option/accessory. 239 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Keyless unlock settings* Keyless tailgate unlock* • Keyless unlock settings* (p. 240) Several different sequences are available for With keyless locking and unlocking, the tail- • Keyless tailgate unlock* (p. 240) keyless unlocking. gate can be unlocked by lightly touching the To change this setting: rubberized button on the tailgate handle. • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 238) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top NOTE view. One of the vehicle's remote keys must be 2. Tap My Car Locking Keyless within range behind the vehicle for unlock- Unlock. ing to be possible. 3. Select alternative: • All Doors – unlocks all doors at the same time. • Single Door – unlocks the selected door. Related information • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239) • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 238)

The tailgate is held closed by an electronic locking mechanism. To open: 1. Lightly press the rubberized pressure plate on the underside of the tailgate handle. > The lock will disengage.

240 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

2. Lift the outer handle to open the tailgate. Antenna locations for the start and WARNING lock system Individuals with an implanted pacemaker CAUTION The antennas for the keyless start system and should not allow the pacemaker to come * • Only light pressure on the rubberized keyless locking system are integrated in the closer than 22 cm (9 in.) to the Keyless pressure plate is necessary to release vehicle. system antennas. The aim of this is to pre- the tailgate's locking mechanism. vent disturbances between the pacemaker and the Keyless system. • Use the handle to lift the tailgate and do not apply force to the rubberized pres- Related information sure plate. Too much force can damage • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* the pressure plate's electrical connec- (p. 238) tions. • Remote key range (p. 227)

Hands-free unlocking of the tailgate is also possible using a foot movement under the rear bumper; see the separate section.

WARNING Location of the antennas: Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic In the storage compartment in the tunnel exhaust fumes can be sucked into the vehi- console cle through the cargo compartment. In the upper front section of the left-side rear door10 Related information • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 239) In the upper front section of the right-side rear door10 • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 10 (p. 238) In the cargo compartment • Remote key range (p. 227) • Operating the tailgate with a foot movement* (p. 247)

10 Only in vehicles equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*.

* Option/accessory. 241 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Locking and unlocking from inside Alternative unlocking method Locking using the front door buttons the vehicle – Press the button (both front doors The doors and tailgate can be locked and must be closed). unlocked from inside the vehicle using the > All doors and the tailgate will lock. central lock buttons in the front doors. Locking using the rear door button* Central locking

Alternative unlocking method using side door opening handle11. – Pull either of the side door inside opening handles and release. > Depending on the remote key settings, either all doors will be unlocked or just Button with indicator light for locking/unlocking in Button with indicator light for locking and unlocking rear door. in front door. the selected door will be unlocked and opened. The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock Unlocking using the front door buttons that particular door. – To change this setting, tap Settings Press the button to unlock all side Unlocking the rear door doors and the tailgate. My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the Top view of the 1. Pull the opening handle to unlock the rear center display. door. 2. Pull the opening handle again to open the rear door12.

11 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model. 12 If the child lock is not activated.

242 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Related information Unlocking the tailgate from inside Activating and deactivating child • Settings for remote and inside door unlock the vehicle locks (p. 226) The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside The child locks help prevent the rear doors • Unlocking the tailgate from inside the using the button on the dashboard. from being able to be opened from the inside. vehicle (p. 243) The child lock can be either manual or electric*. • Activating and deactivating child locks (p. 243) Manual child lock

– Press the button on the dashboard. > The tailgate will unlock and can be opened from the outside by pressing the rubberized button on the handle. Manual child lock. This is not the manual door lock. – With the optional power tailgate*: Use the detachable key blade in the remote key to turn the control. – Press and hold the button on the The door cannot be opened from the dashboard. inside. > The tailgate will open. The door can be opened from both the Related information outside and the inside. • Locking and unlocking from inside the vehicle (p. 242)

}}

* Option/accessory. 243 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

• || NOTE windows can only be opened using the Automatic locking when driving buttons in the driver's door. The doors and tailgate will automatically lock • The door's knob control only locks that • the rear doors cannot be opened from the when the vehicle begins to move. specific door, not both rear doors inside. simultaneously. Related information If the child lock is activated when the vehicle • There are no manual child locks on • Locking and unlocking from inside the is switched off, it will remain activated the models equipped with electronic child vehicle (p. 242) next time the vehicle is started. locks. Symbols and messages Electric child lock* Symbol Message Meaning The electric child lock can be activated and deactivated in any ignition mode higher than Rear child The child lock is 0. The lock can be activated and deactivated lock Acti- activated. up to 2 minutes after the ignition is turned off vated if no door has been opened. Rear child The child lock is lock Deacti- deactivated. vated

Related information • Locking and unlocking from inside the vehicle (p. 242) • Detachable key blade (p. 233)

Button for activation and deactivation. • Light on – lock is activated. • Light off – lock is deactivated. When the child lock is activated, the rear:

244 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Closing and locking the tailgate Closing13 Closing and locking16 using the buttons* – Press the button on the underside of – Press the button on the underside of The buttons on the underside of the tailgate the tailgate. the tailgate. can be used to close and lock the vehicle > The tailgate will close automatically and > The tailgate closes automatically and automatically. remain unlocked. the vehicle locks15.

NOTE NOTE • The button remains active 24 hours • One of the vehicle's remote keys must after the tailgate was opened. After this be within range for locking and unlock- time, the tailgate must be closed man- ing to be possible. ually. • When the keyless locking or closing* • If the tailgate has been open for more functions are used, three audible signals than 30 minutes, it will automatically will sound if the key is not detected close slowly. close enough to the tailgate.

Location of button(s) on underside of tailgate. Locking14 CAUTION 1. Press the button on the underside of the tailgate. When operating the tailgate manually, Close the trunk lid manually. open and close it slowly. If you encounter 2. resistance, do not use force. This could > The tailgate and doors will lock15. lead to damage and loss of function.

13 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid. 14 Vehicles equipped with keyless locking/unlocking. 15 All doors must be closed for the vehicle to lock. 16 Vehicles with keyless locking/unlocking and power-operated tailgate. }}

* Option/accessory. 245 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Interrupting closing WARNING Related information • Press the button on the dashboard. • Setting maximum opening height for the Be aware of the risk of injury when opening power tailgate* (p. 247) • Press the button on the remote key. and closing. • Press the close button on the underside of • Operating the tailgate with a foot move- Before opening or closing, make sure that * the tailgate13. no one is near the tailgate's range of ment (p. 247) • • Press the rubberized pressure plate on the motion. Serious injury could occur. Remote key range (p. 227) underside of the tailgate's outer handle. Always operate the tailgate with caution. • Using a foot movement*. Tailgate movement is interrupted and stops. Preloaded springs The tailgate can then be opened or closed manually. If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it will open the next time it is activated. Pinch protection If anything obstructs the tailgate with enough force to prevent it from opening or closing, pinch protection will be activated. • When opening - the tailgate will stop moving and an audible signal will sound. • When closing - the tailgate will stop, a Preloaded springs for the power tailgate. long audible signal will sound and the tailgate will return to the programmed maxi- WARNING mum opening position. Do not attempt to open or access the preloaded springs in the power tailgate struts. They are preloaded with high pressure and can cause injury if opened.

13 Vehicles with power-operated trunk lid.

246 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Setting maximum opening height NOTE Operating the tailgate with a foot for the power tailgate* movement* • If the system has been working contin- The tailgate can be set to stop opening at a To make it easier to operate the tailgate when uously for a prolonged period of time, it certain height, for example if the tailgate your hands are full, it can be opened and will be switched off to avoid overload. needs to be opened in a garage with a low closed by moving your foot in a forward kick- It can be used again after approxi- ceiling. ing motion under the rear bumper. mately 2 minutes. Setting maximum opening height 1. Open the tailgate manually to the desired opening height.

2. Press the button on the lower edge of the tailgate and hold it for about 3 seconds. > Two audio signals will sound to indicate that the position has been stored.

NOTE It is not possible to program an opening The sensor is located to the left of center under the position lower than half-open tailgate. rear bumper. One of the vehicle's remote keys must be Resetting maximum opening position within range behind the vehicle, approx. 1. Open the tailgate manually to the fully 1 meter (3 feet), for opening and closing to be open position. possible. This applies even if the vehicle is unlocked in order to prevent the trunk lid from 2. Press the button on the lower edge of inadvertently opening e.g. at a car wash. the tailgate and hold it for about 3 seconds. > Two audio signals will sound to indicate that the stored position has been erased.

}}

* Option/accessory. 247 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Foot movement operation Interrupting opening or closing with a foot Private Locking movement The tailgate can be locked using the private – Make one forward kicking motion while locking function to prevent it from being the tailgate is opening or closing to stop opened, e.g. when the vehicle is left at a its movement. workshop or with a valet. The remote key does not need to be within The function button for pri- range of the vehicle to interrupt opening or vate locking is located in the closing of the tailgate. center display's Function view. Depending on the cur- If the tailgate stops near the closed position, it rent status of the lock, will open the next time it is activated. Private Locking Unlocked or Private Locking Locked NOTE will be displayed. Kicking motion within the sensor's activation area. There is a risk of reduced or lost function if Related information – Make one forward kicking motion with there are large amounts of snow, ice, dirt, • Activating and deactivating private locking your foot under the left section of the rear etc. on the rear bumper. Make sure to keep (p. 249) bumper. Take a step back. Do not touch the bumper clean. the bumper. > A brief audible signal will be heard NOTE when opening or closing is activated - the tailgate will open/close. Please note that the system could be inadvertently activated in a car wash or similar If several opening attempts have been made if the remote key is within range. without the remote key in range behind the vehicle, foot movement operation will not be available for a short period of time. Related information • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* Do not keep your foot under the vehicle in a (p. 238) kicking motion. This may prevent activation. • Remote key range (p. 227)

248 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

Activating and deactivating private To create a security code: Deactivating private locking locking 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- Private locking is activated using the function tion view. tion view. button in the center display and a PIN code. NOTE For the valet lock function to be activated the car must be in at least ignition mode I.

Two codes are used for private locking: > A pop-up window will appear. > A pop-up window will appear. • A security code, which is created the first 2. Enter the desired security code and press 2. Enter the code used for locking and tap time the function is used. Confirm. Confirm. • A PIN code, which is changed each time > The security code is saved. The private > The tailgate will unlock. The green indi- the function is activated. locking function is now ready for activa- cator light next to the button in Func- tion. tion view will go out to confirm Entering security code before initial unlocked status. use Activating private locking The first time the function is used, a security 1. Tap the button for private locking in Func- Forgotten PIN code code must be selected. This code can then be tion view. If you have forgotten your PIN code or entered used to deactivate private locking if the it incorrectly more than three times, the secur- selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost. ity code can be used to deactivate private The security code functions as a PUK (secur- locking. ity) code for all PIN codes used for private If the vehicle is unlocked using Volvo On Call locking. or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will Save the security code in a safe place. be automatically deactivated. > A pop-up window will appear. Forgotten security code 2. Enter the code you would like to use to If you have forgotten your security code, con- unlock the tailgate and tap Confirm. tact an authorized Volvo retailer for assistance > The tailgate will lock. A green indicator deactivating private locking. light will illuminate next to the button in Function view to confirm locked status. }}

249 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

|| Related information Alarm When armed, the alarm will be triggered if: • Private Locking (p. 248) The alarm emits sound and light signals if • the hood, tailgate or any door is opened. anyone without a valid remote key attempts • a battery cable is disconnected. to break into the vehicle or interferes with the start battery or alarm siren. • the alarm siren is disconnected. Alarm indicator Alarm signals The following occurs if the alarm is triggered: • A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until the alarm is turned off. • The hazard warning flashers will flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off. If the reason the alarm was triggered is not rectified, the alarm cycle will repeat up to 10 times17. Symbols and messages Symbol Message Meaning

A red indicator light on the dashboard shows Alarm sys- Contact a work- the status of the alarm: tem failure shop ‒ an authorized Volvo • Indicator off - the alarm is disarmed. Service required workshop is rec- • Indicator flashes once every two seconds - ommended. the alarm is armed. • The indicator flashes quickly after the alarm has been disabled for up to 30 seconds or until the ignition is put in I mode – the alarm has been triggered.

17 Certain markets only.

250 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

NOTE Arming and disarming the alarm 2. The alarm is armed when the vehicle is Do not attempt to repair or alter any of the locked and disarmed when the vehicle is components in the alarm system yourself. unlocked. The alarm can also be disarmed Any such attempt could affect the terms without a functioning key. and conditions of your insurance policy. Arming and disarming the alarm Related information The alarm is armed when the vehicle is locked • Arming and disarming the alarm (p. 251) and disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked. Disarming the alarm without a functioning remote key The vehicle can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote key is not functioning e.g. if the battery is discharged. Place the remote key on the key symbol in 1. Open the driver's door using the detacha- the backup reader in the tunnel console's ble key blade. storage compartment. > This will trigger the alarm. 3. Press the start button. > The alarm will be disarmed. Turning off a triggered alarm – Press the unlock button on the remote key or set the vehicle to ignition mode I by pressing the start button. Related information • Alarm (p. 250)

251

DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver support systems • Passing assistance* (p. 292) Speed-dependent steering wheel The vehicle is equipped with a number of • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298) resistance driver support systems that can provide the • Steering assistance at risk of collision Speed-dependent power steering increases driver with active or passive assistance in var- (p. 318) the steering wheel resistance in pace with ious situations. the vehicle's speed, which can help give the • * The systems can, for example, help the driver: Rear Collision Warning (p. 324) driver an enhanced feeling of control and sta- • BLIS* (p. 325) • maintain a set speed bility. Steering is stiffer on highways. When • Driver Alert Control (p. 329) parking and at low speeds, it will be easier to • maintain a set time interval to the vehicle move the steering wheel. ahead • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331) • help prevent a collision by warning the • Park Assist* (p. 335) Reduced power In rare situations, the power steering may driver and applying the brakes • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) need to work at reduced power and the steer- • park the vehicle. • Radar sensor (p. 359) ing wheel may then feel more difficult to Some of the systems are standard and others • Camera (p. 362) move. This may happen when the power are options. This also varies from market to steering becomes too hot and needs to be market. temporarily cooled. It can also happen if there is a disturbance in power supply. Related information • IntelliSafe – driver support and safety If there is reduced power, the (p. 29) message Power steering Assistance temporarily • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- reduced and this symbol are tance (p. 254) shown in the instrument • Electronic Stability Control (p. 255) panel. • Connected Safety (p. 260) While the power steering is working at • City Safety™ (p. 305) reduced power, the driver support functions • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) and systems with steering assistance are not • Cruise control (p. 267) available. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

254 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Electronic Stability Control WARNING The Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) func- If the temperature rises too high, the power • The function is supplementary driver tion helps the driver avoid skidding and steering may be forced to switch off com- support intended to facilitate driving improves the vehicle's directional stability. pletely. In such a situation, the driver dis- and help make it safer – it cannot han- This symbol will be displayed play shows the message Power steering dle all situations in all traffic, weather failure Stop safely along with a symbol. in the instrument panel when and road conditions. the system is intervening. • The driver is advised to read all sec- Changing the level of steering wheel When the system has inter- * tions in the Owner's Manual about this resistance vened to apply the brakes, a function to learn of its limitations, In INDIVIDUAL drive mode, the level of steer- pulsing sound may be heard which the driver must be aware of ing wheel resistance can be adjusted. and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly before using the function. than expected when the accelerator pedal is 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top • depressed. Driver support functions are not a sub- view. stitute for the driver's attention and The system consists of the following sub-func- judgment. The driver is always respon- 2. Select My Car Drive Modes tions: sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Steering Force. • Stability control2 in a safe manner, at the appropriate Steering wheel resistance settings can only be • speed, with an appropriate distance to accessed if the vehicle is stationary or is mov- Spin control and active yaw control other vehicles, and in accordance with ing straight ahead at a low speed. • Engine drag control current traffic rules and regulations. • Related information Trailer Stability Assist 2 • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Roll Stability Control Stability control This function helps control the driving and • Drive modes* (p. 389) braking force of each individual wheel in an attempt to stabilize the vehicle. Spin control and active yaw control This function is active at low speeds and brakes the wheels that are spinning to transfer

1 Electronic Stability Control 2 Also called traction control. }}

* Option/accessory. 255 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| additional power to wheels that are not spin- is leaning and registers any changes. Using Electronic Stability Control in sport ning. this information, the system calculates the mode likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent This function can also help prevent the wheels The stability system (ESC6) is always acti- risk of a rollover, Electronic Stability Control is from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. vated and cannot be switched off. However, activated, engine torque is reduced and brakes the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, Engine drag control are applied to one or more of the wheels until which offers more active driving characteris- Engine drag control (EDC3) can help prevent the vehicle has regained stability. tics. inadvertent wheel lock, e.g. after downshifting With the ESC Sport Mode sub-function or using engine braking when driving at low WARNING selected, intervention from the system is speeds on a slippery surface. The vehicle’s stability systems help reduced and more lateral movement is permit- Inadvertent wheel lock while driving could improve vehicle safety but do not replace ted, giving the driver more control of the vehi- impair the driver's ability to steer the vehicle. the driver’s responsibility for operating the cle than usual. vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the func- Trailer Stability Assist*4 style should always be adapted to the current road, traffic and weather conditions. tion may seem to be disabled even though it 5 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA ) is designed to Posted speed limits should always be continues to assist the driver. help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer if respected. the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. NOTE Related information When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the NOTE • Driver support systems (p. 254) trailer stabilizer (TSA7) is switched off. Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC • Activating or deactivating Sport mode for Sport Mode is activated. Electronic Stability Control (p. 257) ESC Sport Mode also helps provide more • Electronic Stability Control symbols and traction, even if the vehicle gets stuck or is Roll Stability Control messages (p. 258) driving on a loose surface such as deep snow This function helps reduce the risk of a rollover • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416) or loose sand. in the event of e.g. a sudden evasive maneuver or if the vehicle begins to skid. The system monitors the lateral angle at which the vehicle

3 Engine Drag Control 4 Trailer Stability Assist is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original towbar. 5 Trailer Stability Assist 6 Electronic Stability Control

256 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating or deactivating Sport The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be • Electronic Stability Control (p. 255) mode for Electronic Stability selected when any of the following functions • Activating or deactivating Sport mode for Control are activated: Electronic Stability Control (p. 257) The stability system (ESC8) is always acti- • Cruise control • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416) vated and cannot be switched off. However, • Adaptive Cruise Control* the driver can select Sport mode, which • * offers more active driving characteristics. Pilot Assist Activate or deactivate the Related information function using this button in • Electronic Stability Control in sport mode the center display's Function (p. 256) view. • Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)

• Illuminated button indicator light – the function is activated. • Extinguished button indicator light – the function is deactivated.

When ESC Sport Mode is activated, this symbol will illuminate with a steady glow in the instrument panel. It will remain on until the driver deactivates the function or until the engine is turned off. The system will return to normal mode the next time the engine is started.

7 Trailer Stability Assist 8 Electronic Stability Control

* Option/accessory. 257 DRIVER SUPPORT

Electronic Stability Control displayed in the instrument panel. Several symbols and messages examples are provided below. A number of symbols and messages related to Electronic Stability Control (ESC9) may be Symbol Message Meaning Steady glow for approx. 2 seconds System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light The system is actively operating.

Steady glow Sport mode is activated. NOTE! The system is not deactivated in this mode, but has partially reduced functionality.

9 Electronic Stability Control

258 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Meaning ESC The system's functionality has been temporarily reduced due to high brake system temperatures. The function will be automatically reactivated when the brakes have cooled. Temporarily off

ESC The system is not functioning properly. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and then restart it. Service required

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Electronic Stability Control (p. 255)

259 DRIVER SUPPORT

10 Connected Safety When your vehicle WARNING Connected Safety communicates information approaches a vehicle with its • The function is supplementary driver between your vehicle and other vehicles via hazard warning flashers on, this symbol will appear in the support intended to facilitate driving the Internet11. The function is designed to instrument panel. and help make it safer – it cannot han- notify the driver of any hazardous road condi- dle all situations in all traffic, weather tions ahead. and road conditions. The function can notify the driver if another Slippery road alerts • vehicle further down the road has activated its The driver is advised to read all sec- If your own car detects reduced friction hazard warning flashers or detected slippery tions in the Owner's Manual about this between your tires and the road, information road conditions. You will also be notified if function to learn of its limitations, on this can be sent to vehicles approaching your own vehicle detects slippery road condi- which the driver must be aware of your own car's position. tions. before using the function. As the vehicle approaches • Driver support functions are not a sub- Connected Safety can assist the driver with the area affected, this symbol stitute for the driver's attention and the following: will be displayed in the instru- judgment. The driver is always respon- • Hazard warning flashers alert ment panel to alert the driver sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • Slippery road alerts of slippery road conditions. in a safe manner, at the appropriate Drivers of other vehicles speed, with an appropriate distance to Connected Safety communication between receiving information via other vehicles, and in accordance with vehicles only works for vehicles that are equip- Connected Safety will receive similar notifica- current traffic rules and regulations. ped with the function and have it activated. tions as they approach the area. Hazard warning flashers alert Related information If your vehicle's hazard warning flashers are • Driver support systems (p. 254) activated, information on this can be sent to • Activating or deactivating Connected other vehicles approaching your location. Safety (p. 261) • Connected Safety limitations (p. 261) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

10 Not available in all markets. 11 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan.

260 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating Related information Connected Safety limitations Connected Safety • Connected Safety (p. 260) Information on vehicles with activated hazard For Connected Safety to be able to share • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) warning flashers or which have detected slip- information about road conditions with other pery road conditions is not always communi- • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485) drivers, the function must be activated. If you cated between all vehicles in the affected do not wish to share information, the function • Connected Safety limitations (p. 261) area. can be deactivated. This may be the case if: Activate or deactivate the • No or insufficient Internet connection. function using this button in the center display's Function • The maneuvers (steering wheel move- view. ments, acceleration or braking) made by the vehicles on slippery surfaces are too weak for friction between the tires and road to be detected. • Illuminated button indicator light – the • Vehicles that have detected slippery road function is activated. conditions or activated hazard warning • Extinguished button indicator light – the flashers have not activated the function. function is deactivated. • Vehicles that have detected slippery road At activation, the driver must accept the spe- conditions or activated hazard warning cial terms and conditions shown in the display flashers are not equipped with the func- before an Internet connection12 can be estab- tion. lished. The driver must, for example, accept • Insufficient GPS/satellite navigation may that data is sent from the vehicle using the prevent warnings. driver's cellular phone. • Slippery road conditions were detected or Even when your vehicle is not connected to hazard warning flashers were activated on the Internet, you will still be notified if the sys- a road that is not registered in the Volvo tem in your own vehicle detects slippery road Cars database. conditions. For Connected Safety to function • Connected Safety is not developed on all at full capacity, your vehicle needs to be con- markets and does not cover all areas. Con- nected to the Internet.

12 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. }}

* Option/accessory. 261 DRIVER SUPPORT

* || sult a Volvo retailer for more information Road Sign Information NOTE on covered areas. The Road Sign Information (RSI13) function In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- can help the driver observe speed-related tion* function is only available in combina- WARNING road signs. tion with Sensus Navigation*. • In certain situations, the function may give false warnings of slippery road conditions. WARNING • The function cannot always detect • The function is supplementary driver other vehicles with activated hazard support intended to facilitate driving warning factors or detect all stretches and help make it safer – it cannot han- of road with slippery conditions. dle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Related information • The driver is advised to read all sec- • Connected Safety (p. 260) tions in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) Examples of signs that can be detected14. which the driver must be aware of before using the function. If the vehicle passes a speed limit sign, it will • Driver support functions are not a sub- be displayed in the instrument panel. stitute for the driver's attention and There are also subfunctions for Road Sign judgment. The driver is always respon- Information (RSI15) that can alert the driver if sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven the speed limit has been exceeded or if there in a safe manner, at the appropriate are speed cameras nearby. speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

13 Road Sign Information 14 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just some examples. 15 Road Sign Information

262 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information Activating or deactivating Road Road Sign Information* display • Driver support systems (p. 254) Sign Information* Road Sign Information (RSI17) displays road • Activating or deactivating Road Sign Infor- The Road Sign Information (RSI16) function is signs in different ways depending on the sign mation* (p. 263) optional – the driver can choose to have the and situation. • Road Sign Information* display (p. 263) function activated or deactivated. • Activate or deactivate the Road Sign Information and Sensus function using this button in * Navigation (p. 264) the center display's Function • Speed limit and speed camera warnings view. from Road Sign Information* (p. 264) • Road Sign Information* limitations (p. 266) • Illuminated button indicator light – the function is activated. • Extinguished button indicator light – the function is deactivated. 18 Related information Example of registered speed information. • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) When the function has registered a speed limit sign, the sign will be displayed as a sym- • Road Sign Information* limitations bol in the instrument panel and a colored (p. 266) marking will be shown in the speedometer's speed scale. If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, speed-related information will also be retrieved from map data, which means that the instrument panel can display or change information about speed limits even if the vehicle has not passed a speed-related sign.

16 Road Sign Information 17 Road Sign Information 18 Road signs differ according to market ‒ the illustrations shown here are just examples. }}

* Option/accessory. 263 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Signs for "School" and "Children Road Sign Information and Sensus Speed limit and speed camera playing" Navigation* warnings from Road Sign If the warning sign "School" If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Information* or "Children playing" is Navigation*, speed-related information will be There are subfunctions for Road Sign Infor- included in the satellite navi- provided in the following situations: mation (RSI20) that can alert the driver if the gator's map data19, a symbol • In cases where the speed limit is given speed limit has been exceeded or if there are of this type will be displayed indirectly, e.g. signs for highways or other speed cameras nearby. in the instrument panel. major roads. Related information • If a previously detected speed sign is • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) deemed to be no longer valid and no new sign has been passed. • Road Sign Information* limitations (p. 266) NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- tion* function is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*.

NOTE Example of speed camera and speed limit informa- If a downloaded third-party app is used for tion in the instrument panel navigation, there is no support for speed- Speed limit warning related information. When Speed Warning is activated, the symbol for the cur- Related information rent speed limit in the instru- • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) ment panel21 will flash temporarily if that speed is exceeded.

19 Only vehicles with Sensus Navigation*. 20 Road Sign Information 21 Road signs differ by market – the illustration shown here is just an example.

264 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

The driver can be alerted if the vehicle is Speed camera warning Activating or deactivating exceeding a detected speed limit and is Vehicles equipped with Road warnings from Road Sign approaching a speed camera. Sign Information and Sensus Information* Speed Limit Warning warns the driver if the Navigation can provide infor- The Road Sign Information (RSI23) subfunc- vehicle's speed has exceeded the applicable mation on upcoming speed tion Speed Limit Warning is optional – the speed limit or the stored maximum speed. The cameras in the instrument driver can choose to have the subfunction 22 warning will be repeated once after panel . activated or deactivated. about 30 seconds in that speed limit area if If the vehicle exceeds a detected speed limit Activating Speed Warning the driver does not slow down. with the Speed Limit Warning function acti- 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe An additional warning will not be provided vated, the driver is given a speed warning unless the vehicle's speed is reduced by at when the vehicle is approaching a speed cam- Road Sign Information in the center least 5 km/h (3 mph) and then exceeds the era if the navigation map for the vehicle's cur- display's Top view. speed limit again or the vehicle enters a new/ rent location contains information on speed 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. cameras. different speed limit area. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector is displayed. NOTE NOTE For an audible alert to be provided if the It is possible to receive an audible alert for Adjusting the Speed Warning limit speed is exceeded, the Speed Limit speed cameras regardless of the vehicle's The driver can adjust the settings to be alerted Warning function must be activated and speed and whether or not the speed limit is at a higher speed than the posted speed limit. Road Sign Audio Warning the sub-func- exceeded, even if the Road Sign Audio tion must be On. Audible alerts are provi- 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Warning function is deactivated. ded if the vehicle's speed exceeds the Road Sign Information in the center speed displayed by Road Sign Information display's Top view. Related information in the instrument panel. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) • > The function is activated and a speed Activating or deactivating warnings from limit selector is displayed. Road Sign Information* (p. 265) • Road Sign Information* limitations (p. 266)

22 Information on speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas. 23 Road Sign Information }}

* Option/accessory. 265 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 3. Tap the up/down arrows on the screen to 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information* limitations adjust the speed at which the Speed Road Sign Information in the center Road Sign Information (RSI24) functionality Warning will be given. display's Top view. may be reduced in certain situations. The function could have reduced functionality Please note that the set 2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio warning limit will not be used due to e.g.: Warning to activate/deactivate the speed when a speed camera symbol camera audible alert. • faded road signs is displayed in the instrument • signs located in a curve in the road panel. Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) • twisted or damaged signs • • signs positioned high above the road Activating audible alert for Speed Speed limit and speed camera warnings from Road Sign Information* (p. 264) • Warning fully/partially obstructed or poorly posi- • Road Sign Information* limitations tioned signs 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe (p. 266) • signs partially or fully covered by frost, Road Sign Information in the center snow and/or dirt display's Top view. • digital road maps25 that are outdated, 2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio incorrect or do not contain speed informa- Warning to activate/deactivate the audi- tion26 ble alert. When Road Sign Audio Warning is acti- NOTE vated, the driver will also be alerted if the vehi- In certain markets, the Road Sign Informa- cle is approaching a one-way/"no-entry" road tion* function is only available in combina- or entrance. tion with Sensus Navigation*. Activating speed camera alerts If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation* and map data contains information on speed cameras, the driver can choose to receive an audible alert if the vehicle is approaching a speed camera.

24 Road Sign Information

266 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE Cruise control Marker for set speed Cruise Control (CC27) can help the driver Certain types of bike carriers that are con- The vehicle's current speed maintain an even speed to provide a more nected to the trailer socket may be inter- relaxing driving experience on highways and preted as a connected trailer by the RSI Set speed long, straight roads with even traffic flows. function. In such cases, the instrument panel may indicate incorrect speed infor- NOTE mation. In vehicles equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*(ACC28), it is possible to switch NOTE between Cruise Control and Adaptive The function uses the vehicle's camera and Cruise Control. radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 262) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) Function buttons and symbols : Activates Cruise Control from standby mode and resumes the set speed : Increases the set speed

: From standby mode – activates Cruise Control and sets the current speed : From active mode – deactivates/ puts Cruise Control in standby mode : Reduces the set speed

25 Vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*. 26 Map data and speed information is not available for all areas. 27 Cruise Control 28 Adaptive Cruise Control }}

* Option/accessory. 267 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING To disengage CC: Selecting and activating cruise • – Press the accelerator pedal about halfway control The function is supplementary driver 29 support intended to facilitate driving down and then release it. The Cruise Control (CC ) function must be and help make it safer – it cannot han- > Cruise Control will automatically disen- selected and activated in order to regulate dle all situations in all traffic, weather gage the automatic brake function and speed. and road conditions. speed will only be reduced using the engine braking function. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this Related information function to learn of its limitations, • Driver support systems (p. 254) which the driver must be aware of • before using the function. Selecting and activating cruise control • (p. 268) Driver support functions are not a sub- • stitute for the driver's attention and Deactivating cruise control (p. 269) judgment. The driver is always respon- • Cruise control standby mode (p. 270) sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • Adjusting set speed for driver support in a safe manner, at the appropriate (p. 294) speed, with an appropriate distance to • other vehicles, and in accordance with Switching between cruise control and In order to start Cruise Control from standby * current traffic rules and regulations. Adaptive Cruise Control in the center dis- mode, the vehicle's current speed must be play (p. 277) 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. Using engine braking instead of 1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the applying the brakes steering wheel keypad and scroll to the Cruise Control regulates speed by lightly cruise control symbol (4). applying the brakes. On downgrades, it can sometimes be desirable to roll a bit faster and > Gray symbol – cruise control is in let speed be reduced instead by engine brak- standby mode. ing alone. The driver can temporarily disengage the Cruise Control braking function.

29 Cruise Control

268 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

2. When cruise control is selected, press Deactivating cruise control Related information (2) on the steering wheel keypad to acti- Cruise control (CC30) can be deactivated and • Cruise control (p. 267) vate. switched off. • Switching between cruise control and > White symbol – cruise control starts Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- and the current speed is stored as the play (p. 277) maximum speed. The lowest speed • Selecting and activating cruise control that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph). (p. 268) Reactivating cruise control to the last • Cruise control standby mode (p. 270) stored speed – When cruise control is selected, press on the steering wheel keypad to activate. > The Cruise Control marking in the instrument panel will change from GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will then return to the most recently set speed. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel (2). WARNING > The symbol and markings turn gray – A noticeable increase in speed may follow cruise control goes into standby mode. when the speed is resumed with the 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the steering wheel button. steering wheel to select another function. > The cruise control symbol and marking Related information (4) in the instrument panel will go out • Cruise control (p. 267) and the stored maximum speed will be • Deactivating cruise control (p. 269) erased. • Cruise control standby mode (p. 270)

30 Cruise Control

* Option/accessory. 269 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cruise control standby mode Automatic standby mode Adaptive Cruise Control*32 Cruise control (CC31) can be deactivated and The function may automatically go into Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC33) can help the put in standby mode. This may happen auto- standby mode if one of the following occurs: driver to maintain a constant speed, com- matically or be due to driver intervention. • The wheels lose traction. bined with a preset time interval to the vehi- Standby mode means that the function is cle in front. • The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high. selected in the instrument panel but not activated. In standby mode, cruise control will not • The temperature in the brake system regulate speed. becomes too high. • The vehicle's speed goes below 30 km/h Standby mode due to action by the (20 mph). driver The driver must then control the vehicle's Cruise control will be deactivated and put in speed. standby mode if any of the following occurs: • The brakes are applied. Related information • • The gear selector is moved to N. Cruise control (p. 267) • • The vehicle is driven faster than the set Selecting and activating cruise control speed for more than 1 minute. (p. 268) • The camera/radar sensor measures the distance to The driver must then control the vehicle's Deactivating cruise control (p. 269) the vehicle ahead. speed. Adaptive Cruise Control can help provide a Temporarily increasing speed using the accel- more relaxed driving experience on long trips erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi- on highways or long, straight roads with even cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will traffic flows. return to the set speed when the accelerator The driver sets a speed and a time interval to pedal is released. the vehicle ahead. If the camera/radar sensor detects a slower-moving vehicle ahead, your vehicle's speed will be automatically adapted according to the set time interval to that vehi-

31 Cruise Control 32 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 33 Adaptive Cruise Control

270 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• * cle. When there are no longer slower-moving WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control displays (p. 272) vehicles ahead, the vehicle will return to the • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise • The function is supplementary driver set speed. Control* (p. 273) support intended to facilitate driving Adaptive Cruise Control is designed to: and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations • smoothly regulate speed. The driver must dle all situations in all traffic, weather (p. 276) apply the brakes in situations requiring and road conditions. • Symbols and messages for Adaptive immediate braking. For example, when • The driver is advised to read all sec- Cruise Control* (p. 278) there are great differences in speed tions in the Owner's Manual about this • Collision risk warning from driver support between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead function to learn of its limitations, (p. 293) brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the which the driver must be aware of • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead radar sensor, braking may occur unexpect- before using the function. edly or not at all. (p. 295) • Driver support functions are not a sub- • Adjusting set speed for driver support • follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane stitute for the driver's attention and (p. 294) and maintain a time interval to that vehicle judgment. The driver is always respon- set by the driver. If the radar sensor does sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven • Auto-hold braking with driver support not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead in a safe manner, at the appropriate (p. 297) maintain the speed set by the driver. This speed, with an appropriate distance to • Switching target vehicles with driver sup- will also happen if the speed of the vehicle other vehicles, and in accordance with port (p. 294) ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi- current traffic rules and regulations. • * cle. Passing assistance (p. 292) • Contacting Volvo (p. 26) CAUTION Only a workshop may perform maintenance on driver support components – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Adaptive Cruise Control* controls (p. 272)

* Option/accessory. 271 DRIVER SUPPORT

Adaptive Cruise Control*34 Increases the time interval to the vehicle Adaptive Cruise Control*36 controls ahead displays A summary of how Adaptive Cruise Control Reduces the time interval to the vehicle The following illustrations show how Adap- (ACC35) is controlled using the left-side steer- ahead tive Cruise Control (ACC37) can appear in the ing wheel keypad and how the function is Target vehicle indicator: the function has various displays in different situations. shown in the display. detected and is following a target vehicle using the set time interval Speed Symbol for time interval to the vehicle ahead Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations (p. 276)

: From standby mode - activates and Speed indicators sets the current speed Set speed : From active mode - deactivates/ Speed of the vehicle ahead puts in standby mode : Activates the function from standby The current speed of your vehicle mode and resumes the set speed : Increases the set speed

: Reduces the set speed

34 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 35 Adaptive Cruise Control 36 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

272 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Time interval Selecting and activating Adaptive Adaptive Cruise Control will Cruise Control*39 only regulate the time interval Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC40) must first be to the vehicle ahead when selected and then activated before it can reg- the distance symbol shows ulate speed and distance. two vehicles. A speed interval will be marked at the same time. When driving In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor- mation* (RSI38) indicates that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). The previous illustration shows that Adaptive Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target vehicle ahead, which is traveling at the same speed. Related information To start the function: • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations the driver's door must be closed. (p. 276) • There must be a vehicle ahead (target vehicle) within a reasonable distance or

The previous illustration shows that Adaptive Cruise Control is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle ahead to follow.

37 Adaptive Cruise Control 38 Road Sign Information 39 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. }}

* Option/accessory. 273 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| your vehicle's current speed must be at WARNING Deactivating Adaptive Cruise least 15 km/h (9 mph). Control*41 A noticeable increase in speed may follow 42 1. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) button on the when the speed is resumed with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC ) can be deac- steering wheel keypad and scroll to the steering wheel button. tivated and switched off. Adaptive Cruise Control symbol (4). > Gray symbol – Adaptive Cruise Control Related information is in standby mode. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) 2. When Speed Limiter is selected, press • Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* (1) on the steering wheel keypad to (p. 274) activate. • Switching between cruise control and > White symbol – Speed Limiter starts Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- and the current speed is stored as the play (p. 277) maximum speed. • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations Reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 276) to the last stored speed – When Adaptive Cruise Control is selected, 1. Press the button on the steering press on the steering wheel keypad to wheel (1). activate. > The symbol and markings turn gray – Adaptive Cruise Control goes into > The Cruise Control marking in the standby mode. The time interval indica- instrument panel will change from tor light and any symbols for the target GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will vehicle will go out. then return to the most recently set speed.

40 Adaptive Cruise Control 41 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 42 Adaptive Cruise Control

274 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

43 2. Press the ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) buttons on the Adaptive Cruise Control* standby WARNING steering wheel to select another function. mode • If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby > The Adaptive Cruise Control symbol 44 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC ) can be deac- mode, the driver must intervene and and marking (4) in the instrument panel tivated and put in standby mode. This may regulate both speed and distance to will go out and the stored maximum happen automatically or be due to driver the vehicle ahead. speed will be erased. intervention. • Standby mode means that the function is If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- WARNING selected in the instrument panel but not acti- cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con- vated. In standby mode, Adaptive Cruise Con- trol is in standby mode, the driver can • If Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby trol will not regulate speed or distance to the be warned of the short distance by the mode, the driver must intervene and * vehicle ahead. Distance Alert function. regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. Standby mode due to action by the • If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- driver Automatic standby mode cle ahead when Adaptive Cruise Con- Adaptive Cruise Control will be deactivated trol is in standby mode, the driver can and put in standby mode if any of the follow- WARNING be warned of the short distance by the ing occurs: With automatic standby mode, the driver is Distance Alert* function. • The brakes are applied. warned by an acoustic signal and a message on the instrument panel. • The gear selector is moved to N. Related information • The driver must then regulate vehicle * • The vehicle is driven faster than the set • Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 270) speed, apply the brakes if necessary, speed for more than 1 minute. • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise and maintain a safe distance to other Control* (p. 273) Temporarily increasing speed using the accel- vehicles. erator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehi- • Switching between cruise control and cle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will Adaptive Cruise Control* in the center dis- The function may automatically go into return to the set speed when the accelerator play (p. 277) standby mode if one of the following occurs: pedal is released. • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations • One of the systems that Adaptive Cruise (p. 276) Control is dependent on stops working,

43 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 44 Adaptive Cruise Control }}

* Option/accessory. 275 DRIVER SUPPORT

46 || such as Electronic Stability Control Adaptive Cruise Control* WARNING (ESC45). limitations • This is not a collision avoidance sys- • 47 The driver opens the door. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC ) may have tem. The driver is always responsible • The driver unbuckles the seat belt. limited functionality in certain situations. and must intervene if the system fails • The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high. Steep roads and/or heavy loads to detect a vehicle ahead. • One or more of the wheels lose traction. Adaptive Cruise Control is primarily intended • The function does not brake for people or animals and does not brake for small • The brake temperature is high. to be driven on flat roads. The function may not be able to maintain the correct time inter- vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy- • The parking brake is applied. val to the vehicle ahead when driving down cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low • The camera and radar unit is covered by steep hills. The driver should be extra attentive trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta- snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar and prepared to apply the brakes. tionary vehicles and objects. waves are blocked). Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control if the vehi- • Do not use the function in demanding • Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h cle is carrying a heavy load or towing a trailer. situations, such as in city traffic, at (3 mph) and ACC cannot determine if the intersections, on slippery surfaces, vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is Drive mode unavailable with a lot of water or slush on the road, another object, e.g. a speed bump. The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads, or on on/off ramps. • Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h if Adaptive Cruise Control is activated. (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow. NOTE Related information The function uses the vehicle's camera and • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) radar sensor, which has certain general limitations. • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 273) • Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control* Related information • * (p. 274) Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 270) • • Adaptive Cruise Control* limitations Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) (p. 276)

45 Electronic Stability Control 46 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

276 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Switching between cruise control A symbol in the instrument panel indicates and Adaptive Cruise Control*48 in which cruise control system is active the center display Cruise control Adaptive Cruise When the regular cruise control (CC49) is (CC) Control (ACC) selected in the instrument panel, you can switch to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC50) in A A the center display's Function view. Activate or deactivate the A WHITE symbol: The function is active. GRAY symbol: Standby mode function using this button in the center display's Function Related information view. • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • Cruise control (p. 267)

• GREEN button indicator light – Adaptive Cruise Control is deactivated and the regular cruise control is in standby mode. • GRAY button indicator light – regular cruise control is deactivated and the Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode.

47 Adaptive Cruise Control 48 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 49 Cruise Control 50 Adaptive Cruise Control

* Option/accessory. 277 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control*51 A number of symbols and messages relating to Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC52) can be viewed via the instrument panel.

51 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 52 Adaptive Cruise Control

278 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Meaning The symbol is WHITE The vehicle is maintaining the stored speed.

Adaptive Cruise Contr. Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode. Unavailable The symbol is GRAY

Adaptive Cruise Contr. The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required The symbol is GRAY

Windscreen sensor Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

A text message can be erased by briefly press- If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ Related information ing the button in the center of the right- an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) side steering wheel keypad. mended. • Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

* Option/accessory. 279 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*53 of the function's applications and limitations in set by the driver. If the radar sensor does Pilot Assist can help the driver keep the vehi- order to take advantage of all it has to offer. not detect a vehicle ahead, it will instead maintain the speed set by the driver. This cle in the current traffic lane and maintain an The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended will also happen if the speed of the vehicle even speed and a set time interval to the for use on highways and other major roads ahead exceeds the set speed for your vehi- vehicle ahead. where it can help provide a more comfortable cle. and relaxing driving experience. Get to know Pilot Assist The driver sets the desired speed and distance The vehicle's position in the traffic to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors the lane distance to the vehicle ahead and the traffic When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it attempts to lane's side markers using the camera. The sys- position the vehicle halfway between the visi- tem maintains the set time interval to the vehi- ble lane marking lines. For a smoother drive, it cle ahead by automatically adjusting your vehi- is a good idea to allow the vehicle to find a cle's speed and keeps your vehicle in its lane good position. The driver can always adjust by providing steering assistance. the position him/herself by increasing steering input. It is important for the driver to make Pilot Assist regulates speed by accelerating sure the vehicle is positioned safely in the lane. and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a slight sound when they are being used to If Pilot Assist does not position the vehicle adjust speed. appropriately in the lane, the driver should turn The camera/radar sensor monitors the distance to off Pilot Assist or switch to Adaptive Cruise Pilot Assist is designed to: the vehicle ahead and detects lane markings. Control*. Camera and radar sensor • smoothly regulate speed. The driver must apply the brakes in situations requiring Steering assistance Distance monitor immediate braking. For example, when The color of the steering there are great differences in speed wheel symbol indicates the Lane marker line monitors between vehicles or if the vehicle ahead current status of steering Pilot Assist helps to steer the vehicle, and you brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the assistance: may need to drive a few miles with Pilot Assist camera and radar sensor, braking may • GREEN indicates that before you feel completely at home with the occur unexpectedly or not at all. steering assistance is active function. It is important to be familiar with all • follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane and maintain a time interval to that vehicle

53 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

280 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• GRAY (as shown in illustration) indicates that When the vehicle is approaching an off-ramp WARNING steering assistance is deactivated. or a fork in the road, the driver should steer toward the desired lane so that Pilot Assist • The function is supplementary driver Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on can detect the desired direction of travel. support intended to facilitate driving monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and help make it safer – it cannot han- and the traffic lane's side marker lines. The Hands on the steering wheel dle all situations in all traffic, weather driver can override Pilot Assist's steering rec- Pilot Assist only functions if the driver's hands and road conditions. ommendations at any time and steer in are on the steering wheel. It is also important • The driver is advised to read all sec- another direction, e.g. to change lanes or avoid for the driver to always continue to be active obstacles on the road. tions in the Owner's Manual about this and alert when driving since Pilot Assist is function to learn of its limitations, If the camera/radar sensor cannot detect the unable to read all situations and may toggle which the driver must be aware of lane's side marker lines or if Pilot Assist is between off and on without prior warning. before using the function. unable for some other reason to clearly inter- If Pilot Assist detects that the • Driver support functions are not a sub- pret the lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily driver's hands are not on the stitute for the driver's attention and deactivate steering assistance until it can once steering wheel, the system judgment. The driver is always respon- again interpret the lane markings. However, will provide a symbol and a sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven the speed and distance warnings will remain text message in the instru- in a safe manner, at the appropriate active. The driver will be alerted by slight ment panel to instruct the speed, with an appropriate distance to vibrations in the steering wheel that the func- driver to actively steer the other vehicles, and in accordance with tion has been temporarily deactivated. vehicle. current traffic rules and regulations. WARNING If the driver's hands are still detected on the steering wheel after a few seconds have CAUTION Pilot Assist is deactivated automatically passed, the instructions to actively steer the and resumes working without prior notice. vehicle will be repeated, accompanied by an Only a workshop may perform mainte- audible signal. nance on driver support components – an In curves and forks in the road authorized Volvo workshop is recom- If Pilot Assist still does not detect the driver's mended. Pilot Assist is designed to interact with the hands on the steering wheel after a few more driver. The driver should never wait for steer- seconds have passed, the audible signal will ing assistance from Pilot Assist, but instead become intense and the steering function will Related information should always be ready to increase his or her switch off. Pilot Assist must then be reactiva- • Driver support systems (p. 254) own steering efforts, particularly in curves. ted by pressing the button on the steering • Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* wheel. (p. 284) }}

* Option/accessory. 281 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Pilot Assist* displays (p. 283) Pilot Assist*54 controls : Reduces the set speed • * Pilot Assist limitations (p. 288) A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled Increases the time interval to the vehicle • Pilot Assist* symbols and messages using the right-side steering wheel keypad ahead and how the function is shown in the display. (p. 290) Reduces the time interval to the vehicle • Pilot Assist* controls (p. 282) ahead • Collision risk warning from driver support ◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to Adaptive (p. 293) Cruise Control • Switching target vehicles with driver sup- Function symbol port (p. 294) Symbols for target vehicle • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead (p. 295) Symbol for time interval to the vehicle • Adjusting set speed for driver support ahead (p. 294) Symbol for activated/deactivated steering • Auto-hold braking with driver support assistance (p. 297) Function buttons and symbols. Related information • Passing assistance* (p. 292) ▶: Switches from Adaptive Cruise Control* • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • Contacting Volvo (p. 26) to Pilot Assist : From standby mode - activates Pilot Assist and sets the current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ puts Pilot Assist in standby mode : Activates Pilot Assist from standby mode and resumes the set speed and time interval : Increases the set speed

54 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

282 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*55 displays Time interval (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle The following illustrations show how Pilot Pilot Assist will only regulate ahead to follow. Assist can appear in the various displays in the time interval to the vehi- Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assis- different situations. cle ahead when the distance tance because it cannot detect the lane's side symbol shows a vehicle (1) marking lines. Speed over the steering wheel symbol. Pilot Assist's steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) changes from GRAY to GREEN. When driving In the following illustration, Road Sign Infor- mation (RSI56) indicates that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).

Speed indicators. The previous illustration shows that Pilot Set speed Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target vehicle Speed of the vehicle ahead ahead that is traveling at the same speed. The current speed of your vehicle Pilot Assist will not provide any steering assistance because it cannot detect the lane's side marking lines.

The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h

55 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 56 Road Sign Information }}

* Option/accessory. 283 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The previous illustration shows that Pilot Selecting and activating Pilot Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h Assist*57 (68 mph) and that there is no target vehicle Pilot Assist must first be selected and then ahead to follow. activated before it can regulate speed and Pilot Assist will provide steering assistance distance and provide steering assistance. because it can detect the lane's side marking lines. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288)

The previous illustration shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain a speed of 110 km/h (68 mph) and is following a target vehicle ahead that is traveling at the same speed. In this example, Pilot Assist will also provide A green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is steering assistance because it can detect the providing steering assistance. lane's side marking lines. To start Pilot Assist. • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • The side markings of the lane must be clearly visible and detected by the vehicle. • There must be a vehicle ahead (target vehicle) within a reasonable distance or your vehicle's current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). • The speed must not exceed 140 km/h (87 mph).

284 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• 58 The driver must keep their hands on the WARNING Deactivating Pilot Assist* steering wheel. A noticeable increase in speed may follow Pilot Assist can be deactivated and switched • There must be a vehicle ahead (target off. when the speed is resumed with the vehicle) within a reasonable distance or steering wheel button. your vehicle's current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). Related information 1. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) button on the • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) steering wheel keypad and scroll to the • Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 285) Pilot Assist symbol (4). • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288) > Gray symbol – Pilot Assist is in standby mode.

2. When Pilot Assist is selected, press (2) on the steering wheel keypad to activate. A green steering wheel indicates that Pilot Assist is > White symbol – Pilot Assist starts and providing steering assistance. the current speed is stored as the maximum speed. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel (2). Reactivating Pilot Assist to the last > The symbol and markings turn gray – stored speed Pilot Assist goes into standby mode. – When Pilot Assist is selected, press The time interval indicator light and any on the steering wheel keypad to activate. symbols for the target vehicle will go > The Cruise Control marking in the out. instrument panel will change from GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle will then return to the most recently set speed.

57 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. 58 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional. }}

* Option/accessory. 285 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 2. Press the ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) buttons on the Pilot Assist*59 standby mode Automatic standby mode steering wheel to select another function. Pilot Assist can be deactivated and put in > The Pilot Assist symbol and marking (4) standby mode. This may happen automati- WARNING in the instrument panel will go out and cally or be due to driver intervention. With automatic standby mode, the driver is the stored maximum speed will be Standby mode means that the function is warned by an acoustic signal and a mes- erased. selected in the instrument panel but not acti- sage on the instrument panel. vated. In standby mode, Pilot Assist will not • The driver must then regulate vehicle regulate the speed or distance to the vehicle WARNING speed, apply the brakes if necessary, ahead or provide steering assistance. • With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the and maintain a safe distance to other driver must intervene and steer and Standby mode due to action by the vehicles. regulate both speed and distance to driver the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist will be deactivated and put in The function may automatically go into • If the vehicle comes too close to a vehi- standby mode if any of the following occurs: standby mode if one of the following occurs. cle ahead when Pilot Assist is in • The brakes are applied. • One of the systems that Pilot Assist is standby mode, the driver is instead dependent on stops working, such as warned of the short distance by the • The gear selector is moved to N. Electronic Stability Control 60. Distance Alert* function. • A turn signal is used for more than 1 minute. • The driver's hands are not on the steering wheel. Related information • The vehicle is driven faster than the set • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) speed for more than 1 minute. • The driver opens the door. • Selecting and activating Adaptive Cruise • The driver unbuckles the seat belt. Control* (p. 273) • The engine speed (rpm) is too low/high. • Switching between cruise control and • One or more of the wheels lose traction. * Adaptive Cruise Control in the center dis- • The brake temperature is high. play (p. 277) • The parking brake is applied. • * Adaptive Cruise Control limitations • (p. 276) The camera and radar unit is covered by snow or heavy rain (the camera lens/radar • Temporarily deactivating steering assis- waves are blocked). tance with Pilot Assist* (p. 287)

59 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

286 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h Temporarily deactivating steering • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288) (3 mph) and Pilot Assist cannot determine assistance with Pilot Assist*61 if the vehicle ahead is stationary or if it is Pilot Assist steering assistance can be tem- another object, e.g. a speed bump. porarily deactivated and reactivated without • Your vehicle's speed goes below 5 km/h prior warning. (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so When the turn signals are used, Pilot Assist's that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to steering assistance will be temporarily deacti- follow. vated. When the direction indicator is turned off, steering assistance is reactivated automat- Related information ically if the lane's edge markings can still be * • Pilot Assist (p. 280) detected. • Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* If Pilot Assist cannot clearly interpret the (p. 284) lane's side marker lines or if the camera/radar • Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 285) sensor is unable for some other reason to • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288) clearly interpret the lane, Pilot Assist will temporarily deactivate steering assistance. How- ever, the speed and distance warnings will remain active. Steering assistance will resume when the side marker lines can once again be interpreted. In these situations, the driver may be alerted through slight vibrations in the steering wheel that steering assistance is temporarily deactivated. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • Selecting and activating Pilot Assist* (p. 284) • Deactivating Pilot Assist* (p. 285)

60 Electronic Stability Control 61 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

* Option/accessory. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT

62 Pilot Assist* limitations WARNING ity with poor light conditions, backlighting, wet road surface, etc. Pilot Assist functionality may be reduced in In some situations, Pilot Assist may have certain situations. trouble helping the driver properly or may The driver should also note that Pilot Assist Pilot Assist is a driver support function be deactivated automatically – we advise has the following limitations: designed to simplify driving and assist the against using Pilot Assist in such cases. • High curbs, roadside barriers, tempo- driver in many situations. However, the driver Examples of such situations include: rary obstacles (traffic cones, safety bar- is always responsible for maintaining a suita- • the lane markings are unclear, worn, riers, etc.) are not detected. Alterna- ble distance to vehicles or objects around it missing, cross each other, or there are tively, they may be detected incorrectly and ensuring that the vehicle is correctly posi- multiple sets of road markings. as lane markings, with a subsequent tioned in the traffic lane. risk of contact between the vehicle and • the lane division changes, e.g. when such obstacles. The driver is responsi- lanes split or merge, and at off-ramps. ble for ensuring that the vehicle main- • when there is road construction and tains a suitable distance from such sudden changes to the road surface, obstacles. e.g. when the lines may no longer mark • The camera and radar sensors do not the correct route. have the capacity to detect all oncom- • edges or other lines than lane markings ing objects and obstacles in traffic are present on or near the road, e.g. environments, e.g. potholes, stationary curbs, joints or repairs to the road sur- obstacles or objects that completely or face, edges of barriers, roadside edges partially block the route. or strong shadows. • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, • the lane is narrow or winding. animals, etc. • the lane contains ridges or holes. • The steering assistance is limited in • weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, force, which means that Pilot Assist snow or fog or slush or reduced visibil- cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the vehicle within the lane. • In vehicles equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the function is able to use

62 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

288 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

information from map data, which WARNING Do not use Pilot Assist if the vehicle is carrying could cause variations in performance. a heavy load or towing a trailer. • This is not a collision avoidance sys- • Pilot Assist will be switched off if the tem. The driver is always responsible speed-dependent power steering NOTE and must intervene if the system fails wheel resistance is working at reduced to detect a vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, power, e.g. during cooling due to over- bike carrier or similar is connected to the • The function does not brake for people heating. vehicle electrical system. or animals and does not brake for small vehicles, such as bikes and motorcy- WARNING cles. Similarly, it does not brake for low Drive mode unavailable Pilot Assist should only be used if there are trailers, oncoming, slow-moving or sta- The Off Road drive mode cannot be selected clear lane lines painted on each side of the tionary vehicles and objects. when Pilot Assist is activated. lane. All other use will increase the risk of • Do not use the function in demanding contact with nearby obstacles that cannot situations, such as in city traffic, at NOTE be detected by the functions. intersections, on slippery surfaces, The function uses the vehicle's camera and with a lot of water or slush on the road, radar sensor, which has certain general in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on limitations. winding roads, or on on/off ramps. Related information The driver can always correct or adjust steer- • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) ing assistance provided by Pilot Assist by turning the steering wheel to the desired position. • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) • Speed-dependent steering wheel resis- Steep roads and/or heavy loads tance (p. 254) Pilot Assist is primarily intended to be driven • * on flat roads. The function may not be able to Drive modes (p. 389) maintain the correct time interval to the vehicle ahead when driving down steep hills. The driver should be extra attentive and prepared to apply the brakes.

* Option/accessory. 289 DRIVER SUPPORT

Pilot Assist*63 symbols and messages A number of symbols and messages relating to Pilot Assist may be displayed in the instrument panel. Symbol Message Meaning Gray steering wheel symbol Indicates that steering assistance is deactivated. When Pilot Assist is providing steering assistance, the steering wheel is green.

Symbol for hands on the steering wheel The system cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel. Place your hands on the steering wheel and actively steer the vehicle.

Windscreen sensor Clean the windshield in front of the camera and radar sensors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

A text message can be erased by briefly press- If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ ing the button in the center of the right- an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- side steering wheel keypad. mended.

63 Depending on market, this function can be either standard or optional.

290 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • Pilot Assist* limitations (p. 288) • Contacting Volvo (p. 26)

* Option/accessory. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT

* Passing assistance WARNING Using passing assistance Passing assistance can assist the driver when Passing assistance can be used with Adap- • The function is supplementary driver passing other vehicles. The function can be tive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist*. Several support intended to facilitate driving used with Adaptive Cruise Control* or Pilot conditions must be met for passing assis- and help make it safer – it cannot han- Assist*. tance to be possible. dle all situations in all traffic, weather When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist In order to activate passing assistance: and road conditions. is following another vehicle and you indicate • your vehicle must be following a vehicle that you intend to pass that vehicle by using • The driver is advised to read all sec- ahead (target vehicle) 64 tions in the Owner's Manual about this the turn signal , the system will begin accel- • erating toward the vehicle ahead before your function to learn of its limitations, your vehicle's current speed must be vehicle has moved into the passing lane. which the driver must be aware of at least 70 km/h (43 mph) before using the function. • the set speed must be high enough to The function will then delay a speed reduction • safely pass another vehicle. to avoid early braking as your vehicle Driver support functions are not a sub- approaches a slower-moving vehicle. stitute for the driver's attention and To start passing assistance: judgment. The driver is always respon- – The function remains active until your vehicle sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Turn on the left turn signal. has passed the other vehicle. in a safe manner, at the appropriate > Passing assistance will start. speed, with an appropriate distance to WARNING other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Please note that this function can be activated in more situations than just passing another vehicle, such as when a direction Related information indicator is used to indicate a lane change • Driver support systems (p. 254) or before exiting to another road – the vehicle will then briefly accelerate. • Using passing assistance (p. 292) • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

64 Only the left-hand turn signal for left-hand drive vehicles, or right-hand turn signal for right-hand drive vehicles.

292 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

WARNING Collision risk warning from driver WARNING support The driver should be aware that if condi- The driver support system only issues a tions suddenly change when using Passing The driver support systems Adaptive Cruise warning for vehicles detected by its radar Assistance, the function may implement an Control* and Pilot Assist* can help alert the unit – thus, a warning may come after a undesired acceleration in certain condi- driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead delay or not at all. Never wait for a warning. tions. suddenly decreases to an unsafe distance. Apply the brakes when necessary. Some situations should be avoided, e.g. if: • Related information the vehicle is approaching an exit in the • same direction as passing would nor- Driver support systems (p. 254) mally occur • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • the vehicle ahead slows before your • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) vehicle has had time to switch to the passing lane • traffic in the passing lane slows down Situations of this type can be avoided by temporarily putting Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist in standby mode. Collision warning audible signal and symbol Related information Audible signal at risk of collision • * Passing assistance (p. 292) Collision warning symbol • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • Adaptive Cruise Control* standby mode Adaptive Cruise Control and Pilot Assist use (p. 275) approx. 40% of the braking capacity. If a situation requires more braking force than driver • Pilot Assist* standby mode (p. 286) support can provide, and if the driver does not apply the brakes, a warning light and audible warning signal will be activated to alert the driver that immediate action is required.

* Option/accessory. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT

Switching target vehicles with WARNING Adjusting set speed for driver driver support support When driver support follows another vehi- At certain speeds, vehicles with automatic cle at speeds over approx. 30 km/h It is possible to adjust set speeds for the transmissions and the driver support func- (20 mph) and changes target vehicle – cruise control, Adaptive Cruise Control* and tions Adaptive Cruise Control* and Pilot from a moving vehicle to a stationary one – Pilot Assist* functions. Assist* can switch target vehicles. driver support will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored Switching target vehicles speed. • The driver must then intervene and apply the brakes.

Automatic standby mode when switching targets Driver support disengages and goes into standby mode if: • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h If the target vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may (3 mph) and driver support cannot deter- be stationary traffic ahead. mine if the target vehicle is stationary or if : Increases the set speed it is another object, e.g. a speed bump. When driver support is actively following : Reduces the set speed another vehicle at speeds under 30 km/h • your vehicle's speed goes under 5 km/h (20 mph) and switches targets from a moving (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns so Set speed vehicle to a stationary vehicle, driver support that driver support no longer has a vehicle will brake for the stationary vehicle. to follow. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • Pilot Assist* (p. 280)

294 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

– Change a set speed by pressing the Possible speed Setting time interval to the vehicle (1) or (2) buttons briefly or by pressing Automatic transmission ahead and holding them: The driver support functions can follow The time interval to the vehicle ahead can be set for the functions Adaptive Cruise Control* • Brief press: Each press changes the another vehicle at speeds from a standstill up and Pilot Assist*. speed in +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph) incre- to 200 km/h (125 mph). Different time intervals to the ments. Pilot Assist can provide steering assistance vehicle ahead can be selected • Press and hold: Release the button from near-stationary speeds up to 140 km/h and are shown in the instru- when the set speed indicator (3) has (87 mph). ment panel as 1–5 horizontal moved to the desired speed. The lowest speed that can be set is 30 km/h bars. The more bars, the > The most recently set speed will be (20 mph). When following another vehicle, longer the time interval. One stored. ACC can monitor that vehicle's speed and bar represents an interval of slow your own vehicle down to a standstill, approx. 1 second to the vehicle ahead. 5 bars NOTE but it is not possible to set speeds lower than represents approx. 3 seconds. 30 km/h (20 mph). For vehicles without Adaptive Cruise Con- NOTE trol*, speed instead increases by +/- 1km/h Related information (+/- 1 mph) each time the button is • Driver support systems (p. 254) When the symbol in the instrument panel shows a vehicle and a steering wheel, Pilot pressed. • Cruise control (p. 267) Assist follows a vehicle ahead at a preset • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) Pressing the accelerator pedal time interval. • * If speed is increased by depressing the accel- Pilot Assist (p. 280) When only a steering wheel is shown, erator pedal while pressing the (1) button there is no vehicle ahead within a reasona- on the steering wheel, the vehicle's speed ble distance. when the button is pressed will be stored as the set speed. Temporarily increasing speed using the accelerator pedal, e.g. when passing another vehicle, will not affect the setting. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

}}

* Option/accessory. 295 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| NOTE In order to help your vehicle follow the vehicle Related information ahead as smoothly and comfortably as possi- • Drive modes when using time interval to When the symbol in the instrument panel ble, Adaptive Cruise Control allows the time vehicle (p. 297) shows two vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Con- interval to vary noticeably in certain situations. • Driver support systems (p. 254) trol is following the vehicle ahead at a pre- At low speeds, when the distance to the vehi- * set time interval. cle ahead is short, Adaptive Cruise Control • Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 270) When only one vehicle is shown, there is increases the time interval slightly. • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) no vehicle ahead within a reasonable distance. NOTE • The greater the vehicles' speed, the greater the distance between them for a set time interval. • Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. • If driver support does not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time interval.

WARNING Controls for setting a time interval. • Only use a time interval suitable for the Reduce the time interval current traffic conditions. Increase the time interval • The driver should be aware that short time intervals give them limited time to Distance indicator react and act to any unforeseen traffic – Press the (1) or (2) button to decrease or situation. increase the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval.

296 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Drive modes when using time Auto-hold braking with driver WARNING interval to vehicle support The driver support system only issues a The driver can choose different drive modes The driver support functions Adaptive Cruise warning for obstacles detected by its radar to determine how driver support should Control* and Pilot Assist* have a special brake sensor – thus, a warning may come after a maintain a time interval to the vehicle ahead. function in slow traffic and while stationary. delay or not at all. Settings are made using the DRIVE MODE In certain situations, the parking brake will be • Never wait for a warning or assistance. controls. applied to keep the vehicle at a standstill. Apply the brakes when necessary. Select one of the following: Braking function in slow traffic and at • Eco - Driver support will focus on provid- a standstill NOTE ing good fuel economy, which will In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when increase the time interval to the vehicle stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume Driver support can keep the vehicle sta- ahead. automatically if the vehicle is stopped for less tionary for no more than 10 minutes – after • than approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3 that time the parking brake is applied and Comfort - Driver support will focus on fol- the function is deactivated. lowing the set time interval to the vehicle seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving ahead as smoothly as possible. again, the driver support function will go into The parking brake must be released before standby mode and the auto-hold brake func- • * driver support can be reactivated. Dynamic - Driver support will focus on tion will activate. following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more exactly, which could mean – The function can be reactivated by: faster acceleration and heavier braking. • Pressing the button on the steer- Related information ing wheel keypad. • Setting time interval to the vehicle ahead • Pressing the accelerator pedal. (p. 295) > The function will resume following the • Driver support systems (p. 254) vehicle ahead if it begins to move within approx. 6 seconds. • Drive modes* (p. 389) WARNING A noticeable increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button.

}}

* Option/accessory. 297 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Deactivation of the Auto-hold brake Related information Lane Keeping Aid function • Driver support systems (p. 254) Lane Keeping Aid (LKA65) is designed to In certain situations, auto-hold will be deacti- • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) actively steer the vehicle on freeways, high- vated when the vehicle is at a standstill and • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) ways and other major roads to help the driver the function will go into standby mode. This reduce the risk of the vehicle unintentionally means that the brakes will be released and the • Brake functions (p. 374) veering out of the lane. vehicle could begin to roll. The driver must Lake Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle the lane and/or alerts the driver using vibra- stationary. tions in the steering wheel. This can occur if: Lane Keeping Aid is active at speeds between • The driver depresses the brake pedal. 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads with clearly visible traffic lane marker lines. • The parking brake is applied. On narrow roads, the function may be unavail- • The gear selector is moved to the P, N or able and go into standby mode. The function R position. will become available again when the road • The driver puts Adaptive Cruise Control or becomes sufficiently wide. Pilot Assist in standby mode. Auto Activate Parking Brake The parking brake will be applied if the function is keeping the vehicle stationary using the brakes and: • The driver opens the door or unbuckles his/her seat belt. • The function has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than approx. 10 minutes. • The brakes overheat. • The driver switches off the engine.

65 Lane Keeping Aid

298 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

NOTE When the direction indicators/turn signals are activated, the Lane Keeping Aid does not provide any warning or intervene with steering.

WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and help make it safer – it cannot han- A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker Lane Keeping Aid alerts the driver using vibrations in dle all situations in all traffic, weather lines. the steering wheel. and road conditions. Depending on the settings used, Lane Keep- • The driver is advised to read all sec- ing Aid functions in different ways: tions in the Owner's Manual about this • function to learn of its limitations, Assist enabled: When the vehicle which the driver must be aware of approaches a lane marker line, the func- before using the function. tion will actively steer the vehicle back into • the lane using light pressure on the steer- Driver support functions are not a sub- ing wheel. stitute for the driver's attention and • judgment. The driver is always respon- Warning enabled: If the vehicle is about sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven to move over a lane marker line, the driver in a safe manner, at the appropriate will be alerted by vibrations in the steering speed, with an appropriate distance to wheel. other vehicles, and in accordance with Lane Keeping Aid steers the vehicle back into its There is also an option for activating steering current traffic rules and regulations. lane. assistance and alerts at the same time.

}}

299 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene If the driver does not begin to steer the vehi- Activating or deactivating Lane cle, the function will go into standby mode Keeping Aid and this message will be displayed: The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA66) function is • Lane Keeping Aid – Standby until optional – the driver can choose to have the steering applied function activated or deactivated. Activate or deactivate the The function will then be unavailable until the function using this button in driver begins actively steering the vehicle the center display's Function again. view. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Activating or deactivating Lane Keeping • GREEN button indicator light – the func- Lane Keeping Aid does not intervene in sharp inside Aid (p. 300) tion is activated. curves. • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301) • GRAY button indicator light – the function In certain cases, such as when a turn signal is • Lane Keeping Aid symbols and messages is deactivated. used or when "straightening out" an inside (p. 302) Related information curve, Lane Keeping Aid will not provide steer- • ing assistance or alerts. Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298) • Selecting type of assistance for Lane Hands on the steering wheel Keeping Aid (p. 301) Steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301) only functions if the driver's hands are on the steering wheel, which the system continuously monitors. If the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel, an audible signal will be given and a message will instruct the driver to actively steer the vehicle:

• Lane Keeping Aid – Apply steering

300 DRIVER SUPPORT

Selecting type of assistance for Lane Keeping Aid limitations Related information Lane Keeping Aid In certain demanding driving conditions, Lane • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298) The driver can determine what types of assis- Keeping Aid (LKA68) may not be able to prop- • Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance Lane Keeping Aid (LKA67) should pro- erly assist the driver. In these situations, it is tance (p. 254) vide if the vehicle veers from its lane. recommended that the function be deacti- • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe vated. in the center display's Top view. Examples of such situations include: 2. Under Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select • road work what assistance the function should pro- • winter driving conditions vide: • poor road surfaces • Assist the driver will receive steering • a very sporty driving style assistance but no warning. • bad weather with reduced visibility • Warning – the driver is only warned • roads with indistinct or no lane markings through vibrations in the steering wheel. • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings • Both – the driver receives steering assistance and a warning through • when speed-dependent power steering vibrations in the steering wheel. wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. during cooling due to over- Related information heating. • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298) The function cannot detect barriers, railings or similar obstacles at the side of the lane.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

66 Lane Keeping Aid 67 Lane Keeping Aid 68 Lane Keeping Aid

301 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid symbols and played in the instrument panel. Several exam- messages ples are provided below. A number of symbols and messages related to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA69) may be dis- Symbol Message Meaning

Driver support system The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Reduced functionality Service required

Windscreen sensor The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

69 Lane Keeping Aid

302 DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbol Message Meaning Lane Keeping Aid LKA's steering assistance is disabled when the driver's hands are not on the wheel. Follow the instructions and steer the vehicle. Apply steering

Lane Keeping Aid LKA will go into standby mode until the driver begins steering the vehicle again. Standby until steering applied

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If a message cannot be erased, contact a workshopA. Related information • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298) • Lane Keeping Aid display (p. 304) • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301)

303 DRIVER SUPPORT

Lane Keeping Aid display Unavailable Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA70) uses symbols in • Lane Keeping Aid (p. 298) the instrument panel for various situations. • Lane Keeping Aid limitations (p. 301) Some examples of symbols and descriptions of the situations in which they might appear are provided below.

Available Unavailable ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are GRAY. Lane Keeping Aid is unable to detect the lane marker lines, the vehicle's speed is too low or the road is too narrow. Steering/warning indicator

Available ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are WHITE. Lane Keeping Aid is able to detect one or both of the traffic lane's side marker lines.

Steering/warning ‒ the marker lines in the symbol are COLORED. Indicates that the Lane Keeping Aid system is alerting the driver and/or attempting to steer the vehicle back into the lane.

70 Lane Keeping Aid

304 DRIVER SUPPORT

™ City Safety The function assists the driver by automati- WARNING City Safety71 can alert the driver with light, cally applying the brakes if there is an immi- • The function is supplementary driver sound and pulsations in the brake pedal to nent risk of a collision and the driver does not support intended to facilitate driving help the driver detect pedestrians, cyclists, react in time by braking and/or steering away. and help make it safer – it cannot han- large animals and vehicles. City Safety is activated in situations in which dle all situations in all traffic, weather the driver should have applied the brakes and road conditions. much earlier, which means that the system • will not be able to assist the driver in all situa- The driver is advised to read all sections. The function is designed to be activated tions in the Owner's Manual about this as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary function to learn of its limitations, intervention. Automatic braking will only be which the driver must be aware of applied after or during a collision warning. before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a sub- Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not stitute for the driver's attention and be aware of City Safety except when the sys- judgment. The driver is always respon- tem intervenes when a collision is imminent. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate Function overview speed, with an appropriate distance to Audible signal at risk of collision other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Collision warning symbol

Camera/radar sensor distance monitoring Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) The function can help the driver avoid a colli- • City Safety sub-functions (p. 306) sion in e.g. stop-and-go traffic, when changes in the traffic ahead and driver distraction could • Setting a warning distance for City Safety lead to an incident. City Safety activates a (p. 308) brief, forceful braking in an attempt to stop • Detecting obstacles with City Safety your vehicle immediately behind the vehicle or (p. 309) object ahead.

71 This function is not available on all markets. }}

305 DRIVER SUPPORT

• City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles City Safety sub-functions The braking function for large animals is pri- (p. 313) City Safety72 can help prevent a collision or marily intended to mitigate the force of a colli- • Automatic braking during delayed evasive lower the vehicle's speed at the point of sion at higher speeds. Braking is most effec- maneuvers with City Safety (p. 312) impact. The function consists of several sub- tive at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) and less effective at lower speeds. • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 311) functions. • City Safety limitations (p. 313) Ability to reduce speed City Safety steps City Safety carries out three steps in the fol- • City Safety messages (p. 317) If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the obstacle is greater than the speeds lowing order: specified below, the City Safety auto-brake 1. Collision warning function cannot prevent a collision, but it can 2. Brake assistance help mitigate its effects. 3. Auto-brake Vehicles City Safety can help prevent a collision with a vehicle ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). Cyclists City Safety can help prevent a collision with a cyclist ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Pedestrians City Safety can help prevent a collision with a pedestrian ahead by reducing your vehicle's speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph). Large animals If there is a risk of colliding with a large animal, City Safety can help reduce your vehicle's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph).

72 This function is not available on all markets.

306 DRIVER SUPPORT

1 - Collision warning automatic braking function will be triggered. WARNING The driver is first alerted to the risk of an immi- This occurs whether or not the driver is press- nent collision. ing the brake pedal. Full braking force will be City Safety may not be used to change applied to reduce the speed at impact or how the driver operates the vehicle. The City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or driver must not only rely on City Safety to reduced braking effect will be applied if this is vehicles that are stationary, are moving in the brake the vehicle. sufficient to avoid the collision. same direction as your vehicle and are ahead of your vehicle. City Safety can also detect The seat belt tensioner may be activated when Related information pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are the automatic braking function is triggered. • City Safety™ (p. 305) crossing the road in front of your vehicle. In certain situations, auto-braking may begin • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 311) with a limited braking force before applying If there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, • City Safety braking for oncoming vehicles full braking force. large animal, cyclist or another vehicle, the (p. 313) driver will be alerted with light, sound and pul- If City Safety has prevented a collision, the sations in the brake pedal. At lower speeds, • City Safety limitations (p. 313) vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the • during hard braking or if the accelerator pedal driver takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to Seat belt tensioners (p. 52) is pressed, the brake pedal pulsation warning avoid colliding with a slower-moving vehicle will not be given. The intensity of the brake ahead, your speed will be reduced to that vehi- pedal pulsations varies according to the vehicle's speed. cle's speed. Auto-braking can always be cancelled if the 2 - Brake assistance driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal. If the risk of a collision increases after the collision warning, brake support will be activated. NOTE If the system determines that the pressure the driver is exerting on the brake pedal is insuffi- When City Safety activates the brakes, the cient to prevent the collision, brake support brake lights come on. will increase pressure. 3 - Auto-brake When City Safety applies the brakes, a text The automatic braking function is activated at message will appear in the instrument panel the last moment. to notify the driver that the function is/was activated. If the driver has not taken evasive action by this stage and a collision is imminent, the

307 DRIVER SUPPORT

Setting a warning distance for City number of warnings, but it will also result in WARNING City Safety providing warnings at a later stage. Safety • 73 No automatic system can guarantee City Safety is always active, but the func- The Late warning distance setting should 100% correct function in all situations. tion's warning distance can be adjusted. therefore only be used in exceptional cases, You should therefore never test use of NOTE such as when a more dynamic driving style is City Safety in the direction of people, preferred. The City Safety function cannot be deacti- animals or vehicles – this could lead to vated. It is activated automatically each severe damage, serious personal injury time the engine/electric motor is started. or even death. • City Safety warns the driver if there is a risk of collision, but the function cannot The alert distance determines the sensitivity of reduce the driver's reaction time. the system and regulates the distance at which the light, sound and brake pulsations • Even if the warning distance has been will be activated. set to Early, warnings may be perceived as late in certain situations – To select warning distance: e.g. when there are large speed differ- 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe ences or if the vehicle ahead suddenly in the center display's Top view. brakes heavily. • 2. Under City Safety Warning, tap Late, With the warning distance set to Early, Normal or Early to set the desired warn- warnings come further in advance. This ing distance. may cause the warnings to come more frequently than with warning distance If the driver feels that the Early setting is giv- Normal, but is recommended since it ing too many warnings or finds them irritating, can make City Safety more effective. the Normal or Late warning distance settings can be selected instead. Related information If the driver feels that the warnings are too fre- • City Safety™ (p. 305) quent and distracting, the warning distance • City Safety limitations (p. 313) can be reduced. This will reduce the total • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324)

73 This function is not available on all markets.

308 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Detecting obstacles with City For good performance, the system's function Pedestrians Safety for cyclist detection needs the clearest possi- City Safety74 can help the driver detect other ble information about the contours of the bicy- vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedes- cle and of the cyclist's head, arm, shoulders, trians. legs, torso and lower body in combination with normal human movements. Vehicles If large portions of the cyclist's body or the City Safety can detect most vehicles that are bicycle itself are not visible to the function's stationary or are moving in the same direction camera, it will not be able to detect a cyclist. as your vehicle. In some cases, it can also detect oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic. The system can only detect adult cyclists riding on bicycles intended for adults. For City Safety to be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, its headlights and taillights must be WARNING on and clearly visible. Examples of what the system considers to be a City Safety is supplementary driver sup- pedestrian: clear body contours. Cyclists port, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all For good performance, the system's function situations and, for example, cannot see: for pedestrian detection needs the clearest • partially obscured cyclists. possible information about the contours of the pedestrian's head, arm, shoulders, legs, torso • cyclists if the contrast to the cyclist's and lower body in combination with normal background is poor. human movements. • cyclists in clothing that hides their body contour. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be • a contrast to the background, which could bikes loaded with large objects. depend on clothing, weather conditions, etc. If Warnings and brake interventions may there is little contrast, the person may be occur late or not at all. The driver is always detected late or not at all, which may result in responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is a delayed reaction from the system or no reac- driven correctly and with a safety distance tion at all. Examples of what City Safety would interpret to be a suitable for the speed. cyclist: clear body and bicycle shapes.

74 This function is not available on all markets. }}

309 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| City Safety can detect pedestrians even in Large animals WARNING dark conditions if they are illuminated by the vehicle's headlights. City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot WARNING see: City Safety is supplementary driver sup- • partially obscured larger animals. port, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • larger animals seen from the front or • from behind. partially obscured pedestrians, people • in clothing that hides their body con- running or fast moving larger animals. tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm • larger animals if the contrast to the ani- (32 in.). mal's background is poor.

• pedestrians if the contrast to the Examples of what City Safety would interpret as a • smaller animals such as cats and dogs. pedestrian's background is poor. large animal: stationary or moving slowly and with Warnings and brake interventions may clear body contours. • pedestrians who are carrying large occur late or not at all. The driver is always objects. For good performance, the system's function responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is for detecting large animals (e.g. moose, driven correctly and with a safety distance Warnings and brake interventions may suitable for the speed. occur late or not at all. The driver is always horses, etc.) needs the clearest possible infor- responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is mation about body contours. This entails driven correctly and with a safety distance being able to detect the animal straight from Related information suitable for the speed. the side in combination with normal move- • City Safety™ (p. 305) ments for that animal. • City Safety limitations (p. 313) If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera, the system will not be able to detect the animal. City Safety can detect large animals even in dark conditions if they are illuminated by the vehicle's headlights.

310 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety in crossing traffic Related information Limitations of City Safety in City Safety75 can assist the driver when turn- • City Safety™ (p. 305) crossing traffic ing into the path of an oncoming vehicle in an • City Safety limitations (p. 313) In certain situations, it may be difficult for intersection. City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision with crossing traffic.

Sector in which City Safety can detect an oncoming vehicle in crossing traffic. For example: In order for City Safety to detect an oncoming • On slippery roads when Electronic Stabil- vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a ity Control (ESC) is actively operating. collision, that vehicle must be within the sector in which City Safety can analyze the situa- • If an approaching vehicle is detected at a tion. late stage. • The following criteria must also be met: If the oncoming vehicle is partially obstructed by another vehicle or object. • your vehicle's speed must be at least • If the oncoming vehicle's headlights are 4 km/h (3 mph) off. • your vehicle must be making a left turn • If the oncoming vehicle is moving errati- • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must cally and e.g. suddenly changes lanes at a be on late stage.

75 This function is not available on all markets. }}

311 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| NOTE Automatic braking during delayed City Safety will not intervene to automatically evasive maneuvers with City apply the brakes if it is possible for the driver The function uses the vehicle's camera and Safety to avoid a collision by steering the vehicle. radar sensor, which has certain general 76 limitations. City Safety can assist the driver by auto- However, if City Safety determines that an matically braking the vehicle when it is not evasive maneuver would not be possible due possible to avoid a collision by steering alone. to traffic in the adjacent lane(s), the function Related information City Safety assists the driver by periodically can assist the driver by automatically starting • City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 311) attempting to predict possible "escape to apply the brakes at an earlier stage. • City Safety limitations (p. 313) routes" to the sides of the vehicle in the event a slow-moving or stationary vehicle were to be Related information • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) detected at a late stage. • City Safety™ (p. 305) • City Safety limitations (p. 313)

Your vehicle (1) cannot detect any potential escape routes for veering away from the vehicle ahead (2) and may therefore apply the brakes at an earlier stage. Own vehicle

Slow-moving/stationary vehicles

76 This function is not available on all markets.

312 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety braking for oncoming • your lane must have clear side lane mark- City Safety limitations vehicles ings City Safety77 functionality may be reduced in City Safety can help you apply the brakes for • your vehicle must be positioned straight in certain situations. an oncoming vehicle in your lane. your lane Surroundings If an oncoming vehicle veers into your lane • the oncoming vehicle must be positioned and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can within your vehicle's lane markings Low objects help reduce your vehicle's speed to attempt to Hanging objects, such as flags for overhang- • the oncoming vehicle's headlights must mitigate the force of the collision. ing loads or accessories such as auxiliary be on lights or front protective grids that extend • the function can only handle “front-to- beyond the height of the hood, may limit City front” collisions Safety functionality. • the function can only detect vehicles with Slippery road conditions four wheels. The extended braking distance on slippery roads may reduce City Safety's capacity to WARNING help avoid a collision. In these types of situa- Warnings and brake interventions due to tions, the Anti-lock Braking System and Elec- an imminent collision with an oncoming tronic Stability Control (ESC78) are designed vehicle always come very late. for optimal braking power with maintained stability. Related information Backlighting Own vehicle • City Safety™ (p. 305) The visual warning signal in the windshield • City Safety limitations (p. 313) may be difficult to detect in bright sunlight, if Oncoming vehicles there are reflections, or if the driver is wearing sunglasses or not looking straight ahead. The following criteria must be met for the Heat function to work: If the temperature in the passenger compart- • your vehicle's speed must be above ment is high due to e.g. bright sunlight, the 4 km/h (3 mph) visual warning signal in the windshield may be temporarily disabled. • the road must be straight

77 This function is not available on all markets. }}

313 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Camera and radar sensor's field of vision Driver intervention Important warnings The camera's field of vision is limited and in Backing up certain situations, it may be unable to detect City Safety is temporarily deactivated when WARNING pedestrians, large animals, cyclists or vehicles, the vehicle is backing up. or it may detect them later than expected. The driver support system only issues a Low speed warning for obstacles detected by its radar Vehicles that are dirty may be detected later City Safety is not activated at very low speeds sensor – thus, a warning may come after a delay or not at all. than clean vehicles, and in dark conditions, under 4 km/h (3 mph). The system will there- motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. fore not intervene in situations in which your • Never wait for a warning or assistance. If a text message displayed in the instrument vehicle is approaching another vehicle very Apply the brakes when necessary. panel indicates that the camera or radar sen- slowly, such as when parking. sor is obstructed, it may be difficult for City Active driver Safety to detect pedestrians, large animals, Action by the driver always has priority. City cyclists, vehicles or lane markings in front of Safety will therefore not react or will react at a the vehicle. City Safety functionality may later stage with a warning or intervention in therefore be reduced. situations in which the driver is clearly steering Text messages may not be displayed for all sit- and operating the accelerator pedal, even if a uations in which the windshield sensors are collision is unavoidable. blocked. The driver must therefore always An active and aware driving style may there- keep the windshield in front of the camera/ fore delay collision warnings and intervention radar sensor clean. in order to minimize unnecessary warnings.

CAUTION Only a workshop may perform maintenance on driver support components – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

78 Electronic Stability Control

314 DRIVER SUPPORT

• WARNING Warnings and brake interventions for WARNING pedestrians and cyclists are disen- • Warnings and brake interventions can gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h • The City Safety auto-brake function be triggered late or not at all if the traf- (50 mph). can prevent a collision or reduce colli- fic situation or external influences pre- sion speed, but to ensure full brake • Do not place, affix or mount anything vent the camera and radar unit from performance the driver should always on the inside or outside of the wind- properly detecting pedestrians, depress the brake pedal – even when shield, or in front of or around the cam- cyclists, large animals or vehicles the car auto-brakes. era and radar unit – this could disrupt ahead of the vehicle. camera-based functions. • The warning is only activated if there is • To be able to detect vehicles at night, a high risk of collision – you must • Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of its front and rear lights must work and therefore never wait for a collision the camera sensor can reduce the illuminate clearly. warning. function, disengage it completely or • The camera and radar unit have a lim- give an improper function response. • Warnings and brake interventions for ited range for pedestrians and cyclists pedestrians and cyclists are disen- – the system can provide effective gaged at vehicle speeds over 80 km/h warnings and brake interventions if the (50 mph). relative speed is lower than 50 km/h • City Safety does not activate auto- (30 mph). For stationary or slow-mov- braking intervention during heavy ing vehicles, warnings and brake inter- acceleration. ventions are effective at vehicle speeds of up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than NOTE 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved The function uses the vehicle's camera and at vehicle speeds over 70 km/h radar sensor, which has certain general (43 mph). At lower speeds, the warn- limitations. ing and brake intervention for large animals is less effective. Market limitations • Warnings for stationary or slow-mov- City Safety is not available in all countries. If ing vehicles and large animals can be City Safety is not shown in the center display's disengaged due to darkness or poor Settings menu, your vehicle is not equipped visibility. with this function.

}}

315 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| In the center display's Top view, tap: • Settings My Car IntelliSafe Related information • City Safety™ (p. 305) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

316 DRIVER SUPPORT

City Safety messages A number of messages related to City Safety may be displayed in the instrument panel. Several examples are provided below. Message Meaning City Safety When City Safety is braking or has activated the automatic braking function, one or more symbols may illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message may be displayed. Automatic intervention

City Safety The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Reduced functionality Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

317 DRIVER SUPPORT

• Steering assistance at risk of WARNING Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- collision tance (p. 319) • The function is supplementary driver The Collision avoidance function can help • Steering assistance during collision risks support intended to facilitate driving the driver reduce the risk of the vehicle leav- from oncoming traffic (p. 320) and help make it safer – it cannot han- ing its lane unintentionally and/or colliding dle all situations in all traffic, weather • Steering assistance during collision risks with another vehicle or obstacle by actively and road conditions. from behind* (p. 321) steering the vehicle back into its lane and/or • swerving. • The driver is advised to read all sec- Steering assistance during collision risks The function consists of these subfunctions: tions in the Owner's Manual about this limitations (p. 322) function to learn of its limitations, • Symbols and messages for steering assis- • Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- which the driver must be aware of tance during collision risks (p. 323) tance before using the function. • Steering assistance during collision risks • Driver support functions are not a sub- from oncoming traffic stitute for the driver's attention and • Steering assistance during collision risks judgment. The driver is always respon- from behind* sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven After the system has automatically intervened, in a safe manner, at the appropriate this text message will appear in the instru- speed, with an appropriate distance to ment panel: other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Collision avoidance – Automatic intervention NOTE It is always the driver who must decide how much the vehicle should be in control – the vehicle can never take command.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Activating or deactivating steering assistance during collision risks (p. 319)

318 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Activating or deactivating steering NOTE Run-Off Mitigation with steering assistance during collision risks assistance When the Collision avoidance function is The steering assistance function is optional – Steering assistance has several sub-func- deactivated, all subfunctions of the follow- the driver can choose to have it activated or tions. Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- ing are deactivated: deactivated. tance can help the driver and reduce the risk Activate or deactivate the • Steering assistance at risk of run-off of the vehicle inadvertently running off the function using this button in • Steering assistance at risk of head-on road by actively steering the vehicle back the center display's Function collision onto the road. view. This function has two activation levels for • Steering assistance during collision intervention: risks from behind* • Steering assistance only Although it is possible to deactivate the • GREEN button indicator light – the func- function, the driver is advised to keep it • Steering assistance with braking tion is activated. activated since it can help improve driving Steering assistance only • GRAY button indicator light – the function safety in most cases. is deactivated. The function is automatically activated each Related information time the engine is started79. • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 318) • Steering assistance during collision risks limitations (p. 322)

Intervention with steering assistance

79 On some markets, the setting that was active when the engine was switched off is reactivated. }}

* Option/accessory. 319 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Steering assistance with braking is used. The function will also not be activated Steering assistance during if it detects that the driver is actively operating collision risks from oncoming the vehicle. traffic Related information Steering assistance has several sub-functions. Steering assistance during collision • Steering assistance at risk of collision risks from oncoming traffic can help a dis- (p. 318) tracted driver who has not noticed that the • Steering assistance during collision risks vehicle is veering out of the lane. limitations (p. 322)

Intervention with steering assistance and braking Braking intervention assists in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. Braking force is automatically adapted according to the situation at the moment the vehicle begins to run off the road.

The function is active at speeds between The function provides assistance by swerving your 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with vehicle back into your own lane. clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. Oncoming vehicles The system uses a camera to monitor the Own vehicle edges of the road and the painted side marker lines. If the vehicle is about to cross the edge When steering assistance is activated, colli- of the road, the function will attempt to steer sion warning for driver support will also be the vehicle back onto the road. If this is not activated. However, the brake pedal pulsa- sufficient to keep the vehicle on the road, the tions that are part of collision warning will not brakes will also be applied. be activated. However, the function will not provide either steering assistance or braking if the turn signal

320 DRIVER SUPPORT

The function is active at speeds between Steering assistance during next lane, this function can help the driver 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with collision risks from behind* steer the vehicle back into its own lane. clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. Steering assistance has several sub-func- Even if the driver intentionally changes lanes If your vehicle is starting to veer from your tions. If you become distracted and do not using a turn signal without noticing another own lane and a vehicle is approaching from notice your vehicle starting to veer out of the vehicle approaching, the function can provide the opposite direction, this function can help lane while another vehicle is approaching assistance. the driver steer the vehicle back into its own from behind or is in your vehicle's blind spot, The function is active at speeds between lane. Steering assistance during collision risks from behind can help provide assistance. 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with However, the function will not provide steer- clearly visible traffic lane markings/lines. ing assistance if the turn signal is used. The The lights in the door mirrors will flash while function will also not be activated if it detects steering assistance is being provided, whether that the driver is actively operating the vehicle. or not the BLIS80 function is activated. An Related information audible signal will also sound. • Steering assistance at risk of collision Related information (p. 318) • Steering assistance at risk of collision • Collision risk warning from driver support (p. 318) (p. 293) • BLIS* (p. 325) • Steering assistance during collision risks • Steering assistance during collision risks limitations (p. 322) limitations (p. 322) The function provides assistance by steering your vehicle back into your own lane. Another vehicle in blind spot zone

Own vehicle If your vehicle is beginning to veer out of your lane while another vehicle is in your blind spot or another vehicle is rapidly approaching in the

80 Blind Spot Information

* Option/accessory. 321 DRIVER SUPPORT

Steering assistance during NOTE collision risks limitations The function uses the vehicle's camera and The function may have limited functionality in radar sensor, which has certain general certain situations and not intervene, e.g.: limitations. • for smaller vehicles such as motorcycles • if more than half of your vehicle has moved into the adjacent lane Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision • on roads/lanes with indistinct or no side (p. 318) lane markings • Run-Off Mitigation with steering assis- • outside the speed range 60-140 km/h tance (p. 319) (37-87 mph) • Steering assistance during collision risks • when speed-dependent power steering from oncoming traffic (p. 320) wheel resistance is working at reduced • power – e.g. during cooling due to over- Steering assistance during collision risks * heating. from behind (p. 321) Functionality may also be reduced in other situations, such as: • road work • winter driving conditions • narrow roads • poor road surfaces • a very sporty driving style • bad weather with reduced visibility. In these demanding driving conditions, the function may not be able to properly assist the driver. In these situations, it is recommended that it is turned off.

322 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Symbols and messages for the instrument panel. Several examples are steering assistance during collision provided below. risks A number of symbols and messages related to steering assistance may be displayed in Symbol Message Meaning Collision avoidance When the function is activated, a message will appear to alert the driver. Automatic intervention

Windscreen sensor The camera's ability to detect the lane in front of the vehicle is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual

A text message can be erased by briefly press- Related information ing the button in the center of the right- • Steering assistance at risk of collision side steering wheel keypad. (p. 318) If the message persists: Contact a workshop ‒ • Steering assistance during collision risks an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- limitations (p. 322) mended.

323 DRIVER SUPPORT

81 83 Rear Collision Warning* WARNING Rear Collision Warning* 82 limitations The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function • The function is supplementary driver can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions support intended to facilitate driving In some situations, it may be difficult for Rear from vehicles approaching from behind. and help make it safer – it cannot han- Collision Warning (RCW) to warn the driver The function can alert drivers of following vehi- dle all situations in all traffic, weather of a collision risk. cles of the risk of a collision by rapidly flashing and road conditions. This may be the case if: the turn signals. • The driver is advised to read all sec- • the vehicle approaching from the rear is If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the tions in the Owner's Manual about this detected at a late stage function detects that the vehicle is in danger function to learn of its limitations, • the vehicle approaching from the rear of being hit from behind, the seat belt tension- which the driver must be aware of changes lanes at a late stage ers may tension the front seat belts. The before using the function. • a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con- Whiplash Protection System will also be acti- • Driver support functions are not a sub- nected to the vehicle's electrical system - vated in a collision. stitute for the driver's attention and the function will then be automatically Immediately before a collision from behind, judgment. The driver is always respon- deactivated. the function may also activate the brakes in sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven order to reduce the forward acceleration of the in a safe manner, at the appropriate NOTE vehicle during the collision. However, the speed, with an appropriate distance to brakes will only be applied if your vehicle is other vehicles, and in accordance with In certain markets RCW does not warn stationary. The brakes will be immediately current traffic rules and regulations. with the direction indicators due to local released if the accelerator pedal is depressed. traffic regulations – in such cases, that part of the function is deactivated. The function is automatically activated each Related information time the engine is started. • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Rear Collision Warning* limitations NOTE (p. 324) The function uses the vehicle's camera and • Whiplash Protection System (p. 48) radar sensor, which has certain general limitations.

81 Warning of collision from the rear. 82 This function is not available on all markets. 83 Warning of collision from the rear.

324 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Related information BLIS* • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324) The BLIS84 function is designed to help pro- • Setting a warning distance for City Safety vide assistance in heavy traffic with several (p. 308) lanes moving in the same direction by helping • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) the driver to detect the presence of vehicles in the "blind spot" area behind and to the side of the vehicle.

BLIS overview Blind spot zone

Rapidly approaching vehicle zone The system is designed to react to: • vehicles passing your vehicle Location of BLIS indicator light • vehicles that are rapidly approaching your vehicle from behind. BLIS is a driver support system designed to alert the driver of: When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a rapidly approaching vehicle in zone 2, an indi- • vehicles in your "blind spot" cator light will illuminate in the relevant rear- • vehicles approaching rapidly in adjacent view mirror and glow steadily. If the driver lanes. then uses the turn signal on the side in which the warning has been given, the indicator light will become brighter and begin flashing. BLIS is active when your vehicle is traveling at a speed over 10 km/h (6 mph).

84 Blind Spot Information }}

* Option/accessory. 325 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| If a passing vehicle's speed is more than Related information Activating or deactivating BLIS 15 km/h (9 mph) faster than your vehicle, BLIS • Driver support systems (p. 254) The BLIS85 function can be activated or deac- will not react. • Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 326) tivated. • BLIS limitations (p. 327) Activate or deactivate the NOTE function using this button in • BLIS messages (p. 328) The light illuminates on the side of the the center display's Function vehicle where the system has detected the view. vehicle. If the vehicle is passed on both sides simultaneously, both lights come on. • GREEN button indicator light – the func- WARNING tion is activated. • GRAY button indicator light – the function • The function is supplementary driver is deactivated. support intended to facilitate driving and help make it safer – it cannot han- If BLIS is activated when the engine is started, dle all situations in all traffic, weather the indicator lights in the rearview mirrors will and road conditions. flash once. • The driver is advised to read all sec- If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is tions in the Owner's Manual about this turned off, it will remain off the next time the function to learn of its limitations, engine is started and the indicator lights will which the driver must be aware of not illuminate. before using the function. Related information • Driver support functions are not a sub- • BLIS* (p. 325) stitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always respon- • BLIS limitations (p. 327) sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

85 Blind Spot Information

326 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

BLIS limitations WARNING BLIS86 functionality may be reduced in cer- • BLIS does not work in sharp curves. tain situations. • BLIS does not work when the vehicle is being reversed.

NOTE The function uses the vehicle's radar sensors, which have certain general limitations.

Related information • BLIS* (p. 325) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right sides of the vehicle)87. Examples of limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce functionality and prevent the system from providing warnings. • The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle holder or similar is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. • For BLIS to function effectively, bicycle holders, luggage racks or similar should not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar.

86 Blind Spot Information 87 Note: This illustration is general and details may vary depending on model.

* Option/accessory. 327 DRIVER SUPPORT

BLIS messages A number of messages related to BLIS88 may be displayed in the instrument panel. Several examples are provided below. Message Meaning

Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Service required

Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA B have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Trailer attached

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. B Cross Traffic Alert*

88 Blind Spot Information

328 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver Alert Control with the driver's movements of the steering WARNING The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is wheel. Driver Alert Control must not be used to designed to help alert the driver to erratic extend a period of driving. The driver behavior, e.g. if the driver is distracted or should plan in breaks at regular intervals showing signs of fatigue. and make sure they are well rested. The objective of the function is to detect slowly deteriorating driving behavior and is primarily intended to be used on major roads. WARNING The function is not intended for use in city traf- An alarm from Driver Alert Control should fic. be taken very seriously since a sleepy driver is often not aware of their own condition. DAC is activated when the vehicle's speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: active as long as speeds are above 60 km/h • Stop the vehicle safely as soon as pos- (37 mph). sible and rest. The vehicle is moving erratically in the lane. Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive If driving behavior becomes under the influence of alcohol or other considerably erratic, the stimulants. driver will be alerted by this symbol in the instrument panel, an audible signal and the message Time for a break. If the vehicle is equipped with Sensus Navigation* and the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated, suggestions will also be Driver Alert Control detects the vehicle's position in provided for suitable places to take a break. the traffic lane. The warning will be repeated after a short time A camera monitors the traffic lane's marker if driving behavior does not improve. lines and compares the direction of the road

}}

* Option/accessory. 329 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| WARNING Activating or deactivating Driver Selecting guidance to a rest area if Alert Control the Driver Alert Control warning • The function is supplementary driver The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can has been given support intended to facilitate driving be activated or deactivated. In vehicles equipped with Sensus and help make it safer – it cannot han- 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide dle all situations in all traffic, weather view. that can automatically suggest a suitable rest and road conditions. stop if the Driver Alert Control (DAC) warning • The driver is advised to read all sec- 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver is given. tions in the Owner's Manual about this Alert. The Rest Stop Guidance function can be function to learn of its limitations, 3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to switched on or off. which the driver must be aware of activate/deactivate the function. before using the function. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. • Driver support functions are not a sub- Related information stitute for the driver's attention and • Driver Alert Control (p. 329) 2. Select My Car IntelliSafe Driver judgment. The driver is always respon- • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 331) Alert. sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven 3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to in a safe manner, at the appropriate activate/deactivate the function. speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with Related information current traffic rules and regulations. • Driver Alert Control (p. 329) • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 331) Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Activating or deactivating Driver Alert Control (p. 330) • Selecting guidance to a rest area if the Driver Alert Control warning has been given (p. 330) • Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 331)

330 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Driver Alert Control limitations Cross Traffic Alert*89 If the function detects that something is Driver Alert Control (DAC) functionality may Cross Traffic Alert(CTA) is a supplementary approaching your vehicle from the side: be reduced in certain situations. driver support system to BLIS90 that is • an audible signal will sound from either In certain situations, the system may provide a intended to help the driver detect vehicles the left or right speaker, depending on warning even if it has not detected a change in crossing behind the vehicle while backing up. which side of your vehicle the object is driving behavior, e.g.: approaching from. The auto-brake subfunction can help the • in strong crosswinds driver stop the car if there is a risk of collision • an icon will illuminate in the Park Assist • on grooved road surfaces. with an unobserved vehicle. System graphic on the screen. • an icon will appear in the Park Assist Cam- WARNING era's Top view. In certain cases, driving behavior might not be affected despite the driver's fatigue – when using the Pilot Assist* function – resulting in the driver not getting a warning from DAC. It is therefore very important to always stop and take a break at the slightest sign of fatigue, regardless of whether the function has issued a warning or not.

Examples of areas in which Cross Traffic Alert can NOTE help the driver detect obstacles while backing up. The function uses the vehicle's camera and The function is primarily designed to detect Illuminated Cross Traffic Alert icon in the Park radar sensor, which has certain general vehicles, but in certain cases can also detect Assist System graphic on the screen. limitations. pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicycles. If the driver does not pay attention to the warning from the function and a collision is Related information The function is only active when the vehicle is • unavoidable, the auto brake function will Driver Alert Control (p. 329) moving backward or reverse gear is engaged. intervene to stop the vehicle and a text will be • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

89 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up. 90 Blind Spot Information }}

* Option/accessory. 331 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| shown on the instrument panel to explain why • Park Assist* (p. 335) Activating or deactivating Cross the vehicle was braked. Traffic Alert*91 The driver can choose to deactivate the Cross WARNING Traffic Alert (CTA) function. • The function is supplementary driver Activate or deactivate the support intended to facilitate driving function using this button in and help make it safer – it cannot han- the center display's Function dle all situations in all traffic, weather view. and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this • GREEN button indicator light – the func- function to learn of its limitations, tion is activated. which the driver must be aware of • GRAY button indicator light – the function before using the function. is deactivated. • Driver support functions are not a sub- The function is automatically activated each stitute for the driver's attention and time the engine is started. judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven Related information in a safe manner, at the appropriate • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331) speed, with an appropriate distance to • Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 333) other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. • Cross Traffic Alert* messages (p. 334)

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Activating or deactivating Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 332) • Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 333) • Cross Traffic Alert* messages (p. 334) • BLIS* (p. 325)

332 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert*92 limitations However, as you back your vehicle slowly out The Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) function with of a parking space, CTA's field of vision auto brake may have limited functionality in changes in relation to the obstructing vehicle/ certain situations. Auto-brake is active at object and its blind zone is reduced. speeds under 15 km/h (9.3 mph). Examples of further limitations WARNING • The auto brake subfunction only detects vehicles in motion and may therefore not The auto-brake sub-function can only detect and apply the brakes for other mov- "see" and brake for e.g. stationary obsta- ing vehicles – not for e.g. stationary obstacles, a cyclists or a pedestrian. cles, cyclists or pedestrians. • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce functionality and prevent the The function has certain limitations – the sen- The vehicle is parked very far into a parking space. system from providing warnings. sors, for example, cannot "see" through other • CTA is automatically deactivated if a parked vehicles or objects blocking the vehi- trailer, bicycle holder or similar is con- cle. nected to the vehicle's electrical system. Below are a few examples of situations in • For CTA to function effectively, bicycle which the function's field of vision may be ini- holders, luggage racks or similar should tially limited and approaching vehicles may not be mounted on the vehicle's towbar. therefore not be detected until they are very close to your vehicle: NOTE The function uses the vehicle's radar sensors, which have certain general limitations.

In a diagonal parking space, Cross Traffic Alert may be completely "blind" on one side of your vehicle. Related information Blind zone. • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) The function's field of vision.

91 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up. 92 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

* Option/accessory. 333 DRIVER SUPPORT

Cross Traffic Alert*93 messages instrument panel. Several examples are provi- A number of messages related to Cross ded below. Traffic Alert (CTA) may be displayed in the Message Meaning

Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Service required

Blind spot system off BLISB and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Trailer attached

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. B Blind Spot Information System

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If a message cannot be erased, contact a workshopA. Related information • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331) • BLIS* (p. 325) • Cross Traffic Alert* limitations (p. 333)

93 Warning for crossing traffic when the vehicle is backing up.

334 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

* Park Assist The audible signals will also speed up the NOTE The Park Assist function (PAS94) uses sen- closer the obstacle is to the vehicle. The vol- Besides in the sector closest to the vehicle sors to help the driver when maneuvering in ume of the audio system will be automatically symbol, audible warnings are only provided tight spaces by indicating distances to obsta- lowered. for objects located directly in the vehicle's cles using audible signals and graphics in the Audible signals for obstacles in front and to path. center display. the sides of the vehicle are active when the vehicle is moving but will cease after the vehicle has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. WARNING Audible signals for obstacles behind the vehi- • The function is supplementary driver cle will remain active even when the vehicle is support intended to facilitate driving stationary. and help make it safer – it cannot han- If a detected obstacle is within approx. 30 cm dle all situations in all traffic, weather (1 ft) from the front or rear of the vehicle, the and road conditions. tone will become constant and the active sen- • The driver is advised to read all sec- sor field closest to the vehicle symbol will be tions in the Owner's Manual about this filled in. function to learn of its limitations, At distances within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) which the driver must be aware of Display view showing obstacle zones and sensor from an obstacle to the sides of the vehicle, an before using the function. sectors. rapid pulsing signal will be given and the • Driver support functions are not a sub- The center display shows an overview of the active sector fields will change color from stitute for the driver's attention and vehicle in relation to objects that have been ORANGE to RED. judgment. The driver is always respon- detected. The volume of the Park Assist audible signals sible for ensuring the vehicle is driven can be adjusted while the signal is being given in a safe manner, at the appropriate The marked sector indicates where the obsta- speed, with an appropriate distance to cle is located. The closer the vehicle symbol is using the >II knob or in the center display's Top view under Settings. other vehicles, and in accordance with to a marked sector forward/rearward, the current traffic rules and regulations. closer the detected obstacle is to your vehicle. The side sectors change color as the distance between the vehicle and an object decreases.

94 Park Assist System }}

* Option/accessory. 335 DRIVER SUPPORT

* || Related information Park Assist front, rear and sides NOTE • Driver support systems (p. 254) Park Assist (PAS95) behaves differently The Park Assist system is deactivated • * depending on which part of the vehicle is Park Assist front, rear and sides (p. 336) when the parking brake is used or when P approaching an obstacle. • Activating or deactivating Park Assist* is selected on vehicles with automatic (p. 337) Front camera transmission. • Park Assist symbols and messages (p. 339) CAUTION • Park Assist limitations (p. 338) When installing auxiliary lights: Make sure these do not obscure the sensors – the auxiliary lights could be perceived as an obstacle.

Back

The warning signal has a continuous tone when the obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the vehicle. The Park Assist system's front sensors are automatically activated when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The distance monitored extends approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the vehicle. The warning signal has a continuous tone when the obstacle is less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the vehicle.

95 Park Assist System

336 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

The rear sensors will be activated if the vehicle Side sensors Activating or deactivating Park begins rolling backward or if reverse gear is Assist* engaged. The Park Assist function (PAS96) can be acti- The distance monitored extends vated or deactivated. approx. 1.5 meters (5 ft) behind the vehicle. Park Assist's front and side sensors are automatically activated when the engine is started. The Park Assist system's rear sensors will be The rear sensors are activated if the vehicle is automatically deactivated if the vehicle is moving backward or reverse gear is engaged. backing up with a trailer connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in NOTE the center display's Function view. When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the trailer hitch – without Volvo The warning signal will begin pulsating rapidly when the obstacle is less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from original trailer cables – the Parking Assist the vehicle. system may have to be turned off manually • GREEN button indicator light – the func- to prevent the sensors from reacting to Park Assist's side sensors are automatically tion is activated. activated when the engine is started. They are these. • GRAY button indicator light – the function active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). is deactivated. The distance monitored is approx. 25 cm In vehicles equipped with Park Assist Cam- (0.8 ft) out from the sides. era*, Park Assist can also be activated or deac- The detection area of the side sensors increa- tivated from the relevant camera view. ses significantly, however, when the steering angle of the front wheel increases and Related information • * depending on the position of the steering Park Assist (p. 335) wheel, obstacles up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) • Park Assist limitations (p. 338) diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle can be detected. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 335) • Park Assist sensor field (p. 345)

* Option/accessory. 337 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist limitations CAUTION NOTE Park Assist (PAS97) may not be able to detect Objects such as chains, thin and glossy When a trailer hitch is configured with the all conditions in all situations and functional- poles or low obstacles may end up in the vehicle electrical system, the trailer hitch ity may therefore be limited in certain cases. "signal shadow" and then go temporarily protrusion is included when the function The driver should be aware of the following undetected by the sensors – the pulsating measures the distance to objects behind limitations for Park Assist: tone may then unexpectedly stop instead the vehicle. of becoming a constant tone as expected. WARNING The sensors cannot detect high objects, Related information • The parking sensors have dead/blind such as protruding ramps. • Park Assist* (p. 335) spots where objects cannot be • detected. In such situations, pay extra attention • and maneuver/drive the vehicle very Pay particular attention to people and slowly or stop the current parking animals near the vehicle. maneuver – there may be a high risk of • Bear in mind that the front end of the damage to the vehicle or other objects vehicle may swing out towards oncom- since information from the sensors is ing traffic during the parking maneuver. not always reliable in such situations.

WARNING CAUTION Be extra cautious when In some circumstances, the Park Assist reversing if this symbol is System may produce false warnings due to shown when a trailer, bike external sound sources with the same carrier or similar is attached and electrically ultrasonic frequencies as those the system connected to the vehicle. works with. The symbol indicates that Examples of such sources are horns, wet the rear parking assist sensors are deacti- tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust vated and will not warn of any obstacles. noise from motorcycles, etc.

96 Park Assist System 97 Park Assist System

338 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist symbols and messages instrument panel and/or the center display. Symbols and messages for the Park Assist Several examples are provided below. system (PAS98) may be displayed in the Symbol Message Meaning The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings for obstacles/ objects will be provided.

Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Unavailable Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If a message cannot be erased, contact a workshopA. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 335) • Park Assist limitations (p. 338)

98 Park Assist System

* Option/accessory. 339 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera* Lines - activate/deactivate trajectory lines 99 The Park Assist Camera (PAC ) can assist Towbar* - activate/deactivate trajectory the driver when maneuvering in tight spaces lines for towbar*102 by indicating obstacles using the camera screen and graphics in the center display. CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic The Park Assist Camera is a support function Alert that is automatically activated when reverse Objects/obstacles may be closer to the vehicle gear is engaged. It can also be started man- than they appear on the display. ually from the center display. WARNING • The parking sensors have dead/blind spots where objects cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention to people and animals near the vehicle. • Bear in mind that the front end of the vehicle may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking maneuver.

Example camera view. Zoom100 - zoom in/out 360° view* - activate/deactivate all cameras PAS101 – activates/deactivates Park Assist system sensors

99 Park Assist Camera 100The trajectory lines will not be displayed when zooming in. 101 Park Assist System 102Not available for all models and markets.

340 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

• WARNING Park Assist Camera symbols and mes- Location and field of vision of Park sages (p. 348) Assist Cameras* • The function is supplementary driver • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) 103 support intended to facilitate driving The Park Assist Cameras (PAC ) can display and help make it safer – it cannot han- • Park Assist* (p. 335) a 360° panoramic view as well as separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, dle all situations in all traffic, weather • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 331) and road conditions. front, left and right. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this function to learn of its limitations, which the driver must be aware of before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Location and field of vision of Park Assist Cameras* (p. 341) • Park Assist Camera trajectory lines* (p. 343) • Park Assist sensor field (p. 345) • Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 346)

103 Park Assist Camera }}

* Option/accessory. 341 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| 360° view* If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist Front camera System*, the distance to detected obstacles will be illustrated by fields in different colors. The cameras can be activated automatically or manually. Back

The location of the cameras and their approximate The front Park Assist Camera is located in the grille. fields of vision. The front camera can be useful when pulling The 360° view function activates all Park out from areas with limited visibility, such as Assist Cameras and all four sides of the vehi- when pulling out of a garage. The front camera cle are shown in the center display at once to is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) help the driver see what is around the vehicle and is automatically turned off when the vehi- The rear camera is located above the license plate. while maneuvering at low speeds. cle exceeds this speed. The rear camera shows a wide area behind the From the 360° view, each camera view can vehicle. On certain models, part of the bumper If the vehicle does not reach a speed of be activated separately: and the towbar (if installed) may be visible. 50 km/h (30 mph) and speed falls below • Tap the screen to select the camera's field 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the Objects on the center display may appear to of vision, e.g. in the area in front/above the front camera turns off, the camera will be be leaning slightly. This is normal. front camera. reactivated. The active cameras will be indicated by a camera symbol on the vehicle symbol in the center display.

342 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Side cameras Park Assist Camera trajectory based on the current position of the steering lines* wheel and can help simplify parallel parking, The Park Assist Cameras (PAC104) use trajec- backing into tight spaces or attaching a trailer. tory lines and fields on the screen to indicate The lines on the screen are projected as if they the vehicle's position in relation to its imme- were painted lines on the ground behind the diate surroundings. vehicle and are directly affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This makes it possible for the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel. These lines also indicate the outermost limits that any object (towbar, rearview mirrors, cor- The side cameras are located in the rearview mirrors. ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the vehicle. The side cameras can show views along each side of the vehicle. NOTE Related information • When reversing with a trailer that is • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) not electrically connected to the vehi- • Activating Park Assist Camera (p. 346) cle, the screen guide lines show the path the vehicle will take – not the • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) trailer. • The screen does not show guide lines when a trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle's electrical system. • Guide lines are not shown when zoom- Example of trajectory lines ing in. The trajectory lines show the anticipated trajectory for the vehicle's outermost dimensions

104 Park Assist Camera }}

* Option/accessory. 343 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| CAUTION Trajectory lines in 360° view* Trajectory lines for a towbar* • Bear in mind that when the rearward camera view is selected, the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle – pay attention to the sides and front of the vehicle when steering while reversing. • The same applies to the reverse – pay attention to what is happening with the rear parts of the vehicle when the front camera view is selected. • Note that the guide lines show the shortest path – pay extra attention to 360° view with trajectory lines ensure that the vehicle sides do not In the 360° view, trajectory lines are shown come in contact with/travel over any- behind, in front of, or to the sides of the vehi- thing when steering while driving for- cle, depending on the direction of travel. ward or that the vehicle front moves toward/over anything when steering • When driving forward: Front lines while reversing. • When backing up: Side lines and rear lines When the front or rear camera is selected, the trajectory lines will be shown regardless of the Towbar with trajectory line vehicle's direction of travel. Towbar - activate trajectory lines for tow- With a side camera selected, the trajectory bar. lines will only be shown if the vehicle is back- Zoom - zoom in/out. ing up. To use the camera when hitching a trailer:

344 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

1. Tap Towbar (1). Park Assist sensor field The front and rear fields change colors (from > The trajectory line for the towbar's If the vehicle is equipped with Park Assist YELLOW to ORANGE to RED) as the vehicle anticipated path toward the vehicle will (PAS105), distances will be shown in the Park moves closer to an obstacle. appear and the vehicle's trajectory lines Assist Camera's (PAC106) 360° view with col- Field color Distance in meters will disappear. ored fields for each sensor that has detected rearward (feet) Trajectory lines cannot be displayed for an obstacle. Yellow 0.6-1.5 (2.0-4.9) both the vehicle and the towbar at the Front and rear sensors same time. Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0) 2. Tap Zoom (2) for a close-up view for more Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0) precise maneuvering. > The camera will zoom in. Field color for- Distance in meters Related information ward (feet) • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) Yellow 0.6–0.8 (2.0–2.6) • Location and field of vision of Park Assist Cameras* (p. 341) Orange 0.3–0.6 (1.0–2.0) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) Red 0-0.3 (0-1.0)

When the sensor field color is red, the audible pulsing sounds will change to a continuous tone.

The screen can display colored sensor fields on the vehicle symbol.

105Park Assist System 106 Park Assist Camera }}

* Option/accessory. 345 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Side sensor fields Right-side rear sensor field Activating Park Assist Camera Warning signals vary depending on the vehi- 107 Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended The Park Assist Camera (PAC ) is automati- cle's intended direction of travel. Depending cally activated when reverse gear is engaged on the steering wheel position, warnings may direction of travel rearward – varies according to steering wheel position. or can be started manually using one of the be given for obstacles diagonally in front of or center display's function buttons. behind the vehicle, not only directly behind the The color of the side field changes as the vehi- vehicle. Camera view when backing up cle moves closer to the object – from YEL- When reverse gear is engaged, the screen LOW to RED. shows the rear view108. Side field Distance in meters color (feet) Camera view when manually activating the camera Yellow 0.25–0.9 (0.8–3.0) Activate the Park Assist Cam- Red 0–0.25 (0–0.8) era using this button in the center display's Function view. When the sensor field is RED, the audible pulsing signal will become more rapid. The screen will first show the most recently used camera Related information view. However, each time the engine is • * Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be Park Assist (p. 335) started, the previous side view will be replaced detected. • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) by the 360° view and a previously displayed zoomed-in rear view will be replaced by the Left-side front sensor field • Location and field of vision of Park Assist regular rear view. Cameras* (p. 341) Obstacle sector in the vehicle's intended • GREEN button indicator light – the func- direction of travel forward – varies accord- • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) tion is activated. ing to steering wheel position • GRAY button indicator light – the function Sector with RED field color and rapidly is deactivated. pulsing tone

107Park Assist Camera 108In Canada, it is also possible to choose the 360° view. For the US, rear view is standard and cannot be changed.

346 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Automatically deactivating the camera Front view switches off when the vehicle's speed reaches 25 km/h (16 mph) to help avoid distracting the driver. It will be automatically reactivated if the vehicle's speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute as long as the vehicle's speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph). Other camera views switch off at 15 km/h (9 mph) and are not reactivated. Related information • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) • Park Assist limitations (p. 338) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

* Option/accessory. 347 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Camera symbols and instrument panel and/or the center display. messages Several examples are provided below. Symbols and messages for the Park Assist Camera (PAC109) may be displayed in the Symbol Message Meaning The rear Park Assist sensors are turned off and no acoustic warnings or field markings for obstacles/objects will be provided.

The camera is not functioning properly.

Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Unavailable Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

109Park Assist Camera

348 DRIVER SUPPORT

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If a message cannot be erased, contact a workshopA. Related information • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

* Option/accessory. 349 DRIVER SUPPORT

* • * Park Assist Pilot WARNING Park Assist Pilot messages (p. 358) Park Assist Pilot (PAP110) can help the driver • The function is supplementary driver maneuver the vehicle when parking. The support intended to facilitate driving function can also assist with steering when and help make it safer – it cannot han- pulling out from a parallel parking space. dle all situations in all traffic, weather The function first checks whether there is suf- and road conditions. ficient space and then helps the driver steer the vehicle into the space. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual about this The center display uses symbols, graphics and function to learn of its limitations, messages to inform the driver of what steps which the driver must be aware of need to be taken and when. before using the function. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgment. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the vehicle is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations.

Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Types of parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 351) • Using Park Assist Pilot* (p. 352) • Leaving a parallel parking space with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 355) • Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

110 Park Assist Pilot

350 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Types of parking with Park Assist Perpendicular parking Related information Pilot* • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350) Park Assist Pilot (PAP111) can be used for both • Leaving a parallel parking space with Park parallel and perpendicular parking. Assist Pilot* (p. 355) Parallel parking

Perpendicular parking overview. The function helps park the vehicle using the following steps: 1. The system searches for and measures Overview of parallel parking. potential parking spaces. The function helps park the vehicle using the 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing following steps: into the space and its position is adjusted 1. The system searches for and measures by driving forward/backward. potential parking spaces. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing NOTE into the parking space. Leaving a parking space with the Park Out 3. The vehicle's position in the space is function should only be used in connection adjusted by driving forward/backward. with parallel parking – it does not work for The Park Out function can also help the driver perpendicular parking. pull out of parking spaces.

111 Park Assist Pilot

* Option/accessory. 351 DRIVER SUPPORT

* Using Park Assist Pilot NOTE Park Assist Pilot (PAP112) helps the driver The distance between the vehicle and park using three different steps. The function parking spots should be 0.5–1.5 meters can also help the driver pull out of a parking (1.6–5.0 ft) when the function is looking space. for parking. The function measures the space and steers the vehicle. The driver's role is to: Parking with Park Assist Pilot • keep close watch of the area around the The function helps park the vehicle using the vehicle following steps: • follow the instructions on the center dis- 1. The system searches for and measures play potential parking spaces. • change gears (reverse/forward) – an audi- Parallel parking search overview. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing ble signal indicates when the driver needs into the parking space. to change gears 3. The vehicle is positioned in the parking • regulating and maintaining a safe speed space (the driver may be prompted to shift • applying the brakes and stopping the vehi- gears and apply the brakes). cle. Searching and measuring potential parking Information about the actions required by the spots driver are provided in the center display using The function can be activated symbols, graphics and/or text. in the center display's Func- The function can be activated if the following tion view. criteria have been met after the engine is It can also be accessed from started: the camera views. Perpendicular parking search overview. • No trailer is hitched to the vehicle Vehicle speed may not exceed 30 km/h • Your vehicle's speed is lower than • GREEN button indicator light – the func- (20 mph) when parking. 30 km/h (20 mph). tion is activated. • GRAY button indicator light – the function is deactivated.

112 Park Assist Pilot

352 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

1. Tap Park In in Function view or in Camera Backing into a parking space 2. Back up slowly and carefully without view. touching the steering wheel and do not > The function will search for a potential exceed a speed of 7 km/h (4 mph). parking space and measure it to deter- 3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when mine if it is big enough. instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- 2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when a sage in the center display. graphic and message in the center display indicate that a suitable parking space has NOTE been found. • Keep your hands away from the steer- > A pop-up window will appear. ing wheel when the function is acti- 3. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular vated. parking and engage reverse gear. • Make sure that the steering wheel is Backing into a parallel parking spot overview. not hindered in any way and can rotate NOTE freely. • The function searches for space for park- To achieve the best results – wait until ing, shows instructions and guides the the steering wheel is finished turning vehicle on its passenger side. But, if so before beginning to drive forward/in desired the vehicle can be parked on the reverse. driver's side of the street: • Activate the turn signals on the driver's side – the system will then search for space to park on that side of the vehicle instead.

Backing into a perpendicular parking spot overview. 1. Make sure the path behind your vehicle is clear and engage reverse gear.

}}

353 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Positioning the vehicle in the parking space 1. Move the gear selector to the gear instruc- vehicle, the auto-brake function will bring the ted by the system. Wait until the steering vehicle to a standstill. wheel turns and then drive slowly forward. A pop-up message will then appear in the 2. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when instrument panel and the driver can tap instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- Cancel to cancel the parking sequence or sage in the center display. Resume to continue the parking sequence. 3. Engage reverse gear and back up slowly. After selecting Resume: 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes when – Check that the area around the vehicle is instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- free of obstructions and follow the instruc- sage in the center display. tions on the center display, such as: The function will switch off automatically and To continue – Gently accelerate away a graphic and message will appear to indicate Parallel parking positioning overview. from object. that parking has been completed. Adjust- ments can always be made be the driver after- Related information ward. Only the driver can determine when the • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350) vehicle is correctly parked. • Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

CAUTION The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot (PAP113) compared to when they are used by the Parking Assist system.

Auto-brake during a parking sequence Perpendicular parking positioning overview. If, while parking, the parking sensors detect a vehicle or pedestrian in the vehicle's intended direction of travel behind or in front of the

113 Park Assist Pilot

354 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Leaving a parallel parking space 3. Be prepared to stop the vehicle when Park Assist Pilot* limitations with Park Assist Pilot* instructed to do so by a graphic and mes- Park Assist Pilot (PAP114) may not be able to The Park Out function can help the driver to sage in the center display. Follow the detect all conditions in all situations and func- pull out of a parking space when the vehicle instructions in the same way as for the tionality may therefore be limited. is parallel-parked. parking procedure. The driver should be aware of the following NOTE Note that the steering wheel can "spring" limitations for Park Assist Pilot. back when the procedure is completed and Park Out Leaving a parking space with the the driver may need to turn the steering wheel WARNING function should only be used in connection back to the maximum position in order to pull • The parking sensors have dead/blind with parallel parking – it does not work for out of the parking space. perpendicular parking. spots where objects cannot be If the function determines that the driver can detected. pull out of the parking space without any extra The Park Out function is acti- • Pay particular attention to people and maneuvers, the function will be deactivated, animals near the vehicle. vated in the center display's even if it seems as though the vehicle is not Function view or in Camera completely out of the parking space. • Bear in mind that the front end of the view. vehicle may swing out towards oncom- Related information ing traffic during the parking maneuver. • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350) * • GREEN button indicator light – the func- • Park Assist Pilot limitations (p. 355) CAUTION tion is activated. Objects situated higher than the detection • GRAY button indicator light – the function area of the sensors are not included when is deactivated. the parking maneuver is calculated, which 1. Tap Park Out in Function view or in Cam- could cause the function to swing into the era view. parking space too early. Such parking spaces should be avoided for this reason. 2. Move the gear selector to the suitable position (e.g. D or R) for the direction in which you will be pulling out of the parking space.

114 Park Assist Pilot }}

* Option/accessory. 355 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| The parking sequence is cancelled CAUTION There are a number of things to keep in mind A parking sequence will be cancelled if: when parking, including: Under certain circumstances, the function • • the driver moves the steering wheel may not be able to find parking spaces – The driver is always responsible for deter- • the vehicle's speed exceeds 7 km/h one reason may be that the sensors are mining if the space suggested by the func- (4 mph) disrupted by external sound sources that tion is suitable for parking. • Do not use the function when using snow • the driver taps Cancel in the center dis- emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that chains or a temporary spare tire. play the system works with. • Do not use the function if there are any • when the anti-lock brakes or the Elec- Examples of such sources include horns, objects protruding from the vehicle. tronic stability control are engaged - e.g. wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road exhaust noise from motorcycles, etc. • Heavy rain or snowfall may inhibit PAP's ability to accurately measure a parking • when speed-dependent power steering space. wheel resistance is working at reduced NOTE power – e.g. during cooling due to over- • While searching and measuring the park- Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors heating ing space, the function may be unable to reduce their function and can make meas- detect objects located far into the space. • when, while parking, the parking sensors urement impossible. detect a vehicle or pedestrian in the vehi- • PAP may not suggest parking spaces on cle's intended direction of travel behind or narrow streets if it does not detect suffi- in front of the vehicle, the auto-brake func- Driver responsibility cient space for maneuvering the vehicle. The driver should keep in mind that the function will bring the vehicle to a standstill. • Use approved tires115 inflated to the cor- tion is a parking aid ‒ not an infallible fully rect tire pressure because this affects the A message in the center display will explain automatic system. The driver must always be function's ability to provide parking assis- why the parking sequence was cancelled. prepared to take control and cancel a parking tance. sequence if necessary. • The function is based on the way the vehicles are parked behind and in front of your parking space. If they are, for example, parked too close to the curb, there is a risk that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims

115 "Approved tires" refers to tires of the same type and make as the vehicle's original, factory-installed tires.

356 DRIVER SUPPORT

could be damaged by the curb during the parking procedure. • Perpendicular parking spaces may not be detected or may be suggested unnecessarily if a parked vehicle is sticking out more than other parked vehicles. • The function is intended to provide parking assistance on straight streets, not sections of street with sharp curves or bends. Always make sure that your vehicle is parallel to relevant parking spaces when the function is measuring the parking space. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350) • Speed-dependent steering wheel resistance (p. 254) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

* Option/accessory. 357 DRIVER SUPPORT

Park Assist Pilot* messages the center display. Several examples are pro- Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP116) may vided below. be displayed in the instrument panel and/or Message Meaning Park Assist System One or more of the sensors are blocked. Check and clean/remove the obstacle as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed

Park Assist System The system is not functioning as intended. Contact a workshopA. Unavailable Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the button in the center of the right- side steering wheel keypad. If a message cannot be erased, contact a workshopA. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 350) • Park Assist Pilot* limitations (p. 355)

116 Park Assist Pilot

358 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor • Recommended camera and radar sensor The radar sensor is used by several driver maintenance (p. 365) support systems to detect other vehicles. • Radar sensor type approval (p. 360)

Location of radar sensor The radar sensor is used by the following functions: • Distance Alert* • Adaptive Cruise Control* • Pilot Assist* • Lane Keeping Aid • City Safety • Steering assistance at risk of collision Any modifications to the radar sensor may make its use illegal. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 254) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362)

* Option/accessory. 359 DRIVER SUPPORT

Radar sensor type approval The type approval for the vehicle's radar units for adaptive cruise control* (ACC117), Pilot Assist* and BLIS*118 are found here. Market ACC & PA BLIS Type approval

Canada ✓ FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR ✓ Canada Standard RSS-310 USA ✓ FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR ✓ FCC ID: NBG01RS4

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC applicables aux appareils radio exempts de produise pas de brouillage préjudiciable et Rules and with Industry Canada license- licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux qu'il accepte tout brouillage, même celui exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject conditions suivantes: susceptible d'en compromettre le to the following two conditions: fonctionnement. (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, (1) This device may not cause harmful et CAUTION TO USERS: Changes or interference, and modifications not expressively approved by (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout the party responsible for compliance could (2) This device must accept any interference brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le void the user's authority to operate the received, including interference that may brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio cause undesired operation. le fonctionnement. certification number only signifies that Ce dispositif de radiocommunication de Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Industry Canada technical specifications were catégorie II respecte la norme CNR-310 Canada a applicables aux appareils radio met. d’Industrie Canada. Le présent appareil est exempts de licence. L’exploitation est Note: This equipment complies with radiation conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada autorisée à condition que l'appareil ne exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

117 Adaptive Cruise Control 118 Blind Spot Information

360 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

For detailed information about type approval, go to volvocars.com/support. Related information • Radar sensor (p. 359) • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 270) • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • BLIS* (p. 325)

* Option/accessory. 361 DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera Related information Camera/radar sensor limitations The camera is used by several driver support • Driver support systems (p. 254) The camera and radar sensor used by several systems to e.g. detect lane marker lines or • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) of the driver support functions has certain road signs. limitations, which also affect the functions • Recommended camera and radar sensor using the camera and radar sensor. The driver maintenance (p. 365) should be aware of the following limitations:

Location of the camera The camera is used by the following functions: • Adaptive Cruise Control* • Pilot Assist* • Lane Keeping Aid* • Steering assistance at risk of collision • City Safety • Driver Alert Control* • Road Sign Information* • Active high beams* • Park Assist*

362 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Common camera and radar limitations will switch off temporarily for entire windshield should instead be approx. 15 minutes after the engine is started replaced. Obstructed camera to protect its electronic components. When • Before replacing the windshield, contact a the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the workshop119 to verify that the right wind- camera/radar sensor will automatically restart. shield has been ordered and installed. Damaged windshield • The same type of windshield wipers or wipers approved by Volvo should be used NOTE for replacement. Failure to take action could result in • If the windshield is replaced, the camera reduced performance for the driver support and radar sensor must be recalibrated by a systems that use the camera and radar workshop119 to help ensure proper func- unit. It could cause functions to be tioning of all of the vehicle's camera and reduced, deactivated completely or to pro- radar-based systems. duce an incorrect function response. The area marked in the illustration must be cleaned Additional radar limitations regularly and kept free of decals, objects, solar film, etc. To avoid the risk of malfunction of the driver Vehicle speed The radar sensor's ability to detect a vehicle The camera is located on the upper interior support systems that use the radar sensor, the ahead is significantly reduced if the speed of section of the windshield along with the radar following also apply: the vehicle ahead differs greatly from your sensor. • If there are cracks, scratches or stone vehicle's speed. Do not place, affix or mount anything on the chips on the windshield in front of any of inside or outside of the windshield, or in front the camera and radar sensor "windows" of or around the camera and radar sensor – and this covers an area of this could disrupt camera and radar-based about 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or functions. It could cause functions to be more, contact a workshop to have the reduced, deactivated completely or to produce windshield replaced119. an incorrect function response. • Volvo advises against repairing cracks, High temperatures scratches or stone chips in the area in If the temperature in the passenger compart- front of the camera and radar sensor – the ment is very high, the camera/radar sensor

119 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. }}

363 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Limited field of vision in between your vehicle and the vehicle dust/snow, etc. These conditions may reduce The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In directly ahead. the function of systems that depend on the some situations, it may detect a vehicle later Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or camera or cause these systems to temporarily than expected or not at all. vehicles that are not driving in the center stop functioning. of the lane may remain undetected. Strong sunlight, reflections from the road sur- In curves, the radar may detect the a dif- face, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty ferent vehicle than intended or lose sight road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may of a target vehicle. drastically reduce the camera’s ability to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a Low trailers cyclist, a large animal or another vehicle.

Low trailer in the radar shadow Low trailers may also be difficult or even impossible for the radar to detect. The driver should be extra alert when driving behind vehicles towing low trailers when Adaptive Cruise Control* or Pilot Assist* is activated. The radar sensor's field of vision Additional camera limitations The radar sensor's detection of vehicles very close to your vehicle may be delayed Reduced visibility in certain situations, e.g. if a vehicle pulls Cameras have the same limitations as the human eye. In other words, their “vision" is impaired by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall/rain, dense fog, swirling

364 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Additional Park Assist Camera* Lighting conditions Recommended camera and radar limitations The camera image is automatically adjusted sensor maintenance according to the current lighting conditions. Blind sectors In order for the camera and radar units to This means that the brightness and quality of function properly, they must be kept free of the image may vary slightly. Poor lighting con- dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed ditions may result in reduced image quality. regularly with water and car washing deter- NOTE gent. NOTE A bike carrier and other accessories mounted on the rear of the vehicle can obscure Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors the camera's view. could cause false warnings, reduced function, or no function. Related information • Camera (p. 362) • Radar sensor (p. 359) There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields • of vision. Recommended camera and radar sensor maintenance (p. 365) With the Park Assist Camera's 360° view* • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340) selected, objects/obstacles may not be detected if they are located in the "joints" • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) where the edges of the individual camera views meet.

WARNING Even if it seems as though only a fairly Location of the Park Assist sensors small section of the screen image is obstructed, this may mean that a relatively large sector is hidden and obstacles there may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle.

}}

* Option/accessory. 365 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Related information • Camera (p. 362) • Radar sensor (p. 359) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) • Park Assist Camera* (p. 340)

Location of rear radar sensors. Keep the marked area clean (on both the left and right sides of the vehicle). • For best possible performance, it is important to keep the areas in front of the sensors clean. • Do not attach any objects, tape or decals to the surface of the sensors. • Clean the camera lenses regularly using lukewarm water and car washing detergent. Wash gently to avoid scratching the lens.

CAUTION Only a workshop may perform maintenance on driver support components – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

366 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT

Camera and radar unit symbols Sensor blocked The following table shows some of the situa- and messages If this symbol and the message tions that can cause the message to be dis- Here are examples of some of the messages Windscreen sensor Sensor played, and suggested actions: and symbols related to the camera and radar blocked, see Owner's manual is units that may be displayed in the instrument displayed in the instrument panel, it panel. means that the camera and radar unit are unable to detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the vehicle and that the vehicle's camera and radar-based functions may be obstructed.

Cause Action The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor and remove dirt, ice dirty or covered by ice or snow. and snow. Thick fog, heavy rain or snow is blocking the radar signals or the No action. Heavy precipitation may sometimes prevent the camera/radar sensor camera's range of visibility. from functioning. Water or snow is spraying/swirling up and blocking the radar No action. Very wet or snow-covered roads may sometimes prevent the cam- signals or the camera's range of visibility. era/radar sensor from functioning. There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the cam- Consult a workshop to have the area of the windshield on the inside of the camera/radar sensor. era's casing cleaned. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Bright sunlight. No action. The camera/radar sensor will reset automatically when lighting conditions improve.

}}

367 DRIVER SUPPORT

|| Defective camera Rear Park Assist Camera If a camera sector is dark and contains this symbol, this WARNING indicates that the camera is not functioning properly. Be extra cautious when reversing if this symbol is shown when a trailer, bike carrier or similar is attached and electrically connected to the vehicle. The symbol indicates that the rear parking assist sensors are deactivated and will not warn of any obstacles.

Related information • Camera (p. 362) • Radar sensor (p. 359) • Camera/radar sensor limitations (p. 362) • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) The vehicle's left-side camera is malfunctioning. A dark camera sector may also be displayed in the following situations, but without the defective camera symbol: • a door is open • the tailgate is open • a rearview mirror is folded in

368 STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting the vehicle To start the vehicle: WARNING The vehicle can be started using the start 1. The remote key must be inside the vehicle. • Never use more than one inlay mat at a knob next to the steering wheel when the For vehicles with Passive Start, the key time on the driver's floor. If any other remote key is in the passenger compartment. must be in the front section of the passen- type of floor mat is used, remove the ger compartment. With the optional key- original mat from the driver's seat floor * less locking/unlocking function , the key before driving. All types of mats must can be anywhere in the vehicle. be securely anchored in the attach- 2. Press and hold down the brake pedal1 as ment points in the floor. Make sure the far as possible. floor mat does not impede the movement of the brake pedal or accelerator 3. Press the start button. pedal in any way, as this could be a serious safety hazard. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your vehicle. They must be properly secured in the attachment Location of the start button. points in the floor to help ensure they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals. WARNING Before starting: The starter motor will crank until the engine • Buckle your seat belt. starts or until overheating protection is trig- • Adjust the seat, steering wheel and gered. mirrors. Error messages • Make sure you can fully depress the If the Vehicle key not found message is brake pedal. shown in the instrument panel at start, place the remote key at the backup reader and then The remote key is not physically used to start make a new start attempt. the ignition because the vehicle is equipped with the keyless Passive Start system.

1 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the button to start the engine.

370 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING CAUTION Never remove the remote control key from • When starting in cold weather, the the vehicle while driving or the vehicle is automatic transmission may shift up at being towed. slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission WARNING fluid reaches normal operating temperature. • Always remove the remote key from • Do not race a cold engine immediately the passenger compartment when you after starting. This could prevent fluids leave the vehicle and make sure the from properly lubricating vital compo- ignition is in mode 0. nents in the engine before it has • Location of the backup reader. Always put the gear selector in P and reached the proper operating tempera- apply the parking brake before leaving ture. the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle NOTE • The engine should be idling when the unsupervised while the engine is run- gear selector is moved. Never acceler- When the remote key is placed in the ning. backup reader, make sure that no other ate until the gear is fully engaged. • Always open the garage door fully and Accelerating rapidly before a gear is vehicle keys, metal objects or electronic make sure that ventilation is very good devices (e.g. cellular phones, tablets, lap- properly engaged could lead to harder before starting the engine in a garage. wear of components. tops or chargers) are in the backup reader. The exhaust fumes produced by the • To help prevent the transmission oil Multiple vehicle keys close to each other in vehicle contain carbon monoxide, from overheating, select P or N when the backup reader can disrupt their func- which is invisible and odorless but very idling at a standstill for prolonged peri- tionality. toxic. ods of time. CAUTION If the engine has not responded after 3 attempts – wait for 3 minutes before starting a new attempt. Starting capability increases if the starter battery is given time to recover.

}}

371 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| NOTE Switching off the vehicle Ignition modes The vehicle is turned off using the start but- The vehicle's ignition can be put in various With a cold start, idling speed may be con- ton next to the steering wheel. modes (levels) to make different functions siderably higher than normal for certain available. engine types. This is done to get the emis- To enable the use of a limited number of func- sions system up to normal operating tem- tions when the engine is not running, the igni- perature as quickly as possible, which min- tion can be put in one of three different levels: imizes exhaust emissions and protects the 0, I and II. These levels are referred to as "igni- environment. tion modes" in the Owner's Manual. Related information The following table shows which functions are • Switching off the vehicle (p. 372) available in each ignition mode: • Ignition modes (p. 372) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187) • Jump starting using another battery Location of the start button. (p. 410) To switch off the vehicle: • Selecting ignition mode (p. 374) – Press the start button – the vehicle is turned off. If the vehicle rolls: – Press and hold the start button until the vehicle is turned off. Related information • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) • Ignition modes (p. 372) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187) • Jump starting using another battery (p. 410) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)

372 STARTING AND DRIVING

Mode Functions Mode Functions Mode Functions 0 • The odometer, clock and tem- I • The panoramic roof, power II • The headlights illuminate. perature gauge are illumi- windows, 12-volt electrical • Warning/indicator lights illumi- A nated . socket in the passenger com- nate for 5 seconds. • The power* seats can be partment, Bluetooth, naviga- • tion, phone, blower and wind- A number of other systems are adjusted. activated. However, seat and • shield wipers can be used. The power windows can be • rear window heating can only used. The power seats can be be activated when the engine adjusted. • The center display is activated is running. • The 12-volt electrical socket* in and can be usedA. This ignition mode uses a lot of the cargo compartment can be current from the battery and • The infotainment system can used. should be avoided whenever be usedA. • The infotainment system starts possible! In this mode, the functions are up automatically if it was on A Also activated when the door is opened. available for a limited time and when the ignition was then switch off automatically. switched off. Related information Electrical current will be taken • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) from the battery in this ignition • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187) mode. • Jump starting using another battery (p. 410) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 374)

* Option/accessory. 373 STARTING AND DRIVING

Selecting ignition mode • Ignition mode I – Press the start button Brake functions The vehicle's ignition can be put in various and release. The vehicle's brakes are used to reduce modes (levels) to make different functions • Ignition mode II – Press the button and speed or prevent the vehicle from rolling. available. hold it in for approx. 5 seconds. Release In addition to the wheel brakes and parking the button. brakes, the vehicle is also equipped with a Selecting an ignition mode • Back to ignition mode 0 – To return to number of automatic brake assist functions. ignition mode 0 from modes I and II, These systems provide assistance by e.g. the press the start button. driver not needing to depress the brake pedal at a traffic light, when starting up a hill or Related information when driving down a hill. • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, • Switching off the vehicle (p. 372) the following brake assist functions may be • Ignition modes (p. 372) included: • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187) • Auto-hold brake function at a standstill (Auto Hold) • Jump starting using another battery (p. 410) • Hill Start Assist (Hill Start Assist) • Braking assist after a collision Location of the start button. • City Safety • Ignition mode 0 – Unlock the vehicle and keep the remote key in the passenger • Hill Descent Control (Hill Descent compartment. Control)* Related information NOTE • Brakes (p. 375) To set level I or II without engine start – • Parking brake (p. 377) do not depress the brake pedal (or clutch • Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) pedal for vehicles with manual transmission) when selecting this ignition mode. • Braking assist after a collision (p. 383) • Hill Start Assist (p. 382) • City Safety™ (p. 305) • Hill Descent Control* (p. 400)

374 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Brakes Anti-lock brakes Symbols in the instrument panel The brake pedal is used to apply the vehicle's The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Symbol Meaning regular brakes, which are part of the brake Braking System (ABS2), which helps prevent system. the wheels from locking and helps maintain Check the brake fluid level. If the The vehicle is equipped with two brake cir- steering control when braking. Vibrations may level is low, fill brake fluid and cuits. If one brake circuit is damaged, the be felt from the brake pedal when ABS is check to determine the reason brake pedal may go down further when operating, which is normal. for the loss of brake fluid. A depressed. More pressure will then be After the vehicle is started, a brief test of the required from the driver for normal braking ABS system is automatically performed when effect. the driver releases the brake pedal. An addi- The driver's pressure on the brake pedal is tional automatic test of the system may be performed when the vehicle is traveling at a enhanced by a power braking function. B low speed. During the test, the brake pedal may feel as though it is pulsating. WARNING Steady glow for 2 seconds after the engine is started: Automatic Power braking only functions if the engine function check. is running.

A Steady glow for more than 2 If the brake pedal is used when the engine is seconds: Fault in the ABS sys- turned off, the pedal will feel stiffer than usual tem. The vehicle's regular brake and greater pressure must be applied to brake system is still working, but with- the vehicle. out the ABS function.

In very hilly areas or when driving with a heavy B load, engine braking in manual gear should be A In Canada. used to augment the brakes. Engine braking is B In the US. most effective if the same gear is used both uphill and downhill. Use the Off Road* drive mode to increase the engine braking effect when driving on steep downgrades at low speeds.

2 Anti-lock Braking System }}

* Option/accessory. 375 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| WARNING Brake Assist System Braking on wet roads 3 Prolonged driving in heavy rain without brak- If the warning symbols for both brake fault The brake enhancing system, (BAS ), helps and ABS fault are lit simultaneously, there increase braking force and can thereby ing may cause braking effect to be slightly may be a fault in the brake system. reduce braking distance. delayed the first time the brakes are applied. The system monitors the driver's braking hab- This may also occur after washing the vehicle. • If the brake fluid reservoir level is nor- its and increases braking force when neces- It will then be necessary to apply greater pres- mal when this occurs, drive carefully to sary. Braking force can be increased up to the sure to the brake pedal. You should therefore the nearest workshop to have the point at which the ABS intervenes. maintain a greater distance to the vehicle brake system checked - an authorized ahead. Volvo workshop is recommended. NOTE Firmly apply the brakes after washing the • If the brake fluid has fallen below the vehicle or driving on wet roads. This helps MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, When BAS is activated, depress and hold warm up the brake discs, enabling them to dry the vehicle should not be driven until down the brake pedal as long as needed. more quickly and protecting them against cor- the brake fluid has been filled. The rea- rosion. Consider the current traffic situation son for the brake fluid loss must be Related information when braking. checked. • Brakes (p. 375) Related information Related information • Brakes (p. 375) • Brake Assist System (p. 376) • Braking on salted roads (p. 377) • Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) • Hill Start Assist (p. 382) • Braking on wet roads (p. 376) • Braking on salted roads (p. 377) • Maintenance of the brake system (p. 377) • Brake lights (p. 155)

3 Brake Assist System

376 STARTING AND DRIVING

Braking on salted roads Maintenance of the brake system Parking brake When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt Regularly check the brake system compo- The parking brake helps keep the vehicle sta- may form on the brake discs and brake pads. nents for wear. tionary by mechanically locking two wheels. This could increase stopping distance. Main- To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as tain an extra large safety distance to the vehi- possible, follow the Volvo service schedule cle ahead. Make sure to also: specified in the Warranty and Maintenance Records Information booklet. After replacing • Apply the brakes from time to time to help brake pads and brake discs, braking effect is remove salt. Make sure braking does not not adapted until they are "broken in" by driv- pose a risk to any other road users. ing a few hundred kilometers (miles). Com- • Gently apply the brakes when you have pensate for the reduced braking effect by finished driving and before driving again. applying greater pressure to the brake pedal. Related information Volvo recommends only using brake pads approved for your Volvo. • Brakes (p. 375) • Braking on wet roads (p. 376) CAUTION When the electric parking brake is being The brake system's components should be applied, a faint sound can be heard from the regularly checked for wear. brake's electric motor. This sound can also be Contact a workshop for advice on how to heard during the automatic function check of do this or let a workshop perform the the parking brake. inspection - an authorized Volvo workshop If the vehicle is stationary when the parking is recommended. brake is activated, it will only be applied to the rear wheels. If it is activated while the vehicle Related information is moving, the normal brakes will be used on • Brakes (p. 375) all four wheels. Braking will be transferred to only the rear wheels when the vehicle is almost stopped.

}}

377 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Activating and deactivating the Symbol in the instrument panel • Activating and deactivating the parking parking brake Symbol Meaning brake (p. 378) Use the parking brake to help keep the vehi- • Parking on a hill (p. 380) cle stationary when it is parked. The symbol will be illuminated • when the parking brake is acti- Parking brake malfunction (p. 380) Activating the parking brake vated. • Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) A A flashing symbol indicates that a fault has been detected. Read the message in the instrument panel.

A Canadian models. B US models. Automatic activation The parking brake is applied automatically • 1. Pull up the control. when the ignition is switched off and the setting for automatically activating the > The symbol in the instrument panel will parking brake is activated in the center illuminate when the parking brake is display. activated. • when the gear selector is moved to P on a 2. Make sure the vehicle is stationary. steep hill. • if the auto-hold brake (automatic brake at standstill) function is activated and • the vehicle has been stationary for a prolonged period of time (5-10 minutes). • the vehicle is switched off. • the driver has left the vehicle.

378 STARTING AND DRIVING

Emergency braking 2. Press the control. Settings for automatically In an emergency, the parking brake can be > The parking brake will release and the activating the parking brake activated when the vehicle is moving by pull- symbol in the instrument panel will go Choose whether the parking brake should be ing and holding up the control. The braking out. activated automatically when the vehicle is process is canceled when the control is Deactivating automatically switched off. released or if the accelerator pedal is 1. Start the vehicle. To change this setting: depressed. 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Move the 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. NOTE gear selector to D or R and press the accelerator pedal. In case of emergency braking at high 2. Tap My Car Parking Brake and > The parking brake will release and the speeds, a signal sounds during the brake Suspension and select or deselect the symbol in the instrument panel will go procedure. Auto Activate Parking Brake function. out. Related information Deactivating the parking brake NOTE • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 378) For automatic deactivation to be possible, • Parking brake (p. 377) the driver's seat belt must be buckled or the driver's door closed.

Related information • Settings for automatically activating the parking brake (p. 379) • Parking brake malfunction (p. 380) • Parking brake (p. 377) • Parking on a hill (p. 380) Deactivating manually The parking brake can only be deactivated if the engine is running. 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.

379 STARTING AND DRIVING

Parking on a hill Parking brake malfunction Symbols in the instrument panel Always use the parking brake when parking If you are unable to deactivate or activate the Symbol Meaning on a hill. parking brake after several attempts, contact A flashing symbol indicates that WARNING an authorized Volvo workshop. A audible warning signal will sound if the park- a fault has been detected. See Always apply the parking brake when parking brake is activated while the vehicle is the message in the instrument ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or put- being driven. panel. ting the automatic transmission in P may A not be sufficient to keep the vehicle sta- If the vehicle must be parked before the prob- tionary in all situations. lem is rectified, turn the wheels as when parking on an incline and put the gear selector in If the vehicle is pointing uphill: P. • Turn the front wheels so they are pointing Low battery charge level B away from the curb. If the battery charge level is too low, it will not Fault in the brake system. See If the vehicle is pointing downhill: be possible to activate or deactivate the park- the message in the instrument ing brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the • Turn the front wheels so they are pointing panel. vehicle if the battery is discharged. toward the curb. A Heavy load uphill Replacing brake pads Heavy loads, such as a trailer, could cause the Due to the design of the electric parking vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake, the rear brake pads must be replaced brake is released automatically on steep uphill by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop gradients. To help avoid this, pull the control is recommended. upward while you are driving away. Release B the control when the vehicle gains traction. Information message in the Related information instrument panel. • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 378) A Canadian models. B US models.

380 STARTING AND DRIVING

Related information Auto-hold brakes Symbols in the instrument panel • Activating and deactivating the parking With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver Symbol Meaning brake (p. 378) can release the brake pedal and the brakes • Parking on a hill (p. 380) will remain applied, for example, when the This symbol illuminates when the vehicle has stopped at a traffic light or inter- function is using the normal • Starter battery (p. 565) section. brakes to keep the vehicle sta- • Volvo's service program (p. 548) When the vehicle stops, the brakes are acti- tionary. vated automatically. The function can use This symbol illuminates when the either the normal brakes or the parking brakes function is using the parking to keep the vehicle stationary and works on brake to keep the vehicle station- flat surfaces or hills. If the driver has their seat ary. belt fastened and/or if the driver's door is A closed, the brakes will disengage automatically when the vehicle starts driving.

NOTE B When braking to a stop on an uphill or downhill gradient, depress the brake pedal A Canadian models. with slightly more force than usual before B US models. releasing to ensure that the vehicle cannot move at all. Related information • Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a standstill (p. 382) The parking brake is activated if • Brakes (p. 375) • the vehicle is switched off. • Parking brake (p. 377) • the driver's door is opened • Hill Start Assist (p. 382) • the driver's seat belt is removed • the vehicle has been stationary for a prolonged period of time (5-10 minutes)

381 STARTING AND DRIVING

Activating and deactivating Auto- • The function will remain off until it is reac- Hill Start Assist hold at a standstill tivated. The function for assisting when starting the The Auto-hold brake function at a standstill is • When Auto-hold is switched off, Hill Start vehicle on inclines (HSA4) helps prevent the activated with the button in the tunnel con- Assist (HSA) will remain active to help vehicle from rolling backward when starting sole. prevent the vehicle from rolling backward on an uphill gradient. When backing up a hill, when starting up a hill. HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling forward. Related information The function retains pressure from the brake • Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) pedal in the brake system for several seconds after the brake pedal has been released. This temporary braking effect is released after a few seconds or when the driver begins driving. Hill Start Assist is activated when the vehicle is stopped on steep inclines. The function is available even when the Auto-hold brake function is switched off. – Press the button in the tunnel console to activate or deactivate the function. Related information > The indicator light in the button will illu- • Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) minate when the function is activated. • Brakes (p. 375) The function will remain active the next time the vehicle is started. When shutting off If the function is active and holding the vehicle stationary using the normal brakes (A symbol lit in the instrument panel), the brake pedal must be depressed while pressing the button in order to deactivate Auto-hold.

382 STARTING AND DRIVING

Braking assist after a collision Regenerative braking* Transmission In a collision in which the activation level is The vehicle recovers kinetic energy during The transmission is part of the vehicle's drive- reached for the pyrotechnic seat belt tension- braking in order to reduce fuel consumption line (power transmission) between the engine ers or airbags, or if a collision with a large ani- and emissions. and the drive wheels. The function of the mal is detected, the vehicle's brakes will be The battery symbol is shown in the transmission is to change gears depending automatically activated. This function is instrument panel when the vehicle is on speed and power needs. intended to help prevent or reduce the effects generating power for the battery5. The vehicle has an 8-speed automatic trans- of any subsequent collision. mission. The number of gears allows the After a serious collision, it may no longer be The function is available in all drive modes engine's torque and power band to be effec- possible to control and steer the vehicle. In together with gear selector position D or M. tively utilized. order to avoid or mitigate a possible further Activating brake regeneration Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehi- Brake regeneration is activated by gentle pres- fuel when driving at a constant engine speed. cle's path, the brake assist system is activated sure on the brake pedal or during engine brak- Both the gear selector and the steering wheel automatically to help stop the vehicle safely. ing. paddles can be used to shift up or down man- If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a ually. The selected gear selector position will Regeneration increases during engine braking risk of being hit by passing traffic, the driver be displayed in the instrument panel. if manual gear selector position M is selected. can override the system by depressing the Related information accelerator pedal. Related information • Automatic transmission (p. 384) This function assumes that the brake system • Drive modes* (p. 389) is intact after a collision. • Shifting gears with automatic transmission (p. 384) Related information • Rear Collision Warning* (p. 324) • BLIS* (p. 325) • Brake functions (p. 374)

4 Hill Start Assist 5 The symbol is used in vehicles with 48 V batteries.

* Option/accessory. 383 STARTING AND DRIVING

Automatic transmission Shifting gears with automatic Gear selector positions Gear position is selected automatically to transmission Parking – P make driving as energy efficient as possible. Change gear position by pushing the spring- The transmission also has a manual mode. loaded gear selector forward or rearward, or to the side for manual shifting. Selecting gears

Gear selector and P position overview. P Overview of gear selector and gear shift pattern in Parking is activated using the button located the instrument panel. next to the gear selector. In the P position, the transmission is mechani- The selected gear selector position is dis- Gear selector and gear selector positions overview. played in the instrument panel: cally locked. Select P position when the vehicle is parked. Related information The vehicle can be started when it is in P posi- • Shifting gears with automatic transmis- tion. The vehicle must be stationary when P is sion (p. 384) selected. • * Using the steering wheel paddles to shift When parking – apply the parking brake (p. 386) before shifting to position P. • Shiftlock (p. 387) • The kickdown function (p. 387) • The Launch function* (p. 388) • Automatic transmission symbols and messages (p. 388)

384 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING Neutral – N With position M, it is possible to shift gears In N position, the vehicle can roll freely. The manually. Engine braking will occur when the Always apply the parking brake when park- vehicle can be started when it is in N position. accelerator pedal is released. ing on an incline. Selecting a gear or putting the automatic transmission in P may Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is sta- M position is selected by moving the gear not be sufficient to keep the vehicle stationary with the gear selector in the N posi- selector rearward from D. tionary in all situations. tion. • Push the gear selector to the right toward To move to another gear position when N is "+" (plus) and release to shift up one gear. NOTE selected, the brake pedal must be depressed • and the ignition in mode II. For some trans- Push the gear selector to the left toward The gear selector must be in position P in mission variants, the engine must be running. "–" (minus) and release to shift down one order to lock the vehicle and set the alarm. gear. D drive mode • Push the gear selector rearward to return D is the normal driving gear position. The to D mode. Help functions transmission shifts up or down automatically The system will switch to the P position auto- depending on acceleration and speed. For smooth shifting and engine performance, the transmission will shift down automatically matically: The vehicle must be stationary when the gear if the vehicle's speed becomes too low for the selector is moved from R to D. • if the ignition is switched off while D or R selected gear. is selected. Manual position – M • if the driver unbuckles the seat belt and Related information opens the driver's door while the vehicle is • Automatic transmission (p. 384) running with a gear other than P selected. • Shiftlock (p. 387) To park a vehicle with an unbuckled seat belt • Using the steering wheel paddles* to shift and open door – end P mode by shifting to R (p. 386) or D again. • The kickdown function (p. 387) If the vehicle is switched off in gear position N, it will not automatically switch to the P position. This makes it possible to wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Reverse – R Select R when backing up. The vehicle must Overview of manual gear selector positions in instru- be stationary when R is selected. ment panel.

* Option/accessory. 385 STARTING AND DRIVING

Using the steering wheel paddles* pulled. The current gear will be displayed in to shift the instrument panel. The steering wheel paddles are a supplement In the M position, the paddles are automati- to the gear selector and make it possible to cally activated. shift manually without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The function is available in position D or M.

Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for shifting. Turning off the steering wheel paddles in the D position Instrument panel when the paddles are activated for Manual deactivation shifting in manual mode. – Pull the right paddle (+) toward the steer- Activating the steering wheel paddles ing wheel and hold it there until the num- "-": Shift down one gear. in the D position ber in the instrument panel goes out. > The transmission will return to the D "+": Shift up one gear. To be able to shift gears using the paddles, they must be activated: position. Change – Pull one of the paddles toward the steer- Automatic deactivation To shift: ing wheel. The steering wheel paddles will switch off after a short time if they are not being used. – > A number in the instrument panel indi- Pull one of the paddles toward the steer- This is shown by the number in the instrument cates the current gear being used. ing wheel and then release. panel going out. If engine braking is currently As long as the engine speed (rpm) is within being used, the paddles will remain active the permissible range for the selected gear, a until engine braking stops. gear shift will take place each time a paddle is

386 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Related information Shiftlock The kickdown function • Automatic transmission (p. 384) The automatic transmission's shiftlock func- Kickdown can be used when maximum • Shifting gears with automatic transmis- tion helps prevent inadvertently moving the acceleration is needed e.g. when passing. sion (p. 384) gear selector between different positions. When the accelerator pedal is depressed all the way to the floor (past the normal full accel- Automatic shiftlock erator position), the transmission will auto- The automatic shiftlock has a separate safety matically engage kickdown, i.e. immediately system. shift down to a lower gear. From Park – P or Neutral – N If the accelerator pedal is released from the To move the gear selector from P or N to kickdown position, the transmission will auto- another gear selector position, the engine matically shift up again. must be running. Safety function If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has The transmission control module is equipped been stationary for at least 3 seconds (with or with a downshift protection feature to help without the engine running), the gear selector prevent the engine from overheating. will be locked in that position. In some conditions, the transmission will pre- Messages in the instrument panel vent downshifting/kickdown if this would lead If the gear selector is locked in position a mes- to such high engine speed (rpm) that the sage will appear in the instrument panel e.g. engine could be damaged. If the driver still Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate attempts downshifting or kickdown at a high gear lever. rpm, nothing will happen and the original gear will remain selected. There is no mechanical shiftlock function. With kickdown, the vehicle can downshift one Related information or more steps at a time depending on the • Automatic transmission (p. 384) engine speed. The vehicle upshifts when the • Shifting gears with automatic transmis- engine reaches its maximum rpm to prevent sion (p. 384) engine damage. Related information • Automatic transmission (p. 384)

387 STARTING AND DRIVING

The Launch function* Automatic transmission symbols All Wheel Drive (AWD)* Launch can be used to provide maximum and messages All-wheel drive (AWD6), also called four- acceleration from a standstill. The function is If a problem occurs with the transmission, a wheel drive, means that power is distributed available for the drive modes: Dynamic, symbol and a message are displayed in the to all four wheels, which improves traction. Comfort and Individual. instrument panel. To achieve the best traction, power is auto- CAUTION matically directed to the wheels that have the Activating Launch best grip. The system continuously calculates Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and Check the operating temperature of the the need for torque to the rear wheels, and that the wheels are pointing straight ahead. transmission to help avoid damage to any can immediately redistribute up to half of the of the drive system components. If there is 1. Put the gear selector in D position. engine's torque to the rear wheels. a risk of overheating, a warning symbol will 2. Depress the brake pedal fully. appear in the instrument panel and a text All-wheel drive also has a stabilizing effect at higher speeds. In normal driving conditions, 3. Then fully depress the accelerator pedal. message will be displayed. Follow the recommendations given. most of the engine's power is directed to the 4. Release the brake pedal within 2 seconds. front wheels. When the vehicle is stationary, all-wheel drive is always activated in prepara- NOTE Symbol Meaning tion for maximum traction during acceleration. If the Launch function does not work, wait A fault has occurred in the trans- All-wheel drive reacts differently depending on a few minutes to let the driveline reach mission. which drive mode is selected. working temperature before trying again. Read the message in the instru- Related information ment panel. • Drive modes* (p. 389) CAUTION Hot or overheated transmission. • Low Speed Control* (p. 399) The driveline is exposed to wear when Read the message in the instru- • Transmission (p. 383) using Launch and the function is therefore ment panel. only available a limited number of times. Temporary fault in driveline. Related information Read the message in the instru- • Automatic transmission (p. 384) ment panel.

Related information • Automatic transmission (p. 384)

388 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Drive modes* mode. Once Individual mode is selected, you exceeded, Off Road mode will be deactivated Drive modes affect the vehicle's driving cha- can adjust settings to personal preferences, and another drive mode activated. e.g. to show the tachometer. racteristics in different ways to enhance and In Off Road mode, a compass will be dis- simplify the driving experience in certain Comfort played between the speedometer and the types of situations. Comfort is the vehicle's default mode. This tachometer in the instrument panel. Drive modes enable easy access to the vehi- setting offers driving comfort, light steering cle's many functions and settings in different and soft suspension. NOTE driving situations. The following systems are adapted to help optimize driving characteris- Eco This drive mode is not designed to be used tics in each drive mode: • Adapt the vehicle for more fuel-efficient for normal street driving. and eco-friendly driving with Eco mode. • Steering In this mode, the Start/Stop function is acti- Dynamic * • Engine/transmission/all-wheel drive vated and certain climate settings are • Dynamic mode is designed to help pro- • Brakes reduced. vide sportier driving characteristics and a faster acceleration response. • Shock absorbers When driving in Eco mode, an ECO gauge Gear shifting will be faster and more distinct • indicating how economical the driving is will Instrument panel and the transmission will prioritize gears with be displayed in the instrument panel. • Start/Stop function a higher traction force. Off Road • Climate control settings • Helps maximize the vehicle's ability to tra- Steering response is faster and suspension is 8 Select the drive mode that is adapted to the verse difficult terrain or poor roads. stiffer to help reduce body roll when cornering. current driving conditions. Keep in mind that Steering is light and all-wheel drive* and the not all drive modes are available in all situa- low-speed function with assistance for driving The Start/Stop function is deactivated. tions. 7 downhill (HDC ) are activated. The Start/Stop Dynamic mode is also available in a Polestar Available drive modes function is deactivated. Engineered* version. When the engine is started, the vehicle will be This mode can only be activated at low in Comfort mode and the start/stop function speeds. The permitted speed range will be will be activated. Drive mode can be changed shown in the speedometer. If this speed is once the vehicle is started, e.g. to Individual

6 All Wheel Drive 7 Hill Descent Control 8 Vehicles with Four-C. }}

* Option/accessory. 389 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Individual 3. Under Presets, select one of the following • Customizes drive mode to personal prefer- drive modes as a basis: Eco, Comfort, ences. Dynamic or Polestar Engineered*. Select one of the drive modes as a basis and The following settings can be modified: adjust the settings to achieve your preferred • Driver Display driving characteristics. These settings will be stored in the active driver profile and will be • Steering Force available every time the vehicle is unlocked • Powertrain Characteristics with that remote key. • Brake Characteristics Individual drive mode is only available if it has • Suspension Control been activated in the center display. • ECO Climate • Start/Stop. Related information • Changing drive mode* (p. 391) • Eco drive mode (p. 391) • Economical driving (p. 402) • Start/Stop function (p. 394) Settings view9 for Individual drive mode. • Low Speed Control* (p. 399) 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Hill Descent Control* (p. 400) • All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 388) 2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode. • Driver profiles (p. 132) • Regenerative braking* (p. 383)

9 The illustration is generic - details may vary according to vehicle model.

390 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Changing drive mode* 2. Drive mode can be selected two different Eco drive mode Select the drive mode that is adapted to the ways: Eco drive mode can help make driving more current driving conditions. • Tap the desired drive mode directly on fuel-efficient and eco-friendly. Use this mode to save fuel and promote eco- The drive mode is changed using the button the touchscreen to select and activate friendly driving. in the center console. it. Keep in mind that not all drive modes are • Tap the DRIVE MODE button again to When Eco mode is activated, the following available in all situations. move the cursor to the desired drive characteristics are modified: mode. The selected drive mode is acti- • The automatic transmission's shifting To change drive mode: vated after a brief delay. points. Related information • Engine control and accelerator pedal • Drive modes* (p. 389) response. • Activating and deactivating Eco drive • Eco Coast functionality is activated and mode using the function button (p. 393) engine braking is disabled when the accel- • Activating and deactivating Low Speed erator pedal is released at speeds Control* using the function button between 65 and 140 km/h (p. 399) (40 and 87 mph). • • Activating and deactivating Hill Descent Some of the climate system settings will Control* using the function button be reduced or switched off. (p. 401) • Information will be shown in the ECO gauge in the instrument panel to help pro- 1. Tap the DRIVE MODE button. mote more eco-friendly and economical > A pop-up menu opens in the center dis- driving. play with the active drive mode Coast function Eco Coast marked. Eco Coast essentially deactivates engine braking, allowing the vehicle's kinetic energy to be used to roll greater distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal, the transmission is automatically disengaged from the engine. Engine speed is reduced to idling speed to reduce fuel consumption. }}

* Option/accessory. 391 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| This function is most effective in driving situa- • the steering wheel paddles* are being • On a level road, the vehicle's actual speed tions where the vehicle can roll freely for a used for manual shifting. may differ from the set speed when cruise long distance e.g. on roads with slight down- Deactivating and turning off Eco Coast control is active and the vehicle is coast- grades or when a decrease in speed is antici- In certain situations, it may be advisable to ing. pated such as when approaching an area with deactivate or turn off Eco Coast so that engine • On a steep uphill gradient, the vehicle's a lower speed limit. braking can be used. These situations might speed is reduced until the transmission Activating Eco Coast include driving down steep hills or before downshifts. Reduced acceleration is then The function is activated when the accelerator passing another vehicle to help ensure this initiated in order to reach the set speed. pedal is fully released and the following condi- can be done as safely as possible. • On a downhill gradient in which the vehi- tions are met: Deactivate Eco Coast by cle is coasting, the vehicle's actual speed • Eco drive mode is activated. • may be slightly above or below the set pressing the accelerator or brake pedal speed. The function uses engine braking • The gear selector is in D. • moving the gear selector to manual mode to keep the set speed. If necessary, the • The vehicle's speed is approximately • using the steering wheel paddles* to shift. normal brakes are also applied. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). Turn off Eco Coast by ECO gauge in the instrument panel • The gradient of the downgrade is less than * approximately 6%. • switching to another drive mode COASTING will be displayed in the instrument • deactivating Eco drive mode in Function panel when Eco Coast is being used. view. Limitations It is possible to roll short distances even with- Eco Coast is not available if out Eco Coast in order to help conserve fuel. However, for the best fuel economy, Eco • the engine and/or transmission are not at Coast should be activated and used to roll normal working temperatures longer distances. • the gear selector is moved from D to manual shifting mode Cruise control Eco Cruise • When cruise control is activated in the Eco the vehicle's speed is not within the drive mode, the vehicle's acceleration and 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) range deceleration will be slower than in other drive • the gradient of the downgrade is more modes to help further conserve fuel. Because than approximately 6% of this, the vehicle's actual speed may be slightly above or below the set speed.

392 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

The ECO gauge indicates how economical Related information Activating and deactivating Eco current driving is: • Changing drive mode* (p. 391) drive mode using the function • A low reading in the green area of the • Activating and deactivating Eco drive button gauge indicates economical driving. mode using the function button (p. 393) There is a function button for Eco drive mode • A high reading is shown when driving is • Drive modes* (p. 389) in the center display's Function view if the vehicle is not equipped with a drive mode not economical, e.g. heavy braking or • Economical driving (p. 402) rapid acceleration. button in the center console. • Start/Stop function (p. 394) When the engine is switched off, Eco mode is The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing deactivated and must therefore be reactivated how a reference driver would drive in the same each time the engine is started. ECO will be driving situation. This is shown by the short displayed in the instrument panel when the pointer in the gauge. function is activated. ECO Climate Selecting Eco drive mode in the center In Eco mode, ECO climate is automatically display's Function view activated in the passenger compartment to – Tap the Driving Mode ECO button to help reduce energy consumption. activate or deactivate the function. NOTE When the Eco drive mode is activated, settings for certain climate system and elec- tricity consuming functions are reduced. Some of these settings can be reset manually, but full functionality will only be > An indicator light in the button will illu- restored by switching off Eco mode or minate when the function is activated. adapting the Individual* drive mode to full climate system functionality. Related information • Eco drive mode (p. 391) If condensation forms on the windows, tap the • Changing drive mode* (p. 391) max defroster button, which will function nor- • Drive modes* (p. 389) mally.

* Option/accessory. 393 STARTING AND DRIVING

Start/Stop function Driving with the Start/Stop With Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot Assist Start/Stop is a function that temporarily function activated, the engine will auto-stop about switches off the engine when the vehicle has Start/stop is a function that temporarily turns three seconds after the vehicle has stopped. stopped, e.g. at a traffic light or in heavy traf- off the engine when the vehicle is stationary Auto-start fic, and then starts it again automatically and then automatically starts it when needed. The following conditions must be met for the when needed. The Start/Stop function is available when the engine to auto-start. The Start/Stop function reduces fuel con- ignition is started and can be activated if cer- sumption, which helps to reduce exhaust tain conditions are met. • Release the brake pedal. The engine will emissions. auto-start and the vehicle can be driven. The instrument panel indicates when the func- On an uphill gradient, Hill Start Assist The system makes it possible to drive more tion is 10 economically and climate-smart by letting the (HSA ) will activate to help prevent the • Available engine auto-stop when appropriate. vehicle from rolling backward. • active • When the Auto-hold function is activated, Related information • not available. auto-start will be delayed until the acceler- • Driving with the Start/Stop function ator is pressed. (p. 394) All of the vehicle's ordinary systems, such as • When Adaptive Cruise Control or Pilot • lighting, radio, etc. function normally when the Conditions for the Start/Stop function engine has been auto-stopped. Certain func- Assist are activated, the engine will auto- (p. 396) tions may be temporarily reduced however start when the accelerator pedal is • Drive modes* (p. 389) such as the climate system's blower speed or depressed or the button on the left- extremely high audio system volume. side steering wheel keypad is pressed. • Auto-stop Maintain pressure on the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal. The engine To auto-stop the engine: will auto-start. • Stop the vehicle by applying the brakes • On a downhill gradient: Release the brake and keep the brake pedal depressed. The pedal slightly so that the vehicle begins to engine will auto-stop. roll. The engine will auto-start after a slight In Comfort or Eco drive mode, the engine increase in speed. may auto-stop before the vehicle has completely stopped.

10 Hill Start Assist

394 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Symbols in the instrument panel Related information Deactivating the Start/Stop • Deactivating the Start/Stop function function (p. 395) In certain situations, it may be advisable to White – Displayed in the tachometer • Conditions for the Start/Stop function turn the Start/Stop function off. when the function is available. (p. 396) To turn off Start/Stop, tap the Start/Stop • Start/Stop function (p. 394) function button in the center display's Func- • Hill Start Assist (p. 382) tion view. The indicator light Green – Shown in the tachometer • Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) in the button will go out when the function is active and the engine is when the function has been auto-stopped. turned off. The function will remain turned off until: Gray – When the symbol is grayed- • it is reactivated out with a line through it, the function is not • the drive mode is changed to Eco. available. Related information If no symbol is shown, the function is • Driving with the Start/Stop function switched off. (p. 394) • Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 396)

The function is active and the engine has auto-stopped.

395 STARTING AND DRIVING

Conditions for the Start/Stop • Driving at high altitude and the engine has The engine auto-starts while the brake function not reached its normal operating tempera- pedal is depressed Certain conditions must be met for Start/ ture. In the following situations, the engine will Stop to function. • ABS has been activated. auto-start even if the brake pedal is depressed: If any condition is not met, this will be indi- • Hard braking (even if the ABS system has cated in the instrument panel. not been activated). • High levels of condensation on the inside The engine does not auto-stop • Many starts during a short period of time of the windows. The engine will not auto-stop if: have triggered the starter motor's over- • The climate system settings and the heating protection. actual climate in the passenger compart- • The vehicle has not reached a speed of ment differ. ca 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting. • The exhaust system's particulate filter is full. • The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly. • After several auto-stops, the speed must again exceed approximately ca 10 km/h • A trailer is connected to the vehicle's elec- • The hood is open. (6 mph) before the next auto-stop. trical system. • The vehicle begins to roll or increases • The driver has not fastened the seatbelt. • The transmission is not running at its nor- speed slightly if the engine auto-stopped mal operating temperature. before the vehicle was at a standstill. • The engine is not running at its normal operating temperature. • The gear selector is in mode M (±). • The driver's seat belt is unbuckled with the gear selector in the D or N positions. • The ambient temperature is under • If traffic conditions allow it (for example in approximately -5 °C (23 °F) or over a traffic jam). • The gear selector is moved from D to R or M (±). approximately 37 °C (98 °F). The engine does not auto-start • The driver's door is opened with the gear • Windshield heating is activated. The engine will not auto-start after an auto- selector in D. An audible signal and a text • The climate system settings and the stop if: message informs the driver that the igni- actual climate in the passenger compart- • The driver is not wearing a seat belt, the tion is on. ment differ. gear selector is in the P position and the • The vehicle is in reverse. driver's door is open. The engine must be WARNING • The driver is making large steering wheel started normally. Do not open the hood if the engine has movements. auto-stopped. Turn off the engine by • The road gradient is very steep. switching off the ignition before lifting the hood. • The hood is open.

396 STARTING AND DRIVING

Related information • Start/Stop function (p. 394) • Driving with the Start/Stop function (p. 394) • Deactivating the Start/Stop function (p. 395)

397 STARTING AND DRIVING

Leveling control* and suspension mode and the current vehicle speed. The Symbols and messages Self-leveling and suspension functions are shock absorbers are normally set to help opti- If a problem occurs with the leveling control, a controlled automatically. mize comfort and are adjusted continuously message will be displayed in the instrument according to the road surface and the vehicle's panel. Shock absorbers (Four-C) acceleration, braking and cornering. On vehicles equipped with Four-C, the shock absorbers are adapted to the selected drive

Symbol Message Meaning

Suspension A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible. Service required

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information • Drive modes* (p. 389)

398 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

* Low Speed Control NOTE Activating and deactivating Low The low-speed function (LSC11) facilitates and Speed Control* using the function When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel improves control and traction on rough roads button of the accelerator pedal and engine and slippery surfaces, e.g. when towing a response will change. There is a function button for driving at low trailer on grass or up boat ramps. speeds with Hill Descent Control in the cen- In vehicles equipped with drive mode but- ter display's Function view if the vehicle is ton*, the function is included in the Off Road NOTE not equipped with a drive mode button in the drive mode. This drive mode is not designed to be used center console. Low Speed Control is designed for driving on for normal street driving. rough roads and when towing trailers at low Selecting Low Speed Control in the speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 center display's Function view mph). NOTE – Tap the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. Low Speed Control prioritizes low gear posi- The function is deactivated when driving at tions and traction. If the vehicle is all-wheel high speeds and must be reactivated at drive, power is automatically distributed lower speeds if so desired. evenly to provide as much traction as possible on all wheels and reduce the risk of wheel Related information spin. The accelerator pedal will be less respon- • Activating and deactivating Low Speed sive to improve traction and speed control at Control* using the function button low speeds. (p. 399) > An indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is activated. The function is activated together with Hill • Changing drive mode* (p. 391) 12 When the engine is switched off, the function Descent Control (HDC ), which makes it pos- • Hill Descent Control* (p. 400) sible to control speed going down steep hills will be automatically deactivated. • * using the accelerator pedal and reduces the All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 388) need to use the brake pedal. The system NOTE makes it possible to maintain a low and uni- The function is deactivated when driving at form speed when driving down steep hills. high speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired.

11 Low Speed Control 12 Hill Descent Control }}

* Option/accessory. 399 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Hill Descent Control* pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, • Low Speed Control* (p. 399) The function for assisting when driving down- the vehicle will return to very low speed • Changing drive mode* (p. 391) hill (HDC13) is a low-speed function with regardless of how steep the hill is and without increased engine braking. The function the brakes needing to be applied. The brake makes it possible to increase or decrease the lights will illuminate when the function is acti- vehicle's speed on steep downhill gradients vated. by only using the accelerator pedal, without The driver can brake to stop or slow the vehi- applying the brakes. cle at any time by depressing the brake pedal. In vehicles equipped with drive mode but- HDC is activated along with Low Speed Con- ton*, the function is included in the Off Road trol (LSC14), which facilitates and improves drive mode. traction and control on rough and slippery sur- HDC is designed for driving on rough roads at faces. The system is intended to be used at low speeds and downhill gradients with slip- low speeds, up to approximately 40 km/h (25 pery or otherwise difficult road surfaces. The mph). driver does not need to use the brake pedal but can instead focus on steering. To keep in mind when using HDC • If the function is switched off while driving WARNING on a steep downhill gradient, braking effect will be gradually reduced. HDC is only intended to be a supplementary braking aid and it does not function in • HDC can be used in gear positions D and all situations. R, and in manual gears 1 or 2. The driver is always ultimately responsible • It is not possible to manually shift to third for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. gear or higher when HDC is active.

Function Hill Descent Control allows the vehicle to move forward or backward at very low speeds assisted by the brake system. The driver can increase the speed by pressing the accelerator

13 Hill Descent Control 14 Low Speed Control

400 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

NOTE Activating and deactivating Hill Related information Descent Control* using the • Hill Descent Control* (p. 400) When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel function button • * of the accelerator pedal and engine Changing drive mode (p. 391) There is a function button for assistance on response will change. steep gradients with Hill Descent Control in the center display's Function view if the vehi- NOTE cle is not equipped with a drive mode button in the center console. This drive mode is not designed to be used for normal street driving. Selecting Hill Descent Control in the center display's Function view NOTE HDC only works at low speeds. – The function is deactivated when driving at Tap the Hill Descent Control button to high speeds and must be reactivated at activate or deactivate the function. lower speeds if so desired.

Related information • Activating and deactivating Hill Descent Control* using the function button (p. 401) > An indicator light in the button will illu- • * Changing drive mode (p. 391) minate when the function is activated. • Low Speed Control* (p. 399) When the engine is switched off, the function • All Wheel Drive (AWD)* (p. 388) will be automatically deactivated.

NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at high speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired.

* Option/accessory. 401 STARTING AND DRIVING

Economical driving • When using manual gear shifting, drive After driving A more economical driving style can help using the highest possible gear. Use the • If possible, park in a climate-controlled lower fuel consumption. gear indicator15. garage. • Maintain a steady speed and a generous Related information Before driving following distance to traffic ahead to mini- • • Eco drive mode (p. 391) If possible, precondition the vehicle before mize braking. Use engine braking if possi- driving. ble. • Starting and stopping preconditioning* • (p. 213) If preconditioning is not possible when it • Higher speeds increase energy consump- is cold outside, use seat and steering tion because air resistance increases with • Checking tire pressure (p. 507) wheel heating first. Avoid heating the speed. • Activating and deactivating Auto-hold at a entire passenger compartment to reduce • standstill (p. 382) the amount of current being taken from In a cold climate, reduce heating of the the start battery. windshield/rear window, mirrors, seats • Start/Stop function (p. 394) • and the steering wheel. • Trip computer (p. 87) Avoid using idling to warm up the vehicle • before driving. Avoid driving with the windows open. • • The type of tires and inflation pressure Do not use the accelerator pedal to keep used could affect energy consumption – the vehicle stationary on an uphill gradi- consult an authorized Volvo retailer for ent. Instead, activate the auto-hold brake advice on suitable tires. function at a standstill. • • Remove unnecessary items from the vehi- Use trip data to see current fuel consump- cle - the heavier the load, the higher the tion. fuel consumption. WARNING While driving • Never turn off the engine while the vehicle Activate Eco drive mode. is moving, e.g. when driving downhill. This • Use gear selector position D as often as deactivates certain important systems possible. such as power steering and brakes.

15 Only available in certain markets.

402 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Preparing for a long trip Winter driving Slippery driving conditions It is important to have the vehicle's systems It is important to check the vehicle before To help optimize traction and roadholding, and equipment checked carefully before driv- driving in cold/snowy conditions to make Volvo recommends using snow tires on all ing long distances. sure it can be driven safely. wheels whenever there is a risk of snow or ice Check that Before the cold season arrives: on the road. • the engine is running properly and that • Make sure the engine coolant contains fuel consumption is normal 50% antifreeze. This mixture helps pro- NOTE • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) tect the engine from frost erosion down to Certain countries require use of winter tires approx. –35 °C (–31 °F). Do not mix dif- by law. Not all countries permit the use of • the brake pedal is functioning properly ferent types of antifreeze as this could studded tires. • all lights work pose a health risk. • tire tread depth and air pressure are at • Keep the fuel tank well filled to prevent Practice driving on slippery surfaces under correct levels. Change to snow tires when condensation from forming. controlled conditions to learn how the vehicle driving in areas where there is a risk of • Check the viscosity of the engine oil. Oil reacts. snowy or icy roads with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves Related information • the start battery is sufficiently charged cold-weather starting and reduces fuel • Engine oil specifications (p. 618) • the wiper blades are in good condition consumption when driving with a cold engine. • Snow tires (p. 520) Related information • Check the condition and charge level of • Snow chains (p. 521) • Checking tire pressure (p. 507) the start battery. Cold weather places • Braking on salted roads (p. 377) • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) greater demands on the start battery and • Braking on wet roads (p. 376) • Winter driving (p. 403) reduces its capacity. • • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) • Economical driving (p. 402) Use washer fluid containing antifreeze to help prevent ice from forming in the • Starter battery (p. 565) • Vehicle modem settings (p. 482) washer fluid reservoir. • Replacing windshield wiper blades • Loading recommendations (p. 537) See separate section for engine oil recommen- (p. 604) • Driving with a trailer (p. 414) dations. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) • Pilot Assist* (p. 280) • Refilling coolant (p. 563) • Tire sealing system (p. 522)

* Option/accessory. 403 STARTING AND DRIVING

Driving through standing water CAUTION Opening/closing the fuel filler door It may be necessary to drive the vehicle The vehicle must be unlocked before the fuel • Engine damage could occur if water through standing water e.g. deep puddles or filler door can be opened16. enters the air cleaner. flooding on the road. This must be done with An arrow next to the fuel great caution. • If water enters the transmission, the pump symbol in the instru- The vehicle can be driven through water up to lubricating ability of the oils is reduced ment panel indicates the side a depth of 45 cm (17 in) at no more than walk- and the service life of these systems is of the vehicle on which the ing speed. Be particularly careful when driving shortened. fuel filler door is located. through flowing water. • Damage to any component, engine, When driving through standing water, drive transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by 1. Open the fuel filler door by pressing lightly slowly and do not stop the vehicle. When you on its rear edge. have passed the water, press lightly on the flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is brake pedal and check that the brakes are not covered under warranty. 2. After refueling, press the fuel filler door functioning properly. Water, mud, slush, etc. • If the engine stalls while the vehicle is lightly to close it. can make the brake linings slippery, resulting in water, do not attempt to restart it. Related information in delayed braking effect. Have the vehicle towed out of the • Refueling (p. 405) water to a workshop. An authorized • If the vehicle is equipped with contacts for Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk an electric heater or trailer coupling, clean of engine failure. these after driving in water or mud. • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water up to the sills any longer than absolutely CAUTION necessary. This could result in electrical Because it can be difficult to determine the malfunctions. water depth, Volvo recommends not driving through standing or running water. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to all applicable laws and regulations.

Related information • Recovery (p. 421) • Low Speed Control* (p. 399)

404 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

Refueling 3. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler 2. Insert the funnel into the fuel filler pipe's The fuel tank is equipped with a fuel filling pipe's opening. There are two flaps just opening. There are two flaps just inside system without a cover. inside the fuel filler pipe and the pump's the fuel filler pipe and the tube section of nozzle must push both of these flaps open the funnel must push both of these flaps Refueling the vehicle at a service before fuel can be added. open before fuel can be added. station 4. Avoid overfilling the tank. Do not press the handle on the filler nozzle again after it has WARNING initially stopped pumping. California Proposition 65 > The fuel tank is now filled. Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle can expose you to chemi- NOTE cals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are An over-full tank may overflow in hot known to the State of California to cause weather. cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine CAUTION except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In wash your hands frequently when servicing It is important to insert the pump's nozzle past both addition to causing damage to the environ- your vehicle. For more information go to of the two flaps in the fuel filler pipe before beginning ment, gasolines containing alcohol can www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- fueling. cause damage to painted surfaces, which vehicle. Instructions for fueling: may not be covered under the New Vehicle 1. Turn off the engine and open the fuel filler Limited Warranty. Related information door. • Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 404) 2. Select a fuel approved for use in the vehi- Refueling from a fuel container cle. For more information on approved • Fuel (p. 406) When filling from a fuel container, use the fun- fuels, see the section on “Fuel”. nel provided in a foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo compartment. 1. Open the fuel filler door.

16 Only locking and unlocking using the remote key, Passive Entry* or Volvo On Call will affect the status of the fuel filler door.

405 STARTING AND DRIVING

Fuel system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will meet seasonal air quality standards, some Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- lessen the effectiveness of the emission con- areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. trol system and could result in loss of emission oline to control engine deposits. Volvo permits the use of the following "oxy- warranty coverage. State and local vehicle genated" fuels. However, the specified octane Deposit control gasoline (gasoline inspection programs will make detection of ratings must still be met. with detergent additives) misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emis- Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping sion test failure for misfueled vehicles. Alcohol - Ethanol injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume use of deposit control gasolines will help NOTE may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to ensure good driveability and fuel economy. If as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain you are not sure whether the gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called Ethers - MTBE/ETBE: Fuels containing up to deposit control additives, check with the serv- methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tricar- 22% MTBE/ETBE by volume may be used. ice station operator. bonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Methanol Emission Control System performance Do not use gasolines containing methanol NOTE may be affected, and the Check Engine (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice Volvo recommends not using external fuel Light (malfunction indicator light) located can result in vehicle performance deterioration injector cleaning systems, e.g. do not add on your instrument panel may light. If this and can damage critical parts in the fuel sys- detergent additives to gasoline before or occurs, please return your vehicle to a tem. Such damage may not be covered under after refueling. trained and qualified Volvo service techni- the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. cian for service. Unleaded fuel Related information All Volvo vehicles have a three-way catalytic Gasoline containing alcohol and • Octane rating (p. 407) converter and must only use unleaded gaso- ethers, "Oxygenated fuels" • Opening/closing the fuel filler door line. US and Canadian regulations require that Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing (p. 404) pumps delivering unleaded gasoline are "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or • Refueling (p. 405) labeled "UNLEADED". Only the nozzles of ethers. In some areas, state or local laws • these pumps will fit in your vehicle's fuel filler require that the service pump be marked indi- Emission controls (p. 408) inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only". there are areas in which the pumps are Leaded gasoline damages the three-way cata- unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is lytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check with the service station operator. To

406 STARTING AND DRIVING

Octane rating TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand- Volvo requires premium fuel (91 octane17 or ard jointly established by leading automotive higher) for all T5, T6 and T8 engines, and rec- manufactures to meet the needs of today's ommends AKI 93 for optimal performance advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail- and fuel economy. See decal examples in ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their illustrations 1 and 2. gasoline as having met the "TOP TIER Deter- gent Gasoline" standards. For optimal performance, Volvo recommends 17 premium fuel (91 octane and higher) for T4 NOTE engines. However, engine reliability should Illustration 2: Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap 17 Information about TOP TIER Detergent not be affected as long as 87 octane or on vehicles that require premium fuel18. higher is used. See decal example in illustra- Gasoline is available at toptiergas.com tion 3. Minimum octane NOTE Decals When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable.

Fuel Formulations Do not use gasoline that contains lead or manganese as a knock inhibitor, and do not use Illustration 3: Sample fuel pump octane label17. lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline emission control systems on your vehicle, lead Volvo endorses the use of "TOP TIER Deter- has been strongly linked to certain forms of gent Gasoline" where available to help main- cancer. 17 Illustration 1: Sample fuel pump octane label . tain engine performance and reliability. TOP Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to

17 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2 18 For supplementary information - see the car's Service and Warranty Booklet. }}

407 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area WARNING Emission controls where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include: Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, Three-way catalytic converter and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain • standing upwind away from the filler noz- gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes engine malfunctions, particularly involving zle while refueling inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition • compartment is ventilated, and immedi- refueling only at gas stations with vapor ately return the vehicle to a trained and systems, may cause unusually high three- recovery systems that fully seal the mouth qualified Volvo service technician for cor- way catalytic converter temperatures. Do of the filler neck during refueling rection. not continue to operate your vehicle if you • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of fuel filler nozzle. Demanding driving power or other unusual operating condi- In demanding driving conditions, such as tions, such as engine overheating or back- Use of Additives when towing a trailer or driving in hot weather firing. A properly tuned engine will help With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- or for prolonged periods at high altitudes, it avoid malfunctions that could damage the ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- may be a good idea to switch to a higher- three-way catalytic converter. eners, or other store-bought additives to your octane fuel (AKI17 91 or higher) or to switch to • Do not park your vehicle over combustible vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. another brand of gasoline in order to fully uti- materials, such as grass or leaves, which Overuse may damage your engine, and some lize the vehicle's engine capacity and optimize can come into contact with the hot of these additives contain organically volatile traction. exhaust system and cause such materials chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to ignite under certain wind and weather to these chemicals. Related information conditions. • Fuel (p. 406) • WARNING Excessive starter cranking (in excess of • Emission controls (p. 408) one minute), or an intermittently firing or Never carry a cell phone that is switched flooded engine can cause three-way cata- on while refueling your vehicle. If the lytic converter or exhaust system over- phone rings, this may cause a spark that heating. could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and injury. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system over-

17 AKI (Anti Knock Index) is an average value of RON (Research Octane Number) and MON (Motor Octane Number) - (RON)+(MON)/2

408 STARTING AND DRIVING

heating. This includes: altering fuel injec- Overheating of engine and played in the instrument panel. Follow the tion settings or components, altering transmission recommendations given by reducing emission system components or location In certain driving conditions, such as driving speed or stopping the vehicle safely and or removing components, and/or repeated in mountainous areas or hot weather, there is letting the engine idle for a few minutes to use of leaded fuel. a risk of the engine or transmission overheat- let the transmission cool. ing, especially when carrying heavy loads. • If the vehicle begins to overheat, the air NOTE • Engine power may be temporarily limited. conditioning may be temporarily switched Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with • Remove any auxiliary lights mounted in off. three-way catalytic converters. front of the grille when driving in hot • After a prolonged period of driving in weather. demanding conditions, do not turn off the Heated oxygen sensors • If the temperature in the engine's cooling engine immediately after stopping. The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy- system becomes too high, a warning sym- gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings bol will appear in the instrument panel NOTE are fed into a control module that continuously along with the message Engine It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to monitors engine functions and controls fuel temperature High temperature Stop operate for a short time after the engine is injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine safely. Pull over to a safe location and let switched off. is continuously adjusted for efficient combus- the engine idle for a few minutes to cool tion to help reduce harmful emissions. down. Symbols in the instrument panel • If the message Engine temperature Related information High temperature Turn off engine or Symbol Meaning • Octane rating (p. 407) Engine coolant Level low, turn off High engine temperature. Follow • Fuel (p. 406) engine is displayed, stop the vehicle and the recommendations provided. turn off the engine. • If the transmission begins to overheat, an alternative gear shifting program will be Low coolant level. Follow the selected. An integrated protective function recommendations provided. will also be activated, the warning symbol will illuminate and the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to Transmission hot/overheated/ lower temperature or Transmission hot cooling. Follow the recommen- Stop safely, wait for cooling will be dis- dations provided. }}

409 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Battery drain Jump starting using another • Refilling coolant (p. 563) The electrical functions in the vehicle drain battery • Driving with a trailer (p. 414) the battery to varying degrees. Avoid using If the start battery is discharged, current from ignition mode II when the engine is switched another battery can be used to start the vehi- • Preparing for a long trip (p. 403) off. Use ignition mode I instead, as this uses cle. less electrical current. Note that certain accessories may also drain power from the electrical system. Do not use functions that use a lot of electrical current when the engine is turned off. Examples of such functions are: • blower • headlights • windshield wipers • audio system (especially at high volume). If the starter battery voltage is low, a message Jumper cable connecting points. is shown in the driver display. The vehicle's energy-saving function will then turn off or To avoid short circuits or other damage, the reduce certain functions, such as the blower following steps are recommended when jump and/or the audio system. starting the battery using another battery: – To charge the battery, start the engine and 1. Put the ignition in mode 0. let it run for at least 15 minutes (driving 2. Make sure the auxiliary battery (the bat- charges the battery faster than letting the tery used to jump start the discharged engine idle). battery) has a voltage of 12 volts. Related information 3. If the auxiliary battery is in another vehicle, • Starter battery (p. 565) turn off that vehicle's engine and make • Ignition modes (p. 372) sure that the vehicles are not touching each other.

410 STARTING AND DRIVING

4. Clamp the red jumper cable onto the auxil- 11. Start the engine of the vehicle with the WARNING iary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). dead battery. High voltage may be dangerous if handled incorrectly. Do not touch anything on bat- CAUTION CAUTION teries that is not clearly described in this Connect the jump cable carefully to pre- Do not touch the connections between the Owner's Manual. vent short circuits with other components cable and the vehicle during the start • Never use a 48 V support battery to in the engine compartment. attempt. Risk of sparking. jump start the vehicle. • External electrical equipment may not 5. Fold back the cover over your vehicle's 12. Remove the jumper cables in the reverse under any circumstance be connected positive (+) jump start terminal (2). order ‒ first the black cables and then the to the 48 V battery. red cables. 6. Clamp the other end of the red jumper • Only a workshop may replace or per- cable to your vehicle's positive (+) jump Make sure that none of the clamps of the form service on the 48 V battery – an start terminal (2). black jumper cables come into contact authorized Volvo workshop is recom- with either vehicle's positive (+) jump start mended. 7. Clamp the black jumper cable onto the terminals or either of the red jumper auxiliary battery's negative (-) terminal (3). cable's connected clamps. 8. Clamp the other end of the black jumper WARNING cable to your vehicle's negative (-) ground PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery point (4). posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemi- 9. Make sure the jumper cables are securely cals known to the state of California to attached to help prevent sparks while cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash jump starting. hands after handling. 10. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for a few minutes at a higher idling speed than normal, about 1500 rpm.

}}

411 STARTING AND DRIVING

• || WARNING NOTE Selecting ignition mode (p. 374) • Support battery (p. 567) • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, If the starter battery has been discharged which is flammable and explosive. to the extent that the vehicle does not have • Do not connect the jumper cable to normal electrical functions and the engine any part of the fuel system or to any must then be jump-started with an external moving parts. Avoid touching hot battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop manifolds. function may remain activated. If the Start/ • Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do the engine, there is a huge risk that auto- not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, start of the engine will fail due to insuffi- skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. cient battery capacity since the battery had • If contact occurs, flush the affected not had time to recharge. area immediately with water. Obtain If the vehicle has been jump-started or if medical help immediately if eyes are there has not been enough time for the affected. battery to be charged with a battery • Never expose the battery to open flame charger, the Start/Stop function should be or electric spark. Do not smoke near temporarily deactivated until the battery the battery. Failure to follow the has been recharged by the vehicle. At an instructions for jump starting can lead ambient temperature of about +15°C to injury. (about 60°F), the battery must be charged by the vehicle for at least one hour. At lower ambient temperatures, the charging time can increase to 3-4 hours. It is advisable to charge the battery with an external battery charger.

Related information • Starting the vehicle (p. 370) • Ignition modes (p. 372) • Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 187)

412 STARTING AND DRIVING

* Detachable towbar Installing the ball holder WARNING Volvo recommends the use of Volvo towbars 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt Damage may occur on the towbar if it is that are specially designed for the vehicle. not used correctly or if incorrect or faulty out of the towbar assembly. NOTE accessories are used, such as: 2. Slide the ball holder into the towbar The optional detachable trailer hitch may • Overloading of accessory. assembly. not be available in all markets or on all • Use of incorrect or faulty accessory. models. Consult your Volvo retailer. 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the • Accessory used for an incorrect pur- one in the towbar assembly. pose. 4. Slide the locking bolt through the towbar • Use of weight-distributing towing sys- assembly/ball holder. tem. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end • Incorrectly positioned ball mount; see of the locking bolt. geometric limits for the towbar.

WARNING Stowing the ball holder • Be sure the towbar is securely locked in position before attaching anything to WARNING it. When not in use, the detachable ball holder • Always attach the trailer's safety wire should always be properly stowed in the securely to the towbar's safety wire designated location under the floor of the Ball holder attachment bracket. cargo compartment.

Cotter pin Removing the ball holder Driving with a trailer Towbar assembly 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking When towing a trailer, the original ball holder bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the or equivalent should be used. Locking bolt ball holder/towbar assembly. Safety wire attachment bracket 2. Pull the ball holder out of the towbar assembly.

}}

* Option/accessory. 413 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Driving with a trailer • Follow applicable regulations regarding There are a number of things to consider permitted speed and weight. when towing a trailer, such as the towbar, the • Drive slowly when towing a trailer up a trailer and how the load is distributed in the long and steep incline. trailer. • The maximum trailer weights given only Load-carrying capacity is determined by the apply to altitudes up to 1000 meters vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all (3280 feet) above sea level. At higher alti- passengers and any installed accessories, e.g. tudes, engine power (and thus the vehi- towbar, reduces the vehicle's load-carrying cle's climbing ability) is decreased due to capacity by the corresponding amount. the reduced air density, and the maximum • Towbars used on the vehicle must be trailer weight must therefore be reduced. approved for the applicable use. The weight of the vehicle and trailer must The ball mount must fall within the geometric • Distribute the load on the trailer so that be decreased by 10% for each additional limits for the towbar, for both distance and the weight on the towbar complies with 1000 m (3280 feet) or part thereof. height . Geometric limits are described on a the specified maximum towball weight. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of type plate located on the towbar. The tongue weight is calculated as part of more than 12%. the vehicle's payload. • Avoid overloading and other incorrect use. Related information • Increase the tire pressure to the recom- • • Driving with a trailer (p. 414) The trailer's brakes must be balanced with mended pressure for a full load. the vehicle's brakes to help ensure safe • Towing capacity and tongue weight • The engine is subjected to more load than stops (follow applicable local regulations). (p. 616) usual when towing a trailer. • Towing a trailer affects the vehicle's handling, durability and driving economy. • Do not drive with a heavy trailer when the vehicle is very new. Wait until the mileage has reached at least 1000 km (620 miles). • On long and steep downgrades, the vehicle's brakes are subjected to much more load than usual. When manually shifting, downshift and adapt speed accordingly.

414 STARTING AND DRIVING

CAUTION NOTE the vehicle will be slightly lowered, which is normal. • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must Extreme weather conditions, towing a not be used on Volvos, nor should trailer, high altitude and lower fuel grade Driving in hilly terrain or hot weather safety chains be attached to the than recommended are factors that can In certain conditions, there is a risk of over- bumper. significantly increase the vehicle's fuel con- heating when driving with a trailer. If overheat- • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle sumption. ing of the engine and drive system is detected, rear axle must not be used. a warning symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a message will appear. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic Trailer weights brake system directly to the vehicle The automatic transmission adapts the gear brake system, nor a trailer's lighting WARNING for the current load and engine speed. system directly to the vehicle lighting Please adhere to the recommendations Steep inclines system. Consult your nearest author- provided for trailer weight. If the recom- Do not lock the automatic transmission into a ized Volvo retailer for correct installa- mendations are not followed, the vehicle higher gear than what the engine can handle ‒ tion. and trailer may be difficult to control during it is not always preferable to drive in high • When towing a trailer, the trailer's evasive maneuvers and braking. gears at low rpm. safety chains or wire must be correctly Parking on a hill fastened to the attachment points pro- NOTE 1. Depress the brake pedal. vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety chain or wire must never be The specified maximum trailer weights are 2. Apply the parking brake. those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle fastened to or wound around the tow- 3. Put the gear selector in P. ing ball. regulations may set additional restrictions on trailer weight and speed. The trailer 4. Release the brake pedal. hitches may be certified for higher towing Put chocks behind the wheels when the vehi- NOTE weights than the vehicle is permitted to cle is parked on a hill with a trailer attached. tow. The optional detachable trailer hitch may Starting on a hill not be available in all markets or on all 1. Depress the brake pedal. models. Consult your Volvo retailer. Self-leveling suspension* The vehicle's self-leveling system attempts to 2. Put the gear selector in D. keep the vehicle at a constant level, regardless 3. Release the parking brake. of load (up to the maximum permitted weight). When the vehicle is stationary, the rear end of 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving. }}

* Option/accessory. 415 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Related information Trailer Stability Assist* Trailer Stability Assist function • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416) Trailer Stability Assist (TSA19) is part of the Trailer Stability Assist continuously monitors • Checking trailer lights (p. 417) ESC20 stability system and is a function the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral movements. If swaying is detected, the brakes • Towing capacity and tongue weight designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer are applied individually on the front wheels, (p. 616) which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle • have begun to sway. The function is added Overheating of engine and transmission when installing a towbar. Contact a Volvo and trailer. This is often enough to enable the (p. 409) retailer for more information. driver to regain control of the vehicle. If the Trailer Stability Assist function's first Reasons for swaying attempt is not adequate to stop the swaying A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway motion, the brakes are applied on all wheels for various reasons. Normally this only occurs and engine power is temporarily reduced. As at high speeds. However, if the trailer is over- the swaying motion begins to decrease and loaded or unevenly distributed, e.g. too far the vehicle and trailer have once again back, there is a risk of swaying even at low become stable, TSA stops regulating the speeds. brakes/engine power and the driver regains Swaying may be caused by factors such as: control of the vehicle. • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, NOTE strong crosswind. • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if the uneven road or over a bump. driver activates ESC Sport Mode in the center display's menu system. • Sudden movements of the steering wheel.

Once swaying has begun, it can be difficult or Trailer Stability Assist may not intervene if the impossible to stop it. This makes the vehicle driver tries to compensate for the swaying and trailer difficult to control and there is a risk motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly, of swerving into oncoming traffic or driving off because the system will then not be able to the road. determine if it is the trailer or the driver causing the swaying.

19 Trailer Stability Assist 20 Electronic Stability Control

416 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

When Trailer Stability Assist Checking trailer lights trailer. If this is the case, check to see if the is activated, the ESC symbol When connecting a trailer, make sure that all trailer is equipped with a rear fog light before is displayed in the instrument of the lights on the trailer are functioning activating the vehicle's fog lights when driving panel. before starting to drive. with a trailer to help ensure safe operation. Trailer turn signals and brake lights If one or more of the turn signals or brake NOTE lights on the trailer is not working, a symbol and message will be displayed in the instru- A vehicle software update is required when ment panel. The other lights on the trailer a towbar is retrofitted. Contact a Volvo must be checked manually by the driver before retailer. the vehicle is driven.

Related information Symbol Message • Driving with a trailer (p. 414) • Trailer turn indicator Right • Electronic Stability Control (p. 255) turn indicator malfunction • Trailer turn indicator Left turn indicator malfunction • Trailer brake light Malfunc- tion

If any of the trailer's turn signal lights is not working, the turn signal symbol in the instrument panel will also flash more quickly than normal. Trailer rear fog light When a trailer is connected, the vehicle's rear fog light may not illuminate and rear fog light functionality is instead transferred to the }}

417 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| Checking trailer lights* Disabling the automatic check Towing using a towline Automatic check The automatic light check can be disabled in This section refers to one vehicle being towed When the trailer has been connected to the the center display. behind another using a towline. vehicle's electrical system, its lights can be 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. Before towing another vehicle, check applica- checked by automatically activating them. ble speed limit regulations. This function helps the driver check that the 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting. Preparations and towing trailer's lights are functioning correctly before 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp starting to drive. Check. CAUTION In order to perform this check, the vehicle Manual check must be switched off. If the automatic check has been disabled, the For some transmission variants, it is not check can be started manually. possible to shift from P position if the 1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, engine is switched off. Contact an author- the message Automatic Trailer Lamp 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. ized Volvo workshop for assistance towing Check will appear in the instrument panel. or call a professional towing service. 2. Tap My Car Lights and Lighting. 2. Acknowledge the message by pressing the O button on the right-side steering 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. CAUTION wheel keypad. > The light check will begin. Get out of > The light check will begin. the vehicle to perform the check. Note that the vehicle must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. 3. Get out of the vehicle to perform the Related information • check. • Driving with a trailer (p. 414) Do not tow a vehicle with automatic transmission at a speed greater than > All of the lights on the trailer will begin 80 km/h (50 mph) or for a distance flashing, and then illuminate separately greater than 80 km (50 miles). one at a time. 4. Visually check that all of the trailer's lights are functioning correctly. 5. After a short time, all of the trailer's lights will start flashing again. > The light check is completed.

418 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING 5. Keep the towline taut when the towing Attaching and removing the vehicle slows down by applying light pres- towing eyelet • Ignition mode II must be active – all sure to the brake pedal. This will help Use the towing eyelet when towing. Screw airbags are deactivated in ignition avoid jarring movements. the towing eyelet securely into place in the mode I. threaded outlet behind the cover on the right- • 6. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop Always have the remote key in the the vehicle. hand side of the front and rear bumpers. vehicle when it is towed. Jump starting Attaching the towing eyelet Do not tow the vehicle to start the engine. Use WARNING an auxiliary battery if the start battery's charge The brake and steering servos do not work level is so low that the engine cannot be when the engine is off – it takes started. about 5 times more pressure on the brake pedal and steering requires much more effort than normal. CAUTION Attempting to tow with the engine running 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. could result in damage to the three-way catalytic converter. 2. Attach the towline to the towing eyelet. Take out the towing eyelet, which is 3. Put the vehicle in ignition mode II – with- Related information stored in a foam block under the floor in out pressing the brake pedal, press and the cargo compartment. • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet hold the start button for about 4 seconds. (p. 419) Release the button. • Hazard warning flashers (p. 155) 4. Move the gear selector to neutral (N) and • release the parking brake. Recovery (p. 421) • Jump starting using another battery If the battery charge level is too low, it (p. 410) may not be possible to release the parking brake. Connect an auxiliary battery to the • Selecting ignition mode (p. 374) vehicle if the battery is discharged. • Transmission (p. 383) > The towing vehicle can now start driving.

}}

419 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| 4. Screw the towing eyelet in as far as possi- using the towing eyelet may result in dam- ble. age. • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow truck's lifting device instead of using the towing eyelet.

WARNING No person or object should be behind the tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto Front: Remove the cover by pressing the the bed of the truck. cover. > The cover turns along its center line and CAUTION can then be removed. Fasten the eyelet securing by, for example, inserting a lug wrench* through it and The towing eyelet is only intended for tow- using this as a lever. ing on roads – not for pulling vehicles from ditches or any similar purpose involving CAUTION severe strain. Call a tow truck for professional assistance. It is important that the towing eye is screwed in securely as far as possible. Removing the towing eyelet – Unscrew the towing eyelet after use and To consider before using the towing eyelet return it to the foam block. • In certain conditions, the towing eyelet Replace the cover on the bumper. Rear: Remove the cover by placing a coin, may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flat- key or similar at the mark and prying out bed tow truck. The vehicle's position and Related information the cover. ground clearance determines if this is pos- • Towing using a towline (p. 418) sible. > Fold out the cover completely and • Recovery (p. 421) remove. • If the incline of the tow truck is too steep • Tool kit (p. 516) or if the ground clearance under the vehicle is insufficient, attempting to pull it up

420 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

21 Recovery CAUTION HomeLink®* This section refers to transporting the vehicle ®22 Note that the vehicle must always be HomeLink is a programmable remote con- with a tow truck or similar vehicle. towed with the wheels rolling forward. trol, integrated in the vehicle electrical sys- Call a professional towing service for assis- tem, that can control up to three different tance. devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm sys- Related information In certain conditions, the towing eyelet can be tem, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow replace the remote controls for these. (p. 419) truck. General The vehicle's location and ground clearance determine if it can be lifted onto a tow truck. If the incline of the tow truck is too steep or if the ground clearance under the vehicle is insufficient, attempting to pull it up may result in damage. In this case, the vehicle should only be lifted with the tow truck's lifting equipment.

WARNING No person or object should be behind the tow truck when the vehicle is lifted onto the bed of the truck. The illustration is generic – the design may vary. Button 1

CAUTION Button 2 The towing eyelet is only intended for tow- Button 3 ing on roads, and must not be used to pull vehicles from ditches or any similar pur- Indicator light pose involving severe strain. Call a tow truck for professional assistance. HomeLink® is delivered integrated in the rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of

21 Certain markets only. }}

* Option/accessory. 421 STARTING AND DRIVING

|| three programmable buttons and an indicator Programming HomeLink®*23 1. Point the remote control at the ® light in the mirror. Follow these instructions to program HomeLink button to be programmed and hold it about 2-8 cm (1-3 inches) from the For more information about HomeLink®, HomeLink®, reset all programming, or pro- ® please visit: homelink.com or call gram individual buttons. button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink indicator light. 1–800–355–3515. NOTE Note: Some remote controls are more Save the original remote controls for future In some vehicles, the ignition must be on effective at programming HomeLink® from programming (e.g. for use in another vehicle). or in the "accessory position" before a distance of about 15-20 cm (6-12 ® HomeLink can be programmed or used. It inches). Keep this in mind if you experi- CAUTION can be a good idea to put new batteries in ence any programming difficulties. The button programming should be cleared the remote control being replaced by ® 2. Press and hold both the remote control if the vehicle is sold. HomeLink for faster programming and better radio signal transmission. The button and the HomeLink® button to be HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programmed. Related information programming. • Using HomeLink®* (p. 424) • Programming HomeLink®* (p. 422) WARNING • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 424) While HomeLink® is being programmed, the garage door or gate being programmed may be activated. Make sure that no one is near the door or gate during programming. When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage.

22 HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. 23 Certain markets only.

422 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

3. Do not release the buttons until the indica- Programming individual buttons tor light has stopped flashing slowly To program an individual HomeLink® button: (about once a second) and either flashes quickly (about 10 times a second) or 1. Press and hold the desired button for glows steadily. about 20 seconds. > If the indicator light glows steadily: 2. When the indicator light on HomeLink® Indication that programming is com- starts flashing slowly, it is possible to pro- plete. Press the programmed button gram as usual. twice to activate. Note: If the button you are reprogram- If the indicator light flashes quickly: 4. Locate the "training" button24 on the ming does not program with a new The device being programmed with receiver for the e.g. garage door opener. It device, it will return to the previously HomeLink® may have a security func- is usually located near the antenna bracket saved programming. tion that requires an extra step. Try on the receiver. ® pressing the programmed button twice Resetting the HomeLink buttons 5. Press and release the "training" button ® to see whether the programming It is only possible to reset all HomeLink but- once. Programming must be completed works. Otherwise, continue with the tons at once. It is not possible to reset individ- within 30 seconds after pressing the but- following steps. ual buttons. Individual buttons can only be ton. reprogrammed. 6. Press and release the HomeLink® button – Press and hold the outer buttons (1 and 3) to be programmed. Repeat the press/ on HomeLink® for about 10 seconds. hold/release sequence a second time. For > When the indicator light goes from a some receivers, the sequence may need to steady glow to flashing, the buttons be repeated a third time. have been reset and are ready for > Programming is now completed and reprogramming. the garage door, gate, etc. should now be activated when the programmed Related information button is pressed. • Using HomeLink®* (p. 424) If you experience any difficulties programming, • HomeLink®* (p. 421) ® please contact HomeLink at: homelink.com, • Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 424) or call 1–800–355–3515.

24 The name and color of the button varies depending on the manufacturer.

* Option/accessory. 423 STARTING AND DRIVING

25 26 Using HomeLink®* WARNING Type approval for HomeLink®* Once HomeLink® is programmed, it can be • If you use HomeLink® to open a garage used instead of the separate remote controls. FCC (USA) and IC (Canada) door or gate, be sure no one is near the Press and hold the programming button. The This device complies with FCC rules part 15 gate or door while it is in motion. garage door, gate, alarm system, etc. will be and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is activated (this may take several seconds). If • Do not use HomeLink® with any subject to the following two conditions: (1) the button is held down for more than 20 sec- garage door opener that lacks safety This device may not cause harmful interfer- onds, reprogramming will begin. The indicator stop and reverse features as required ence, and (2) This device must accept any light will glow steadily or flash when the but- by U.S. federal safety standards (this interference that may be received including ton has been pressed. The original remote includes any garage door opener model interference that may cause undesired opera- controls may be used concurrently with manufactured before April 1, 1982). A tion. HomeLink® if desired. garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and WARNING reverse - does not meet current U.S. NOTE The transmitter has been tested and com- federal safety standards. For more plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or When the ignition is switched off, information, contact HomeLink at: modifications not expressly approved by HomeLink® will be active for at least homelink.com. the party responsible for compliance could 7 minutes. void the user's authority to operate the 27 Related information device. NOTE • HomeLink®* (p. 421) Type approval for EU • Programming HomeLink®* (p. 422) HomeLink® cannot be used if the vehicle is Gentex Corporation hereby declares that * ® locked and the alarm is armed from the • Type approval for HomeLink * (p. 424) HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the outside. Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU. Wavelengths within which the radio equipment operates: • 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P. • 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.

25 Certain markets only. 26 Certain markets only. 27 The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

424 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING

• 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P. Compass* Activating and deactivating the • 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P. An integrated compass28 in the upper right compass* 29 • 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P. corner of the rearview mirror shows the An integrated compass in the upper right direction the vehicle is traveling. corner of the rearview mirror shows the Certificate holder address: Gentex Corpora- direction the vehicle is traveling. tion, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA The compass is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. For further details, search for support information on type approval at volvocars.com To deactivate/activate the compass manually: – Related information Use a paper clip or similar object to press the button on the bottom of the mirror. • HomeLink®* (p. 421) > If the compass is deactivated when the vehicle is switched off, it will not be activated the next time the vehicle is started. The compass will then need to be activated manually. Rearview mirror with compass. Related information Eight different compass directions are shown • Compass* (p. 425) with the abbreviations: N (north), NE (north- • * east), E (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW Calibrating the compass (p. 426) (southwest), W (west) and NW (northwest). Related information • Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 425) • Calibrating the compass* (p. 426)

28 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models. 29 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

* Option/accessory. 425 STARTING AND DRIVING

Calibrating the compass* 1 7. Vehicles with heated windshields*: If C The globe is divided into 15 magnetic zones. is shown in the display when the wind- 2 15 The compass30 should be calibrated if the shield heating function is activated, per- vehicle is driven from one zone to another. 14 form step 6 above with the heating func- 3 tion on. 1. Stop the vehicle in a large, open area away 13 from steel constructions and high-voltage 4 8. Repeat the above procedure as needed. power lines. 12 Related information 5 8 2. Start the engine and switch off all electri- 11 • Compass* (p. 425) 9 cal equipment (climate system, wipers, 10 • * 6 Activating and deactivating the compass etc.) and make sure all doors are closed. 7 (p. 425)

NOTE Magnetic zones. Calibration may fail or not even be initiated 4. Press the button on the underside of the if electrical equipment is not turned off. mirror repeatedly until the desired magnetic zone (1–15) appears (see the map of magnetic zones). 3. Hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror pressed for about 3 seconds 5. Wait until the display again shows C, or (using e.g. a paper clip). The number of the press and hold the button on the under- current magnetic zone is shown. side of the rearview mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display. This indicates that calibration is complete. Drive in a circle two more times to fine- tune the calibration.

30 Rearview mirror with compass is available as an option only on certain markets and models.

426 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Audio, media and Internet Related information Sound settings The audio and media system consists of a • Media player (p. 449) Sound reproduction quality is preset but can media player and a radio. A cellular phone can • Radio (p. 432) also be adjusted. also be connected through Bluetooth to use The system's volume is normally adjusted • Phone (p. 465) hands-free functions or play music in the using the volume control below the center dis- vehicle. When the vehicle is connected to the • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) play or the right-side steering wheel keypad. Internet, it is also possible to use apps to play • Apps (p. 429) This applies, for example, when playing music media. • Voice Control (p. 138) or the radio or during phone calls and active traffic messages. • Ignition modes (p. 372) • Driver distraction (p. 41) Sound reproduction The audio system is precalibrated using digital • Handling system updates via Download signal processing. This calibration takes into Center (p. 551) account speakers, amplifiers, passenger com- • License agreement for audio and media partment acoustics, listener position, etc. for (p. 488) each combination of vehicle model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the volume control setting and the vehicle's speed. Personal settings Audio and media overview Different settings are available in Top view The functions can be controlled using voice under Settings Sound depending on the commands, the steering wheel keypad or the vehicle's sound system. center display. The number of speakers and amplifiers varies depending on the audio sys- Premium Sound* (Harman Kardon) tem installed in the vehicle. • Equalizer - setting of equalizer. System updates • Balance - balance between right/left and The audio and media system is continuously front/rear speakers. improved. It is recommended to download • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the system updates as soon as they are available. various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.

428 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

High Performance Sound experience* Apps • Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal- Sound experience is an app that provides The App view contains apps that provide izer, etc. access to additional sound settings. access to certain vehicle services. • Balance - balance between right/left and Open Sound Experience from the center dis- Swipe the center display screen from right to front/rear speakers. play's App view. Depending on the sound sys- left1 to access the App view from the Home tem installed in the vehicle, the following set- view. This view displays downloaded apps • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the tings are possible: (third-party apps) as well as apps for inte- various systems of the car, e.g. Voice grated functions, such as FM radio. Control, Park Assist and Phone • Seat Optimization – sound settings can Ringtone. be adjusted to be primarily adapted for Driver, All and Rear. Related information • Surround - surround sound mode with • Sound experience* (p. 429) level settings. • Media player (p. 449) • Tone - setting for e.g. bass, treble, equal- • Voice control settings (p. 142) izer, etc. • Phone settings (p. 472) Related information • Audio, media and Internet (p. 428) • Sound settings (p. 428) • * Internet-connected vehicle (p. 479) • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 111)

1 Applies for left-hand drive vehicles. For right-hand drive vehicles, swipe in the other direction. }}

* Option/accessory. 429 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| All apps used should be updated to the latest Download apps version. New apps can be downloaded when the vehi- Related information cle is connected to the Internet. • Download apps (p. 430) NOTE • Updating apps (p. 431) Data downloading can affect other services • Deleting apps (p. 432) such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the affect on other services is experienced as • ® ® Apple CarPlay * (p. 458) problematic, the download can be interrup- • Android Auto* (p. 462) ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) switch off or cancel other services. • Hard disk storage space (p. 487) • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485) NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs.

1. Open the Download Center app in App view.

App view. (generic illustration; basic apps vary depending on market and model) Several basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. 2. Select New apps to open a list of apps Some apps can only be used when the vehicle that are available but are not installed in is connected to the Internet. the vehicle. Start an app by pressing the app in the center display's app view.

430 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

3. Tap on the row for an app in order to Updating apps Update certain apps expand in the list and get more informa- Apps can be updated when the vehicle is 1. Open the Download Center app in App tion about the app. connected to the Internet. view. 4. Select Install to start the download and NOTE 2. Select Application updates to open a list installation of the app. of all available updates. Data downloading can affect other services > The current status of the download and such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the 3. Find the desired app and select Install. installation will be shown. affect on other services is experienced as > The update will begin. If a download cannot be started imme- problematic, the download can be interrup- diately, a message will be displayed. ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to Related information The app will remain in the list and it will switch off or cancel other services. • Apps (p. 429) be possible to reattempt downloading. • Download apps (p. 430) Canceling a download NOTE • Deleting apps (p. 432) – Tap Abort to cancel a download in pro- When downloading using a phone, pay • Handling system updates via Download gress. extra attention to the data traffic costs. Center (p. 551) Note that only a download can be cancelled. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) An installation cannot be cancelled once it has If an app is being used while an update is in begun. progress, it will be restarted to complete the Related information update. • Apps (p. 429) Update all • Updating apps (p. 431) 1. Open the Download Center app in App view. • Deleting apps (p. 432) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) • Handling system updates via Download Center (p. 551) • Hard disk storage space (p. 487)

2. Select Install all. > The update will begin.

* Option/accessory. 431 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Deleting apps Radio • Radio settings (p. 435) When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- The radio can receive broadcasting from the • RBDS (p. 436) net, it is possible to uninstall apps. FM waveband with HD Radio Technology ™ • HD Radio™ (p. 436) If the app is being used, it must be closed and SiriusXM® Satellite radio *. When the • ® * before it can be uninstalled. vehicle has an Internet connection, it is also SiriusXM Satellite radio (p. 440) • * 1. Open the Download Center app in App possible to listen to web radio. Internet-connected vehicle (p. 479) view. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) • Media player (p. 449)

2. Select Application updates to open a list of all installed apps. 3. Find the desired app and select Uninstall to begin uninstalling the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it The radio can be controlled will be removed from the list. using voice commands, the right-side steering wheel key- Related information pad or the center display. • Apps (p. 429) • Download apps (p. 430) • Updating apps (p. 431) Related information • Handling system updates via Download • Starting the radio (p. 433) Center (p. 551) • Changing waveband and radio station • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) (p. 433) • Storing radio channels in the Radio favorites app (p. 435)

432 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Starting the radio • Changing waveband and radio station Changing waveband and radio The radio is started from the center display's (p. 433) station App view. • Storing radio channels in the Radio favor- Instructions for changing wavebands, wave- 1. Open the desired waveband (e.g. FM) ites app (p. 435) band lists and radio stations in the selected from App view. • Radio settings (p. 435) list are provided here. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) Changing wavebands Swipe from App view on the center display and select the desired waveband (e.g. FM) or open the App menu in the instrument panel with the right-side steering wheel keypad and make your selection there. Changing a list in a waveband

1. Tap Library. 2. Select a radio station. 2. Select playback from Stations, Favorites Related information or Genres. • Radio (p. 432) 3. Tap the desired station in the list. • Searching for a radio station (p. 434)

}}

433 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Favorites – only plays selected favorite chan- Searching for a radio station Searching for a station manually nels. The radio automatically compiles a list of the Genres - only plays channels broadcasting the radio stations that are sending out the stron- selected genre or program type, e.g. pop, clas- gest signals in the vehicle's current location. sical, etc. Changing radio stations in a selected list – Press or under the center display or on the right-side steering wheel keypad. > Move step-by-step through the selected list. It is also possible to change radio station in Searching manually makes it possible to find the selected list via the center display. and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest sta- Related information Searching is performed in different ways tions in the area. • Radio (p. 432) depending on the waveband selected: – Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or • Searching for a radio station (p. 434) • FM, stations, genres and frequency. tap or . Press and hold to skip to • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) 1. Tap Library. the next available station in the frequency band. You can also use the right-side • Storing radio channels in the Radio favor- 2. Tap . steering wheel keypad. ites app (p. 435) • > Search view will displayed and the key- Radio settings (p. 435) board will open. Related information • App menu in instrument panel (p. 100) • Radio (p. 432) 3. Enter a search word/phrase. • Starting the radio (p. 433) > The search will start and change as • characters are entered. Search results Changing waveband and radio station will be displayed by category. (p. 433) • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) • Radio settings (p. 435)

434 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Storing radio channels in the Radio Related information Radio settings favorites app • Radio (p. 432) There are a number of different radio func- It is possible to add a radio station in the • Starting the radio (p. 433) tions that can be activated and deactivated. Radio favorites app and in the list of favor- • Searching for a radio station (p. 434) ites for the waveband (e.g. FM). Instructions Canceling a traffic message for adding and removing radio channels are • Changing waveband and radio station A current broadcast (e.g. a traffic message) provided below. (p. 433) can be temporarily interrupted by pressing • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) in the right-side steering wheel keypad or Radio favorites • Radio settings (p. 435) tapping Cancel in the center display. The radio favorites app shows stored radio channels • App menu in instrument panel (p. 100) Activating and deactivating radio from all wavebands. functions Pull down Top view and select Settings Media and the desired waveband to see available functions. 1. Open the Radio favorites app from App AM/FM Radio2 view. • HD Radio FM: HD Radio™ Technology: 2. Tap the desired station in the list to listen. makes it possible to achieve a sound quality comparable with a CD. Adding and deleting radio favorites • Show Broadcast Information: shows 1. Tap to add a radio channel to the information on program content, artists, waveband's list of favorites or the Radio etc. favorites app. • Freeze Program Name: select to stop 2. Tap Library, select Edit and tap to the program service name from scrolling delete a radio channel from the list of continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 favorites. seconds. When you delete a radio channel from the Radio favorites app, the channel will also be deleted from that waveband's list of favorites.

2 AM radio availability varies depending on model and/or market. }}

435 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| SiriusXM® Satellite radio* RBDS HD Radio™ Pull down Top view and select Settings RBDS radio HD Radio is a brand name registered by the Media SiriusXM to show a list of available RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) ena- DTS, Inc.4. They are the developer of a broad- 3 options. bles certain functionality , such as: casting technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to the method of trans- • Searches for program types or new broad- mitting a digital radio broadcast signal cen- Related information casts • tered on the same frequency as the AM or FM Radio (p. 432) • Text information about currently broadcast station's present frequency. • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* programs Introduction (p. 442) Related information • Symbols in the center display status bar • Radio (p. 432) (p. 120) • Radio settings (p. 435)

Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast (generic illustration)

NOTE HD Radio volume may fade in and out at times due to coverage limitations.

3 Certain stations only. 4 HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of DTS, Inc.

436 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" station, the logo will be displayed immedi- • Instead of transmitting one analog signal, since it is both analog and digital. During ately. Album art is synched with the artist that stations send out a bundled signal – both hybrid operation, receivers still continue to you are currently listening to. analog and digital. receive the analog (non-digital) signal. HD • Ball game mode An HD Radio receiver can receive both Radio receivers incorporate both modes of digital and analog broadcasts. Depending This feature means that a main FM station reception, where the receiver will automati- on the terrain and location of the vehicle (HD1) will broadcast live events, where the cally switch to the analog signal if the digital (which will influence the signal strength), content of the programming is more important signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the the receiver will determine which signal to than sound quality, in analog mode only to receiver. receive. help prevent the delay between analog and When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, digital broadcasting. The HD Radio symbol Related information the symbol will appear in the infotain- will be white during live broadcasts and "Live" • Radio (p. 432) ment system display. The symbol will be dis- will be displayed next to the symbol. played in different colors: • Activating and deactivating the HD Benefits of digital broadcasting Radio™ (p. 438) • Grayed-out symbol: no HD Radio broad- • Better sound (FM sounds near CD qual- • cast reception HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 438) ity). • • White symbol: the radio is actively receiv- HD Radio™ limitations (p. 439) • Some FM frequencies offer a greater ing an HD broadcast • Changing waveband and radio station number of listening choices through multi- (p. 433) • Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an casting (consisting of a frequency's main HD broadcast with digital sound channel and any sub-channels that may • Searching for a radio station (p. 434) More information about HD Radio and IBOC also be available on that particular fre- can be found on DTS, Inc.'s website, quency.) www.dts.com. • When receiving a digital signal there is no multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/ Artist Experience™ crackling due to outside influences. A radio station's logo and album art can be displayed. If a station opts to provide this How HD Radio ™ Technology information, it is broadcast once every 12 broadcasting works minutes, which means that there may be a HD Radio works similarly to conventional delay before the logo/album art appear on the radio and broadcasts of this type are available screen. The radio can store 100 station logos in many areas of the United States. However, so the next time the radio is tuned to the same there are a few key differences:

437 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Activating and deactivating the HD • HD Radio™ limitations (p. 439) HD Radio™ sub-channels Radio™ • Opening contextual setting in the center In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM HD Radio is deactivated when the car leaves display (p. 129) wavebands only) will also have sub-channels the factory. offering additional types of programming or When listening to an HD Radio station and music. driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the Sub-channels radio repeatedly switches between analog/ digital and digital/analog reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. Carry out the following to activate or deactivate HD Radio: 1. Drag down the top view and tap on Settings. 2. Press Media and FM Radio. 3. Press HD Radio FM to activate/deactivate the function. If HD radio is deactivated, the radio will be Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels unable to receive digital broadcasts but it will If any sub-channels are available, they will lis- continue to function as a conventional radio ted below the main channel on the screen. In (analog FM receiver). Please note that when this example, WILD-FM HD2 is a sub-chan- HD is switched off, it will not be possible to nel. tune in to sub-channels. Activating or deactivating HD Radio only affects the currently selected waveband. Related information • HD Radio™ (p. 436) • HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 438)

438 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Selecting sub-channels HD Radio™ limitations NOTE To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the station on the screen or press the forward/ Limitations There may be a noticeable difference in back arrow keys on the right-side steering • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM sound quality when a change from ana- wheel keypad or below the screen. only): The main channel is the only chan- logue to digital or digital to analogue nel that can receive in hybrid mode (both occurs, such as: Sub-channels can also be saved as radio digital and analog). If a frequency has sub- • favorites. Volume increase or decrease channels, they are broadcast in digital • Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Mid- If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take mode only. The main FM channel will be range/Treble cut or boost up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes displayed as, for example, "WRIF-FM audible. If you tap a station while you are out HD1". The sub-FM channels will be dis- • Time alignment (Digital program mate- of digital range of the transmitter, No played as"WRIF-FM HD2", "WRIF-FM rial in extreme cases can be as much reception will be displayed. HD3", etc. as 8 seconds behind the analogue). This will noticeable as a "stuttering" • Reception coverage area: Due to current Related information effect. IBOC transmitter power limitations, the • HD Radio™ (p. 436) reception coverage area in digital mode is The above items are dependant on the • Activating and deactivating the HD somewhat more limited than the station's broadcaster's equipment settings and Radio™ (p. 438) analog coverage area. Be aware that, like do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's • Changing waveband and radio station all radio transmission technology, terrain, radio receiver or antenna systems. (p. 433) time of day, vegetation and buildings can • Searching for a radio station (p. 434) have a positive or negative effect on radio Related information reception. • HD Radio™ (p. 436) • HD Radio™ limitations (p. 439) • Analog to digital/digital to analog • Activating and deactivating the HD blending: Analog to digital blending will Radio™ (p. 438) occur as the signal strength reaches a pre- • set threshold in the receiver. This will be HD Radio™ sub-channels (p. 438) noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal.

439 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 2. Open the settings menu for SiriusXM® The SiriusXM® Satellite system broadcasts Satellite radio. from of a number of high elevation satellites 3. Tap Unsubscribed Services. in geosynchronous orbit. 4. To call SiriusXM®, enter the phone num- Listening to satellite radio ber. They will activate the subscription of The digital signals from the satellites are line- your choice. This may take several of-sight, which means that physical obstruc- minutes. tions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may tem- When the subscription has been activated, tap porarily interfere with signal reception. the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon to start the Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic function and display the channel list included objects transported on roof racks or in a ski in your subscription. box, or other antennas that may impede signals from the SiriusXM® satellites. Related information • Radio (p. 432) Selecting SiriusXM® Satellite radio • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 441) mode • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 1. From the center display's Home view, (p. 442) swipe from right to left to come to App view. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 444) Home view with SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated If there is no subscription activated, tap channel 1, where you will be prompted on the screen to phone SiriusXM®. If a cell phone is paired and connected to the vehicle, you can also subscribe by: 2. Tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon. 1. From Home view, pull down the Settings menu.

440 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Search selected team will be listed in a virtual cate- SiriusXM® Satellite radio offers several fea- Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen gory. tures for finding and listening to music, news, where you can enter text using the center display's keyboard or by writing in the free-text EPG (Electronic Program Guide) sporting events, etc. being broadcast on sat- On the center display's Home view, tap EPG ellite radio stations. field to search for e.g., a station number, an artist, song title, etc. for information about e.g., when a program is SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions being broadcast and its name, description, Channels artist, etc. If no information is currently availa- Tap to display a complete list of the channels ble, No information will be displayed. included in your subscription. Tap a channel name to listen. If a subscription to a channel Alerts has expired, its name will be grayed-out on the If this feature has been selected under screen. SiriusXM Settings, the Alerts button will be For quick access to a channel that you often displayed on the Home view. listen to, tap the star to the right of the chan- To add e.g. an artist's name, song title or a nel's name. It will then be added to your list of sports team to the list of alerts: favorites. 1. Tune to a channel that is broadcasting a Favorites song, game, etc., of your choice. Tap to display the channels that you have added to this list. Tap a channel name to lis- 2. Tap the Alerts button. ® With SiriusXM Satellite radio activated, tap ten. 3. A pop-up window will be displayed show- Library to display a screen offering the following a list of alerts (nothing will be dis- ing functions: Categories/Genres Tap to display the categories available. Tap a played if the selected channel does not • Search (the magnifying glass icon) category or genre name to display the chan- support the alert function). • Channels nels that it contains and then tap a channel to 4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only listen. • Favorites one can be selected at a time). • Categories If you have activated alerts (see the “Alerts” section below) and an alert is activated for an If you have used this view previously, you will artist, song or team, temporary virtual catego- be returned to the most recently used one. ries will also be created and displayed. The channels currently broadcasting the song, artist or broadcasting a program with the }}

* Option/accessory. 441 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| 5. The song/artist/team will now be added to device. To purchase the song, consult the Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can iTunes support page. radio* also be added to the list using “Game There are numerous settings that can be Alert” in the SiriusXM satellite radio set- Related information made to enhance your SiriusXM® Satellite tings. • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 440) radio listening experience. > When your choice is being broadcast • Entering characters, letters and words by on a channel, you will be informed by a hand in the center display (p. 125) Settings pop-up. • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* Drag down the top view and tap on Settings Media SiriusXM. The following alterna- iTunes tagging (p. 442) tives will be displayed: From the center display's Top view, tap • Settings for SiriusXM® Satellite radio* SiriusXM Settings. Tap the iTunes Tagging (p. 442) menu. Tap the iTunes Tagging box to acti- • Connecting a device via the USB port vate/deactivate this function and tap Close to (p. 456) return to Home view. Tap Tags List to display a list of all tagged songs. If the function is activated, the iTunes tag button will be displayed in Home view. If a song is played that you would like to buy in the iTunes store, tap this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a song with iTunes Tagging information is available, the button will be selectable. Tap the button to tag the song. If you would like to buy a tagged song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button. To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting an iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB port in the tunnel console. The iTunes tagging list will automatically be transferred to the device and removed from the list in the vehicle. If the device is connected when a song is tagged, the data will automatically be saved in the

442 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Traffic Jump iTunes Tagging channel previously selected as a favorite will Tap to display a list of cities from which you Tap to display a menu with the options: still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it can choose to get traffic/weather information iTunes Tagging and Tags List. With this fea- has been added to the skip list. (or Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). ture activated, songs can be tagged for later Skipped Categories Tap to select a city (JUMP will be displayed purchase from the iTunes store. Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a cate- on the Home screen next to Library). Tap Game Alerts gory to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in Back to return to the list of settings or Close Tap to display a list of sports. the list of categories. to return to the Home screen. Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a Related information From the Home screen, tap JUMP to activate box on the right side of the screen to select a • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 440) the function. When traffic/weather information team as a favorite. An alert will then be provi- • ® * is available from the selected city, the radio ded when information about the team is being Using SiriusXM Satellite radio (p. 441) will automatically tune to the channel provid- broadcast. ing the information. When the information/ announcement is finished, the radio will auto- Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list matically return to the channel that you were of sports. previously listening to. Tap Back to return to the list of settings or During an announcement, tap JUMP to inter- Close to return to the main screen. rupt the message and return to the station Unsubscribed Services that you were currently listening to. If you have a SiriusXM® Satellite radio sub- Alert Notifications scription, any channels not included in the Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When acti- subscription will be listed here. Call vated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. SiriusXM™ to subscribe. The phone number that you have selected is playing. You will be will be shown on the screen. If a cell phone is asked if you want to listen. paired and connected to the vehicle, tap the phone number to make the call. Alert Notifications Sound Opt to receive an audible alert when one of Skipped Stations your selected choices is being played. Tap to display a list of channels that you would like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the Sort Channels channel list by tapping the boxes to the right Select how to sort your channels list. of the screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will not be shown in the channel list. However, a

* Option/accessory. 443 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

SiriusXM Travel Link®* 3. Tap Media. NOTE SiriusXM Travel Link is a subscription fea- 4. Press SiriusXM Travel Link and If the Close button is used to return to the ® * ture offered by SiriusXM satellite radio that Subscription Status. SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, the can provide information about e.g., weather > To subscribe, call the phone number lis- following applies (the Weather service is forecasts, weather alerts, service stations, ted on the screen. used here as an example): sports, etc. in the vicinity of the vehicle. Any services not subscribed will be grayed out • If you have already used the Weather Starting SiriusXM Travel Link and contain the text Service not subscribed. function, tapping Weather again in the When the services have been activated (sub- SiriusXM Travel Link home screen NOTE scribed), tap the one of your choice to start it. before using any other SiriusXM SiriusXM Travel Link services are only Travel Link service will return you to The following applies for all of the SiriusXM available in vehicles equipped with the the point where you left the Weather Travel Link services: Sensus Navigation system. service. • Pressing the Back button will take you • If another SiriusXM Travel Link serv- back to the previous screen From the center display's App view, tap Travel ice is used (e.g., Fuel, Sports, etc.) Link to activate the feature. A disclaimer text • Pressing the Close button will take you to before you return to the Weather serv- will be displayed. Tap OK to display a list of the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen. ice, you will be returned to the default SiriusXM Travel Link services: Weather view (in this case, Local). • Alerts The same principle applies to all of the SiriusXM Travel Link services. • Fuel • Sports Favorites • Weather Many SiriusXM Travel Link selections can be • Favorites saved for easy access as favorites by tapping the "star" icon next to the selection where In order to use one or more of these services, applicable. the user has to subscribe to the ones desired. To display a list of your stored selections, tap To subscribe to a SiriusXM Travel Link service: the Favorites application in the SiriusXM 1. Open the center display's Top view. Travel Link home screen. 2. Tap Settings.

444 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Related information SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather Local5 • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 440) This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides Information from the closest weather station • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 447) weather-related information near the vehicle, will be displayed and the following alternatives at a local ski resort, etc. are available: • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 448) From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, • Map view • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 445) to display weather-related information: • Today • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications – Tap the Weather button to display this • 5 days (p. 446) screen. Map view At the top of the screen, the following catego- Tap the map to display it in full-screen mode. ries will be displayed: Tap Back to return to the original map view. • Search (the magnifying glass icon) Tap Map options to display the following • Local alternatives. • Ski condition • Weather radar • Areas • Storm attributes • Favorites • Surface features Tap the category of your choice. • Tropical storm tracks Search • Winds Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function Tap the relevant box to the right of the option is supported in the current context, a keyboard to select/deselect it. Tap Done to confirm and will appear on the screen. Enter the text of return to the previous screen or Cancel. your choice and tap Search for detailed infor- Today mation from the SiriusXM Travel Link database. Tap to see the current temperature, or the temperature in 3/6 hours. Tap Back to return to the Local screen or Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen.

5 This is the weather default unless another alternative has been selected. }}

* Option/accessory. 445 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| 5 days Areas SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Tap to see weather information for the coming Tap Areas to display a list of areas/locations in Notifications 5 days. states from the SiriusXM Travel Link database. This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides Tap Back to return to the Local screen or Scroll to a state and tap to display: notifications of potential weather problems or Close to return to the SiriusXM Travel Link other emergency situations in the vicinity of • Weather locations: tap arrow to the right home screen. the vehicle. to display a list of towns. Scroll to desired From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, Ski condition town and tap for detailed weather infor- to show notifications: Tap to display a list of ski areas in the vicinity mation. You can choose Map view, today, – Tap the Alerts button to display this of the vehicle. Tap a name in the list for infor- 5 days or Favorites (star) screen. mation such as if the ski area is open/closed, • Ski locations: tap arrow at right to dis- temperature, wind conditions, snow condi- play local ski areas. Tap an area for • If any notifications are currently available, tions, the number of lifts that are in operation, detailed info. a message will appear at the top of the etc. For information about storing a location, state, screen. They can also be listed from the Settings menu in the center display's Top • Weather locations town, etc. as a favorite, see the heading "Favorites" in the article "SiriusXM Travel view. • Ski location Link." • If no notifications are available, No active Tap Map view to display a map and a weather alerts will be displayed. legend. Related information Types of notifications • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 444) Tap Map options to display the following To select the types of notifications to be dis- alternatives. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 447) played: • ®* • Weather radar SiriusXM Travel Link - Sports (p. 448) 1. From the Alerts screen, tap the Select • Storm attributes • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications alerts button at the bottom of the screen. • Surface features (p. 446) 2. This displays the types of notifications that • Tropical storm tracks can be displayed. Tap the box to the right • of each type of notification to select/dese- Winds lect it. Tap the relevant box to the right of the option 3. Tap Done when you have made your to select/deselect it. Tap Done to confirm and selections. You will return to the Alerts return to the previous screen or Cancel. screen.

446 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Information about a notification SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel6 Search If any notifications have been displayed on the This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides Tap the magnifying glass icon. If the function screen, tap one for more detailed information information and guidance to service stations is supported in the current context, a keyboard (i.e., the location of the weather problem on a near the vehicle providing the type of fuel that will appear on the screen. Enter the text of map and a description of the situation). you prefer/require for your vehicle. your choice and tap Search for detailed information if available. If a phone number is available in a notification, From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, to show fuel information: a Call button will be displayed. Tap this button Nearby for additional information. – Tap the Fuel button to display the main Tap for a list of service stations in the vicinity Related information fuel screen. of the vehicle, with the nearest station at the top of the list. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 444) The following categories are shown: The following information will be provided • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 447) • Search (the magnifying glass icon) where available: • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 448) • Nearby • For vehicles using gasoline, the price ® • Recommended • SiriusXM Travel Link * - Weather (p. 445) information for regular gasoline (unless • Favorites another grade/type of fuel has been • Brands selected in Select fuel type) Tap one of the alternatives to display its • For electric vehicles/hybrids, information screen. about charging stations, showing the total number of charging ports and the number NOTE of ports currently not in use • The distance to the station In each of the categories listed, tapping the Select fuel type button near the bottom • A star icon to set the service station as a of the screen opens a sub-view where you favorite can specify the type of fuel preferred/ Tap the name of a service station to display required (Regular, Midrange, Premium, more detailed information. Diesel, Electric 120V, etc.) Tap Done to For guidance to the service station, tap the return to the previous screen. Start navigation or Add as waypoint buttons. See the Sensus Navigation* supplement

6 This service is not available in Canada. }}

* Option/accessory. 447 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| for additional information about using the nav- 3. Tap the name of a service station to dis- SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports igation system. play more detailed information. This SiriusXM Travel Link service provides Recommended In addition to the Select fuel type button at information about sporting events, tourna- ments, teams, leagues, etc. Tap for a list of service stations near the vehi- the bottom of the screen, tap the Sort button From the SiriusXM Travel Link home screen, cle, displayed according to the price of regular to arrange the list according to Nearest or to display sports information: gasoline (unless another grade/type of fuel has Cheapest/Recommended. Tap Done to been selected in Select fuel type) or of sta- return to the previous screen. – Tap the Sports button to display the main tions offering the greatest number of available Related information sports screen. charging ports for electric vehicles/hybrids. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 444) A number of sports categories will be listed The station offering the lowest price/most (Football, Baseball, Basketball, etc.) available charging ports will be displayed at • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications the top of the list. Tap the name of a service (p. 446) Tap a sport to select a league in that sport (NFL, MLB, etc.) or a sport organization (PGA, station to display more detailed information. • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Sports (p. 448) LPGA, etc.). Favorites • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 445) The following is an example of the result of Tap for a list of service stations that have been tapping Baseball: stored as favorites. Tap the name of a service station to display more detailed information. 1. MLB (Major League Baseball) will be displayed. In addition to the Select fuel type button at the bottom of the screen, tap the Edit button 2. Tap MLB to display the two leagues in to delete individual stations from the list or tap Major League Baseball (American League Delete to clear the list. Tap Done to return to or National League). the previous screen. 3. Tap one of the league names to display Brands the divisions in the league. 1. Tap Brands to display a list of service station brands in the area. 2. Tap a brand to display a list of service stations affiliated with that brand (BP, Exxon, etc.).

448 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

4. Tap one of the divisions to display: Media player Related information • • In progress: play-by-play information The media player can play audio from external Playing media (p. 450) about a match/game/tournament cur- audio sources connected via USB port or • Controlling and changing media (p. 451) Bluetooth. It can also play video format via rently in progress. Continue tapping to • Media searches (p. 452) display. In the detailed view, you can the USB port. • Apps (p. 429) also select a radio station that is cur- When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, rently broadcasting an ongoing sport- it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio • Radio (p. 432) ing event books and to access music services via apps. • Video (p. 453) • Headlines for MLB: tap to display • Streaming media via Bluetooth® (p. 455) brief headline information • Playing media via the USB port (p. 455) • Scheduled: schedules for coming • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) matches, games, etc. • Scores: match/game results The same principle applies to all sports. Related information • SiriusXM Travel Link®* (p. 444) • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Notifications (p. 446) • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Fuel (p. 447) The media player is controlled from the center display. Sev- • SiriusXM Travel Link®* - Weather (p. 445) eral functions can also be controlled using voice commands or the right-side steering wheel keypad. The radio, which is also handled by the media player, is described in a separate section.

* Option/accessory. 449 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Playing media USB flash drive Media with Internet connection The media player is controlled from the cen- 1. Inset a USB flash drive. Medial playback from apps with Internet connection: ter display. Several other functions can also 2. Open the USB app from App view. be controlled using the right-side steering 1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet. wheel keypad or by using voice commands. 3. Select the track you would like to play. > Playback will begin. 2. Open the app from the App view. The radio can also be controlled in the media > Playback will begin. player. See the section describing the radio. MP3 player and iPod® Read the separate section on how to down- Starting a media source NOTE load apps. To start playback from an iPod, the iPod Video app must be used (not USB). 1. Connect a media source. When an iPod is used as source, the car's 2. Open the USB app from App view. audio and media system has a menu struc- 3. Tap the title you would like to play. ture similar to the iPod player's own menu > Playback will begin. structure. Apple CarPlay CarPlay is described in a separate section. 1. Connect a media source. Android Auto 2. Start playback in the connected media Android Auto is described in a separate sec- source. tion. 3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from App view. Related information > Playback will begin. • Handling the App menu in the instrument Bluetooth-connected device panel (p. 101) 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. • Radio (p. 432) 2. Connect a media source. • Controlling and changing media (p. 451) 3. Start playback in the connected media • Connecting a device via the USB port source. (p. 456) App view. (Generic illustration; basic apps vary • ® depending on market and model). 4. Open the Bluetooth app from App view. Connecting a device via Bluetooth > Playback will begin. (p. 455)

450 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Download apps (p. 430) Controlling and changing media Changing track/song - tap the desired track in • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) Media playback can be controlled using voice the center display, or press or below the center display or on the right-side steering • Video (p. 453) commands, the steering wheel keypad or the center display. wheel keypad. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) The media player can be con- Rewinding/fast-forwarding - tap the time axis • * Android Auto (p. 462) trolled using voice com- in the center display and drag it sideways, or mands, the right-side steer- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) press and hold or below the center ing wheel keypad or the cen- • Compatible file formats for media (p. 457) ter display. display or on the right-side steering wheel keypad. Changing media source - select from among previous sources in the app, tap the desired app in App view or use the right-side steering wheel keypad to select the app in the app menu . Library - tap the button to play from the library.

Shuffle - tap the button to Volume - turn the knob under the center display tracks in a random order. play or tap on the right-side steering wheel keypad to raise or lower the volume. Play/pause - tap the image for the track you would like to play, or press the button below the center display or on the right-side steering wheel keypad.

}}

* Option/accessory. 451 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Similar - tap the button to Media searches Related information use Gracenote to search for Searches can be performed to locate a spe- • Media player (p. 449) similar music on the USB cific artist, composer, song title, album, • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) device and create a playlist video, audio book or playlist. If the vehicle is • Playing media (p. 450) from the music found. The connected to the Internet, it is also possible playlist can contain up to 50 to search for podcasts (online digital media). • Entering characters, letters and words by tracks. hand in the center display (p. 125) Change device - tap the button to toggle between USB devices when more than one is connected.

Related information • Media player (p. 449) • Media searches (p. 452) • Sound settings (p. 428) • Apps (p. 429) 1. Tap . • Gracenote® (p. 453) > Search view will displayed and the keyboard will open. • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) 2. Enter a search word/phrase. 3. Tap Search. > A search will be performed on connected devices and the results will be displayed by category. Swipe the screen horizontally to display each category separately.

452 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Gracenote® Updating Gracenote Video Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks The contents of the Gracenote database are The media player can play videos from USB- and any associated images that can be dis- continuously updated. Download the latest connected devices. played during playback. update to take advantage of improvements. Video is not available when the vehicle is mov- Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music For information and to download, see ing; only audio will be played. Video will recognition. It can identify and analyze the volvocars.com/support. resume when the vehicle is stationary. metadata of music files and present informa- Information on compatible media formats is tion about the music. Metadata from different Related information provided in a separate section. sources may sometimes be inconsistent or • Playing media (p. 450) insufficient. • License agreement for audio and media Related information • Because Gracenote supports phonetic pro- (p. 488) Playing video (p. 454) cessing of artist name, album titles and gen- • Voice control for radio and media (p. 142) • Playing DivX® (p. 454) res, voice commands can be used to control • Video settings (p. 454) music playback. • Compatible file formats for media 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. (p. 457) 2. Tap Media Gracenote®. 3. Choose settings for Gracenote data: • Gracenote® Online Search - search Gracenote's online database for currently playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results - select how Gracenote data should be displayed if there are multiple search results. 1 - the file's original data will be used. 2 - Gracenote data will be used. 3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None - no result will be displayed.

453 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Playing video Playing DivX® Video settings The USB app in App view is used to play vid- The DivX Certified® device must be registered You can change some language settings for eos. to play purchased DivX video-on-demand video playback. 1. Connecting media source (USB device). (VOD) movies. Audio Language and Subtitle Language can be adjusted with the video player in full-screen 2. Open the USB app from App view. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. mode or by opening Top view and tapping 3. Tap the title you would like to play. 2. Tap Video DivX® VOD to get a regis- Settings Media Video. > Playback will begin. tration code. Related information If the USB device also contains music and 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information • Video (p. 453) audio tracks, it may be difficult to locate the and to complete the registration process. video files. To find them, go to Library and select the video tab. Related information • Video (p. 453) Related information • Playing video (p. 454) • Video (p. 453) • Video settings (p. 454) • ® Playing DivX (p. 454) • • Compatible file formats for media Video settings (p. 454) (p. 457) • Compatible file formats for media (p. 457)

454 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Streaming media via Bluetooth® Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Playing media via the USB port The vehicle's media player is equipped with Connect a Bluetooth® device to the vehicle to External audio sources, such as an iPod® or Bluetooth and can play audio files from wirelessly play media and give the vehicle an MP3 player, can be connected to the audio Bluetooth-enabled external devices such as Internet connection if it is available. system via the vehicle's USB port. cellular phones and tablets. Many cellular phones on the market currently Devices with rechargeable batteries can be In order for the media player to be able to offer wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not charged when they are connected via the USB wirelessly play audio files from an external all phones are fully compatible with the vehi- port and the ignition is in mode I, II or the device, the device must be connected to the cle. engine is running. vehicle via Bluetooth. The procedure for connecting a media device The content on the external source can be Related information is the same as for connecting a cellular phone read faster if it only contains data of a compat- ® ible format. Video files can also be played via • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® to the vehicle via Bluetooth . the USB port. (p. 455) Related information Some MP3 players have their own file system • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • ® Streaming media via Bluetooth (p. 455) that the vehicle has support for. tooth for the first time (p. 466) • • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Playing media (p. 450) tooth for the first time (p. 466) Related information • • Connecting a device via the USB port Compatible file formats for media • Playing media (p. 450) (p. 457) (p. 456) • Playing media (p. 450) • Video (p. 453) • Ignition modes (p. 372) • Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 456) • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) • Android Auto* (p. 462)

* Option/accessory. 455 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting a device via the USB Technical specifications for USB port devices External audio sources, such as an iPod® or For the contents of USB devices to be read, MP3 player, can be connected to the audio the following specifications must be met. system via any of the vehicle's USB ports. Any folder structures will not be shown in the If the vehicle has two USB ports, the phone center display during playback. must be connected to the port with the white frame to use Apple CarPlay* or Android Auto*. Max. number Files 15 000 Folders 1 000 USB ports* (type C) on rear of tunnel console for Folder levels 8 charging phones, tablets, etc.7. Playlists 100 Related information • Playing media (p. 450) Tracks in a playlist 1 000 • Playing media via the USB port (p. 455) Subfolders No limit • Media player (p. 449) • Technical specifications for USB devices Technical specifications for the USB-A (p. 456) connector USB ports (type A) under the center display. • Type A port • Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 456) • Version 2.0 • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) Voltage 5 V • • Android Auto* (p. 462) Max. current 2.1 A Technical specifications for the USB-C connector • Type C port • Version 3.1

7 It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input.

456 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Voltage 5 V Compatible file formats for media Format File extension • Max. current 3.0 A In order to play media, the following file formats must be used. AVI .avi Related information AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx • Playing media via the USB port (p. 455) Audio files For- File extension Codec ASF .asf, .wmv mat Subtitles MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, Format File extension MP3 Pro (mp3 SubViewer .sub compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 SubRip .srt compatible) SSA .ssa AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2) WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro WAV .wav LPCM FLAC .flac FLAC

Video files Format File extension MP4 .mp4, .m4v MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v

}}

457 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| DivX® Related information Apple® CarPlay®* • DivX-certified devices have been tested for Media player (p. 449) With CarPlay8, you can listen to music, make high-quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. • Video (p. 453) phone calls, get driving instructions, send/ When you see the DivX logo, you have the • Playing DivX® (p. 454) receive messages and use Siri, all while freedom to play your favorite DivX videos. remaining focused on driving. CarPlay works with select Profile DivX Home Theater iOS devices. If the car does not already support CarPlay, Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 this can be retrofitted. Con- Resolution 720x576 tact a Volvo retailer to install CarPlay. Audio speed 4.8Mbps (bit rate) Information about supported apps and compatible iOS devices are available on the Apple Frame rate 30 fps website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using File extension .divx, .avi apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection Max. file size 4 GB between the device and the vehicle is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for Audio codec MP3, AC3 the content of CarPlay. Subtitles XSUB When using navigation guidance provided by Special func- Multiple subtitles, multi- CarPlay, navigation will only be shown on the tions ple audio, resume play center display and not in the instrument panel. When navigation is started through Apple Reference Meets all requirements of CarPlay, any current route guidance from the the DivX Home Theater vehicle's own systems will be discontinued. profile. Visit divx.com for more information and CarPlay apps can be controlled from the cen- software tools to convert ter display, an iOS device or with the right- your files into DivX Home side steering wheel keypad (for certain func- Theater video. tions). The apps can also be voice-controlled

8 Availability may vary depending on market.

458 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET using Siri. Press and hold the button on Using Apple® CarPlay®* 2. Read the terms and conditions and then the steering wheel to start voice control with To use CarPlay10, the Siri voice control must tap Accept to connect. Siri. Press briefly to activate the vehicle's own be activated in your iOS device. The device > The CarPlay tile will open and compati- voice control system. If Siri cuts off too soon, must also have an Internet connection via Wi- ble apps will be displayed. 9 press and hold the button on the steer- Fi or a mobile network for all functions to 3. Tap the desired app. ing wheel.. work. > The app will start up. By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge Connecting an iOS device and starting the following: Apple CarPlay is a service CarPlay provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its NOTE features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is CarPlay, certain information from your car disabled. A cell phone or media player con- (including its position) is transferred to nected to the vehicle via Bluetooth will your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you therefore not be available when CarPlay is are fully responsible for your and any active. An alternative source must be used others person’s use of Apple CarPlay. to provide an Internet connection for the vehicle's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the vehicle's Related information integrated modem. • Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 459) • Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 461) To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has • Voice Control (p. 138) not previously been connected: • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) 1. Connect an iOS device that supports CarPlay to the USB port. If there are two USB ports, use the one with the white frame.

9 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. 10 Availability may vary depending on market. }}

* Option/accessory. 459 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Starting CarPlay Switching connection between • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via To start CarPlay from an iOS device that has CarPlay and iPod a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480) previously been connected: CarPlay to iPod • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via 1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. If 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481) there are two USB ports, use the one with • Voice Control (p. 138) the white frame. 2. Proceed to Communication Apple CarPlay. > If the auto start setting is selected – the name of the device will be dis- 3. Uncheck the box for the iOS device that played. The CarPlay tile will open auto- should no longer start CarPlay automati- matically when Home view is displayed cally when the USB cable is connected. when the iOS device is connected. 4. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device 2. If the CarPlay tile does not open automati- into the USB port. cally, tap the name of the device. The 5. Open the iPod app from App view. CarPlay tile will open and compatible apps will be displayed. iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap Apple CarPlay in App view. 3. If any other app is active in the same tile, tap Apple CarPlay in App view. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap OK. > The CarPlay tile will open and compatible apps will be displayed. 3. Remove and then reinsert the iOS device into the USB port. 4. Tap the desired app. > The Apple CarPlay tile will open and > The app will start up. compatible apps will be displayed11. CarPlay will run in the background if another app is started, or is already active when the Related information device is connected, in the same view. To dis- • Connecting a device via the USB port play CarPlay in the tile, tap the CarPlay icon in (p. 456) App view. • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) • Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 461)

11 Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

460 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* 2. Tap Sound System Volumes to Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for an iOS device connected through change the settings for the following: Here are some useful tips for when you use 12 13 14 CarPlay , . • Voice Control CarPlay® . • Update your iOS device with the latest • Navi Voice Guidance Automatic start version of the iOS operating system and 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone Ringtone ensure that the apps have been updated. 2. Tap Communication Apple CarPlay Related information • In the event of a problem with CarPlay, unplug the iOS device from the USB port and select the desired setting: • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) and then plug it in again. Otherwise, try to • Check the box - CarPlay will start auto- ® ® • Using Apple CarPlay * (p. 459) close the app on the device that is not matically when the USB cable is con- • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) working and then restart the app, or try nected. closing all apps and restart your device. • Uncheck the box - CarPlay will not start • If the apps do not appear when CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is starts (black screen), try minimizing and connected. expanding the tile for CarPlay. A maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored • Using apps that are not compatible with in the list, which may be worth noting if many CarPlay may sometimes cause the con- people share the vehicle, e.g. in a car pool. nection between the iOS device and the When the list is full and a new device is con- vehicle to be broken. Information about nected, the oldest one will be deleted. supported apps and compatible devices To delete the list, the settings must be rest in can be found on Apple's website. You can the center display (factory reset). also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are com- System Volumes patible with CarPlay in your market. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • You can use Siri to write or dictate messages or have them read aloud. Messages are read aloud and dictated in the language selected in the Siri settings. When

12 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. 13 Availability may vary depending on market. 14 Availability may vary depending on market. }}

* Option/accessory. 461 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| you write/dictate messages, no text will Related information Android Auto* be shown in the vehicle's center display, • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) Android Auto16 lets you listen to music, make but the text will be shown in your iOS • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via calls, get driving directions and use apps cus- device. When using Siri, note that it is the a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480) tomized for your vehicle from an Android phone's microphones that are used and device. Android Auto can be used with the quality therefore depends on the selected Android devices. phone's location. • If the device is connected to the vehicle through Bluetooth, the connection will be broken when CarPlay is used. Resume Internet connection in the vehicle by tethering using the device's Wi-Fi hotspot. • Some of CarPlay's functions (such as voice calls and messages) interrupt the use of the vehicle's own functions and CarPlay will instead be automatically displayed. If you do not wish this to happen, deselect display of the corresponding function in CarPlay under the phone's For information on supported apps and com- notification settings. patible Android devices, please go to • CarPlay only works with iPhone15. www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not NOTE responsible for the content of Android Auto. Availability and functionality can vary Android Auto is started from App view. After depending on market. Android Auto has been initially started, the app will start automatically the next time the device is connected. The automatic start setting can be deactivated in Settings.

15 Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. 16 Availability may vary depending on market.

462 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* NOTE Using Android Auto From a previously connected Android To use the Android Auto17 app, the app must device When a device is connected to Android be installed on the Android device and the 1. Connect the device to the USB port with Auto, it is possible to stream to another device must be connected to the vehicle's the white frame. media player via Bluetooth. Bluetooth is USB port. active while Android Auto is in use. > If the auto start setting is selected - NOTE the name of the device will be displayed. When using navigation guidance provided by For installation of Android Auto to be pos- Android Auto, navigation will only be shown sible, the vehicle must be equipped with 2. Tap the name of the device – the on the center display and not in the instrument two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only Android Auto tile will open and compatible panel. has one USB port then it is not possible to apps will be displayed. use Android Auto. Android Auto can be controlled from the cen- 3. If the automatic start setting is not acti- ter display, with the right-side steering wheel vated - open the Android Auto app from keypad or by using voice commands. Press Connecting an Android device for the first App view. and hold the steering wheel button to time > The Android Auto tile will open and start the Google Assistant and press briefly to 1. Connect the Android device to the USB compatible apps will be displayed. deactivate it. port with the white frame. 4. Tap the desired app. By using Android Auto, you acknowledge 2. Read the information in the pop-up win- > The app will start up. dow and then tap OK. the following: Android Auto is a service Android Auto will run in the background if provided by Google Inc. under its terms 3. Tap Android Auto in App view. another app is started in the same tile. To dis- and conditions. Volvo Cars is not 4. Read the terms and conditions and then play Android Auto in the tile, tap the responsible for Android Auto or its Android Auto icon in App view. features or applications. When you use tap Accept to connect. Android Auto, your car transfers certain > The Android Auto tile will open and Related information information (including its location) to your compatible apps will be displayed. • Android Auto* (p. 462) connected Android phone. You are fully 5. Tap the desired app. • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 464) responsible for your and any other > The app will start up. • person’s use of Android Auto. Connecting a device via the USB port (p. 456) Related information • Voice Control (p. 138) • Using Android Auto* (p. 463) • Settings for Android Auto* (p. 464)

* Option/accessory. 463 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Android Auto* 2. Tap Sound System Volumes to Tips for using Android Auto* Settings for Android devices initially con- change the settings for the following: Here are some useful tips for when you use 18 19 nected with Android Auto . • Voice Control Android Auto . • Ensure that your apps are updated. Automatic start • Navi Voice Guidance • When starting the vehicle, wait until the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone Ringtone center display has started, connect the 2. Tap Communication Android Auto Related information device and then open Android Auto from the app view. and select setting: • Android Auto* (p. 462) • In the event of problems with Android • Check the box - Android Auto will start • Using Android Auto* (p. 463) automatically when the USB cable is Auto, unplug your Android device from the • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) connected. USB port and then plug it in again. Other- wise, try closing the app on the device and • Uncheck the box - Android Auto will not then restarting the app. start automatically when the USB cable is connected. • When a device is connected to Android Auto it is still possible to play media via A maximum of 20 Android devices can be Bluetooth to another media player. The stored in the list. When the list is full and a Bluetooth function is on when Android new device is connected, the oldest one will Auto is used. be deleted. • If the Android Auto icon is grayed out, it A factory reset must be performed to delete means that a device is no longer con- the list. nected. When you connect your device, the icon will light up. If there is no icon at System Volumes all, the vehicle does not support connect- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. ing a device for this purpose. • If the device is connected to the vehicle through Bluetooth, the connection will be broken when Android Auto is used. Resume Internet connection in the vehicle

17 Availability may vary depending on market. 18 Availability may vary depending on market. 19 Availability may vary depending on market.

464 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

by tethering using the device's Wi-Fi hot- Phone Overview spot. A phone equipped with Bluetooth can be Related information wirelessly connected to the vehicle's integrated hands-free system. • Android Auto* (p. 462) The audio and media system offers hands-free • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via functionality for remotely controlling a number a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480) of the phone's features. The phone's integrated controls can also be used, even when it is connected to the vehicle. When the phone has been paired and connected to the vehicle, it can be used as an Internet connection or to make or receive calls, send or receive text messages or wirelessly play music. Microphone. The phone is controlled from the center dis- Phone. play, and the App menu (accessed using the right-side steering wheel keypad) and voice Wireless phone charger. commands can also be used to control certain Phone handling in the center display. functions. Keypad for controlling phone functions shown in the center display and voice commands. Instrument panel.

Related information • Handling phone calls (p. 469) • Managing the phone book (p. 472) • Handling text messages (p. 470) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 466) }}

* Option/accessory. 465 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Connecting a phone to the car via Option 1 - searching for the phone tooth automatically (p. 468) Bluetooth for the first time from the vehicle • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Pair a Bluetooth-enabled phone to the vehicle 1. Make the phone discoverable/visible using tooth manually (p. 468) to make calls, send/receive text messages its Bluetooth function. • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected and wirelessly play media from the vehicle, or 2. Open the phone tile in the center display. phone (p. 468) connect the vehicle to the Internet. • If no phone has been paired to the vehi- • Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at Switch between phones connected via the same time, but in that case, only one will cle, tap Add phone. Bluetooth (p. 469) be used for wireless playback. The most • If a phone has been paired to the vehi- • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- recently paired phone will be automatically cle, tap Change . Tap Add phone in ces (p. 469) connected to make calls, send/receive text the pop-up window. * messages, play media or use as an Internet • Wireless phone charger (p. 473) > A list of available Bluetooth devices will connection. It is possible to change what the • Phone settings (p. 472) be displayed. The list will be updated as phone is used for under Bluetooth Devices new devices are discovered. • Voice Control (p. 138) via the settings menu in the center display's • Handling the App menu in the instrument Top view. The cellular phone must be equip- 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like panel (p. 101) ped with Bluetooth and support tethering. to connect. • Sound settings (p. 428) After the device has been connected/regis- 4. Make sure that the code displayed in the • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via tered for the first time via Bluetooth, the vehicle matches the one in the phone. If it a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480) device no longer needs to be visible/searcha- does, confirm the code in both places. ble. It just needs to have Bluetooth activated. 5. In the phone, accept or cancel the options A maximum of 20 paired Bluetooth devices for selecting the phone's contacts and text can be stored in the vehicle. messages. There are two ways to pair a phone to the vehicle. Searching for the phone from the vehi- NOTE cle or searching for the vehicle from the • phone. The message function must be activated in certain phones. • Not all cell phones are fully compatible and may not be able to display contacts and messages in the vehicle.

466 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

• Option 2 - searching for the vehicle NOTE Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480) from the phone • 1. Open the phone tile in the center display. The message function must be activated in certain phones. • If no phone has been paired to the vehi- • Not all cell phones are fully compatible cle, tap Add phone Make vehicle and may not be able to display con- discoverable. tacts and messages in the vehicle. • If a phone has been paired to the vehi- Change Add phone cle, tap . Tap NOTE Make vehicle discoverable in the pop-up window. If the phone's operating system is being updated, it is possible that the connection 2. Activate Bluetooth in the phone. will be interrupted. Delete the phone from 3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices. the car and reconnect. > A list of available Bluetooth devices will be displayed. Related information • Phone (p. 465) 4. Select the vehicle's name from the list of devices in the phone. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth automatically (p. 468) 5. A pop-up window for the connection is shown in the car. Confirm the connection. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth manually (p. 468) 6. Make sure that the code displayed in the • vehicle matches the one shown in the Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected external device. If it does, confirm the phone (p. 468) code in both places. • Switch between phones connected via Bluetooth (p. 469) 7. In the phone, accept or cancel the options for selecting the phone's contacts and text • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- messages. ces (p. 469) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479)

* Option/accessory. 467 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting a phone to the car via Connecting a phone to the car via Disconnecting a Bluetooth- Bluetooth automatically Bluetooth manually connected phone A phone can be automatically connected to A phone can be manually connected to the A Bluetooth-connected phone can be discon- the vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must vehicle via Bluetooth. The phone must have nected from the vehicle. have first been paired with the vehicle. first been paired with the vehicle. • When the phone is out of range of the Only the two most recently connected phones 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone. vehicle, it will be automatically discon- can be connected automatically. nected. If a call is in progress when the 2. Open the phone tile. phone is disconnected from the vehicle, 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before > A list of available phones will be dis- the call will be transferred from the vehi- turning the vehicle's ignition to mode I. played. cle's speakers and microphone to the cel- 2. Turn the ignition to I or higher. 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like lular phone. > The phone will be connected. to connect. • The phone can also be disconnected by > The phone will be connected. manually deactivating Bluetooth. Related information • Phone (p. 465) Related information Related information • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone (p. 465) • Phone (p. 465) tooth for the first time (p. 466) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone settings (p. 472) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 466) • Switch between phones connected via tooth manually (p. 468) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Bluetooth (p. 469) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected tooth automatically (p. 468) • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- phone (p. 468) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected ces (p. 469) • Switch between phones connected via phone (p. 468) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) Bluetooth (p. 469) • Switch between phones connected via • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- Bluetooth (p. 469) ces (p. 469) • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) ces (p. 469) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480) • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via • Ignition modes (p. 372) a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480)

468 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Switch between phones Disconnecting Bluetooth- Handling phone calls connected via Bluetooth connected devices Handling phone calls in the vehicle for a It is possible to switch between Bluetooth- Phones or other devices in the list of regis- Bluetooth-connected cellular phone. connected phones. tered Bluetooth devices can be removed. 1. Open the phone tile. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

2. Tap Change or pull down Top view 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth and tap Settings Communication Devices. Bluetooth Devices Add device. > A list of registered Bluetooth devices is > A list of available Bluetooth devices will displayed. be displayed. 3. Tap the name of the device you would like 3. Tap the name of the phone you would like to remove. to connect. 4. Tap Remove device and confirm. Related information > The device is no longer registered in the vehicle. • Phone (p. 465) Generic illustration. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Related information Making calls tooth for the first time (p. 466) • Phone (p. 465) 1. Open the phone tile. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 2. Initiate a call by selecting the phone num- • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected tooth for the first time (p. 466) ber from the recent calls list, entering the phone (p. 468) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected number on the keypad or selecting a number from the phone book (list of contacts). • Disconnecting Bluetooth-connected devi- phone (p. 468) You can search or scroll to find a contact ces (p. 469) • Switch between phones connected via Bluetooth (p. 469) in the phone book. Tap in the phone book to add a contact to Favorites. • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) 3. Tap to make a call. 4. Tap to end the call. Calls can also be made from the list of recent calls using the app menu, which can be }}

469 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

20 || opened using the button on the right-side 2. Tap to end the call. Handling text messages steering wheel keypad. A Bluetooth-connected cellular phone's text Privacy messages can be handled in the vehicle. Making multiple calls – While a call is in progress, tap Privacy While the call is in progress: Text message functionality needs to be acti- and select setting: vated in certain phones. Not all phones are 1. Tap Add call. • Switch to mobile phone - the hands- fully compatible and therefore cannot display 2. Select from the list of recent calls, favor- free function will be disabled and the contacts and messages in the vehicle. ites or contacts. call will proceed on the cellular phone. • Handling text messages in the center 3. Tap an item/row in the list of recent calls Driver focused - the microphone in the display ceiling liner on the passenger side will or for the contact in the phone book. Text messages are only shown in the center be muted and the call will proceed display if the relevant setting is made. 4. Tap Swap call to switch between calls. using the vehicle's hands-free function. Tap Messages in App view 5. Tap to end the current call. Related information to handle text messages in Group (conference) calls • Phone (p. 465) the center display. While multiple calls are in progress: • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 1. Tap Join calls to merge ongoing calls. tooth for the first time (p. 466) • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) 2. Tap to end the call. • Handling the App menu in the instrument NOTE Incoming calls panel (p. 101) Incoming phone calls will be shown on the • Entering characters, letters and words by When the vehicle is moving: instrument panel and in the center display. hand in the center display (p. 125) • Only one row of the message will be Manage the calls using the right-side steering • Managing the phone book (p. 472) displayed. Tap Read out to have the wheel keypad or the center display. entire message read aloud. • Handling text messages (p. 470) 1. Tap Answer/Reject. • The center display's keyboard cannot • Sound settings (p. 428) be used. 2. Tap to end the call. Incoming calls while another call is in progress 1. Tap Answer/Reject.

470 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Reading text messages in the center Dictating replies in the instrument panel Text message settings display aloud After the text message has been read aloud, it Settings for handling text messages received Tap the icon to have the message is possible to dictate a brief reply if the vehicle through a connected phone can be personal- read aloud. has an Internet connection. ized. – Tap Answer using the steering wheel key- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. pad. A dictation dialog will start. Sending text messages in the center 2. Tap Communication Text Messages display21 Message alert and select settings: 1. It is possible to reply to text messages or Alerts can be activated and deactivated in the • Notification in center display - dis- create a new message. text message settings. play text message notifications in the • To reply to a text message - tap the center display's status bar. Related information • name of the contact who sent the mes- • Phone (p. 465) Notification in driver display - dis- sage and then tap Answer. • plays notifications in the driver's display • Text message settings (p. 471) and incoming messages can be man- To create a new message - tap Create • new. Select a contact or enter a phone Phone settings (p. 472) aged using the steering wheel's right- number. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) hand keypad. • Text message tone - select tone for 2. Write the message. • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) • incoming text messages. 3. Tap Send. Entering characters, letters and words by hand in the center display (p. 125) Related information Handling text messages in the • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- • Phone (p. 465) instrument panel tooth for the first time (p. 466) • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- Text messages are only shown in the instru- • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485) tooth for the first time (p. 466) ment panel if the relevant setting is made. • Handling text messages (p. 470) Reading new text messages in the • Phone settings (p. 472) instrument panel aloud – To have the message read aloud, select Read out using the steering wheel keypad.

20 Only applies to certain markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information. 21 Only certain phones can send text messages via the vehicle. The connected phone must support the Bluetooth profile Message Access Profile (MAP).

* Option/accessory. 471 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Managing the phone book first name or last name. This is adjusted in Phone settings When a phone is connected with Bluetooth your cellular phone settings. When the phone is connected to the car, the to the vehicle, contacts can be managed Related information following settings can be made: directly in the center display. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Phone (p. 465) Up to 3,000 contacts can be displayed from the phone selected in the center display. • Phone settings (p. 472) 2. Tap Communication Phone and select settings: • Voice control for cellular phones (p. 141) • • Entering characters, letters and words by Ringtones - select a ring tone. Ring hand in the center display (p. 125) tones from the cellular phone or the • vehicle can be used. Some phones are Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- not fully compatible and it may not be tooth for the first time (p. 466) possible to use the phone's ring tones in the vehicle. • Sort Order - select sort order in the contact list. Related information • Phone (p. 465) • Text message settings (p. 471) Scroll by letter or to find contacts. Only letters matching existing contacts in • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) the phone book will be shown. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- tooth for the first time (p. 466) Search contacts - tap to search by phone number or name in the phone book. • Sound settings (p. 428) Favorites - tap to add/remove a contact from the list of favorites. Sorting The phone book is sorted in alphabetical order and special characters and numbers are sorted under . The list can be sorted by either

472 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Settings for Bluetooth devices This device complies with Industry Canada Wireless phone charger* Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is A charging pad for wireless phone charging is 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. subject to the following two conditions: located in the tunnel console. (1) this device may not cause interference, and To be able to charge, the phone 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth must have wireless charging (Qi) Devices and select settings: (2) this device must accept any interference, capability. Phones not equipped with including interference that may cause unde- • Add device - start the procedure for pair- a wireless charging receiver can sired operation of the device. ing a new device. often be supplemented with a shell that enables wireless charging. • Previously paired devices - lists regis- Related information tered/paired devices. • Phone (p. 465) This device complies with 47CFR part 15 of • Remove device - remove a connected • Phone settings (p. 472) FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condi- device. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) tion that this device does not cause harmful interference. • Allowed services for this device - select • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- what the device will be used for: making tooth for the first time (p. 466) calls, sending/receiving messages, WARNING streaming media, Internet connection. Wireless charging can affect the operation • Internet connection connect the vehicle of an implanted pacemaker or other medi- to the Internet using the device's cal devices. If you have one, it is recom- Bluetooth connection. mended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system. Bluetooth® declaration of conformity Related information USA • Phone (p. 465) FCC CAUTION • Using the wireless phone charger* Changes or modifications not expressly (p. 474) approved by the party responsible for compli- • Certificate for wireless charger (p. 475) ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada

* Option/accessory. 473 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Using the wireless phone charger* Tap the center display to confirm that the If the phone is not charging: The rubber pad below the center display can charging plate should be switched on. • Make sure that the charging plate is be used to charge a phone without having to To use the wireless charging plate: switched on in the center display's Func- connect its cord. tion view. 1. Make sure that the charging plate is • Make sure there are no other objects on switched on in the center display's Func- the charging pad. tion view. • Make sure the phone supports wireless 2. Remove all objects from the charging pad charging (Qi). and place the phone in the center of the pad. • If the phone has a phone case, remove it. > The phone will begin charging and the • Lift up the phone and then put it back on symbol will appear at the top of the center of the charging pad. the center display. • Make sure the ignition is on. If the phone is incorrectly positioned or an CAUTION object prevents charging on the charge pad, a message is shown on the center display. Wireless phone charger in front of gear selector Do not place cards with NFC (Near Field Communication), e.g. debit cards for con- WARNING tactless payment, next to the phone. This CAUTION type of card could be destroyed during Wireless charging can affect the operation Keep cellular phones and charger stations charging. of an implanted pacemaker or other medi- away from other objects while charging to cal devices. If you have one, it is recom- help avoid overheating. mended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system. NOTE Related information Some cellular phones may become warm • Phone (p. 465) The charging plate can be switched on and off during wireless charging. This is normal. • * via the center display's Function view. The Wireless phone charger (p. 473) charging plate's default mode is activated. • Certificate for wireless charger (p. 475) When the charging plate is switched on, a • Symbols in the center display status bar message will appear describing the risks for (p. 120) users with pacemakers or other implanted devices who could be affected by the plate.

474 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Certificate for wireless charger

Country/ Area Mexico: RCPVAPVO 18-1919 Paraguay:

2018-11-1-000541 Taiwan: 根據 NCC 低率電波輻射性電機管理辦法規定: 第十二條經型式認證合格之低率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率大率或變更原設計之特性及能第十四條低率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信低率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾

}}

475 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area

Ukraine: : 107 - 115 Мь ь : 5 (), 63 (єь) Кє : N / A М: 2 NFC : 13,56 М, +/- 0,01% Мь ь : 10 – : - І.(LG Electronics Inc) 10, М' 10-, -, , 07796, К Frequency range 111 / Мь ь : 42 / - Іє, WC510MVV20 є ; ь - :https://www.lg.com/ global/support/cedoc/cedoc. : І . , 5-, .К, Кь ь, 08112, .: +38(044) 585 63 00 К : Alla Haidai ([email protected])

476 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/ Area US/ FCC ID : BEJWC510MVV20 Canada IC : 2703H-WC510MVV20 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-Gen,RSS-216 rules of Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changed or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body. – IDéclaration d'avertissement ISED Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquerd'interferences nuisibles, et (2) Cet appareil doit accepter toute interference recue, y compris les interferences pouvant entrainerun fonctionnement indesirable. Les changements ou modifications non expressement approuves par LG Vehicle Components Company pourraient annuler l'autorite de l'utilisateura utilizer l'equipement. Déclaration d'exposition aux radiations RF de l'ISED: Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements RF de l'ISED définies pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas être situés ou fonctionner conjointement avec une autre antenne ou un autre émetteur.

}}

477 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area Cet équipement doit être installé pour fonctionner avec une distance minimale de 10cm entre le radiateuret le corps de l'utilisateur final.

Related information • Wireless phone charger* (p. 473) • Using the wireless phone charger* (p. 474) • License agreement for audio and media (p. 488)

478 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

* Internet-connected vehicle NOTE Related information When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- • Symbols in the center display status bar Data (data traffic) is transfered when using net, it is possible to use web radio and music (p. 120) the internet, which can incur additional services via apps, download software and • costs. Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via contact retailers from the vehicle. a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 480) The vehicle can be connected to the Internet Activating data roaming can cause addi- • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or the vehicle's inte- tional charges. a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480) grated modem (SIM card). Contact your network operator about data • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, traffic costs. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481) it is possible to share the vehicle's Internet • connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devi- Apps (p. 429) ces, e.g. tablets, can access the Internet22. NOTE • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi- The Internet status is shown by a symbol in • Sharing Internet from the vehicle via Wi-Fi ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet the center display's status bar. hotspot (tethering) (p. 483) using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem. • Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 484) • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 485) NOTE • Volvo ID (p. 26) When using Android Auto, it is possible to • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485) connect the vehicle to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the vehicle's modem.

Before the vehicle is connected to the Inter- net, search for support information about terms and conditions for services and the customer privacy policy at volvocars.com.

22 This is not possible when the vehicle is connected to another Wi-Fi hotspot.

* Option/accessory. 479 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Connecting the vehicle to the 6. If a different connection is being used, Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected confirm the connection change. Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) phone > Your vehicle is now connected to the Establish an Internet connection using Wi-Fi Establish an Internet connection using Internet via your Bluetooth-connected through Internet sharing (tethering) from a Bluetooth and tethering from a phone and phone. phone and get access to the connected servi- get access to multiple connected services in ces in your vehicle. your vehicle. NOTE 1. Make sure that the phone supports Inter- 1. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via a net sharing (tethering) and that the func- The cellular phone and network operator Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function must support tethering (sharing of Internet must first be paired with the vehicle via is called "personal hotspot". In Android connection) and the subscription must Bluetooth. phones, the function can have different include data traffic. names, but is often called "hotspot". For 2. Make sure that the phone supports Inter- iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot" net sharing (tethering) and that the func- menu page must also be open until the tion is activated. In an iPhone, the function NOTE Internet connection has been made. is called "personal hotspot". In Android When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possi- phones, the function can have different ble to connect the vehicle to the Internet 2. Tap Settings in the Top view. names, but is often called "hotspot". For using Wi-Fi or the vehicle's modem. iPhone phones, the "personal hotspot" 3. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi. menu page must also be open until the 4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ Internet connection has been made. Related information uncheck the Wi-Fi box. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) 3. If the phone has been connected via Blue- 5. If a different connection is being used, • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via tooth previously, tap Settings in the cen- confirm the connection change. vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481) ter display's Top view. • Connecting a phone to the car via Blue- 6. Tap the name of the network you would 4. Tap Communication Bluetooth tooth for the first time (p. 466) like to connect. Devices. • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via 7. Enter the network password. 5. Mark the window for Bluetooth Internet a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480) > The vehicle will connect to the network. connection under the heading Internet • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 458) Please note that certain cellular phones will connection. • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) disable Internet sharing (tethering) when the connection to the vehicle has been broken, • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 473) e.g. when the phone has been removed from

480 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET the vehicle. The phone's tethering function will • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 485) Connecting the vehicle to the then need to be reactivated the next time the Internet via vehicle modem (SIM phone's hotspot is used to connect to the card) Internet. It is possible to establish an Internet connec- When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it tion via the vehicle modem and a personal will be saved for future use. To display a list of SIM card (P-SIM). saved networks or to manually delete saved Vehicles equipped with Volvo On Call will use networks, tap Settings Communication the vehicle modem Internet connection for the services. Wi-Fi Saved networks. 1. NOTE The cellular phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing of Internet connection) and the subscription must include data traffic.

Technical and security requirements for Wi-Fi Insert a personal SIM card in the holder connection are described in a separate sec- under the floor of the cargo compartment. tion. Note that the vehicle's card reader requires mini SIM cards. Related information • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) 2. Tap Settings in the Top view. • Deleting Wi-Fi networks (p. 484) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) }}

* Option/accessory. 481 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| 3. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Vehicle modem settings Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can Internet. Your vehicle is equipped with a modem that be entered. 4. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ can be used to connect the vehicle to the Disable PIN - select whether a PIN code uncheck the Vehicle modem Internet Internet. It is also possible to share this Inter- will be required to access the SIM card. net connection over Wi-Fi. box. • Send request code - used to e.g. down- 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. load or check the balance remaining on a 5. If a different connection is being used, prepaid phone card. This function is spe- confirm the connection change. 2. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Internet and select settings: cific to your service provider. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. • Vehicle modem Internet - select this to > The vehicle will connect to the network. NOTE use the vehicle's modem to connect to the Internet. Please note that the SIM card used for NOTE • Data usage. - tap Reset to reset the Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have Please note that the SIM card used for counter for the amount of data received the same telephone number as the SIM Internet connection via P-SIM cannot have and sent. card used in the cellular phone. If the same the same telephone number as the SIM • card is used for both, phone calls will not card used in the cellular phone. If the same Network. be connected properly to the cellular card is used for both, phone calls will not Select carrier - select a service provider phone. Use a SIM card with a separate be connected properly to the cellular manually or automatically. phone number for the Internet connection phone. Use a SIM card with a separate Data roaming - if the box is checked, the or a data card that does not handle phone phone number for the Internet connection vehicle modem will attempt to connect to calls and can therefore not interfere with or a data card that does not handle phone the Internet when the vehicle is outside its phone function. calls and can therefore not interfere with home network (e.g. if you are in another phone function. country). Please note that this could entail Related information additional charges. Consult with your serv- • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via Related information ice provider for data roaming terms under vehicle modem (SIM card) (p. 481) • * Internet-connected vehicle (p. 479) your contract. • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) • Folding up the cargo compartment floor • SIM card PIN. (p. 540) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) • Vehicle modem settings (p. 482)

482 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Sharing Internet from the vehicle 2. Tap Communication Vehicle Wi-Fi The connection status is shown by a symbol in via Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) Hotspot. the center display's status bar. When the vehicle is connected to the Inter- 3. Tap Network name to assign a name to Tap Connected devices to see a list of cur- net, other devices may share the vehicle's the hotspot. rently connected devices. Internet connection23. 4. Tap Password and create a password. Related information This password can then be used to con- • Symbols in the center display status bar nect other devices to this hotspot. (p. 120) 5. Tap Frequency band and select a fre- • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) quency for the hotspot to use to transmit • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) data. Please note that selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets. 6. Activate/deactivate by tapping to check/ uncheck the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot box. 7. If Wi-Fi is being used to connect to the Internet, confirm the change of connections. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot.

NOTE Activation of Wi-Fi hotspot can cause additional charges from your network operator. The network service provider (SIM card) must Contact your network operator about data support Internet sharing (tethering). traffic costs. 1. Tap Settings in the Top view.

23 This does not apply when the vehicle is connected to the Internet via Wi-Fi.

* Option/accessory. 483 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

No or poor Internet connection Restarting the phone Deleting Wi-Fi networks Factors affecting the Internet connection. If you experience any Internet connection Networks that are not needed can be The amount of data transmitted depends on problems, it may help to restart your phone. deleted. the services or apps currently in use in the 1. Tap Settings in the Top view. vehicle. Streaming music, for example, Related information • * involves the transmission of a large amount of Internet-connected vehicle (p. 479) 2. Proceed to Communication Wi-Fi data, and this requires a good connection and • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 485) Saved networks. a strong signal. 3. Tap Forget to delete the network. Phone to vehicle 4. Confirm the selection. Internet connection speed may vary depend- > The vehicle will no longer connect to ing on the location of the cellular phone in the the deleted network. vehicle. Move the phone closer to the center display to increase signal strength. Make sure Deleting all networks that nothing is between the phone and center All networks can be deleted at once by per- display that could be blocking the signal. forming a factory reset. Please note that all user data and system settings will be restored Phone to network operator to original default factory settings. The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the vehicle's Related information current location. Coverage may be poorer in • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) e.g. tunnels, mountainous areas, deep valleys • No or poor Internet connection (p. 484) or indoors. Connection speed is also depend- • Resetting center display settings (p. 130) ent on the subscription you have with your service provider. • Connecting the vehicle to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 480) NOTE If you experience any problems with data traffic, contact your network service provider.

484 * Option/accessory. AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Wi-Fi technology and security Terms of use and data sharing there. Note that services and apps cannot be Networks must meet certain criteria in order The first time certain services and apps are used as intended if data sharing is disabled. for the vehicle to connect. started, a pop-up window with the heading After a factory reset or e.g. a workshop visit or It is possible to connect to the following types Terms and conditions and Data sharing a software update, your data sharing preferen- of networks: may open. ces may be reset to default settings. You will The aim is to inform the user about Volvo's • Frequency - 2.4 or 5 GHz24. then need to reactivate data sharing for con- terms of use and data sharing policy. By nected services and downloaded apps. • Standards - 802.11 a/b/g/n. accepting data sharing, the user accepts that • Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. certain information will be sent from the vehi- NOTE cle. This is required for certain services and The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to han- apps to work with full functionality. Settings for privacy and data sharing are dle Wi-Fi devices inside the vehicle. unique for each driver profile. The data sharing function for connected servi- Performance may be impaired if multiple devi- 25 ces are using a frequency at the same time. ces and apps is disabled by default . For certain connected services and apps in the vehi- Related information Related information cle to work, data sharing must be activated. • Activating and deactivating data sharing • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) Data sharing can be set from the center dis- (p. 486) play's settings menu or when the services or apps are started in the center display. Privacy and data sharing The software update that became available in November 2017 introduced privacy and data sharing settings for connected services and downloaded apps. These settings can be found under Privacy and data in the settings menu in the vehicle's center display. There, you can choose which connected services will be allowed to share data. Data sharing for downloaded apps can also be disabled

24 Selecting a frequency is not possible on all markets. 25 Does not apply to Volvo On Call.

* Option/accessory. 485 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Activating and deactivating data Data sharing for services Enabling data sharing when starting a sharing If you haven't activated data sharing for a service Data sharing for relevant services and apps connected service or for downloaded apps, 1. Select the function or service you want to can be set via the Settings menu in the center you can do this when you start them in your activate. display. center display. The first time that you start a > If this is the first time you are using the 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top service, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain service or after e.g. a factory reset or view. software updates, you will also need to certain software updates, you will first accept Volvo's terms and conditions for con- need to accept Volvo's terms and con- 2. Tap System Privacy and data. nected services. ditions for connected services in order 3. Select to activate or deactivate data shar- to continue. ing for individual services and all apps. If data sharing for a connected service or downloaded apps is not activated, this can be done when they are started in the center display. If this is the first time that a service is started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for connected services must be accepted. Note that data sharing will then also be activated for other services or apps that sharing has already been accepted for.

NOTE After visiting a Volvo workshop, you may need to reactivate data sharing so that services and apps will work again.

Related information • Terms of use and data sharing (p. 485)

486 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

2. Accept data sharing for the service or can- Hard disk storage space cel. It is possible to view how much space is If you choose to accept, data sharing will be remaining on the vehicle's hard disk. enabled and you can begin using the service. Storage information for the vehicle's hard disk can be shown, including total capacity, availa- Enabling data sharing when starting ble capacity and how much space is used for an app installed apps. The information is found under To accept data sharing for an app that needs Settings System System Information the function, start the app and tap accept in Storage. the pop-up window. You can disable data sharing for services and Related information • Apps (p. 429) apps in the settings menu under System Privacy and data Data Sharing.

487 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

License agreement for audio and DivX® Gracenote® media A license is an agreement on the right to con- duct a certain activity or the right to use someone else's right according to terms and conditions specified in the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/developers. Dirac Unison®

Portions of the content are copyright © of DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos Gracenote or its providers. are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under license. Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote This DivX Certified® device can play DivX ® MusicID are either registered trademarks or Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ- trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United ing .avi, .divx). Download free software at States and/or other countries. www.divx.com to create, play and stream digital video. Dirac Unison co-optimizes the loudspeakers in ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX frequency, time and space for the best possi- ® ble bass integration and clarity. It enables a Certified device must be registered in order faithful reproduction of the acoustic characte- to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand ristics of specific performance venues. Using (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all code, locate the DivX VOD section in your loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high- device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for precision measurements. Like a conductor of more information on completing the registra- an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeak- tion process. ers perform in perfect unison. Patent number Covered by one or more of the following patents in the US: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.

488 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Gracenote® End User License Agreement Gracenote Software, and all Gracenote Serv- GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRAN- This application or device contains software ers, including all ownership rights. Under no TIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, from Gracenote, Inc. in Emeryville, California, circumstances will Gracenote become liable BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRAN- United States (“Gracenote”). The software for any payment to you for any information TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND enables this application to perform disc and/or Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agree- NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES file identification and obtain music-related ment against you directly in its own name. NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE information, including name, artist, track, and The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACE- title information (“Gracenote Data”) from to track queries for statistical purposes. The NOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACE- online servers or embedded databases (collec- purpose of a randomly assigned numeric iden- NOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUEN- tively “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform tifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count TIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR other functions. You may use Gracenote Data queries without knowing anything about who ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. only by means of the intended End-User func- you are. For more information, see the web tions of this application or device. page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, Gracenote service. Sensus software the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Serv- The Gracenote Software and each item of ers for your own personal non-commercial use Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” This software uses parts of sources from clib2 only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or Gracenote makes no representations or war- and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source transmit the Gracenote Software or any ranties, express or implied, regarding the (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE- Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the 1993), The Regents of the University of NOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, right to delete data from the Gracenote Serv- California. All or some portions are derived OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS ers or to change data categories for any cause from material licensed to the University of EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty California by American Telephone and You agree that your non-exclusive license to is made that the Gracenote Software or Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- Gracenote Servers are error-free or that func- Inc. and are reproduced herein with the ware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if tioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. you violate these restrictions. If your license Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not Redistribution and use in source and binary terminates, you agree to cease any and all use obligated to provide you with new enhanced forms, with or without modification, are of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft- or additional data types or categories that permitted provided that the following ware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote Gracenote may provide in the future and is conditions are met: Redistributions of source reserves all rights in all Gracenote Data, all free to discontinue its services at any time. code must retain the above copyright notice, }}

489 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| this list of conditions and the following ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must DAMAGE. MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A reproduce the above copyright notice, this list PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND This software is based in part on the work of of conditions and the following disclaimer in NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL the Independent JPEG Group. the documentation and/or other materials SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR provided with the distribution. Neither the This software uses parts of sources from ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER name of the nor the "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF names of its contributors may be used to Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, endorse or promote products derived from released January 26, 2000, developed by ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN this software without specific prior written Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] not be used in advertising or otherwise to INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. promote the sale, use or other dealings in this IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, Software without prior written authorization MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A to any person obtaining a copy of this from Silicon Graphics, Inc. PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. software and associated documentation files This software is based in parts on the work of IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT (the "Software"), to deal in the Software the FreeType Team. OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE without restriction, including without FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, sell copies of the Software, and to permit ([email protected]). All rights reserved BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF persons to whom the Software is furnished to SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS do so, subject to the following conditions: The Linux software OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS above copyright notice including the dates of This product contains software licensed under INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND first publication and either this permission GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies You have the right of acquisition, modification, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR or substantial portions of the Software. THE and distribution of the source code of the OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", GPL/LGPL software. OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT

490 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

You may download Source Code from the other materials provided with the (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any following website at no charge: http:// distribution. associated documentation (the "Software") to www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS deal in the Data Files or Software without download/TVM_8351_013 IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, The website provides the Source Code "As Is" WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files and without warranty of any kind. LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR or Software, and to permit persons to whom By downloading Source Code, you expressly A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE the Data Files or Software are furnished to do assume all risk and liability associated with DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE so, provided that (a) the above copyright downloading and using the Source Code and LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, notice(s) and this permission notice appear complying with the user agreements that INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR with all copies of the Data Files or Software, accompany each Source Code. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this Please note that we cannot respond to any BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF permission notice appear in associated inquiries regarding the source code. SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS each modified Data File or in the Software as camellia:1.2.0 INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND well as in the documentation associated with Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT Corporation). All rights reserved. (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY Redistribution and use in source and binary OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, forms, with or without modification, are ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE permitted provided that the following DAMAGE. WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, conditions are met: FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 1. Redistributions of source code must retain Unicode: 5.1.0 AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY the above copyright notice, this list of COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE conditions and the following disclaimer as Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS the first lines of this file unmodified. reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR 2. Redistributions in binary form must in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY reproduce the above copyright notice, this Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING list of conditions and the following to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, disclaimer in the documentation and/or data files and any associated documentation }}

491 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, Declaration of Conformity USA NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS FCC CAUTION ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR Changes or modifications not expressly PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR approved by the party responsible for compli- SOFTWARE. ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be Except as contained in this notice, the name of co-located or operated in conjunction with any a copyright holder shall not be used in other antenna or transmitter. advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Canada Software without prior written authorization of This device complies with Industry Canada the copyright holder. license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

492 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/ Area Brazil:

Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br EU:

Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU. For further details, search for support information on www.volvocars.com. United Arab Emi- rates:

}}

493 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area Kazakh- stan:

Model name: NR-0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Export country: Japan

494 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/ Area China: 1. ■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz ■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ① ■ 最大率谱密度天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ① ■ 载频容限20 ppm ■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外) • ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) • ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) • ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) • ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) • ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线 3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续使用 4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰 5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用

}}

495 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

|| Country/ Area

Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다. Malaysia:

This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (volvocars.com/support) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”. Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth) Model: NR-0V Type Approval No.: RDBV/25A/1118/S(18-4228), RDBV/26A/1118/S(18-4229), RDBV/37A/0619/S(19-2241), RDBV/39A/0619/S(19-2240)

496 AUDIO, MEDIA AND INTERNET

Country/ Area Mexico:

Taiwan: 低率電波輻射性電機管理辦法第十二條經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能第十四條低率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信低率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾

Related information • Audio, media and Internet (p. 428) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) • Media player (p. 449) • Gracenote® (p. 453) • Sensus - connection and entertainment (p. 30) • Certificate for wireless charger (p. 475)

* Option/accessory. 497

WHEELS AND TIRES WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires CAUTION When replacing tires, be sure that the new The function of the tires is to carry loads, pro- tires are the same size designation, type Some Volvo models are equipped with an vide traction on road surfaces, reduce vibra- (radial) and preferably from the same manu- Ultra High Performance tire and wheel tions and protect the wheels from wear. facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is combination designed to provide maxi- The tires significantly influence the vehicle's a risk of altering the vehicle's roadholding and mum dry pavement performance with con- driving characteristics. The type, dimensions, handling characteristics. sideration for hydroplaning resistance. tire pressure and speed rating have a consid- They may be more susceptible to road haz- Recommended tires erable impact on how the vehicle performs. ard damage and, depending on driving On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo Your vehicle is equipped with tires according conditions, may achieve a tread life of less original tires that have the VOL1 marking on to the vehicle's tire information placard on the than 30,000 km (20,000 miles). Even if the side of the tires. These tires have been B-pillar (the structural member at the side of this vehicle is equipped with Volvo's designed specifically for your vehicle. It is the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door advanced AWD or stability system, these therefore important when replacing tires that opening). tires are not designed for winter driving, the new tires have this same marking to help and should be replaced with winter tires maintain the vehicle's driving characteristics, WARNING when weather conditions dictate. comfort and fuel consumption. A damaged tire could cause the driver to New tires lose control of the vehicle. The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ice-free surfaces. Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree of roadholding on slippery road surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating. However, Volvo recommends using snow tires on all four wheels for good roadholding on icy or snow-covered roads.

1 This may vary for certain tire dimensions.

500 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tires are perishable goods. After a few years, • Correct front wheel alignment is very authorized Volvo workshop. If significant dif- they will begin to harden and their friction important. ferences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread properties will gradually deteriorate. Always • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy depth) between the tires have already occur- replace tires with the freshest tires possible. and driving comfort. red, the least worn tires should always be This is particularly important for snow tires. A • mounted on the rear wheels. A front-wheel series of numbers is imprinted on the sidewall Tires must maintain the same direction of skid (understeer) is usually easier to control of the tire. The last four digits in the series is rotation throughout their lifetime. than a rear-wheel skid (oversteer). If the front the Department of Transportation (DOT) • When replacing tires, the tires with the wheels skid, the vehicle will continue in a stamp and indicates the week and year the most tread should be mounted on the rear straight line instead of the rear wheels skid- tire was manufactured. The tire in the illustra- wheels to reduce the chance of oversteer ding to the side, which could cause you to tion has 0717 as the last four digits, which during hard braking. completely lose control of the vehicle. It is means it was manufactured week 7 of 2017. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the therefore important that the rear wheels never tires and/or wheels permanently. lose grip before the front wheels. Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are Tire rotation Storing wheels and tires not being used. It is recommended that tires Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Driv- When storing complete wheels (tires mounted generally be replaced after 6 years of normal ing style, tire pressure, climate and road con- on rims), they should be suspended off the service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent ditions affect how quickly the tires age and floor or placed on their sides on the floor. high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exhibit signs of wear. Maintaining the correct Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on exposure can accelerate the aging process. tire pressure helps keep tread wear evenly dis- their sides or standing upright, but should not 2 The temporary spare should also be replaced tributed. be suspended. at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been used. A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discol- To help prevent differences in tread depth and oration should be replaced immediately. wear patterns forming on the tires, the front CAUTION and rear wheels should be rotated, i.e. the Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, front tires moved to the rear and the rear tires Tire economy dry, dark place, and should never be stored moved to the front. Ideally, tire rotation should • Maintain correct tire pressure. in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, be done the first time after approximately • Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire oils, etc. 5000 km (ca 3100 miles) and thereafter at screeching. 10,000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals. • Tire wear increases with speed. If you have any questions regarding tread depth, Volvo recommends consulting an

2 Not available on all models. }}

501 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Tire direction of rotation NOTE Tires with tread designed to roll in only one • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo Use tires of the same type, dimensions and direction are marked with an arrow on the are specified to meet stringent stability make (manufacturer) on each axle. sidewall. and handling requirements. Unap- proved wheel/tire size combinations Related information can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- • Tires (p. 500) bility and handling. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such installations.

Related information The arrow shows the tire's direction of rotation. • Checking tire pressure (p. 507) • The tire should maintain the same direc- • Tire direction of rotation (p. 502) tion of rotation throughout its service life. • Tread wear indicator (p. 503) • Tires should only be moved between the • Tire pressure monitoring system* front and back, never from right to left or (p. 509) vice versa. • • Tire sealing system (p. 522) Incorrectly mounted tires impair the vehi- • cle's braking properties and ability to force Uniform Tire Quality Grading (p. 506) aside rain, snow and slush. • Tire terminology (p. 503) • The tires with the most tread should • Tire sidewall designations (p. 504) always be mounted on the rear wheels to • Loading recommendations (p. 537) help reduce the risk of skidding.

502 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

Tread wear indicator Tire terminology • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- The tread wear indicator shows the status of The following is a glossary of tire-related sure. the tire's tread. terms. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard The tire suppliers may have additional mark- unit of air pressure. ings, notes or warnings such as standard load, • B-pillar: The structural member at the radial tubeless, etc. side of the vehicle behind the front door. • Tire information placard: A placard • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire to the rim. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perime- • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A num- ter of the tire that contacts the road when ber on the sidewall of each tire providing mounted on the vehicle. information about the tire brand and man- ufacturing plant, tire size and date of man- • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire The tread wear indicator is a narrow elevated ufacture. or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. strip running across the tire's longitudinal • Inflation pressure: A measure of the tread grooves. The letters TWI (Tread Wear amount of air in a tire. • Maximum load rating: A figure indicating Indicator) are visible on the side of the tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or When approximately 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) is left grams that can be carried by the tire. This Metric tires designed to carry a maximum on the tread, the tread will be at the same rating is established by the tire manufac- load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric height as the tread wear indicator. Replace the turer. tire as soon as possible. Tires with low tread tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Maximum permissible inflation offer very poor traction in rain or snow. beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. pressure: The greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. Related information • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. • Tires (p. 500) tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric • Recommended tire inflation pressure: tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure Inflation pressure, established by Volvo, beyond this pressure will not increase the which is based on the type of tires that are tire's load carrying capability. mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This information can be found on the tire infla- }}

503 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| tion placard(s) located on the driver's side Tire sidewall designations NOTE B-pillar and in the tire inflation table. The following information can be found on a Please be aware that the following tire • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be tire's sidewall. designation is an example only and that cold when they have the same tempera- this particular tire may not be available on ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This your vehicle. temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. 1. 215: The width of the tire (in millimeters) from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Related information larger the number, the wider the tire. • Tires (p. 500) 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width in percent. 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the symbol indicate that the vehicle is equipped with optional self-supporting run Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers flat tires3. place standardized information on the sidewall 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in of all tires (see the illustration). inches). The vehicle has been certified with certain 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a combinations of wheels and tires. load index of 95 equals a maximum load The following information is listed on the tire of 1521 lbs (690 kg). sidewall: 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum The tire designation: speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 210 km/h (130 mph).

3 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models.

504 WHEELS AND TIRES

NOTE carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's T 190 km/h (118 mph) tire information placard located on the B- The tire's load index and speed rating may Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your H 210 km/h (130 mph) not appear on the sidewall because they vehicle. are not required by law. V 240 km/h (149 mph) 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades. W 270 km/h (168 mph) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All 12. Maximum permissible inflation Terrain, AS = All Season Y 300 km/h (186 mph) pressure: The greatest amount of air 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number pressure that should ever be put in the (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- WARNING and indicates that the tire meets all federal turer. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo standards. The next two numbers are the are specified to meet stringent stability factory code where the tire was manufac- Speed Symbol and handling requirements. Unap- tured, the next two are the tire size code A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maxi- proved wheel/tire size combinations and the last four numbers represent the mum speed for which the tire has been certi- can negatively affect your vehicle's sta- week and year the tire was made. For fied and should be at least equivalent to the bility and handling. example, 0717 means that the tire was vehicle's top speed. • manufactured during week 7 of 2017. The Any damage caused by installation of Winter tires, with or without studs, are excep- unapproved wheel/tire size combina- numbers in between are marketing codes tions and may use a lower SS. When winter used at the manufacturer's discretion. This tions will not be covered by your new tires are installed, the vehicle may not be vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no information helps a tire manufacturer driven faster than the tires' SS. identify a tire for safety recall purposes. responsibility for death, injury, or The vehicle's speed should always be deter- expenses that may result from such 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: mined by the posted speed limit and traffic installations. Indicates the number of plies indicates or and road conditions, not the tire's SS. the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire man- The following table indicates the maximum Related information ufacturers also must indicate the ply permissible speed for each SS. • Tires (p. 500) materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and M 130 km/h (81 mph) others. Q 160 km/h (100 mph) 10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be

505 WHEELS AND TIRES

Uniform Tire Quality Grading WARNING Related information ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST • Tires (p. 500) The traction grade assigned to this tire is CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY based on braking (straight-ahead) traction • Tire sidewall designations (p. 504) REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE tests and is not a measure of cornering GRADES. (turning) traction. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread TEMPERATURE shoulder and maximum section width. For The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, example: and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions TREADWEAR on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Sustained high temperature can cause the based on the wear rate of the tire when tested material of the tire to degenerate and reduce under controlled conditions on a specified tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to government test course. For example, a tire sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) to a minimum level of performance that all times as well on the government course as a passenger vehicle tires must meet under the tire graded 100. The relative performance of Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. tires depends upon the actual conditions of Grades B and A represent higher levels of per- their use, however, and many depart signifi- formance on the laboratory test wheel than cantly from the norm due to variation in driving the minimum required by law. habits, maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. WARNING TRACTION The temperature grade for this tire is estab- The traction grades, from highest to lowest, lished for a tire that is properly inflated and are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under con- not overloaded. Excessive speed, under- trolled conditions on specified government inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure. marked C may have poor traction performance.

506 WHEELS AND TIRES

Checking tire pressure WARNING found on the vehicle's tire information decal or Correct inflation pressure helps improve driv- certification label. • Under-inflation is the most common ing stability, save fuel and increase the serv- cause of tire failure and may result in If you check inflation pressure when the tires ice life of the tires. severe tire cracking, tread separation, are warm, you should never release air. The Tire pressure decreases over time, which is or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of tires become warm after driving and it is nor- normal. Tire pressure also varies depending on vehicle control and increased risk of mal for warm tires to have an inflation pres- the ambient temperature. Driving on under- injury. sure above the recommended pressure for inflated tires could cause the vehicle to over- • cold tires. A warm tire with an inflation pres- heat and lead to damage. Tire pressure affects Under-inflated tires reduce the load sure equal to or under the recommended pres- traveling comfort, road noise and driving cha- carrying capacity of your vehicle. sure for cold tires could be significantly under- racteristics. inflated. Cold tires Check the pressure in the tires every month. Related information Use the recommended inflation pressure for Inflation pressure should be checked when the • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 508) cold tires to help maintain good tire perform- tires are cold. The tires are considered to be ance. Under-inflated or over-inflated tires cold when they have the same temperature as • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) could cause uneven tread wear. the surrounding (ambient) air. This tempera- • Tire pressure monitoring system* ture is normally reached after the vehicle has (p. 509) Use an air pressure gauge and check the infla- been parked for at least 3 hours. tion pressure on all the tires, including the • Tires (p. 500) After driving for approximately 1.6 km (1 mile), spare tire4, at least once a month and before the tires are considered to be warm. If you long trips. Volvo recommends buying a relia- need to drive longer than that to inflate the ble air pressure gauge, as the automatic tires, check and record the inflation pressure gauges provided at service stations may be of the tires first and inflate accordingly when inaccurate. you arrive at the pump. When the ambient temperature changes, so does the inflation pressure. A 10-degree temperature drop causes a corresponding drop in inflation pressure of 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the inflation pressure of the tires regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which can be

4 Not available in all models.

* Option/accessory. 507 WHEELS AND TIRES

Adjusting tire pressure 3. Screw the valve cap back on. NOTE Tire pressure decreases over time, which is If you have overfilled the tire, release air by normal. The tire pressure must therefore be NOTE pushing on the metal stem in the center of adjusted to maintain the recommended tire • After inflating a tire, always replace the the valve. Then recheck the pressure with pressure. valve cap to help prevent valve damage your tire gauge. Use the recommended inflation pressure for caused by gravel, dirt, etc. cold tires to help maintain good tire perform- Some spare tires require higher inflation ance and even wear. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps pressure than the other tires. Consult the could corrode and become difficult to tire inflation pressure table or the inflation remove. NOTE pressure decal. To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure, 4. Visually inspect the tire to make sure there Related information pressure should be checked when the tires are no nails or other embedded objects are cold. The tires are considered to be • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) that could puncture the tire and cause air • cold when they have reached the same leakage. Checking tire pressure (p. 507) temperature as the ambient temperature • Inflate tires with the compressor included 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there (about 3 hours after the vehicle was last in the tire sealing system (p. 527) driven). After driving for a few kilometers, are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irreg- the tires will warm up and the pressure will ularities. • Approved tire pressure (p. 621) increase. 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare tire5. 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire and press the air pressure gauge firmly onto the valve. 2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pressure; see the tire pressure placard on the driver's side B pillar for recommended pressures for factory-mounted tires.

5 Not available on all models.

508 WHEELS AND TIRES

Recommended tire pressure Related information Tire pressure monitoring system* The tire pressure placard on the driver's side • Checking tire pressure (p. 507) The tire inflation pressure monitoring system6 B pillar (between the front and the rear door) • Approved tire pressure (p. 621) provides an indicator symbol in the instru- indicates tire pressure for different loads and ment panel if pressure is too low in one or speed conditions. more tires. This symbol illuminates to indicate low inflation pressure. Check the inflation pressure in the Car Status app in the center display. If there is a system malfunction, the inflation pressure warning symbol will flash for approximately one minute and then glow steadily. System description The tire pressure monitoring system measures Location of the tire pressure placard differences in rotational speed between the The decal specifies the designation for the fac- wheels through the ABS system to determine tory-mounted tires on the vehicle, as well as if the tires are properly inflated. If inflation load limits and inflation pressures. pressure in a tire is too low, its diameter (and consequently its rotational speed) changes. By NOTE comparing the tires with each other, the system can determine if the pressure in one or The decals shown in the Owner's Manual more tires is too low. do not claim to be exact reproductions of those found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show approximately how they look and about where they are located on the vehicle. The information that applies for your vehicle in particular is found on the decal on the vehicle.

}}

* Option/accessory. 509 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| General information about the tire pressure note that the TPMS is not a substitute for To keep in mind monitoring system proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's • Always save the new inflation pressure in In the following description, the tire monitor- responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, the system after changing a tire or adjusting system is generally referred to as TPMS. even if under-inflation has not reached the ing the inflation pressure. level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low 7 • If you switch to a tire of another size than Each tire, including the spare (if provided) tire pressure telltale. should be checked monthly when cold and the factory-mounted tires, the system inflated to the inflation pressure recom- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a must be reset by storing a new inflation mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when pressure for these tires to avoid false vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. the system is not operating properly. The warnings. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with • If a spare wheel8 is used, it is possible that the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire the low tire pressure telltale. When the system the tire pressure monitoring system will inflation pressure label, you should determine detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for not work correctly due to the differences the proper tire inflation pressure for those approximately one minute and then remain between the wheels. tires.) continuously illuminated. This sequence will • continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as The system does not replace the need for As an added safety feature, your vehicle has long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- regular tire inspection and maintenance. been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring function indicator is illuminated, the system • It is not possible to deactivate the tire system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure monitoring system. pressure telltale when one or more of your pressure as intended. tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord- WARNING ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of nates, you should stop and check your tires as reasons, including the installation of replace- • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead soon as possible, and inflate them to the ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- to tire failure, which could cause the proper pressure. cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning driver to lose control of the vehicle. properly. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire • The system cannot predict sudden tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale damage. failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- after replacing one or more tires or wheels on ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 7 Not available on all models. 8 Not available on all models.

510 WHEELS AND TIRES

Related information Saving new reference values for NOTE • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) tire inflation pressure monitoring* The vehicle must be stationary for the • In order for the tire inflation pressure moni- Viewing tire pressure status in the center Store Pressure button to be selectable. display* (p. 512) toring system9 to function correctly, inflation • Action when warned of low tire pressure pressure reference values must be saved cor- 6. Tap Store Pressure. (p. 513) rectly. To help ensure that the system can • correctly alert the driver of low inflation pres- 7. Tap OK to confirm that the tire pressure in Saving new reference values for tire infla- sure, this must be done each time the tires tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511) all four tires has been checked and are changed or the inflation pressure is adjusted. • Tire inflation pressure monitoring system* adjusted. messages (p. 514) For example, when driving with a heavy load 8. Drive the vehicle until the new inflation or at high speeds (over 160 km/h (100 mph)), pressure has been saved. The new infla- tire pressure should be adjusted to the Volvo- tion pressure is stored when the vehicle is recommended tire pressure values. The sys- driven at speeds over 35 km/h (22 mph). tem should then be reset by saving the new > When enough data has been collected inflation pressure. for the system to detect low inflation pressure, the animation showing the To store the new inflation pressure as a refer- progress of the storing procedure will ence value in the system: disappear from the center display. The 1. Switch off the ignition. system will not provide any further con- 2. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- firmation that the new inflation pressure; see the tire pressure placard on the sure has been stored. driver's side B pillar for recommended If storing cannot be performed, Storing pressures for factory-mounted tires. pressure unsuccessful. Try again. will be 3. Start the vehicle. displayed. 4. Open the Car Status app in App view. 5. Tap TPMS.

9 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) }}

* Option/accessory. 511 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Viewing tire pressure status in the Related information center display* • Saving new reference values for tire infla- The exhaust gases contain carbon monox- tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511) ide, which is invisible and odorless but very With the system for tire inflation pressure poisonous. The procedure for saving a new monitoring10, inflation pressure status can be • Action when warned of low tire pressure inflation pressure must therefore always be viewed in the center display. (p. 513) performed outdoors or in a workshop with • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509) exhaust gas extraction. Checking status The vehicle may need to be driven for a few • Vehicle status (p. 552) Related information minutes at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph) • Tire inflation pressure monitoring system* • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) to activate the system. messages (p. 514) • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 508) 1. Open the Car Status app in App view. • Viewing tire pressure status in the center 2. Tap TPMS to display the status of the display* (p. 512) tires. • Action when warned of low tire pressure (p. 513) • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509)

The illustration is generic. Layout may vary depending on vehicle model or software version.

10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

512 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

Action when warned of low tire NOTE Related information pressure • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) To help prevent incorrect inflation pressure, When the tire inflation pressure monitoring • Adjusting tire pressure (p. 508) 11 pressure should be checked when the tires system detects low inflation pressure in a are cold. The tires are considered to be • Saving new reference values for tire infla- tire, immediate action is required. cold when they have reached the same tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511) If the system's indicator sym- temperature as the ambient temperature • bol illuminates and the mes- Viewing tire pressure status in the center (about 3 hours after the vehicle was last display* (p. 512) sage Tire pressure low is driven). After driving for a few kilometers, • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509) displayed, check the tire the tires will warm up and the pressure will pressure and inflate if neces- increase. • Inflate tires with the compressor included sary. in the tire sealing system (p. 527) 1. Switch off the ignition. NOTE 2. Check the inflation pressure on all four • After inflating a tire, always replace the tires using a tire pressure gauge. valve cap to help prevent valve damage 3. Inflate the tire to the correct inflation pres- caused by gravel, dirt, etc. sure; see the tire pressure placard on the • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps driver's side B pillar for recommended could corrode and become difficult to pressures for factory-mounted tires. remove. 4. After the inflation pressure has been adjusted, always save the new inflation pressure in the system via the center dis- WARNING play. • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, which could cause the Please be aware that the indicator symbol driver to lose control of the vehicle. will not go out until the low tire pressure has been corrected and a storing proce- • The system cannot predict sudden tire dure has been started for the new inflation damage. pressure.

11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

* Option/accessory. 513 WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire inflation pressure monitoring Related information Changing a wheel system* messages • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509) Wheel changes must always be carried out A number of messages related to the tire • Saving new reference values for tire infla- correctly. The following instructions show inflation pressure monitoring system12 may tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511) how to remove and install a wheel and what is important to keep in mind. Make sure that be displayed. Several examples are provided • Action when warned of low tire pressure the tire dimension is approved for use on the below. (p. 513) vehicle. Instrument The indicator symbol will • Vehicle status (p. 552) panel: Tire illuminate to indicate that WARNING • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) pressure low inflation pressure is low • If a tire must be changed near passing Check Car in one or more tires. See traffic, make sure all passengers move Status app in the Car Status app in to a safe location. center display the center display for • more information. Use a jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other Instrument The indicator symbol will job, use stands to support the vehicle. panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute • Never crawl under or allow any part of pressure sys- and then glow steadily. your body to be extended under a vehi- tem Tempo- The system is temporarily cle supported by a jack. rarily unavaila- unavailable and will be • Never let anyone remain in the vehicle ble activated momentarily. when it is raised on a jack. Instrument The indicator symbol will panel: Tire flash for about 1 minute pressure sys- and then glow steadily. If tem Service the system is not work- required ing properly, contact a workshopA.

A An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

514 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

CAUTION 4. Using the lug wrench, screw the towing 2. Lift the wheel into place. Tighten the eye into place as far as possible. wheel bolts securely. • When not in use, the jack* should be kept in its storage compartment under Do not grease the wheel bolt threads. the cargo compartment floor. 3. Lower the vehicle so that the wheel can- • The jack provided with your vehicle is not rotate. intended to be used only in temporary 4. Tighten the wheel bolts in a crisscross pat- situations such as changing wheels in tern (as shown in illustration). It is impor- the event of a flat tire. Only the jack tant that the wheel bolts are securely that came with your particular model tightened. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). should be used to lift the vehicle. If the Use a torque wrench to check torque. vehicle needs to be lifted more frequently or for a prolonged period, using 5. Remove the plastic covers from the wheel a garage jack or hoist is recommended. bolts using the designated tool. Always follow this device's instructions 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use for use. the lug wrench/towing eye to loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing down- Removing a wheel ward (counterclockwise). Always start Read through all instructions before starting. with the locking wheel bolts*. Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift, 7. Follow the instructions for safely lifting the take out all the tools you will need. vehicle using a jack. 1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be flashers if a wheel change must be per- changed can move freely. Unscrew the formed in an area with traffic. wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. 5. Press the plastic covers over the wheel 2. Make sure that the parking brake is bolts. engaged and put the gear selector in P Installing a wheel 6. Check the tire inflation pressure and store position. 1. Clean the contact surfaces between the wheel and the wheel hub. the new inflation pressure in the tire pres- 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the sure monitoring system*. wheels that are still on the ground. For example, use heavy wooden blocks or large stones. }}

* Option/accessory. 515 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| WARNING Tool kit Related information Tools for e.g. towing or changing wheels are • Folding up the cargo compartment floor The wheel bolts may need to be tightened (p. 540) again several days after a wheel change. provided in the vehicle's cargo compartment. Temperature fluctuations and vibrations • Changing a wheel (p. 514) can cause them to loosen slightly. • Jack* (p. 517) • Tire sealing system (p. 522) NOTE • Attaching and removing the towing eyelet • After inflating a tire, always replace the (p. 419) valve cap to help prevent valve damage caused by gravel, dirt, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to remove.

All the tools are located in a foam block under the Related information cargo compartment floor. • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 555) Jack* • Tool kit (p. 516) • Tool for removing the plastic wheel bolt Saving new reference values for tire infla- covers tion pressure monitoring* (p. 511) Funnel for refilling fluids

Wheel bolt key* and towing eyelet

If the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire*13, a jack and lug wrench are provided.

13 Not available on all models.

516 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TIRES

* Jack CAUTION Wheel bolts The jack can be used to lift the vehicle to e.g. The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place on • When not in use, the jack* should be change a wheel. the wheel hub. kept in its storage compartment under Only use rims that have been tested and the cargo compartment floor. approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's • The jack provided with your vehicle is original product range. intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel the event of a flat tire. Only the jack bolts are tightened correctly. that came with your particular model Do not grease the wheel bolt threads. should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more fre- WARNING quently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. The wheel bolts may need to be tightened again several days after a wheel change. Always follow this device's instructions Temperature fluctuations and vibrations for use. can cause them to loosen slightly.

The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to fit. CAUTION The wheel bolts should be tightened to Related information 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Over-tightening or • Folding up the cargo compartment floor under-tightening could damage the threa- (p. 540) ded joints. • Tool kit (p. 516) • Hoisting the vehicle (p. 555) Locking wheel bolt kit* To loosen or tighten the locking wheel bolts, turn the wrench in the locking bolt until it fully engages in the code grooves. When removing a wheel, always start with the locking wheel bolts. When mounting a wheel, end with the locking bolt.

}}

* Option/accessory. 517 WHEELS AND TIRES

14 || CAUTION Spare wheel WARNING The spare wheel is a Temporary Spare and Make sure you have a solid connection • Never drive faster than 80 km/h can be used to temporarily replace a punc- between bolt and wheel bolt key when (50 mph) with a spare tire mounted on tured tire on one of the vehicle's regular loosening/tightening the wheel bolts. the vehicle. wheels. Applying force at an angle could damage The spare wheel is only intended for tempo- • The vehicle must never be driven with the slots in the wheel bolts and the wheel rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as more than one "Temporary Spare" bolt key and make it impossible to install or soon as possible. wheel mounted. remove the wheel. • The driving characteristics of the vehicle Driving with a spare wheel may alter the driving characteristics of the vehi- When the wheel bolt key is not being used, change and ground clearance reduces when the spare wheel is used. Do not wash the vehicle. Replace the spare wheel with a stow it in its designated location in the foam normal wheel as soon as possible. block under the cargo compartment floor. This cle in an automatic car wash while using the • The spare wheel is smaller than the is important to remember so that the tool is Temporary Spare. normal wheel, which affects the vehi- available if the vehicle is taken to a workshop. The recommended tire pressure must be cle's ground clearance. Watch for high If you lose the key, contact your Volvo retailer. maintained regardless of at which position the curbs and do not wash the vehicle in temporary spare wheel is used on the vehicle. Related information an automatic car wash when a spare • Changing a wheel (p. 514) If the spare wheel is damaged, a replacement wheel is mounted. can be purchased from a Volvo retailer. • Tool kit (p. 516) • Follow the manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure for the WARNING spare wheel. Current legislation prohibits the use of the • On all-wheel drive vehicles, the drive "Temporary Spare" wheel other than as a on the rear axle can be disconnected. temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- • If the spare wheel is mounted on the ble by a standard tire. Roadholding and front axle, snow chains must not be handling may be affected with the "Tempo- used. rary Spare" wheel in use. • The spare wheel must not be repaired.

14 Not available on all models.

518 WHEELS AND TIRES

15 CAUTION Handling the spare wheel 3. Lift out the spare wheel. Follow these instructions regarding handling The vehicle must not be driven with tires of Accessing the spare wheel the spare wheel. different dimensions or with a spare wheel other than the one that came with the vehi- Accessing the spare wheel cle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your vehicle's transmission.

Related information • Changing a wheel (p. 514) • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

This illustration is generic and appearance may vary. Vehicles without 48 V support battery. This illustration is generic and appearance may vary. The spare tire is located under the floor of the Vehicles with 48 V support battery. cargo compartment and is held in place by a The spare tire is located in the spare wheel strap. The foam block contains all tools nee- well under the cargo compartment with the ded to change a wheel. outside of the wheel facing downward. The 1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compart- spare tire is secured with a bolt that goes ment floor. through the tire and attaches it to the body. 2. Release the straps and lift out the spare The foam block contains all tools needed to wheel. change a wheel. 1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compartment floor. 2. Unscrew the retaining bolt.

15 Not available on all models. }}

519 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| Stowing a flat tire Related information Snow tires 1. Screw the spare tire's retaining bolt back • Spare wheel (p. 518) Snow tires are designed for winter driving on. • Folding up the cargo compartment floor conditions. (p. 540) Volvo recommends snow tires with specific dimensions. The tire dimensions vary depend- CAUTION • Tool kit (p. 516) ing on engine type. When driving with snow Do not attempt to unscrew the lower part • Changing a wheel (p. 514) tires, the correct type of tires must be moun- of the retaining bolt if it is attached to the ted on all four wheels. body, as this could cause it to break. If the retaining bolt becomes dislodged Tips for changing snow tires from its lower attachment point in the When switching between regular tires and body under the spare tire, replace it in the snow tires, mark the tires according to which hole and turn clockwise to secure it again. side they were mounted on, e.g. L for left and R for right.

WARNING Contact a Volvo retailer for assistance determining the most suitable rims and tires. On vehicles with 48 V batteries, the bolt is attached to the battery box instead of the Studded tires body. If the lower part of the retaining bolt Studded tires should be broken in by driving is not dislodged when the spare tire is 500–1000 km (300–600 miles) slowly and taken out, it should be removed to help gently to help the studs settle properly in the prevent injury when the flat tire is replaced. tires. This gives the tire, and especially the studs, a longer service life. 2. Put the tools back in their correct positions in the foam block. NOTE 3. Then lower the trunk/cargo compartment Legal requirements concerning the use of floor and place the punctured tire in the studded tires may vary. Always follow local trunk/cargo compartment. laws and regulations.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands

520 WHEELS AND TIRES on tires than summer conditions. Volvo there- Snow chains CAUTION fore recommends not driving on snow tires Using snow chains and/or snow tires can Snow chains can be used on the vehicle, that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm help improve traction in winter driving condi- with the following restrictions: (0.15 inch). tions. • Always follow the manufacturer's Related information Volvo does not recommend use of snow chains on wheel dimensions larger than installation instructions carefully. Install • Changing a wheel (p. 514) 18 inches chains as tightly as possible and • Winter driving (p. 403) retighten periodically. • Tread wear indicator (p. 503) WARNING • Only put snow chains on the front • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive lent snow chains that are suitable for the vehicles). vehicle model and the tire and wheel sizes. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" Only one-sided snow chains are permit- tires and wheels with different dimen- ted. sions than the original tires and wheels If uncertain about snow chains, Volvo rec- are used, snow chains in some cases ommends contacting an authorized Volvo may NOT be used. Sufficient distance workshop. Use of the wrong snow chains between the chains and brakes, sus- could cause serious damage to the vehicle pension and body components must and result in an accident. be maintained. • Check local regulations regarding the use of snow chains before installing. • Never exceed the snow chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed limit. Under no circumstances should you exceed 50 km/h (30 mph). • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. • Avoid driving on surfaces without snow as this wears out both the snow chains and the tires.

}}}}

521 WHEELS AND TIRES

• 16 || The handling of the vehicle can be Tire sealing system NOTE adversely affected when driving with The temporary tire sealing system can be The sealing compound effectively seals chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as used to seal a puncture in a tire or to check tires with punctures in the tread but may well as locked wheel braking. and adjust the pressure in the tire. not be able to fully seal tires with punctu- • Some types of strap-on chains affect Models equipped with a spare wheel17 do not res in the sidewall. Do not use the tire seal- brake components and therefore must have the tire sealing system. ing system on tires with large tears, cracks NOT be used. WARNING or similar damage. Consult a Volvo retailer for more information California Proposition 65 about snow chains. Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- NOTE senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- The compressor is intended for temporary Related information cals including engine exhaust, carbon mon- tire sealing and is approved by Volvo. • Winter driving (p. 403) oxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- Location tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid The tire sealing system is located in a foam breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine block under the cargo compartment floor. except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle.

The tire sealing system consists of a compressor and a bottle containing sealing compound. The sealing functions as a temporary repair.

16 Certain models only. 17 Not available on all models.

522 WHEELS AND TIRES

Sealing compound expiration date Using the tire sealing system Sealing compound bottle The sealing compound bottle must be 18 The temporary tire sealing system (TMK ) Bottle opening replaced if its expiration date has passed (see can be used to seal a puncture in a tire. Read the decal on the bottle). Handle the old bottle through all instructions before use. Connection for bottle as hazardous waste. Overview Hose Related information • Using the tire sealing system (p. 523) Connection valve • Inflate tires with the compressor included in the tire sealing system (p. 527) Connecting • Tires (p. 500)

Speed limit sticker

Switch

Electrical cable

Bottle holder

Air release valve

Air pressure gauge

Decal, wheel-side warning

18 Temporary Mobility Kit }}

523 WHEELS AND TIRES

• || WARNING Inhalation: Move the exposed person 2. Peel off the speed limit sticker from the to fresh air. If irritation persists, get side of the compressor. Affix the decal to a Please keep the following points in mind medical attention. clearly visible location on the windshield when using the tire sealing system: • to remind the driver not to exceed this • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in unless directed to do so by medical speed limit. Do not drive faster than the illustration) contains 1) rubber latex, personnel. Get medical attention. 80 km/h (50 mph) while using a tire that natural and 2) ethanediol. These sub- • has been temporarily repaired with the tire stances are harmful if swallowed. Disposal: Dispose of this material and sealing system. • its container at a hazardous or special The contents of this bottle may cause waste collection point. Also peel off the warning decal and affix it allergic skin reactions or otherwise be securely to the side of the wheel. potentially harmful to the respiratory 0 tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- WARNING 3. Make sure the switch is in the (Off) tem, and the eyes. position and take out the electric cable Do not remove the bottle or the hose while and the hose. Precautions: the tire sealing system is being used. • 4. Attach the sealing compound bottle to the Keep out of reach of children. compressor, making sure that the red 1. Preparations • Do not ingest the contents. arrows on the compressor and bottle are • Avoid prolonged or repeated contact Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning aligned, and then turn clockwise until it with the skin. Remove any clothing flashers if the tire sealing system is to be clicks into place. used in an area with traffic. that has come into contact with seal- The bottle is equipped with a check valve ant. If the puncture was caused by a nail or that prevents fluid leakage when the bot- • Wash thoroughly after handling. similar object, do not remove it. It will help tle is not connected to the compressor. seal the hole. First aid: 5. Attach the hose in the bottle opening and • Skin: Wash affected areas of the skin turn clockwise until it clicks into place. with soap and water. Get medical 6. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw attention if symptoms occur. the hose's valve connector as far as possi- • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for ble onto the valve. least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.

524 WHEELS AND TIRES

7. Begin tire sealing procedure 8. Start the compressor by moving the 10. Switch off the compressor and check the switch to the I (On) position. inflation pressure using the air pressure Connect the electrical cable to the nearest gauge. The inflation pressure should be 12 V outlet and start the vehicle. When the compressor starts, the pressure between 1.8 bar (22 psi) and 2.5 bar can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi), but the (36 psi). If the inflation pressure is too pressure will decrease after NOTE high, use the air release valve to release approx. 30 seconds. Make sure that none of the vehicle's other air. 12 V sockets are used while the compres- WARNING The sealing compound bottle must be sor is running. removed in order to access the air release Never stand next to a tire being inflated valve. Remove the bottle in the following with the compressor. If cracks, bulges, etc. WARNING form on the tire, switch off the compressor order: immediately. The vehicle should not be 1. Remove the hose from the tire's valve. Never leave children unattended in the driven. Call roadside assistance to have the vehicle while the engine is running. vehicle towed to a workshop for inspec- 2. Remove the hose from the bottle. tion/replacement of the tire. Volvo recom- 3. Remove the bottle from the compres- WARNING mends an authorized workshop. sor. Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- 4. Reconnect the hose directly to the ous injury. Never leave the engine running 9. Inflate the tire for 7 minutes. compressor. in an enclosed space or a space without 5. Screw the hose back on to the tire's sufficient ventilation. CAUTION valve. To help avoid overheating, the compressor 6. Release air using the air release valve. should never be used for more than 10 minutes at a time. WARNING If pressure falls below 1.8 bar (22 psi), the hole in the tire may be too large. The vehicle should not be driven. Call roadside assistance to have the vehicle towed to a workshop for inspection/replacement of the tire. Volvo recommends an authorized workshop.

}}

525 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 11. Switch off the compressor and remove 14. Immediately drive the vehicle at least 16. Check the inflation pressure on the air the electrical cable. 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of pressure gauge. 80 km/h (50 mph) to allow the sealing 12. Unscrew the hose from the tire's valve and • If the pressure is under 1.3 bar (19 psi), compound to seal the tire, and then screw the valve cap back on. the tire is not sufficiently sealed. The recheck the inflation pressure. vehicle should not be driven. Call road- NOTE side assistance to have the vehicle WARNING towed. • After inflating a tire, always replace the During the tire's first revolution, some seal- • If the inflation pressure is higher than valve cap to help prevent valve damage ing compound may spray out of the punc- caused by gravel, dirt, etc. 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tire must be inflated ture hole. Before driving away, make sure to the inflation pressure specified on • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps that no one is near the vehicle who could be sprayed with sealing compound. Make the tire pressure decal on the driver's could corrode and become difficult to side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = remove. sure no one is within 2 meters (7 feet) of the vehicle. 14.5 psi). If the inflation pressure is too high, use the air release valve to release 13. Clean the hose before stowing it and air. 15. Rechecking the inflation pressure make sure that no sealing compound is leaking out. Connect the hose to the tire's valve and WARNING screw the hose connector onto the valve as far as possible. The compressor must Check inflation pressure regularly. be switched off. Volvo recommends driving to the nearest authorized Volvo workshop to have the tire replaced/repaired. Inform the workshop that the tire contains sealing compound. The sealing compound bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop for replacement.

526 WHEELS AND TIRES

WARNING Inflate tires with the compressor 4. Connect the electrical cable to the nearest included in the tire sealing system 12 V outlet and start the vehicle. After using the tire sealing system, the vehicle should not be driven farther than The vehicle's original tires can be inflated approximately 200 km (120 miles). using the compressor in the tire sealing sys- WARNING tem. Inhaling exhaust fumes could lead to seri- 1. The compressor must be switched off. ous injury. Never leave the engine running NOTE Make sure that the switch is in the 0 (Off) in an enclosed space or a space without The compressor is an electric device. Fol- position and take out the electrical cable sufficient ventilation. low local regulations for disposal. and the hose. 2. Attach the hose directly onto the com- WARNING pressor's bottle holder and turn clockwise Related information Never leave children unattended in the • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) until it clicks into place. vehicle while the engine is running. • Tire sealing system (p. 522) Move the warning sticker to the side of the compressor; it doesn't need to be • Inflate tires with the compressor included 5. Start the compressor by moving the affixed to the wheel side if the sealing in the tire sealing system (p. 527) switch to the I (On) position. compound is not used. • Contacting Volvo (p. 26) 3. Unscrew the tire's valve cap and screw CAUTION the hose's valve connector as far as possi- Risk of overheating. The compressor ble onto the valve. should not be running for longer than 10 minutes at a time.

6. Inflate the tire to the pressure specified on the tire pressure decal on the driver's side door pillar. If the inflation pressure is too high, use the air release valve to release air. 7. Switch off the compressor. Remove the hose and the electrical cable.

}}

527 WHEELS AND TIRES

|| 8. Screw the valve cap back onto the tire. Determining the vehicle's Gross vehicle weight (GVW) permitted weight The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- NOTE Properly loading your vehicle will provide gers. maximum return of vehicle design perform- • After inflating a tire, always replace the Steps for Determining Correct Load ance. valve cap to help prevent valve damage Limit caused by gravel, dirt, etc. Weight designations 1. Locate the statement "the combined • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- weight of occupants and cargo should could corrode and become difficult to self with the following terms for determining never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your remove. your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a vehicle's placard. trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian 2. Determine the combined weight of the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ driver and passengers that will be riding in CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- NOTE your vehicle. tion placard: The compressor is an electric device. Fol- 3. Subtract the combined weight of the Curb weight low local regulations for disposal. driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX The weight of the vehicle including a full tank lbs. of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not Related information include passengers, cargo, or optional equip- 4. The resulting figure equals the available • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509) ment. amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" • Using the tire sealing system (p. 523) Capacity weight amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be • Tire sealing system (p. 522) All weight added to the curb weight, including five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the cargo and optional equipment. When towing, amount of available cargo and luggage towbar weight is also part of cargo weight. load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × Permissible axle weight 150) = 650 lbs.) The maximum allowable weight that can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- carried by a single axle (front or rear). These gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian cle. That weight may not safely exceed the Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ available cargo and luggage load capacity CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle calculated in Step 4. must never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

528 WHEELS AND TIRES

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent defor- mation or catastrophic failure. • Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information.

Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 537)

529

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Passenger compartment interior front seat's backrest and USB ports* in the tunnel console. Overview of the passenger compartment interior and storage spaces. WARNING Front seats Store loose objects, such as cell phone, camera, remote control for extra equipment, etc., in the glove compartment or another compartment. Otherwise, these could injure people in the vehicle in the event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION Storage compartment at leg area, electrical outlets Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be and USB ports via wireless phone charger*, cup holder and storage under armrest in tunnel console. easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do not place keys, phones or similar items on Rear seat sensitive surfaces.

Storage compartment in door panel, card holder to the left of the steering wheel, storage under driver's Related information seat1, sun visors and glove compartment with fold- • Electrical outlets (p. 534) out hook. • Using the glove compartment (p. 535) • Sun visors (p. 537) • Tunnel console (p. 533) • Wireless phone charger* (p. 473) • Connecting a device via the USB port (p. 456)

Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holders* in the center seat's backrest, storage pocket* in the

1 A maximum of 1 kg (2.2 lbs) can be stored here.

532 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Tunnel console WARNING Related information The tunnel console is located between the • Passenger compartment interior (p. 532) Store loose objects, such as cell phone, front seats. camera, remote control for extra equip- • Electrical outlets (p. 534) ment, etc., in the glove compartment or • Climate system controls (p. 201) another compartment. Otherwise, these could injure people in the vehicle in the event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTION Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be easily scratched by e.g. metal objects. Do not place keys, phones or similar items on sensitive surfaces.

Storage compartment with cup holder. NOTE Waste bin*2 that can be taken out and One of the sensors for the alarm* is located emptied. under the cup holder in the center console. Avoid placing coins, keys and other metal Storage compartment under the armrest. objects in the cup holder as this could trig- Climate control panel for the rear seats* or ger the alarm. storage compartment. There is also a USB port underneath*. NOTE The USB port can be used to e.g. charge a cellular phone or tablet. Only the front USB port can be used to play media through the vehicle's speakers.

2 Only in vehicles with automatic transmission.

* Option/accessory. 533 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Electrical outlets Using the electrical outlets There is a 12 V electrical outlet in the tunnel The 12 V outlet can be used for devices console and a 12 V electrical outlet* in the intended for this such as MP3 players, cool- trunk/cargo compartment. ers and cellular phones. The ignition must be in at least mode I for the If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, outlets to supply current. The outlets will then contact a workshop - an authorized Volvo be active as long as there is sufficient charge workshop is recommended. in the start battery. 12 V outlets If the engine is turned off and the vehicle is locked, the outlets will be deactivated. If the engine is turned off and the vehicle remains unlocked, the sockets will remain active for up 12 V outlet in the cargo compartment*. to 7 minutes. Related information • Passenger compartment interior (p. 532) NOTE • Using the electrical outlets (p. 534) Bear in mind that using the electrical outlets when the engine is off could cause the starter battery to have too low of a charge level, which could limit other functionality. Accessories connected to the electrical 12 V outlet in the tunnel console, front seat. outlets can be activated even when the The 12 V outlets can be used for devices vehicle electrical system is off or if precon- intended for this such as MP3 players, coolers ditioning is used. For this reason, discon- and cellular phones. nect plugs when they are not in use to prevent the starter battery from becoming discharged.

534 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING Related information Using the glove compartment • Electrical outlets (p. 534) The glove compartment is located on the pas- • Do not use accessories with large or • senger side. The glove compartment can be heavy plugs – they could damage the Passenger compartment interior (p. 532) used to store the Owner's Manual, maps, etc. outlet or come loose while you are driv- There is also room for a pen and a card ing. holder. • Do not use accessories that could cause disruptions to e.g. the vehicle's radio receiver or electrical system. • Position the accessory so that there is no risk of it injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or a collision. • Pay attention to connected accessories as they can generate heat that could burn passengers or the interior.

Using 12 V outlets Glove compartment with fold-out hook. 1. Remove the stopper (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (trunk/cargo com- The hook on the glove compartment can be partment) over the socket and plug in the folded out when the glove compartment is device. open. Once folded out, it can be used when the glove compartment is closed. 2. Unplug the device and put the stopper back in (tunnel console) or fold up the CAUTION cover (trunk/cargo compartment) when the socket is not in use or left unattended. To help prevent damage to the hook, fold it in completely before closing the glove CAUTION compartment. The maximum power is 120 W (10 A) per outlet.

}}

535 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| Locking and unlocking the glove box* The glove compartment can be locked when the vehicle is left at a workshop, hotel, etc. The glove compartment can then only be locked/unlocked with the glove compartment key.

The illustration is generic – the design may vary. The illustration is generic – the design may vary. To lock the glove compartment: Activate cooling. Insert the key into the lock on the glove Deactivate cooling. compartment. Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. – Activate or deactivate cooling by moving the control as far as possible toward the Storage compartment for the key. The illustration is Remove the key from the lock. passenger compartment/glove compart- generic – the design may vary. ment. – To unlock, perform the above steps in reverse. Related information • Using the glove box as a cooled area* Passenger compartment interior (p. 532) The glove compartment can be used to cool • Private Locking (p. 248) e.g. drinks or food. Cooling is possible when the climate system is active (i.e. when the ignition is in mode II or when the engine is running).

536 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Sun visors Cargo compartment Loading recommendations In the ceiling in front of the driver's and front The vehicle has a flexible cargo compartment There are a number of things that are impor- passenger's seats, there are sun visors that that makes it possible to carry and secure tant to consider when carrying loads in or on can be lowered and angled to the side as large objects. the vehicle. necessary. The cargo capacity of the vehicle can be con- Load-carrying capacity is determined by the siderably increased by folding down the rear vehicle's curb weight. The total weight of all seat backrests. Use load anchoring eyelets or passengers and any installed accessories grocery bag holders to help secure objects in reduces the vehicle's load-carrying capacity by place. In order to accommodate bulky loads, the corresponding amount. the parcel shelf is easy to remove and store under the load compartment floor. WARNING The towing eyelet and tire sealing system, or The vehicle's driving characteristics change the temporary spare tire*, are located under depending on the weight and position of the cargo compartment floor. the load. Related information Loading the cargo compartment/trunk • Loading recommendations (p. 537) Keep the following in mind when loading: The illustration is generic – the design may vary. • Grocery bag holders (p. 539) • The mirror lighting* comes on automatically • Position objects so they are pressing Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540) against the rear seat backrests. when the visor is lifted up. • Removing and storing the parcel shelf • Heavy objects should be positioned as low The mirror frame has a holder for e.g. cards or (p. 544) as possible. Avoid placing heavy objects tickets. on folded-down seat backrests. Related information • Cover sharp corners with a soft cloth or • Passenger compartment interior (p. 532) similar to help prevent damage to the upholstery. • Use the load anchoring eyelets and tensioning straps or similar to secure all objects.

}}

* Option/accessory. 537 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| WARNING ment/trunk and simplify loading. If the rear Roof loads and load carriers seat backrests are folded down, make sure Volvo-developed load carriers are recom- In a head-on collision at a speed of that no objects loaded into the vehicle prevent mended for carrying loads on the roof of the 50 km/h (30 mph), an unsecured object the WHIPS system for the front seats from weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can reach a vehicle. projectile weight equivalent to 1000 kg functioning correctly. Volvo load carriers are specially designed to (2200 pounds). A ski hatch* in the rear seat can be folded help prevent damage to your vehicle and help down to carry skis or other long, thin objects. ensure maximum safety while driving. Volvo load carriers are available from authorized WARNING Related information Volvo retailers. If objects are loaded higher than the upper • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540) Carefully follow the installation instructions edge of the side windows, leave a 10 cm • Folding down the rear seat backrests (4 in.) space between the objects and the provided with the load carriers. (p. 183) window. Objects placed closer to this • Distribute the load evenly throughout the * could impede the function of the inflatable • Rear seat ski hatch (p. 540) load carriers. Place heavier cargo at the curtain concealed inside the headlining. • Roof loads and load carriers (p. 538) bottom of the load. • Leveling control* and suspension (p. 398) • Check periodically to ensure that the load WARNING • Weights (p. 615) carriers and load are properly secured. Always secure the load. Otherwise, it may Secure the load firmly using tie straps or shift during heavy braking and injure peo- similar. ple in the vehicle. • If the load is longer than the vehicle, such Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with as a canoe or kayak, attach the towing something soft. eyelet in its front outlet and secure the tie Turn off the engine and apply the parking straps in it. brake when loading/unloading long • The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel objects. Otherwise, it is possible for the consumption increase with the size of the load to reach the gear lever or gear selector load. and move it to a drive position – which could cause the vehicle to begin rolling. • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Extra cargo space The rear seat backrests can be folded down to increase cargo space in the cargo compart-

538 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

* WARNING Grocery bag holders Under the floor hatch Grocery bag holders (hooks) help keep shop- The vehicle's center of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. ping bags in place and prevent them from falling over and spilling their contents in the Follow the vehicle's specifications regar- cargo compartment. ding weights and maximum permitted load. On the sides of the cargo compartment Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 537) • Weights (p. 615)

1. Lift the handle in the center of the load compartment floor and fold up the floor. 2. Move the load compartment floor to the upright position and place it in the adjustment track on each side. > It is now possible to hang grocery bags There is a grocery bag holder in the side panel with handles at a suitable height on the on each side of the cargo compartment. hooks. CAUTION In the glove compartment There is also a fold-out hook in the glove com- The grocery bag holders are only intended partment that can be used to hang a shopping to hold weights up to 5 kg (11 lbs). bag. Related information • Loading recommendations (p. 537) • Using the glove compartment (p. 535) • Installing and removing the cargo net* (p. 542)

* Option/accessory. 539 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Load anchoring eyelets Rear seat ski hatch* Folding up the cargo compartment The load anchoring eyelets in the cargo com- The hatch in the rear seat backrest can be floor partment can be used to secure objects with opened to transport long, narrow objects The cargo compartment floor can be secured straps, a net, etc. such as skis. in the raised position using the support arm. 1. Grasp the handle to fold up the cargo compartment floor. 2. Raise the support arm and insert the end in the recess on the underside of the cargo compartment floor.

1. In the cargo compartment, grasp the ski WARNING hatch handle and pull it down. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects in or pro- 2. Fold down the armrest in the rear seat. truding from the vehicle can cause injury in the event of hard braking. 3. Adjust the center seat head restraint Always secure large and heavy objects upwards so the steel tubes do not block the opening. > The cargo compartment floor will then with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. be held in the raised position. If the private locking function is used, the ski Related information hatch must be closed. • Loading recommendations (p. 537) Related information • Weights (p. 615) • Loading recommendations (p. 537) • Private Locking (p. 248) • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540)

540 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

With folding cargo compartment floor* Removing the folding cargo 2. compartment floor* The folding cargo compartment floor can be removed for easier access to e.g. the SIM card holder or the storage space underneath the cargo compartment floor. 1.

– Lift the handle in the middle of the folding cargo compartment floor and push it for- Press the locking clip at the location ward so that it folds together. shown by the arrow until it stops. Maintain pressure on the locking clip. Related information At the same time, lift the cargo com- • Cargo compartment (p. 537) partment floor slightly upward. Push the folding cargo compartment floor 3. Release pressure on the locking clip, but forward so that it folds together. keep holding the cargo compartment floor up.

}}

* Option/accessory. 541 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| 4. Installing and removing the cargo net* The cargo net helps prevent objects in the cargo compartment from entering the passenger compartment in the event of a sudden stop or hard braking. The cargo net is attached at four points.

The cargo compartment floor can be carefully placed back on top of the lock- While continuing to hold the cargo coming clips without it locking into place. partment floor up, press the locking clip on the other side, as shown by the arrow. > If the procedures in step 2 have been NOTE performed correctly, the cargo com- The cargo compartment floor is also partment floor should now be released secured in the front hinge. from its side attachment points. Volvo recommends that the cargo com- For safety reasons, the cargo net must always partment floor remains secured in its front be mounted and secured according to the fol- hinge. lowing description. The net is made of strong nylon weave and 5. Press the cargo compartment floor down- can be attached in two different locations in ward to lock it into its attachment points the vehicle: again. • Rear mounting - behind the rear seats. Related information • Front mounting - behind the front seats. • Cargo compartment (p. 537)

542 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING 2. Insert one of the net's hooks into the front 4. or rear ceiling mounting point with the Objects in the cargo compartment must strap lock facing you. always be securely anchored, even with a correctly installed cargo net. Remove any clothing hooks from the ceiling attachment by turning the hook a quar- Installing the cargo net ter-turn clockwise (left side) or a quarter- turn counterclockwise (right side). WARNING All of the cargo net's upper consoles, hooks and straps must be securely mounted and attached before the net is used. Never use the net if it is damaged. Rear mounting.

NOTE For rear mounting: With front mounting, the cargo net is most With the cargo net hooked into the rear Left side. easily installed via a rear door. ceiling mounting points, attach the net's 3. Insert the net's other upper hook into the straps into the front cargo anchoring eye- ceiling mounting point on the opposite lets in the cargo compartment. 1. Fold out the cargo net with the upper side. hooks facing upwards. Make sure that the net's hooks are pushed forward as far as possible into their respective mounting points.

}}

543 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

|| 5. Pull the straps until the cargo net is taut. Removing and storing the parcel shelf Removing the cargo net The parcel shelf can be removed to increase The cargo net can be easily removed and the cargo space. folded up. 1. Loosen the cargo net by pressing the but- Removing the parcel shelf ton on the strap locks on each side and pulling to allow some slack. 2. Press in the catches and release both of the strap hooks. 3. Unhook the upper hooks and remove the Front mounting. net from the ceiling mounting points. 4. Fold up the net and store it in its case. For front mounting: Replace clothing hooks, if desired. With the cargo net mounted in the front ceiling mounting points, hook the straps Related information into the outer eyelets on the front seat rails • Loading recommendations (p. 537) behind the seats. Attaching the net is eas- • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 540) Detach the parcel shelf lifting eyes on both ier if the seat backrests are upright and the sides. seats are moved slightly forward. Unhook the front edge of the parcel shelf Move the seat or backrest only until it and remove it. touches the net. Moving it with too much force or applying too much pressure to the net could lead to damage.

CAUTION If a seat or backrest is pressed with too much force back against the cargo net, the net and its ceiling brackets could be damaged.

544 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Storing the parcel shelf under the With folding cargo compartment floor*: cargo floor 1.

Once removed, the parcel shelf can be stored under the cargo compartment floor. Fold the cargo compartment floor forward to position the parcel shelf with its top fac- Fold up the cargo compartment floor and ing down and its rear part facing forward. secure it with the support arm. 2. Restore the cargo compartment floor to a Position the parcel shelf with its top facing flat position. down and place it in the space with the rear part facing forward. Related information • Cargo compartment (p. 537)

* Option/accessory. 545

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Volvo's service program Introduction Applicable warranties - U.S./Canada To keep the vehicle as safe and reliable as The maintenance services contain several In accordance with applicable U.S. and Cana- possible, follow the Volvo service schedule checks that require special instruments and dian regulations, the following list of warran- specified in the Warranty and Maintenance tools and therefore must be performed by a ties is provided. qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top Records Information booklet. • New Vehicle Limited Warranty condition, specify time-tested and proven WARNING Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty California Proposition 65 • The Federal Clean Air Act - U.S. Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint senger vehicle can expose you to chemi- manufacturers to furnish written instructions Systems Limited Warranty cals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper • Emission Design and Defect Warranty servicing and function of the components that known to the State of California to cause • Emission Performance Warranty cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- control emissions. These services, which are tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid listed in the "Warranty and Service Records These are federal warranties; other warranties breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine Information" booklet, are not covered by the are provided as required by state/provincial except as necessary, service your vehicle in warranty. You will be required to pay for labor law. Refer to your separate Warranty and a well ventilated area and wear gloves or and material used. Service Records Information booklet for wash your hands frequently when servicing detailed information concerning each of the Maintenance your vehicle. For more information go to warranties. www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Your Volvo passed several major inspections vehicle. before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance Volvo recommends having an authorized procedures outlined in the Warranty and Serv- Volvo workshop perform service and mainte- ice Records Information booklet, many of nance. Volvo workshops have the staff, service which will positively affect your vehicle's emis- literature and special tools that can provide sions, should be performed as indicated. It is the highest quality of service. recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case ques- CAUTION tions arise concerning maintenance. Inspec- tion and maintenance should also be per- To ensure the Volvo warranty is not invali- formed anytime a malfunction is observed or dated, check and follow the Warranty and suspected. Service Records Information booklet.

548 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Periodic maintenance helps minimize Emission inspection readiness your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. emissions How do states use OBD II for emission inspections? • If you recently had service for a lit Check NOTE Many states connect a computer directly to a Engine light, or if you had service that required disconnecting the battery, a • Refer to your Service and Warranty vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can period of driving is necessary to bring the Booklet for a comprehensive service then read "faults." In some states, this type of OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. and maintenance schedule up to inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and-go/ 240,000 km (150,000 miles). This test. highway driving are typically needed to program contains inspections and ser- How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your vices necessary for the proper function inspection? Volvo retailer can provide you with more of your vehicle and includes compo- Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- information on planning a trip. nents that affect vehicle emissions. tion for any of the following reasons: • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with • The Warranty and Service Records • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your your vehicle's maintenance schedule. Information booklet also contains vehicle may fail inspection. detailed information concerning the Owner maintenance • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, warranties that apply to your vehicle. Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- but went out without any action on your vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. and Service Records Information booklet. On-board Diagnostic System Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized on the inspection practices in your area. The following points can be carried out engine management system. It stores diag- • If you had recent service that required dis- between the normally scheduled maintenance nostic information about your vehicle's emis- connecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic services. sion controls. It can light the Check Engine information may be incomplete and "not light (MIL) if it detects an emission control Each time the vehicle is refueled: ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not "fault." A "fault" is a component or system • Check the engine oil level. ready may fail inspection. that is not performing within an expected • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. How can I prepare for my next OBD II headlights, and taillights. OBD II will store a message about any fault. emission inspection? • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit or was lit but went out without service, have

}}

549 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Monthly: Related information Data transfer between vehicle and • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. • Vehicle status (p. 552) workshop over Wi-Fi Inspect the tires for wear. • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553) Volvo workshops have a designated Wi-Fi network for data transfer between your vehi- • Check that engine coolant and other fluid • Connecting equipment to the vehicle's cle and the workshop. Your visit to the work- levels are between the indicated "min" data link connector (p. 37) and "max" markings. shop will be easier and more effective when • Technician certification (p. 38) diagnostics information and software can be • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass • transferred over the workshop's network. cleaner and soft paper towels. Climate control system service (p. 558) • At the workshop, your service technician can • Wipe driver information displays with a Maintenance of the brake system (p. 377) • connect your vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi soft cloth. Engine compartment overview (p. 559) network to perform troubleshooting and • Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- download software. For this type of communi- rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose ter- cation, the vehicle only connects to a work- minal connector, or a battery near the end shop's network. It is not possible to connect of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo the vehicle to another Wi-Fi network (e.g. your retailer for additional information. home network) in the same way as to a work- As needed: shop's network. Wash the vehicle, including the undercarriage, Connecting with remote key to reduce wear that can be caused by a Connection is usually managed by the service buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be technician, who will use the remote key but- caused by salt residues. tons. It is therefore important to bring a key Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at with buttons with you when you visit the the base of the windshield, and from other pla- workshop. Pressing the lock button on the ces where they may collect. remote key three times will connect the vehicle to the workshop's Wi-Fi network. NOTE When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi net- Complete service information for qualified work, the symbol appears in the center technicians is available online for purchase display. or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com.

550 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

WARNING Download Center Handling system updates via 1 Download Center The vehicle may not be driven when it is With the vehicle connected to the Internet , connected to the workshop's networks and updates for a number of the vehicle's sys- Functions for Internet-connected vehicles systems. tems can be downloaded from the center dis- and infotainment can be updated via Down- play. load Center. Updates can be done one at a time or all at the same time. Related information The Download Center app is started from the center dis- • Handling system updates via Download play and makes it possible to: Searching for update Center (p. 551) If an update is available, the • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553) message New software updates available See Download Center will be • search for and update system software displayed in the center dis- • update Sensus Navigation* map data play's status field. • download, update and delete apps. In order for system updates to be possible, the vehicle must have an Internet connection2. Related information • Handling system updates via Download – Go to Download Center in the center dis- Center (p. 551) play's App view. • Download apps (p. 430) > If no search has been performed since the last time the infotainment system • Updating apps (p. 431) was started, a search will be initiated. • Deleting apps (p. 432) No search will begin if a software • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) download is in progress. • Navigating in the center display's views A number in System updates shows (p. 111) how many updates are available. Tap to display a list of updates that can be installed in the vehicle.

1 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. 2 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. }}

* Option/accessory. 551 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| NOTE Note that only a download can be cancelled. Vehicle status An installation cannot be cancelled once it has The general status of the vehicle can be Data downloading can affect other services begun. viewed in the center display. such as transfer data, e.g. web radio. If the The Car Status app is started affect on other services is experienced as Deactivating the background search from the center display's App problematic, the download can be interrup- for software update view and has four tabs: ted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to Automatic searching for software updates is switch off or cancel other services. activated as the default factory setting, but the function can be deactivated. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top NOTE • Messages view. - status messages An update can be interrupted when the • Status – checking engine oil level and ignition is switched off and the vehicle is 2. Tap System Download Center. AdBlue level3 left. 3. Tap to deselect Auto Software Update. • TPMS - tire inflation pressure check However, the update does not have to be • completed before the vehicle is left as the Related information Appointments - appointment information 4 update is resumed the next time the vehi- • Download Center (p. 551) and vehicle information cle is used. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) Related information • Navigating in the center display's views • Handling messages saved from the instru- Updating all system software (p. 111) ment panel (p. 104) – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562) To avoid displaying a list, select Install all via • Tire pressure monitoring system* (p. 509) System updates. • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553) Updating individual system software • Sending vehicle information to the work- – Select Install to choose the software you shop (p. 554) would like to download. • Navigating in the center display's views Canceling software download (p. 111) – Tap the checkbox in the activity indicator that replaced Install when the download began.

552 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Scheduling service and repairs5 2. Tap Appointments. The retailer will send you a digital appointment suggestion. You also have information about This service offers a way to send a booking 3. Tap Request appointment. request for service and workshop appoint- your retailer available in the vehicle so that you 4. ments directly from the vehicle. Check that your Volvo ID is correct. can contact your workshop. When it is time for service, and in certain 5. Make sure your preferred Workshop Accepting an appointment suggestion cases if the vehicle requires repairs, a mes- information is correct. When the vehicle has received an appoint- sage will be displayed in the instrument panel 6. In the Tap to write information to the ment suggestion, a message will be displayed and at the top of the center display. The time workshop field, you can provide details at the top of the center display. for service is determined by how much time on what you would like performed during has elapsed, the number of hours the engine 1. Tap the message. the visit or other important information to has run, or the distance driven since the last your workshop. 2. To accept the suggested appointment, tap service. Accept. Otherwise, tap Send new 7. Tap Send appointment request. To use the service proposal or Decline. > You will receive an appointment sug- • Create a Volvo ID and register it to the For some markets, the system reminds you gestion by email within a couple of vehicle. when an appointment time is approaching and days7. • To send and receive appointment informa- the navigation system8 can also guide you to tion, the vehicle must be connected to the On some markets, the message in the the workshop at the appointed time. Internet6. instrument panel indicating that the vehicle requires service will go out once NOTE Book service the appointment request has been sent. Book a service request when desired or when If you experience any problems with this 8. Tap Cancel request if you would like to service, contact your Volvo retailer. a message is displayed indicating that service cancel your request. or repairs are needed. The appointment request contains information 1. Open the Car Status app from App view about your vehicle that helps the workshop in the center display. plan for your visit.

3 AdBlue Diesel models only. 4 Certain markets only. 5 Certain markets only. 6 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. 7 Timespan may vary depending on market. 8 * For vehicles with Sensus Navigation . }}

* Option/accessory. 553 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Related information Sending vehicle information to the was turned on). This includes information • Vehicle status (p. 552) workshop9 regarding: • Sending vehicle information to the work- Vehicle-related information can be sent at • service requirements shop (p. 554) any time from the vehicle, e.g. if you schedule • time since last service was performed • a visit to a workshop and would like to assist Navigating in the center display's views • function status (p. 111) your workshop by providing additional basic information. Sending vehicle information is • fluid levels • Volvo ID (p. 26) not the same as scheduling service. • mileage (odometer reading) • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) 1. Open the Car Status app from App view 11 in the center display. • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN ) • software version 2. Tap Appointments. • diagnostic information. 3. Tap Send vehicle data. > A message confirming that vehicle-rela- Related information ted information has been sent will • Scheduling service and repairs (p. 553) appear at the top of the center display. • Vehicle status (p. 552) You can cancel data transmission by • Navigating in the center display's views tapping the checkbox in the activity (p. 111) indicator. • Internet-connected vehicle* (p. 479) Information is sent via the vehicle's Internet connection10. Vehicle information can be accessed by any retailer if they are provided with your vehicle identification number (VIN11). Vehicle information contents The most recently saved vehicle-related information will be sent (the last time the vehicle

9 Certain markets only. 10 There may be a charge for transmitting data over the Internet, depending on your service plan. 11 Vehicle Identification Number.

554 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Hoisting the vehicle When hoisting the vehicle, it is important that the jack is positioned on the designated points under the vehicle.

The triangles in the plastic covering indicate where the jack attachment points/lifting points (red areas) are located.

}}

555 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• || NOTE WARNING Never crawl under or allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehi- Volvo recommends only using the jack • Apply the parking brake and put the cle supported by a jack. intended for your specific vehicle model. If gear selector in the Park (P) position. a jack other than that recommended by • Block the wheels standing on the Volvo is used, follow the instructions ground, use rigid wooden blocks or WARNING included with the equipment. large stones. If the vehicle is lifted on a garage jack, the The vehicle's ordinary jack is only intended • Check that the jack is not damaged, jack must be placed under one of the four to be used in temporary situations for short the threads are properly lubricated and lifting points. Make sure that the vehicle is periods of time, such as when changing it is free from dirt. correctly positioned on the jack and that it wheels in the event of a flat tire. If the vehi- cannot slide off. Make sure the jack plate • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, non- has a rubber pad to help keep the vehicle cle needs to be lifted more frequently, or slippery surface and that it is upright stable and prevent damage. Always use for a longer period of time than for a wheel and not leaning. axle stands or similar. change, a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow the instructions for • The jack must correctly engage in the * use provided with the equipment. jack attachment. When not in use, the jack should be kept in its storage compartment under the cargo • No objects should be placed between compartment floor. the base of the jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment Read through all instructions before starting. bar on the vehicle. Before raising the vehicle using a jack or lift, • Never let anyone remain in the vehicle take out all the tools you will need. when it is raised on a jack. 1. Turn on the vehicle's hazard warning • If a tire must be changed near passing flashers if e.g. a wheel change must be traffic, make sure all passengers move performed in an area with traffic. to a safe location. 2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear • Use a jack intended for the vehicle selector in P, or first gear if the vehicle has when changing a tire. For any other a manual transmission. job, use stands to support the vehicle. 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels that are still on the ground. For example, use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

556 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

4. Position the jack or garage lift arms at the 6. Crank it up until it is properly aligned and designated points under the vehicle. The it is in contact with the vehicle's jack triangle markings on the plastic cover indi- attachment point. Make sure the top of cate where the jack attachment points/lift- the jack (or the garage lift arms) is cor- ing points are located. There are two jack rectly positioned in the attachment point, attachment points on each side of the with the bump on the top of the jack in the vehicle. There is a groove for the jack at recess in the attachment point and its each attachment point. base positioned vertically under the attachment point. 7. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far as possible from the side of the vehicle, which will position the jack's arms perpendicular to the vehicle's direction of movement. 8. Raise the vehicle to a suitable height for the operation to be performed. Related information • Jack* (p. 517) • Wheel bolts (p. 517) 5. Position the jack under the attachment • Tool kit (p. 516) point being used, ensuring that the surface is firm, flat and not slippery.

* Option/accessory. 557 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Climate control system service Opening and closing the hood Service and repairs on the air conditioning To open the hood, pull the lever in the pas- system should only be done by an authorized senger compartment and then turn the han- workshop. dle under the hood. Troubleshooting and repairs Opening the hood The air conditioning system contains a fluores- cent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used to search for leaks in the system. Volvo recommends contacting an authorized Volvo workshop. The climate system in the vehicle uses a freon- free R1234yf refrigerant. For information Move the handle under the front edge of regarding the refrigerant, refer to the decal the hood upwards to release the catch located on the inside of the hood. and lift the hood. Warning - hood not closed WARNING When the hood is released, a warn- The air conditioning system contains the Pull the handle to the left of the brake ing symbol and graphic will be dis- refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In pedal to release the hood from its fully played in the instrument panel and accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician closed position. an audible signal will sound. If the Training for Safe Service and Containment vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys- repeated several times. tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant system may only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure NOTE the safety of the system. If the warning symbol is illuminated or an audible warning signal sounds even though Related information the hood is securely closed, consult a • Volvo's service program (p. 548) workshop - an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

558 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Closing the hood Engine compartment overview 1. Press down the hood until it begins to This overview shows some service-related close under its own weight. components. 2. When the hood reaches the catch at the handle in the front edge of the vehicle, press down on the hood to close it completely.

WARNING Risk of injury! When closing, make sure that the hood is completely unobstructed and that no one can be injured. Hood completely closed.

WARNING WARNING Never drive with the hood The layout of the engine compartment may vary Make sure the hood locks securely after depending on model and engine variant. closing. It must audibly lock on both sides. open! Coolant expansion tank If this symbol appears, or anything else indicates Washer fluid filler pipe that the hood is not completely closed while driv- Brake fluid reservoir (located on the driving, stop immediately and er's side) close it properly. Fusebox

Related information Air filter • Engine compartment overview (p. 559) Engine oil filler pipe • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 54)

Hood not completely closed.

}}

559 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| WARNING Engine oil For the recommended service intervals and Bear in mind that the cooling fan (located at the front of the engine compartment warranties to be applied, an approved engine behind the radiator) may start or continue oil must be used. running automatically up to about 6 minutes after the engine is turned off. Always entrust engine washing to a workshop – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of fire.

Location of warning decal for the engine compart- WARNING ment. The layout of the engine compartment may The ignition system works with extremely vary depending on model and engine variant. high and dangerous voltages. The vehicle electrical system should always be in igni- NOTE tion mode 0 when work in being performed in the engine compartment. Location of warning decal for the engine compart- The decals shown in the Owner's Manual ment. The layout of the engine compartment may do not claim to be exact reproductions of Do not touch any spark plugs or ignition vary depending on model and engine variant. coils when the vehicle electrical system is those found in the vehicle. The purpose is in ignition mode II or when the engine is Volvo recommends: to show approximately how they look and warm. about where they are located on the vehicle. The information that applies for your vehicle in particular is found on the decal Related information on the vehicle. • Opening and closing the hood (p. 558) • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) • Refilling coolant (p. 563) • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 572) • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562) • Ignition modes (p. 372)

560 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

If the engine oil is not checked regularly and CAUTION and display messages are used to alert the the level becomes low, this could cause seri- driver. Some engine variants have both sys- ous engine damage. To satisfy the requirements for the engine's tems. Contact a Volvo retailer for more infor- service intervals, all engines are factory- mation. NOTE filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil. Great care has been put into the Change the engine oil and oil filter according The decals shown in the Owner's Manual choice of oil, with consideration given to to the schedule specified in the Warranty and do not claim to be exact reproductions of service life, startability, fuel consumption Maintenance Records Information booklet. those found in the vehicle. The purpose is and environmental impact. Oils of a higher grade than that specified may to show approximately how they look and be used. If the vehicle is driven in adverse con- For the recommended service intervals to about where they are located on the vehi- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil with a apply, an approved engine oil must be cle. The information that applies for your higher grade than that specified. used. Only use the prescribed oil grade to vehicle in particular is found on the decal top off or change the oil. Otherwise, there Related information on the vehicle. is a risk of the vehicle's service life, starta- • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562) bility, fuel consumption and environmental • Engine oil specifications (p. 618) impact being affected. • Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) Failure to use engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity could cause damage to engine-related components. Volvo disclaims warranty liability for such type of damage. Volvo recommends entrusting oil changes to an authorized Volvo workshop.

Symbols for low oil level Volvo uses different systems to warn if the oil level is too low/high or the oil pressure is low. For oil pressure sensors, a warning symbol is displayed in the instrument panel when oil pressure is low . For oil level sensors, the warning symbol in the instrument panel

561 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Checking and filling engine oil NOTE Filling engine oil The engine oil level is monitored by an elec- The system cannot directly detect changes tronic oil level sensor. when the oil is filled or drained. The vehicle Viewing oil level in the center display must have been driven approximately 30 km (20 miles) and have been stationary 5 minutes on a level surface and with the engine off before the correct oil level will be displayed.

NOTE If the conditions for measuring oil level are not properly fulfilled (time after engine Filler pipe12,13 shutdown, vehicle inclination, ambient temperature, etc.) the message No value It may be necessary to top up engine oil available will be shown in the center dis- between regularly scheduled services. No action is necessary with regard to engine oil Example of the oil level graphic in the center display play. This does not mean that anything is wrong in the vehicle systems. level until a message appears in the instru- The oil level can be viewed using the elec- ment panel. tronic oil level gauge in the center display once the vehicle has been started. The oil level CAUTION WARNING should be checked regularly. If this symbol is shown, the oil If the message Engine oil level Service 1. Open the Car Status app from App view pressure may be too low. Stop required is displayed, drive to a workshop in the center display. the vehicle as soon as possible – an authorized Volvo workshop is recom- and have it towed to a workshop mended. The oil level may be too high. 2. Tap Status to display the oil level. – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

12 Engines with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. 13 The layout of the engine compartment may vary depending on model and engine variant.

562 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

WARNING Coolant Refilling coolant The coolant helps ensure that excess heat is When refilling coolant, follow the instructions Do not spill oil on the hot exhaust pipes as this could cause a fire. distributed in the circuit in order to, for exam- on the package. Never fill the cooling system ple, warm up the start battery or provide with only water. The risk of freezing is heating to the passenger compartment. increased with too low or too high amounts CAUTION To avoid deterioration of the cooling system, of coolant. If the messageEngine oil level low Refill engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool- If there is coolant under the vehicle, smoke ant should be used. from the cooling system, or if more than 1 liter is displayed, fill only with the speci- 2 liters (about 2 quarts) of coolant has been fied volume, e.g. 1 liter (1 quart). Recommended grade: Volvo-approved pre- added to the system, there could be some- mixed coolant. If concentrated coolant is used, thing wrong with the cooling system and star- mix with 50% water of acceptable quality (i.e. Related information ting the vehicle could damage the engine. Call not salt water, etc.). Consult a Volvo retailer if • Engine oil (p. 560) a tow truck and do not attempt to start the you have any questions. • Engine oil specifications (p. 618) engine. To avoid deterioration of the cooling system, • Ignition modes (p. 372) engine trouble, etc., only approved Volvo cool- WARNING • Vehicle status (p. 552) ant should be used. • The coolant may be very hot. Never Contacting Volvo (p. 26) unscrew the cap when the coolant is hot. If WARNING coolant must be filled, unscrew the expan- Coolant is hazardous if ingested and could sion tank cap slowly to relieve overpres- cause damage to organs (kidneys). The sure. product contains ethylene glycol, inhibitor, water, etc.

Related information • Refilling coolant (p. 563)

}}

563 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION • Do not ingest the contents. May cause damage to organs (kidneys). • Use premixed coolant according to Volvo's recommendations. If concentrated coolant is used, make sure that the coolant mixture is 50% coolant and 50% water of acceptable quality. • Do not mix different types of coolant. • To help ensure sufficient corrosion protection in the system, only use new Coolant expansion tank coolant when replacing larger compo- – Unscrew the expansion tank cap and fill nents in the cooling system. coolant as needed. The level should not • Never run the engine unless the cool- exceed the MAX mark on the outside of ing system is properly filled. An the expansion tank. improperly filled cooling system could lead to high temperatures and cracks in the cylinder heads. • High levels of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Related information • Engine compartment overview (p. 559) • Coolant (p. 563)

564 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Starter battery WARNING further limits starting capacity. If the starter The starter battery is used to start the electri- battery becomes discharged too many times, • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, cal system and power the starter motor and its service life will be shortened. which is flammable and explosive. other electrical equipment in the vehicle. • To help keep the starter battery in good condi- The vehicle has a single-pole electrical system Do not connect the jumper cable to tion, the vehicle should be driven at least that uses the chassis and engine mount as any part of the fuel system or to any 15 minutes per week or the battery should be conductors. moving parts. Avoid touching hot connected to a battery charger with automatic manifolds. The vehicle has a voltage-regulated alternating trickle charging. A starter battery that is current generator. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do always kept fully charged has the maximum not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, service life. The starter battery is a 12 V battery, dimen- skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. sioned for the carbon dioxide-reducing func- Location • If contact occurs, flush the affected tions Start/Stop and regenerative charging area immediately with water. Obtain and to support the function of the vehicle's medical help immediately if eyes are various systems. affected. The service life and performance of the starter • Never expose the battery to open flame battery are affected by factors such as driving or electric spark. Do not smoke near style, driving conditions, climate, battery dis- the battery. Failure to follow the charges, number of starts, etc. instructions for jump starting can lead • Never disconnect the starter battery while to injury. the engine is running. • Make sure the cables to the starter battery Starter battery service life and are correctly connected and the clamps capacity are securely tightened. The service life of the starter battery is affec- The starter battery is located in the engine compart- ted by several factors, such as number of ment. starts, battery discharges, driving style, driving conditions, climate, etc. The starting capacity of the battery reduces gradually over time. The battery must therefore be recharged if the vehicle is not used for a long period of time or if it is only driven short distances. Severe cold }}

565 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| WARNING CAUTION If the starter battery is disconnected, the On certain models, the battery is secured function for automatic opening and closing with a tensioning strap. Make sure that the must be reset to function correctly. A reset tensioning strap is always securely tight- is required in order for the pinch protection ened. to work.

Specifications for starter battery Battery type H6 AGM Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 760 Dimensions, L×W×H 278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches) Capacity (Ah) 70

A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

Volvo recommends that batteries are replaced Related information by an authorized Volvo workshop. • Battery symbols (p. 569) • Support battery (p. 567) CAUTION • Jump starting using another battery If replacing the battery, make sure you (p. 410) replace it with a battery of the same size, • Reset procedure for pinch protection cold start capacity and type as the original (p. 160) battery (see the decal on the battery). • Battery recycling (p. 569)

566 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Support battery NOTE Vehicles with the Start/Stop function are • The higher the current consumption in equipped with two batteries – a more power- the vehicle, the more the alternator has ful 12 V start battery and a support battery to work and the batteries have to be that provides stronger current during the charged = increased fuel consumption. function's start sequence. • When the starter battery capacity has dropped below the lowest permissible level, the Start/Stop function is disengaged.

When the Start/Stop function is temporarily If the vehicle is instead equipped with a 48 V support reduced due to high current consumption: battery, it is located to the left in the cargo compartment. Only an authorized workshop may handle the • The engine will auto-start, even if the 48 V support battery. driver does not lift their foot from the brake pedal. WARNING The support battery does not normally require The 12 V support battery is located in the engine High voltage may be dangerous if handled more service than the start battery. If you have compartment. The start battery is also shown here incorrectly. Do not touch anything on bat- any questions or concerns, consult a work- (top). teries that is not clearly described in this shop ‒ an authorized Volvo workshop is rec- Owner's Manual. ommended. • Never use a 48 V support battery to jump start the vehicle. • External electrical equipment may not under any circumstance be connected to the 48 V battery. • Only a workshop may replace or perform service on the 48 V battery – an authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

}}

567 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION NOTE Cold start capacityA - B 170 If the following is not observed, the Start/ If the starter battery has been discharged CCA (A) Stop function may temporarily stop work- to the extent that the vehicle does not have 150×90×130 mm ing after connection of an external starter normal electrical functions and the engine Dimensions, L×W×H (5.9×3.5×5.1 battery or battery charger: must then be jump-started with an external inches) battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop • The negative battery terminal of the function may remain activated. If the Start/ Capacity (Ah) 10 vehicle's starter battery must never be Stop function shortly thereafter auto-stops used to connect an external starter A According to EN standard. the engine, there is a huge risk that auto- battery or battery charger – only the B Cold Cranking Amperes. start of the engine will fail due to insuffi- vehicle's negative charging point cient battery capacity since the battery had should be used as a grounding point. CAUTION not had time to recharge. If replacing the battery, make sure you If the vehicle has been jump-started or if replace it with a battery of the same size, there has not been enough time for the cold start capacity and type as the original battery to be charged with a battery battery (see the decal on the battery). charger, the Start/Stop function should be temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the vehicle. At an Related information ambient temperature of about +15°C • Starter battery (p. 565) (about 60°F), the battery must be charged • Start/Stop function (p. 394) by the vehicle for at least one hour. At • Battery symbols (p. 569) lower ambient temperatures, the charging time can increase to 3-4 hours. It is advisa- • Battery recycling (p. 569) ble to charge the battery with an external battery charger.

Specifications for support battery Type AGM Voltage (V) 12

568 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Battery symbols Battery recycling There are warning symbols and information Start batteries and support batteries must be on the batteries. Avoid smoking, open recycled in an environmentally sound manner flames, and/or sparks. at the end of their service life. Consult a workshop if you are uncertain of how to dispose of this type of waste ‒ an Wear protective goggles. authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information Risk of explosion. • Starter battery (p. 565) • Support battery (p. 567) See the Owner's Manual • Battery symbols (p. 569) for additional information.

Recycle properly.

Keep batteries away from children. Related information • Starter battery (p. 565) • Support battery (p. 567) • Battery recycling (p. 569) Batteries contain corrosive acid.

569 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses and fuseboxes Location of fuseboxes Replacing fuses All electrical functions and components are All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the vehicle's electrical system from protect the vehicle's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. damage by short circuiting or overloading. WARNING 1. Refer to the fuse diagram to locate the Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a fuse. higher amperage than that specified to replace a fuse. This could cause significant 2. Pull out the fuse and examine it from the damage to the electrical system and possi- side to determine if the curved metal wire bly lead to a fire. in the fuse is intact. 3. If the wire is broken, replace the fuse with If any electrical component or function is not a new fuse of the same color and amper- responding, the component may have blown a Engine compartment age. fuse due to temporary overload. If the same fuse blows repeatedly, there may be a prob- Under the left front seat lem with the component. Volvo recommends WARNING contacting an authorized Volvo workshop to Related information Never use a foreign object or a fuse with a have the component checked. • higher amperage than that specified to Replacing fuses (p. 570) replace a fuse. This could cause significant • Fuses in the engine compartment damage to the electrical system and possi- (p. 572) bly lead to a fire. • Fuses under the left front seat (p. 578) WARNING Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for assistance replacing fuses not listed in the Owner's Manual. If fuse replacement is performed incorrectly, significant damage can be caused to the electrical system.

570 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 570) • Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 572) • Fuses under the left front seat (p. 578)

571 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses in the engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment help protect electrical components such as engine and brake functions.

572 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the There are also spaces for several extra fuses in Positions fuse box cover to assist in removing and the fusebox. There is a decal with a diagram of the loca- inserting fuses. tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

Function Ampere Type USB port tunnel console, rear* 5 Micro Double USB port tunnel console, rear* 7.5 Micro 12 V outlet in tunnel console, front 15 Micro

– – Micro

12 V outlet in trunk/cargo compartment* 15 Micro

Engine control module 20 Micro

Ignition coils; spark plugs 15 Micro

Solenoids (gasoline); valve; Engine cooling system thermostat (gasoline); EGR cooling pump (diesel); glow control 15 Micro module (diesel) Engine control module Solenoids (gasoline); Valve; Engine cooling system thermostat (gasoline); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control 10 Micro module (diesel); Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for power pulse (diesel) 15A Valves for coolingA Heated oxygen sensor, center (gasoline); Heated oxygen sensor, rear (diesel) 15 Micro

Nitrous oxide sensor (diesel); Engine control module 15 Micro

Coolant pump 20 Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 573 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type Right-side headlight 20 Micro

Left-side headlight 20 Micro

Airbags 5 Micro

Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Micro

Fed when ignition is on: engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical 5 Micro module, brake system control module Auxiliary electric heater* 5 Micro OBD-II firewall – – Micro

– – Micro

Internal relay windings 5 Micro

– – Micro

Brake pedal sensor 5 Micro

Calculation module 5 Micro

Control module for actuator for engaging/changing gears, automatic transmission 5 Micro Hydraulic clutch actuator 25 Micro Transmission control module 15 Micro Hydraulic clutch actuator 25 Micro

574 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type Engine control module 5 Micro

– – Micro

Horn 20 Micro

Alarm siren* 5 Micro

Wipers 30 MCaseB

Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 40 MCaseB

Brake system control module (ABS pump) 40 MCaseB

– – MCaseB

Transmission actuator 25 MCaseB

Transmission actuator 30 MCaseB

– ––

Right-hand headlight; Left-hand headlight 30 MCaseB

Brake control with 48 V battery 30 MCaseB

– – MCaseB

Towbar* control module 25 MCaseB

Towbar* control module 40 MCaseB

}}

* Option/accessory. 575 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type

– – MCaseB

Power driver seat* 20 MCaseB

– – MCaseB

– – Micro

Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30 MCaseB

– – MCaseB

Support battery check function 5 Micro

Left-side headlight 20 Micro

Right-side headlight 20 Micro

A Gasoline engines generation 3 (VEP4_G3). B This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended.

576 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 570) • Replacing fuses (p. 570)

577 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Fuses under the left front seat Fuses under the left front seat provide protection for e.g. electrical outlets, displays and door modules.

578 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

There are spaces for several extra fuses in the fuse box cover to assist in removing and Positions distribution box in the engine compartment. inserting fuses. There is a decal with a diagram of the loca- Fuse pliers are provided on the inside of the tions of the fuses on the inside of the cover.

Function Ampere Type

Infotainment control module (amplifier)A 40 MCaseB

Central Electric Module A: Sensors, radar sensors, power seats* 40 MCaseB

Central Electric Module B: Sensors, radar sensors, power seats* 40 MCaseB

Climate system blower module (front) 40 MCaseB

Power tailgate* 25 MCaseB

Power seat*, right 20 MCaseB

Parking heater* 25 MCaseB

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30 MCaseB

Door module in right-side rear door 20 Micro

Door module in left-side rear door 20 Micro

Door module in left-side front door 20 Micro

– – Micro

Door module in right-side front door 20 Micro

Seat heating, rear* 15 Micro

}}

* Option/accessory. 579 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type 48 V battery module 5 Micro

Calculation module 5 Micro

Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Micro

– – Micro

Climate system control module 7.5 Micro

Interior movement sensors* 5 Micro

Instrument panel 5 Micro

Center console buttons 5 Micro

Steering wheel module 5 Micro

Module for start knob; Electronic gear module; Electronic parking brake 5 Micro

Center display 5 Micro

Control module for Internet-connected vehicle; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 Micro

Multi-band antenna module 5 Micro

Relay coils 5 Micro

Foot movement detection module for opening the power tailgate* 5 Micro

Sensus control module 15 Micro TV*C

580 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type Data link connector OBD-II 10 Micro

– – Micro

Lock motor for rear seat head restraint, left side 15 Micro

Lock motor for rear seat head restraint, right side 15 Micro

Heated rear window 30 MCaseB

Seat belt tensioner module (left side) 40 MCaseB

Seat belt tensioner module (right side) 40 MCaseB

Humidity sensor 5 Micro 48 V generator and voltage converter Fuel pump control module 20 Micro

Coolant pump 7.5 Micro

Heated steering wheel* module 15 Micro

Air humidity sensors 5 Micro

Headlight washers* 25 MCaseB

Windshield and tailgate window washers 25 MCaseB

– – MCaseB

}}

* Option/accessory. 581 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Function Ampere Type – – Micro

– – Micro

Module for seat belt tensioners 5 Micro

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*; Exterior reverse signal control module 5 Micro

– – Micro

All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module* 15 Micro

Exhaust system 5 Micro

Park Assist Camera* 5 Micro

– – Micro

Control module for airbags and seat belt tensioners 5 Micro

Rear window wiper 15 Micro

Roof console for panoramic roof* 20 Micro

Sun sensor 5 Micro

582 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Function Ampere Type Interior lighting; rearview mirror autodimming*; rain and light sensor*; control panels in rear doors and load compart- 7.5 Micro ment – – Micro

Control module for driver support functions 5 Micro

– – Micro

Wireless phone charger*; USB port 5 Micro

– – Micro

A Certain variants only. B This type of fuse should be replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. C Certain markets only.

Related information • Fuses and fuseboxes (p. 570) • Replacing fuses (p. 570)

* Option/accessory. 583 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Replacing bulbs NOTE Bulb specifications (p. 588) Bulb types vary depending on model and If the error message persists after the equipment level. If a light bulb14 breaks, it can defective bulb has been replaced, we rec- be replaced by following the procedure ommend a visit to an authorized Volvo shown in the Owner's Manual. workshop. If there is a problem with an LED15 light, the entire lamp unit will normally need to be replaced. NOTE NOTE Exterior lighting such as headlights and taillights may develop temporary conden- For information on lights not mentioned in sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor- the Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo mal. All exterior lighting is designed to retailer or an authorized Volvo workshop. resist this. Condensation is normally ven- ted out of the lamp housing once the light WARNING has been lit for some period of time. The vehicle electrical system must be in ignition mode 0 when bulbs are replaced. NOTE Bulbs for Active Bending Lights* contain CAUTION traces of mercury and should therefore always be deposited at an authorized Volvo Never touch the bulb glass with your bare workshop. fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which may dam- Related information age it. • Location of exterior lights (p. 585) • Replacing rear turn signal bulbs (p. 585) • Replacing the brake light bulb (p. 587) • Replacing the rear fog light bulb (p. 588)

14 Some vehicles do not have any light bulbs. 15 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

584 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Location of exterior lights Rear bulbs Replacing rear turn signal bulbs The vehicle's exterior lighting consists of sev- The rear turn signal bulbs are located behind eral different bulbs. LED16 bulbs must be the panel in the side of the cargo compart- replaced by a workshop. An authorized Volvo ment. workshop is recommended. Front lights

Brake light ‒ central, high-mounted (LED) Fog light

Parking light (LED) 1. Press in the top edge of the panel cover to remove it. Turn signals 2. Move aside the insulation to access the Daytime running lights/position lamps/ support bridge. direction indicators (LED) Brake lights High beam (LED) Backup light (LED) Low beam (LED) Related information Front fog light/cornering illumination* • Replacing bulbs (p. 584) (LED) • Bulb specifications (p. 588) • Lighting control and panel (p. 146)

16 LED (Light Emmitting Diode) }}

* Option/accessory. 585 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION Never touch the bulb glass with your bare fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which may damage it.

Related information • Location of exterior lights (p. 585) • Bulb specifications (p. 588) • Replacing bulbs (p. 584) 3. Unscrew the spring screw by turning 4. Remove the gray bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise, press the clips into the counterclockwise and pulling it out. sides and remove the support bridge. It is 5. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and simplest to leave one screw in place in the turning it counterclockwise. support bridge. 6. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise. 7. Put the panel back in place and turn it clockwise. 8. Install the support bridge using the sup- plied spring screw and make sure that the clip is positioned correctly. Tighten the spring screw until it stops, max. 2 Nm (1.5 ft lbs). 9. Reposition the insulation, hook the panel and then press it back into place.

586 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing the brake light bulb Related information The brake light bulbs are located behind the • Location of exterior lights (p. 585) panel in the side of the cargo compartment. • Bulb specifications (p. 588)

3. Remove the black bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and 1. Press in the top edge of the panel cover to turning it counterclockwise. remove it. 5. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and 2. Move aside the insulation to access the turning it clockwise. brake light bulb. 6. Put the panel back in place and turn it clockwise. 7. Reposition the insulation, hook the panel and then press it back into place.

CAUTION Never touch the bulb glass with your bare fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which may damage it.

587 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Replacing the rear fog light bulb 7. Plug in the connector. Bulb specifications The rear fog light is located in the rear 8. Insert the hook on the wide part of the fog Specifications for replaceable light bulbs. bumper on the driver's side. light unit in the rear bumper and rotate the If you are experiencing problems with any unit until the clips fasten into place. lights other than light bulbs, contact a work- 17 18 Related information shop . If there is a problem with an LED light, the entire lamp unit will normally need • Location of exterior lights (p. 585) to be replaced. • Bulb specifications (p. 588) Function WA Type Rear turn signals 24 PY24W Brake lights 21 H21W LL Rear fog light 21 H21W LL

A Watt The rear fog light is only located on the driver's side. Related information 1. Remove the fog light unit on the driver's • Location of exterior lights (p. 585) side by inserting a flat object (e.g. a kitchen knife or screwdriver) behind the • Replacing bulbs (p. 584) light kit's narrower short side and prying out the fog light unit. 2. Unplug the connector. 3. Remove the bulb holder by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise. 5. Insert the new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise. 6. Put the panel back in place and turn it clockwise.

588 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning the interior Related information Cleaning the center display Use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) Marks, stains, finger smudges etc. on the recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner center display may affect its performance and treat stains immediately. It is important to (p. 590) readability. Clean the screen regularly with a vacuum before using a cleaning agent. microfiber cloth. • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591) CAUTION • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats • Some colored clothing (for example, (p. 592) dark jeans and suede garments) may • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592) stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is • important to clean and treat these Cleaning the leather steering wheel parts of the upholstery as soon as pos- (p. 593) sible. • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood • Never use strong solvents such as surfaces (p. 594) washer fluid, gasoline, mineral spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior as this can damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials. • 1. Turn off the center display by pressing and Never spray cleaning agent directly holding the Home button. onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe instead 2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber with a damp cloth with cleaning agent. cloth provided or use another microfiber cloth of similar quality. Wipe the screen • Sharp objects and Velcro can damage with a clean, dry microfiber cloth using the car's textile upholstery. small, circular motions. If necessary, mois- • Only use cleaning agent on the type of ten the cloth slightly. material it is intended for. 3. Reactivate the display by pressing the Home button briefly.

17 An authorized Volvo workshop is recommended. 18 LED (Light Emitting Diode) }}

* Option/accessory. 589 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• || CAUTION Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning fabric upholstery and (p. 593) ceiling liner The microfiber cloth must be free of sand • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood Use of textile cleaner is recommended when and dirt when cleaning the center display. surfaces (p. 594) cleaning textile materials. Clean as needed and treat stains immediately. CAUTION CAUTION When cleaning the center display, apply Never scrape or rub a stain because this only light pressure to the screen. Pressing may damage the upholstery. too hard could damage the screen.

CAUTION CAUTION Never use stain removers or strong sol- Do not spray liquid or corrosive chemicals vents because these may damage the directly onto the center display. Do not use upholstery. window cleaners, cleaning agents, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or detergents that contain abrasives. Cleaning textile upholstery 1. Start by vacuuming the upholstery. Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or 2. Follow the instructions of the textile tissue paper, as these may scratch the cen- cleaner. ter display. 3. When cleaning upholstery, a spray extraction cleaner is recommended for sucking Related information up cleaning fluids and rinse water. • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner CAUTION (p. 590) • Certain dyed clothing (such as denim and Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591) suede garments) may stain the upholstery. • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats Difficult stains, like oil, can be difficult to (p. 592) remove. • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)

590 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• CAUTION Cleaning the leather steering wheel Cleaning the seat belt (p. 593) Use cleaning agents and car care products Always clean all of the upholstery, even if it • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and only has isolated stains. This helps to pre- surfaces (p. 594) treat stains immediately. It is important to vent permanent water rings. vacuum before using a cleaning agent. Use water and a synthetic soap solution. Spe- NOTE cially designed textile cleaning agents are available for purchase at Volvo retailers. Make Do not remove the upholstery when clean- sure the belt is dry before it is retracted. ing. Related information Cleaning the ceiling liner • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) 1. Carefully brush the ceiling liner using a • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) soft brush. • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner 2. Follow the instructions of the textile (p. 590) cleaner. • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats 3. Then use a soft, lint-free cloth to wipe the (p. 592) ceiling liner. • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592) • Cleaning the leather steering wheel CAUTION (p. 593) Failure to take care during cleaning could • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood lead to damage to the ceiling liner. surfaces (p. 594)

Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591) • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats (p. 592) • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592)

* Option/accessory. 591 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Cleaning textile floor and inlay WARNING Cleaning leather upholstery mats Use cleaning agents and car care products • Never use more than one inlay mat at a Use of textile cleaner is recommended when recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and time on the driver's floor. If any other cleaning textile mats. Clean regularly and treat stains immediately. It is important to type of floor mat is used, remove the treat stains immediately. It is important to vacuum before using a cleaning agent. original mat from the driver's seat floor vacuum before using a cleaning agent. before driving. All types of mats must Remove the inlay mats to clean the floor mats Volvo's leather upholstery* is treated to pro- be securely anchored in the attach- and inlay mats separately. Each inlay mat is tect its original appearance. Over time, sun- ment points in the floor. Make sure the secured into place with pins. light, grease, dirt, etc. could break down the floor mat does not impede the move- protective layer. This could result in scratches 1. Remove the inlay mat by grasping the ment of the brake pedal or accelerator and cracking. inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat pedal in any way, as this could be a straight up. serious safety hazard. Leather upholstery* is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over 2. Use a vacuum to remove dust and dirt. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your vehicle. They must be time. Regular cleaning and treatments are required to preserve the qualities and color of NOTE properly secured in the attachment points in the floor to help ensure they the leather. Volvo offers a comprehensive Do not swing or strike the inlay mats vio- cannot slide and become trapped product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for lently against another object to remove dirt under the pedals. cleaning and treating leather upholstery. as this could damage the mats. When used as directed, it helps preserve the leather's protective coating. Related information 3. After vacuuming, a specially designed tex- • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) For optimal results, Volvo recommends clean- tile cleaning agent should be used to • ing and applying protective cream one to four remove stains on floor mats. Cleaning the center display (p. 589) times a year (or more often as needed). Volvo • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Volvo Leather 4. After cleaning, put the inlay mat back into (p. 590) Softener 943 7429 are available for purchase place by pressing it in at each pin. • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591) at Volvo retailers. • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592) Cleaning the leather upholstery • Cleaning the leather steering wheel 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp (p. 593) sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood surfaces (p. 594)

592 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

2. Move the sponge in circular motions to Cleaning the leather steering Type 3 (dry dirt or dust) apply the foam to the stain. wheel 1. Remove the dirt/dust using a soft brush. 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the Use cleaning agents and car care products 2. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains. sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and and do not rub. treat stains immediately. It is important to Related information vacuum before using a cleaning agent. 4. Dry the stain using a soft towel and let the • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the • leather dry completely. leather steering wheel with a plastic protector. Cleaning the center display (p. 589) • Protecting the leather upholstery Volvo Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner 1. Apply a small amount of leather protector Softener 943 7429 are recommended for (p. 590) to a cloth and then apply the protector to cleaning the leather steering wheel. First, • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591) the leather using light circular movements. remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or • cloth. Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats 2. Let it dry for approximately 20 minutes. (p. 592) * > Protecting the leather upholstery CAUTION • Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 592) makes it better able to withstand sun- • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood Sharp objects such as rings could damage light's harmful UV rays. surfaces (p. 594) the leather on the steering wheel. Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) Treating stains on the steering wheel: • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the (p. 590) steering wheel using a solution of 5% • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591) ammonia. For blood stains, mix approximately 2 dl (1 cup) of water with 25 g • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats (one ounce) of salt and wipe the stain. (p. 592) • Cleaning the leather steering wheel Type 2 (grease, oil, sauces or chocolate) (p. 593) 1. Same procedure as for Type 1 stains. • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood 2. Finish by wiping the wheel with an surfaces (p. 594) absorbent paper or towel.

* Option/accessory. 593 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and • Cleaning textile floor and inlay mats Cleaning the exterior wood surfaces (p. 592) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Use cleaning agents and car care products • Cleaning leather upholstery* (p. 592) becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and • Cleaning the leather steering wheel to clean because dirt does not attach as treat stains immediately. (p. 593) strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches A lightly dampened microfiber cloth is recom- and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the mended for cleaning interior details and surfa- rims at a car wash or garage with an oil sepa- ces. These cloths are available for purchase at rator. Use a car washing detergent recom- Volvo retailers. mended by Volvo. Never scrape or rub a stain. Never use strong Related information stain removers. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) CAUTION • Hand washing (p. 596) Do not use solvent containing alcohol to • Automatic car washes (p. 597) clean the instrument panel glass. • High-pressure washing (p. 598) • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599) CAUTION • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Keep in mind that glossy surfaces can be components (p. 599) easily scratched. Wipe these surfaces with • a clean and dry microfiber cloth using Cleaning rims (p. 600) small, circular motions. If necessary, mois- • Corrosion protection (p. 601) ten the cloth lightly with clean water.

Related information • Cleaning the interior (p. 589) • Cleaning the center display (p. 589) • Cleaning fabric upholstery and ceiling liner (p. 590) • Cleaning the seat belt (p. 591)

594 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Polishing and waxing CAUTION Automatic car washes (p. 597) Polish and wax the vehicle when the paint is • High-pressure washing (p. 598) Never polish or wax initially matte exterior dull or to provide extra protection. The vehicle details on the vehicle. This could destroy • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599) does not need to be polished until it is at the matte effect and make the surface per- least a year old. However, it can be waxed • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim manently shiny. during the first year. Do not polish or wax the components (p. 599) vehicle in direct sunlight. The surface of the • Cleaning rims (p. 600) vehicle should not be warmer than 45 °C CAUTION • Corrosion protection (p. 601) (113 °F). • Wash and dry the vehicle very carefully Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and before polishing or waxing. Remove rubber. asphalt and tar stains with asphalt If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, remover or paint thinner. More stubborn only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. stains can be removed with a grinding Use a soft sponge. paste designed for vehicle paint. Use Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear cleaning agents recommended by Volvo. away or damage the glossy surface layer. • Use polish first and then liquid or paste wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- Polish containing abrasives must not be age carefully. Many products contain both used. polish and wax. • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can CAUTION be purchased today. These waxes are easy Use cleaning agents recommended by to use and produce a long-lasting, high- Volvo. Other treatments, such as preserva- gloss finish that protects the bodywork tion, sealing, protection, luster sealing or against oxidation, road dirt and fading. similar, could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments are not covered by Volvo's warranty.

Related information • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) • Hand washing (p. 596)

595 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

• Hand washing If necessary, use cold degreaser on heavily CAUTION The vehicle should be washed as soon as it soiled surfaces. Note that in such cases Dirty headlights do not work as well. Clean becomes dirty. This makes the vehicle easier the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. them regularly, e.g. when refueling. to clean because dirt does not attach as • Wash using a sponge, car washing deter- strongly. It also reduces the risk of scratches gent and plenty of lukewarm water. Make Do not use corrosive cleaners. Use water and keeps the vehicle looking new. Wash the sure that the sponge is clean. A dirty and a non-abrasive sponge. vehicle in a car wash or garage with an oil sponge can scratch the paint. separator and use car washing detergent. • Clean the wiper blades with lukewarm NOTE Use cleaning agents and car care products soap solution or car washing detergent. recommended by Volvo. • Exterior lighting such as headlights and Dry the vehicle using a clean, soft chamois taillights may develop temporary conden- Important to keep in mind when or a squeegee. Try not to let drops of sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor- handwashing your vehicle water dry in strong sunlight. This could mal. All exterior lighting is designed to • Avoid washing the vehicle in direct sun- cause water drying stains that may need resist this. Condensation is normally ven- light. This could cause the detergent or to be polished out. ted out of the lamp housing once the light wax to dry out and become abrasive. • In areas with heavy industrial emissions, has been lit for some period of time. • Remove bird droppings from paintwork as more frequent washing of the vehicle's soon as possible. It contains chemicals exterior is recommended. CAUTION that affect and discolor paintwork very • Tar spots from asphalt may remain even quickly. Use e.g. soft paper or a sponge after washing. Use a Volvo-recommended • Make sure that the panoramic roof* soaked in lots of water. Consult an author- tar remover to remove these spots after and sun shade are closed before wash- ized Volvo workshop for assistance washing the vehicle. ing the vehicle. removing discoloration. • Never use abrasive polishing agents on • Hose down the underbody, including the WARNING the panoramic roof. wheel housings and bumper. Always entrust engine washing to a work- • Never use wax on the rubber seals • Hose down the entire vehicle and remove shop. If the engine is hot, there is a risk of around the panoramic roof. any loose dirt, droppings etc. to reduce fire. the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto locks.

596 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

CAUTION Automatic car washes CAUTION The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Remember to remove dirt from the drain For automatic car washes in which the becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, holes in the doors and sills after washing vehicle is pulled forward on rolling wheels: the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle the vehicle. clean. It could also lead to paint damage. 1. Before washing the vehicle, make sure that the automatic rain sensor is deac- Related information Washing your vehicle in an automatic car tivated. If it is not deactivated and • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) wash is a fast and easy way to keep your vehi- inadvertently starts, the wiper arms • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) cle clean, but it does not reach all areas of the could be damaged. • vehicle. Volvo recommends washing your 2. To help prevent damage from the auto- Automatic car washes (p. 597) vehicle by hand or supplementing automatic • matic car wash machinery, make sure High-pressure washing (p. 598) car washes with a hand wash. that the door mirrors are folded in, • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599) antennas retracted or removed, and • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim NOTE any auxiliary lights secured. components (p. 599) Volvo recommends not washing the vehi- 3. Drive into the automatic car wash. • Cleaning rims (p. 600) cle in an automatic car wash during the 4. Turn off the "Automatic Braking when first few months; the paintwork on new • Corrosion protection (p. 601) Stationary" function using the but- vehicles takes some time to fully harden. • Settings for automatically activating the ton in the tunnel console. parking brake (p. 379) 5. Turn off the "Automatic Parking Brake CAUTION Application" function in the center dis- Before driving the vehicle into a car wash, play's Top view. deactivate the Automatic Braking when 6. Turn off the engine by pressing the Stationary and Automatic Parking Brake start button next to the steering wheel. Application functions. If the functions are Press and hold the button for at least not deactivated, the brake system will 2 seconds. seize when the vehicle is stationary and the The vehicle is now ready for the automatic vehicle will not be able to roll. car wash.

}}

597 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION Related information High-pressure washing • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) The vehicle should be washed as soon as it The system will automatically change to P • becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, mode if the above steps are not followed. Polishing and waxing (p. 595) the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle In P mode, the wheels are locked, which • Hand washing (p. 596) clean. It could also lead to paint damage. they should not be when the vehicle is • High-pressure washing (p. 598) Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage being washed in a car wash. • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599) with an oil separator. Use a car washing • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim detergent recommended by Volvo. NOTE components (p. 599) If washing the vehicle with a high-pressure wash, use sweeping movements and keep the Keep in mind that if the vehicle is equipped • Cleaning rims (p. 600) nozzle at least 30 cm (13 in.) from the vehicle. with the keyless locking and unlocking • Corrosion protection (p. 601) Do not spray directly onto locks. * function , the doors and tailgate/trunk lid • may open when washing the vehicle if the Auto-hold brakes (p. 381) Related information remote key is within range. • Settings for automatically activating the • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) parking brake (p. 379) • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* Testing the brakes • Hand washing (p. 596) (p. 238) • Automatic car washes (p. 597) WARNING • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599) Always test the brakes after washing the vehicle, including the parking brake, to • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim ensure moisture and corrosion do not components (p. 599) attach the brake pads and impair brake • Cleaning rims (p. 600) functionality. • Corrosion protection (p. 601) Lightly depress the brake pedal from time to time when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction will help warm up and dry the brake pads. Do the same after starting the vehicle in very damp or cold weather.

598 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Cleaning the wiper blades • Corrosion protection (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber The vehicle should be washed as soon as it and trim components becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, The vehicle should be washed as soon as it the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, clean. It could also lead to paint damage. the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle Wash the vehicle in a car wash or garage clean. It could also lead to paint damage. Use with an oil separator. Use a car washing a car washing detergent recommended by detergent recommended by Volvo. Volvo. Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, A special cleaning agent available from Volvo as well as insects, ice etc. on the windshield, retailers is recommended for the cleaning and shorten the service life of wiper blades. care of colored plastic parts, rubber and trim When cleaning, put the wiper blades in the components, e.g. glossy trim. Follow the service position. usage instructions for the cleaning agent carefully. NOTE Avoid using car washing detergents with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. Doing Wash the wiper blades and windshield so could result in the discoloring of anodized regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or aluminum surfaces* (as shown in the illustra- vehicle shampoo. Do not use strong sol- tions below). Abrasive polishing agents are not vents. recommended for these areas (as shown in the illustrations below). Related information • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) • Hand washing (p. 596) • Automatic car washes (p. 597) • High-pressure washing (p. 598) • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 599) • Cleaning rims (p. 600) }}

* Option/accessory. 599 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| CAUTION Cleaning rims The vehicle should be washed as soon as it Avoid washing the vehicle with cleaner becomes dirty. The longer the dirt remains, with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. the more difficult it will be to keep the vehicle This could cause discoloration of anodized clean. It could also lead to paint damage. aluminum components like the roof rail and Wash the rims at a car wash or garage with around the side windows. an oil separator. Use a car washing detergent Never use metal polishing agent on ano- recommended by Volvo. dized aluminum components. This could cause discoloration and destroy the sur- Use a rim cleaning agent recommended by face treatment. Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents could damage the Components that should be washed with a cleaning product with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. Related information surface and stain the chromed aluminum rims. • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) Related information • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) CAUTION • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) • Hand washing (p. 596) Avoid waxing and polishing plastic and • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) rubber. • Automatic car washes (p. 597) • Hand washing (p. 596) • High-pressure washing (p. 598) If using degreaser on plastic and rubber, • Automatic car washes (p. 597) only rub (if necessary) with slight pressure. • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599) • Use a soft sponge. High-pressure washing (p. 598) • Cleaning rims (p. 600) • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Polishing glossy trim moldings can wear • Corrosion protection (p. 601) components (p. 599) away or damage the glossy surface layer. • Cleaning rims (p. 600) Polish containing abrasives must not be used. • Corrosion protection (p. 601)

600 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Corrosion protection • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim Paintwork Your vehicle is constructed with protection components (p. 599) The paintwork consists of multiple layers. It is against corrosion. • Cleaning rims (p. 600) an important part of the vehicle's corrosion Corrosion protection for the body consists of protection and therefore needs to be checked modern metallic protective coatings on the regularly. sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, The most common types of paint damage are corrosion-protected and minimized metal minor stone chips, scratches and damage to overlap, and shielding plastic components, e.g. the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. abrasion protection and supplemental rust To help prevent corrosion, paint damage inhibitor in exposed areas. In the chassis, should be rectified immediately. exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast alumi- Related information num. • Touching up minor paint damage (p. 602) • Color codes (p. 603) Inspection and maintenance The corrosion protection does not normally require maintenance, but keeping the vehicle clean helps reduce the risk of corrosion. The use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids should be avoided on shiny body components. Any stone chips in the paint should be touched up as soon as they are discovered. Related information • Cleaning the exterior (p. 594) • Polishing and waxing (p. 595) • Hand washing (p. 596) • Automatic car washes (p. 597) • High-pressure washing (p. 598) • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 599)

601 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Touching up minor paint damage Applying touch-up paint to a damaged 2. Light sanding with a very fine-grained The paintwork is an important part of the surface sandpaper or similar may be required vehicle's corrosion protection and therefore before painting (e.g. if there are uneven needs to be checked regularly. The most edges). Clean the area carefully to remove common types of paint damage are minor dirt, grease, salts, etc. and let it dry. stone chips, scratches and damage to e.g. 3. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it the edges of fenders, doors and bumpers. with a small brush, toothpick or similar. To help prevent corrosion, paint damage When the primer is dry, apply one or more should be rectified immediately. coats of paint and then a clear coat, letting the paint dry between each application. NOTE If there is a longer scratch, follow the same Make sure the surface is clean and dry procedure as above, but first mask off the sur- before performing any touch-ups to the rounding area to protect the undamaged paint. paint. The surface temperature should be Touch-up pens/sticks and spray paint are at least 15 °C (59 °F). If the damage has not reached all the way available at Volvo retailers. down to the metal, then touch-up paint can be Materials that might be needed applied immediately after the surface has been cleaned. NOTE • Primer ‒ special adhesive primer is available in a spray can for e.g. plastic-covered 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the If the stone chip has not gone down to the bumpers. damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that bare metal and an undamaged coat of any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. paint remains, apply base coat and clear • Base coat and clear coat ‒ available in coat immediately after cleaning the sur- spray cans or as a touch-up pen/stick19. If the damage goes down to the bare face. • Masking tape. metal, you may need to use primer first. If the paint damage is on a plastic surface, • Fine-grain sandpaper. Related information an adhesive primer should be used for bet- • ter results. Spray the primer into the lid of Paintwork (p. 601) the spray can and brush on thinly. • Color codes (p. 603)

19 Follow the instructions on the packaging for the touch-up pen/stick carefully.

602 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Color codes Changing rear window wipers The wiper blades help remove water from the Color code windshield and rear window. Along with the The color code decal is placed on the vehicle's washer fluid, they are designed to clean the left-side door pillar (B-pillar) between the front glass and help improve visibility while driving. and rear doors and is visible when the left The windshield and rear window wiper front door is open. blades can be replaced.

Sample color code (1): Canadian models. Exterior color code

Secondary exterior color code (if applicable) Related information • Paintwork (p. 601) Sample color code (1): US models. • Touching up minor paint damage (p. 602) Exterior color code

Secondary exterior color code (if applicable)

}}

603 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Changing rear window wipers 3. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks Replacing windshield wiper blades into place. Check to make sure the blade The wiper blades help remove water from the is securely in place. windshield and rear window. Along with the 4. Fold the wiper arm back toward the win- washer fluid, they are designed to clean the dow. glass and help improve visibility while driving. The windshield and rear window wiper CAUTION blades can be replaced. Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the life of the blades.

Related information Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) lower section of the blade to the right. • Using the windshield and headlight wash- Grasp the center of the wiper blade and ers (p. 173) lift it from the window to the stop position. • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 175) NOTE • Activating and deactivating the rain sensor's memory function (p. 172) When the wiper arm is halfway folded out, • it will stop in a locking position that helps Using the rear window wiper/washer prevent the arm from falling back onto the (p. 174) rear window. The wiper arm must be • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) pulled past the locking position stop in • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- order to change the wiper blade. tion (p. 605) • Replacing windshield wiper blades Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to (p. 604) the right until the blade loosens from the • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) arm. • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170)

604 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Raise the wiper arms to the service posi- NOTE Putting the wiper blades in service tion. Service position is activated/deacti- position When changing wiper blades, make sure vated via the function view in the center The windshield wiper blades must be in the that the blades are of different lengths. The display when the car is stationary and the service (vertical) position for certain opera- blade on the driver's side is longer than the windshield wipers are not on. Press the tions, e.g. replacing the blades. button on the wiper blade attachment and one on the passenger side. pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. Related information Slide in a new wiper blade until it clicks • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) into place. • Using the windshield and headlight wash- 3. Check to make sure the blade is securely ers (p. 173) in place. • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 175) 4. Press the wiper blade back against the windshield. • Activating and deactivating the rain sensor's memory function (p. 172) Wiper blades come in varying lengths • Using the rear window wiper/washer (p. 174) Windshield wipers in the service position. • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) The windshield wipers must be in the service • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- position when replacing, washing or lifting the tion (p. 605) blades (e.g. to scrape ice or snow from the windshield). • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) CAUTION • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) Before placing the wipers in service position, ensure that they have not frozen to the windshield.

}}

605 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

|| Activating/deactivating service CAUTION Filling washer fluid position Washer fluid is used to keep the headlights, If the wiper arms in service position are The service position can be activated/deacti- windshield and rear window clean. Washer raised from the windshield, they must be vated when the vehicle is stationary and the fluid containing anti-freeze should be used in folded back against the windscreen before windshield wipers are switched off. Service very cold weather (below-freezing tempera- activating wiping, washing or rain sensor position is activated/deactivated via Function tures). view in the center display: as well as before departure. This is to prevent scratching the paint on the hood. Tap the Wiper Service Position button. The indica- Related information tor light in the button will illu- • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) minate when service position is activated. The wipers will • Using the windshield and headlight wash- move to the service position ers (p. 173) when activated. To deactivate • Using automatic rear window wiping the service position, tap Wiper Service when backing up (p. 175) Position once. The indicator light in the but- • Activating and deactivating the rain sen- ton will go out when service position is deacti- sor's memory function (p. 172) vated. • Using the rear window wiper/washer Fill washer fluid into the reservoir with the The wiper blades will also move out of the (p. 174) blue cover. The reservoir is used for the wind- service position if: • Filling washer fluid (p. 606) shield washer, tailgate window washer and • The windshield wipers are turned on. • Replacing windshield wiper blades headlight washer*. • The windshield washers are turned on. (p. 604) • The rain sensor is activated. • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) NOTE • The vehicle begins moving. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) When there is approximately 1 liter (1 qt) of • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) washer fluid remaining, the message Washer fluid Level low, refill and the symbol will be displayed in the instrument panel.

606 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

Recommended grade: Washer fluid recom- • Activating and deactivating the rain sen- mended by Volvo, with frost protection during sor's memory function (p. 172) cold weather and temperatures below the • Using the rear window wiper/washer freezing point. (p. 174) • Putting the wiper blades in service posi- CAUTION tion (p. 605) Use Volvo's original washer fluid or an • Replacing windshield wiper blades equivalent fluid with the recommended pH (p. 604) value between 6 and 8, diluted as recom- • Changing rear window wipers (p. 603) mended, e.g. in a 1:1 solution with pH-neutral water. • Using the windshield wipers (p. 170) • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 170) CAUTION • Opening and closing the hood (p. 558) Use washer fluid with anti-freeze when temperatures are below the freezing point to help keep the pump, reservoir and hoses from freezing.

Volume: • Vehicles with headlight washing: 5.5 liters (5.8 qts). • Vehicles without headlight washing: 3.5 liters (3.7 qts). Related information • Using the rain sensor (p. 171) • Using the windshield and headlight washers (p. 173) • Using automatic rear window wiping when backing up (p. 175)

607

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS

Type designations The decals in the vehicle contain information such as chassis number, type designation, color code, etc. Location of decals

The illustration is general and details may vary depending on market and model.

610 SPECIFICATIONS

Vehicle Emission Control Information. Vehicle Emission Control Information. Tire inflation pressures. This label indi- US models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to cates the correct inflation pressures for the applicable emission standards, as evidenced meet all applicable emission standards, as evi- tires that were on the vehicle when it left the by the certification label on the underside of denced by the certification label on the under- factory. the hood. For further information regarding side of the hood. For further information regar- these regulations, please consult your Volvo ding these regulations, please consult your retailer. Volvo retailer.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts. }}

611 SPECIFICATIONS

|| NOTE The decals shown in the Owner's Manual do not claim to be exact reproductions of those found in the vehicle. The purpose is to show approximately how they look and about where they are located on the vehicle. The information that applies for your vehicle in particular is found on the decal on the vehicle. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Engine oil. This label contains the recom- (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry mended engine oil specifications. Related information of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). • Air conditioning specifications (p. 619) Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This label also includes codes for paint color, etc. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper decal; Canadian models have the lower one. Decal A/C. Refrigerant R1234yf.

612 SPECIFICATIONS

Dimensions The vehicle's length, height, etc. are shown in the table.

Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches A Ground clear- 205 8.1 E Load length, 887 34.9 J Load width, 1059 41.7 anceA floor floor B Wheelbase 2702 106.4 F HeightB 1658 65.3 K Width 1873 73.7 (1863C) (73.3C) C Length 4425 174.2 G Load height 733 28.9 D Load length, 1670 65.7 H Wheel track, 1601 63.0 floor, folded front backrest I Wheel track, 1626 64.0 rear

}}

613 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Dimensions mm inches L Width incl. 2034 80.1 rearview mirrors M Width incl. 1910 75.2 folded rearview mirrors

A For curb weight + 1 person. (Varies slightly depending on tire dimension, chassis alternative, etc.). B Including roof antenna, at curb weight. C Chassis width. Related information • Weights (p. 615)

614 SPECIFICATIONS

Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle. Category Engine USA Canada (lbs) (kg) T4 4760 2160 Gross vehicle weight T4 AWD 4895 2220 T5 AWD 4895 2220 Capacity weight – 925 420 T4 2490 1130 Permissible axle weights, front T4 AWD 2535 1150 T5 AWD 2535 1150 T4 2360 1070 Permissible axle weights, rear T4 AWD 2445 1110 T5 AWD 2445 1110 Curb weight – 3600–3860 1630–1750 Max. roof load – 165 75

CAUTION Related information • • Type designations (p. 610) When loading the vehicle, the maxi- • mum gross vehicle weight and permis- Towing capacity and tongue weight sible axle weights may not be excee- (p. 616) ded.

615 SPECIFICATIONS

Towing capacity and tongue Towing capacity and tongue weight are weight shown in the table.

Category USA Canada (lbs) (kg) Without brakes: 1650 750 Max. trailer weights With brakes: 3500 1600 Max. tongue weight – 350 160

CAUTION • The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by 10% for every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or part thereof).

Related information • Type designations (p. 610) • Weights (p. 615) • Driving with a trailer (p. 414) • Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 416)

616 * Option/accessory. SPECIFICATIONS

Engine specifications The specifications for Special Edition vehicles NOTE Engine specifications (output, etc.) for each may vary. Not all engines are available on all markets. engine variant are shown in the table below.

Engine Engine codeA Output Output Torque Torque Number of cylinders (kW/rps) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rps) (ft. lbs./rpm) T4 / T4 AWD B4204T47 140/78 187/4700 300/23–67 221/1400–4000 4 T5 AWD B4204T18 185/92 248/5500 350/30-80 258/1800-4800 4

A The engine code, component and manufacturer serial numbers can be found on the engine.

Related information • Type designations (p. 610) • Engine oil specifications (p. 618)

617 SPECIFICATIONS

Engine oil specifications Oil viscosity Transmission fluid specifications Engine oil of type VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 The wrong oil viscosity can shorten engine Under normal driving conditions, the trans- must be used. Lower oil grades may not offer service life during normal use. mission fluid will not need to be changed dur- the same fuel economy, engine performance VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 provides good fuel ing the transmission's service life. However, or engine protection. economy and engine protection. See the visit may need to be changed if the vehicle is Volvo recommends: cosity chart. driven frequently in adverse driving conditions. Automatic transmission Prescribed transmission fluid: AW-1

Related information • Type designations (p. 610)

Viscosity chart General See the Service and warranty booklet for infor- Oil volume mation about oil change intervals. Engine oil volumes (including oil filter) are shown in the table. NOTE Liter (approx) 5.6 This vehicle is delivered from the factory with synthetic oil. US qts (approx) 5.9

Related information Do not use oil additives. • Type designations (p. 610) • Checking and filling engine oil (p. 562) • Engine oil (p. 560)

618 SPECIFICATIONS

Brake fluid specifications Fuel tank volume Air conditioning specifications The medium in the hydraulic brake system is The fuel tank's refillable volume is shown in The climate system in the vehicle uses a called brake fluid and is used to transfer pres- the table below. freon-free R1234yf refrigerant. For informa- sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master All models tion regarding the refrigerant, refer to the brake cylinder, which in turn actuates the decal located on the inside of the hood. brake calipers. Liter (approx) 54 The prescribed grades and volumes for fluids Recommended grade: Volvo Original or simi- US gallons (approx) 14.2 and lubricants in the air conditioning system lar fluid that meets a combination of Dot 4, 5.1 are shown below. and ISO 4925 class 6. Related information A/C Decal • Refueling (p. 405) NOTE Decal for R1234yf • Octane rating (p. 407) Changing or filling brake fluid should be entrusted to an authorized Volvo workshop.

Related information • Engine compartment overview (p. 559)

}}

619 SPECIFICATIONS

|| Explanation of symbols for R1234yf Vehicles with R1234yf refrigerant Evaporator Symbol Explanation CAUTION Caution The A/C system evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. The new evaporator must be Mobile air condition system certified and labeled in accordance with (MAC) SAE J2842.

Related information Refrigerant amount. Lubricant • Climate control system service (p. 558)

WARNING The air conditioning system contains the Only a trained and certified tech- refrigerant R1234yf under pressure. In nician can perform service on the accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician mobile air conditioning system Training for Safe Service and Containment (MAC) of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C Sys- tem), service and repairs to the refrigerant Flammable refrigerant system may only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Refrigerant Compressor oil The refrigerant amount (charge level) is prin- Volume Prescribed grade ted on a decal on the inside of the hood. 130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2

620 SPECIFICATIONS

Approved tire pressure the tire inflation placard for information spe- The following tire pressures are recom- cific to the tires installed on your vehicle at mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the factory. Tire dimensions Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa) 235/60 R17 235/55 R18 33 (230) 33 (230) 235/50 R19 245/45 R20 245/40 R21 35 (240) 35 (240) Temporary spare tire T125/70 R18 60 (420) 60 (420) T125/80 R18

Related information • Type designations (p. 610) • Checking tire pressure (p. 507) • Recommended tire pressure (p. 509)

621

INDEX INDEX 1, 2, 3 ... troubleshooting 276 All Wheel Drive, AWD 388 WARNING 293 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 388 4WD 388 Adjusting the steering wheel 187 All Wheel Drive (four-wheel drive) 388 Airbag 55 Android Auto 462, 463, 464 activation/deactivation 59 Antenna A driver's side 56 location 241 passenger side 56, 59 ABS Apple CarPlay 458, 459, 461 anti-lock brakes 375 Air bag, see Airbag 55 Approach lighting 156 AC (Air conditioning) 211 Air conditioning 211 Apps 429 Accessories and extra equipment 36 Air conditioning, fluid Assistance at risk of collision 318 installation 37 volume and grade 619 activating/deactivating 319 Air distribution 196 Accessory installation warning 37 at risk of run-off 319 air vents 196, 197 Active Bending Lights 152 during collision risks from behind 321 changing 197 during collision risks from oncoming Adapting driving characteristics 389 defrosting 207 traffic 320 Adaptive Cruise Control 270 recirculation 206 limitations 322 activating 273 table showing options 198 Symbols and messages 323 auto-brake 297 Air quality 193, 195 Audio and media 428 change cruise control functionality 277 allergy and asthma 194 controls 272 passenger compartment filter 196 Audio system deactivate 274 HD digital radio 439 Air recirculation 206 display 272 SiriusXM® Satellite radio 440, 441, limitations 276 Alarm 250 442 deactivating 251 passing 292 Auto-climate 205 set time interval 295 Alarm about slippery road conditions 260 Auto hold 381 standby mode 275 Alarm on hazard warning flashers 260 stored speed 294 Auto-hold brakes 381 Allergy and asthma-inducing sub- switching target vehicles 294 activating/deactivating 382 stances 194 Symbols and messages 278

623 INDEX

after collision 383 BLIS 325 brake system 374 driver support 254 activating/deactivating 326 emergency brake lights 155 Automatic car wash 597 limitations 327 Maintenance 377 Symbols and messages 328 on salted roads 377 Automatic engine stop on wet roads 376 auto-stop 394 Blower adjusting 209 parking brake 377 Automatic high beam 151 air distribution 197 brake system Automatic locking 244 air vents 197 fluid 619 Automatic relocking 225, 239 Bluetooth Automatic transmission 384 connect 455 kickdown 387 connecting vehicle to Internet 480 C oil 618 phone 465 Trailer 414 settings 473 Camera sensor see Camera 362 Book service and repair 553 Camera unit 362 Booster cushions 75 B limitations 362 Brake assist maintenance and cleaning 365 Backrest after collision 383 Symbols and messages 367 front seat, adjusting 178, 179, 182 Brake fluid Capacity weight 528, 615 rear seat, folding 183 grade 619 Care Key Battery Brake functions 374 restricted remote key 232 jump-start 410 Brakes 375 settings 233 Maintenance 565 anti-lock brakes, ABS 375 Cargo compartment 537 recycling 569 auto-brake with Pilot Assist 297 attachment points 540 starter battery 565 auto-braking with Adaptive Cruise cargo net 542 support 567 Control 297 electrical outlet 534 symbols on the battery 569 automatic when stationary 381 Lighting 157 Blind Spot Information 325 Brake Assist System, BAS 376 parcel shelf 544 brake lights 155 Cargo compartment cover 544

624 INDEX

Cargo compartment floor 540 Child lock upholstery 589, 590, 591, 592, foldable 541 activating/deactivating 243 593, 594 cargo net 542 Child restraints 66, 68 wheels 600 Cargo net 542 booster cushions 75 Cleaning wheels 600 convertible seats 72 Car wash 594, 596, 597, 598, 599, 600 Cleaning wiper blades 599 infant seats 70 CleanZone 194 Catalytic converter 408 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 78 recovery 419 lower attachment points 77 Clean Zone Interior Package 194 Cell phone, see Phone 466 recalls and registration 68 Climate 190 Center console 533 top tether anchors 76 auto-regulation 205 blower control 209 Center display Child safety 66 parking 212 change appearance 127 City Safety 305 perceived temperature 192 cleaning 589 braking for oncoming vehicles 313 Sensors 191 climate controls 201 crossing traffic 311 temperature control 210, 211 Function view 118 delayed evasive maneuver 312 voice control 192 handling 108, 111, 115, 120 detecting obstacles 309 zones 190 keyboard 122 limitations 313 messages 136, 137 limitations in crossing traffic 311 Climate controls 201 overview 106 setting warning distance 308 center display 201 settings 128, 129 sub-functions 306 rear seat 201 switch off and change volume 127 Symbols and messages 317 Climate system 190, 201 symbols in status bar 120 Cleaning 592, 593, 594 Refrigerant 619 views 111 automatic car wash 597 repairs 558 Central locking 242 car wash 594, 596, 597, 598, 599, Clock, setting 91 Certificate 475 600 Clothing hook 542 center display 589 Change of owner 130 Collision 44, 49, 55, 64 Seat belts 591 Changing target vehicle 294 textile upholstery 589, 590, 592 Checking engine oil level 562

625 INDEX

Collision warner Cooling system D crossing traffic rear 331 overheating 409 see City Safety 305 Cornering illumination 153 Data recording 33 Collision warning Corner Traction Control 255 from the rear 324 transferring between vehicle and Corrosion protection 601 with Adaptive Cruise Control 293 workshop 550 with Pilot Assist 293 Crash, see Collision 44 Data sharing 485, 486 Color code, paintwork 603 Crash event data 33 Daytime running lights 148 Color codes 603 Cross Traffic Alert 331 Decals activating/deactivating 332 Compass 425 location 610 limitations 333 calibration 426 Defrosting 207 messages 334 Condensation in headlights 596, 597, Detecting obstacles Cruise control 267 598, 599 City Safety 309 activating 268 Connected Safety 260 standby mode 270 Diagnosis activating/deactivating 261 stored speed 294 via the workshop's Wi-Fi 550 limitations 261 turn off 269 Dimensions 613 Connecting vehicle to Internet Curb weight 615 Dipstick, electronic 562 No connection or poor connection 484 Customer Privacy Policy 35 Direction of rotation 502 via a mobile device (WiFi) 480 via cellular phone (Bluetooth) 480 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 194 Display via vehicle's modem 481 driver information 84 Connect phone 466 Display lighting 158 Contact information 26 Distance Alert Set time interval 295 Convertible seats 72 DivX® 454 coolant 563 filling 563 Door mirrors 163 compass 425, 426 dimming 163

626 INDEX

outer 163 driving with a trailer Engine compartment power folding 164 towball load 616 coolant 563 resetting 164 towing capacity 616 engine oil 560 store position 180, 181 overview 559 Download Center 551 Engine drag control 255 use 551 E Engine oil 560 Driveline checking and filling 562 ECO climate 391 transmission 383 grade and volume 618 ECO mode 391 Drive mode 389 Engine shutdown 372 activate with function button 393 changing 391 Engine specifications 617 ECO 391, 393 Economical driving 391, 402 Engine temperature when using driver support 297 Electrical outlet 534 high 409 Driver Alert Control 329 use 534 Environment 28 activating/deactivating 330 Electrical system 565 Ethanol content limitations 331 Electric parking brake 377 rest stop guidance 330 max. 10% by volume 406 Electronic immobilizer 236 Driver performance 90 Exterior dimensions 613 emergency brake lights 155 settings 90 Emission inspection readiness 548 Driver profile 132 edit 133, 134, 136 Engine F select 133 overheating 409 start 370 Federal Clean Air Act 548 Driver support system 254 Start/Stopfunction 394 Ferry transport 398 Drive mode 297 turn off 372 Flooded road 404 Driving Engine braking 375, 400 cooling system 409 Fluids, volumes 606, 619 with a trailer 414 Fluids and oils 563, 618, 619 Driving economy 402 Driving through standing water 404

627 INDEX

Fog lights in engine compartment 572 Head restraint 185 front 153 replacing 570 Heated washer nozzles 170 rear 154 Heating Four-C 398 Seats 203, 204 Front seat G steering wheel 204, 205 blower 209 windows 208 Gasoline grade 406 climate 201 high beams 150, 151 heating 203 Gauge High engine temperature 409 temperature 210 fuel gauge 87 Hill Descent Control 399, 400, 401 Front seat manual 178 Gear selector positions automatic transmission 384 activate with function button 401 Front seats, power 179 Hill Start Assist 382 adjusting seat 179 Glass, laminated/reinforced 160 Hill Start Assist (HSA) 382 lumbar support 182 Glove compartment 535 massage 182 Hoisting the vehicle 555 Gracenote® 453 multifunction control 182 HomeLink® 421 Grocery bag holders 539 store position 180, 181 programming 422 FSC, environmental labeling 23 Gross vehicle weight 615 type approval 424 use 424 Fuel 406 Travel Link service 447 HomeLink® remote control H programmable 421 Fuel filling 405 Home safe lighting, Homesafe Lighting, Fuel gauge 87 Handbrake 377 Follow me home lighting, follow-me- Fuel requirements 406, 407 Hand wash 596 home lighting 156 Fuel tank Hard disk Honk 186 volume 619 space 487 Hood, opening 558 Fuse box 570 Hazard warning flashers 155 Horn 186 Fuses 570 HDC 400 below the glove compartment 578 HD radio 436

628 INDEX

I Instrument cluster 84 J settings 86 IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 195 Instrument illumination 158 Jack 517 IC (Inflatable Curtain) 63 Instrument lighting 158 Jump-start 410 ID, Volvo 26 Instrument panel 84 Identification number 39 app menu 100, 101 K Ignition mode 372, 374 messages 102 settings 86 Immobilizer 236 Key 222 Instruments and controls 82 Electronic immobilizer 236 Keyboard 122, 125 Indicator symbols 92 Instruments overview change language 125 left-hand drive vehicle 82 Individual drive mode 389 Keyless IntelliSafe Infant seats 70 locking/unlocking 239 driver support 29 settings 240 Inflatable curtain 63 Interior Air Quality System 195 touch-sensitive surfaces 238 Inflatable Curtain 63 Intermittent wiping 170 Key tag 222 Inflating tires 527 Internet, see Internet-connected vehi- Inflation pressure cle 479 adjusting 508 Internet-connected vehicle 479 L Checking 507 book service and repair 553 decal with recommended pressure 509 Labels No connection or poor connection 484 location 610 Inflation pressure monitoring 509 send car data 554 action 513 system updates 551 Laminated glass 160 save new inflation pressure 511 iPod®, connecting 455 Lamps Status 512 changing 584 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors 78 Inflation pressure table 621 location 585 Information display 84, 86 specifications 588 Trailer 417 Infotainment (Audio and media) 428

629 INDEX

Lane Keeping Aid 298 daytime running lights 148 Lock indication 220 activating/deactivating 300 emergency brake lights 155 setting 221 display 304 front fog lights 153 Locking/unlocking limitations 301 Hazard warning flashers 155 Tailgate 226, 240 see Lane Keeping Aid 298 high beams 150, 151 Locking wheel bolts 517 select assistance option 301 home safe lighting 156 Symbols and messages 302 in passenger compartment 156 Locks locking/unlocking 225 Language 128 light locations 585 low beams 149 Locks and remote keys 220 Large Animal Detection (LAD) 309 position lights 148 Low battery charge level Launch function 388 rear fog light 154 start battery 410 Leather upholstery, cleaning instruc- settings 147 Low beams 149 tions 592 Turn signals 152 Low-speed driving 399 Leveling control Lighting, replacing bulbs 584 activate with function button 399 suspension 398 brake lights 587 License agreement 95, 488 light bulbs, specifications 588 rear fog light 588 Lifting tools 517 turn signal, rear 585 M Light bulbs Limp home 383 changing 584 Maintained climate comfort 216 specifications 588 Load anchoring eyelets start/stop 217 cargo compartment 540 Light control 146, 158 Maintenance 548 Load anchoring hooks 539 corrosion protection 601 Lighting Active Bending Lights 152 Load carriers 538 Max. axle weight 615 approach lighting 156 Load index 504 Max. roof load 615 automatic high beam 151 Loading Media player 449, 450, 451 brake lights 155 general 537 compatible file formats 456, 457 control, instrument, display 158 load anchoring eyelets 540 voice control 142 controls 146, 156 long load 538 cornering illumination 153

630 INDEX

Messages and symbols O Panoramic roof 165 Adaptive Cruise Control 278 opening and closing 167 Assistance at risk of collision 323 Occupant Classification System 59 pinch protection 160 BLIS 328 Occupant safety 45 sun shade 169 camera and radar unit 367 ventilation position 168 Octane rating 407 City Safety 317 Parallel parking 350 Cross Traffic Alert 334 Oil, see also Engine oil 618 Parcel shelf 544 Lane Keeping Aid 302 Oil filter 560 Park Assist Camera 340 Park Assist Camera 348 Oil level 562 Park Assist Pilot 358 activating 346 On-board diagnostics 548 Parking Assist 339 limitations 362 Pilot Assist 290 On-board Diagnostic socket 37 location and views 341 stability and traction control system 258 Option/accessory 21 sensor field 345 Symbols and messages 348 Messages in display 102, 136 Outside temperature gauge 92 trajectory lines 343 handling 103, 137 Overheating 409, 414 saved 104, 137 Park Assist Pilot 350 Owner's information 16 limitations 355 Mileage 87 OWNER'S MANUAL 21 parallel parking 351 Misting environmental labeling 23 perpendicular parking 351 condensation in headlights 594, 597 in cellular phone 20 pulling out of a parking space 355 Mood lighting 157 in the center display 17, 18 Symbols and messages 358 adjusting 158 use 352 Park Assist System 335 P parking N on hills 380 Paddle at steering wheel 186 Parking Assist 335 Net Paint cargo compartment 542 activating/deactivating 337 color code 603 front, rear and sides 336 paint damage and touch-up 601, limitations 338 602, 603 Symbols and messages 339

631 INDEX

Parking brake 377 Phone charger 473, 474 Power windows 161 activating/deactivating 378 Pilot Assist 280 opening and closing 161 automatic activation 379 activating 284 pinch protection 160 Low battery charge level 380 auto-brake 297 Preconditioning 212 Parking climate 212 controls 282 start/stop 213 Symbols and messages 218 disengaged steering assistance 287 timer 213 Passenger compartment filter 196 display 283 Pressure wash 598 limitations 288 Passenger compartment interior 532 Privacy Policy (Customer Privacy Policy) 35 passing 292 center console 533 set time interval 295 Private locking 248 electrical outlet 534 standby mode 286 activating/deactivating 249 glove compartment 535 stored speed 294 PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 410 sun visor 537 switching target vehicles 294 Passenger compartment lighting 156 Symbols and messages 290 adjusting 158 turn off 285 R auto switch 157 WARNING 293 Passing assistance 292 pinch protection 160 Radar unit 359 activating 292 resetting 160 limitations 362 maintenance and cleaning 365 personal information (Customer Privacy PIN code 482 Symbols and messages 367 Policy) 35 Private locking 249 type approval 360 Phone 465 Polishing 595 changing to another 469 Radio 432 Position lights 148 connect 466 changing radio waveband and radio connect automatically 468 Power 617 station 433 connect manually 468 Power folding door mirrors 164 HD radio 436 RBDS 436 delete 469 Power panoramic roof 165 disconnect 468 search radio station 434 Power save mode 410 phone call 469, 472 settings 435 text message 470 Power seats 179 SiriusXM® Satellite radio 440, 441, 442 voice control 141

632 INDEX

start 433 Recovery 421 speed camera information 264 voice control 142 Refrigerant 558 Speed warning 264 Radio favorites 435 climate system 619 Road trip 403 Rain sensor 171, 172 Refueling Roll-over protection 255 Rain sensor's memory function 172 filling 405 Roll Stability Control 255 fuel filler door, fuel flap 404 Rear camera 340 Roof load, max. weight 615 Regenerative braking 383 Rear Collision Warning 324 Run-off Mitigation 319 limitations 324 Remote immobilizer 236 Rear seat Remote key 222 climate 201 battery replacement 228 S folding backrest 183 connecting to driver profile 134 head restraint 185 detachable key blade 233 Safety 44 heating 204 loss 232 pregnancy 45 Range 227 Rearview/door mirrors Safety belt, see Seat belt 49 adjusting door mirrors 164 Remote updates 551 Safety defects, reporting 46 dimming 163 Reporting safety defects 46 Safety mode 64 heating 208 Resetting door mirrors 164 starting/moving 65 interior 163 Resetting settings 130 Sealing compound 522 Rearview mirror 163 change of owner 130 Seat, see Seats 178 dimming 163 Driver profile 136 Seat belt reminder 54 Rear window Resetting trip odometer 89 heating 208 Seat belts 49 Road Sign Information 262 washers 174, 175 Automatic locking retractor/Emer- activate/deactivate warnings 265 wipers 174, 175 gency locking retractor 68 activating/deactivating 263 buckling/unbuckling 50 Recalls 47 display 263 pregnancy 45 Recommendations when driving 403 limitations 266 seat belt reminder 54 Recommendations when loading 537 Sensus Navigation 264

633 INDEX

seat belt tensioner 52 Side airbag 63 Stability and traction control system 255 securing child restraint systems 70, Side Impact Protection System 63 sport mode 256, 257 72, 75 Symbols and messages 258 SIM card 482 Seat belt tensioner 52 Stains 589, 590, 591, 592, 593, 594 SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 63 resetting 53 Start/Stop Sirius Satellite radio Seats deactivate 395 Travel link 444 heating 203, 204 Driving 394 manual front seat 178 SiriusXM® Satellite radio limitations 396 power front seats 179 traffic information 440, 441, 442 vehicle function 394 store position 180, 181 Ski hatch 540 Start and lock system whiplash protection 48 Slippery conditions 403 type designations 236 Security code 249 Slippery road conditions 403 Start battery 410, 565 Sensors Snow chains 521 overload 410 air quality 195 Software updates 33 Start engine 370 Camera unit 362 Starting the engine climate 191 Sound experience 429 after a collision 65 Radar unit 359 Sound settings 428, 471 Start the vehicle 370 Sensus phone 472 connection and entertainment 30 playing media 450, 451 Steering assistance at risk of collision 318 text message 471 Sensus Navigation Steering power level, see Steering wheel Road Sign Information 264 Spare tire 518 resistance 254 handling 519 Service position 605 Steering wheel 186, 187 Speed camera information 264 heating 204, 205 Service program 548 activating/deactivating 265 keypad 186 settings Speed symbols, tires 504 paddle 186 Categories 131 steering wheel adjustment 187 contextual 129 Spin control 255 Steering wheel keypad 186 resetting 130 Steering wheel paddles 386 Shiftlock 387

634 INDEX

Steering wheel resistance, speed- T speed rating 504 dependent 254 storage 500 Stone chips and scratches 601, 602, 603 Tailgate tread wear indicator 503 closing and locking using button 245 winter tires 520 Stop/start function 394 locking/unlocking 226, 240 Tire sealing system 522 Storage compartments 532 open/close with foot movement 247 Inflating tires 527 center console 533 unlocking from inside 243 use 523 glove compartment 535 Technician certification 38 sun visor 537 Tire tread 503 Temperature Stored speed 294 Tools 516 adjusting 210, 211 Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- Sunroof perceived 192 pinch protection 160 tems) 76 Temporary Spare 518 Sun shade Top view 128 Temporary tire sealing system 522 panoramic roof 165, 169 Total airing function 222 Terms and conditions pinch protection 160 Towbar 413 services 35 Sun visor 537 removable, attaching, installing, users 485 mirror lighting 157 mounting 413 Time interval to the vehicle ahead 295 Support battery 567 removable, removing, detaching 413 Tires Symbols Towing 418 age 500 dynamic 84 Towing capacity and towball load 616 designations 504 indicator symbols 92 direction of rotation 502 Towing eyelet 419 warning symbols 92 economy and wear 500 TPMS - Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- Symbols and messages glossary of terms 503 tem 509 center display's status bar 120 inflation pressure table 621 Traction control 255 parking climate 218 pressure 621 Traffic information 435 system updates 551 recommended 500 removing and installing 514 rotation when changing 500 specifications 504, 621

635 INDEX

Trailer Troubleshooting V driving with a trailer 414 Adaptive Cruise Control 276 Lamps 417 City Safety 313 Vehicle care 594, 596, 597, 598, 599, swaying 416 TSA - Trailer Stability Assist 416 600 leather upholstery 592 Trailer Stability Assist 256 Tunnel detection 149 trailer 416 Vehicle Event Data 33 Turn off engine 372 Trailer stabilizer 256, 416 Vehicle functions Turn signals 152 Trailer towing in the center display 118 Type approval trailer hitch 413 Vehicle key bat. low 228 HomeLink® 424 Transmission 383 radar system 360 Vehicle modem automatic 384, 388 connecting vehicle to Internet 481 Transmission fluid settings 482 grade 618 U Vehicle recovery 421 Travel Link 444 Vehicle status 552 Fuel 447 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 506 inflation pressure 512 Notifications 446 Units 128 Vehicle upholstery 589, 590, 591, 592, Sports 448 Unlocking 593, 594 weather 445 settings 226 Vehicle weight 615 Tread depth 503 with key blade 234 Ventilation 196, 197 winter tires 520 USB Video 453, 455 Tread wear indicator 503 socket for connecting media 456 settings 454 Trip computer 87 Voice control 138 display in instrument panel 88 climate 192 Trip odometer 87 phone 141 Trip odometer resetting 89 radio and media 142 Trip statistics 90 settings 142 settings 90 use 139, 141, 142

636 INDEX

VOL mark 500 Wheel bolts 517 WPC 473, 474 Volvo ID 26 Wheels create and register 27 cleaning 600 removing and installing 514 Snow chains 521 W Wheels and tires Load index and speed symbol 504 Warning lights Whiplash protection 48 Adaptive Cruise Control 293 Pilot Assist 293 Whiplash Protection System 48 stability and traction control system 255 WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 48 Warning sound Wi-Fi parking brake 380 connecting vehicle to Internet 480 warning symbols 92 delete network 484 sharing Internet connection, tether- Warning symbols ing, hotspot 483 safety 44 technology and security 485 Warranties 548 Windows and glass 160 Washer Windshield washing 173 headlights 173 rear window 174, 175 Windshield wipers 170 washer fluid, filling 606 rain sensor 171, 172 Windshield 173 Winter driving 403 Washer fluid 170, 606 Snow chains 521 winter tires 520 Washer nozzles, heated 170 Wiper blade 170 Waxing 595 replacing 603, 604 Weights service position 605 Curb weight 615 Wiper blade and washing fluid 170

637 INDEX

638

WARNING California Proposition 65 Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- vehicle. TP 32898 (English - USA & Canada), AT 2017, MY21, Copyright © 2000-2020 Volvo Car Corporation